JP2018175944A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To improve the amusement of a game.SOLUTION: A first display performance is a performance which forms a first ready-to-win state by using a first decorative pattern. A second display performance displays a second decorative pattern having higher permeability than the first decorative pattern on a first position, and a third decorative pattern having higher permeability than the first decorative pattern on a second position. The third display performance is a performance in which the second decorative pattern is moved from the first position, the third decorative pattern is moved from the second position, and the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern are superimposed, so as to generate a fourth decorative pattern having smaller permeability than the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern. When the first display performance is carried out, the second display performance is carried out. After the second display performance, the third display performance is carried out. A first pattern array is formed by using the first decorative pattern forming the first ready-to-win state in the first display performance and the fourth decorative pattern generated in the third display performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 56

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of executing display effects using a display device triggered by winning of a gaming ball in a starting opening (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform display effects using a character image, a symbol or the like.

JP, 2016-202930, A JP, 2016-198339, A JP, 2016-182376, A

  However, even with the above-described gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to improve the interest of a game.

  The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application example. In addition, the reference numerals in the parentheses in the column, the supplementary explanation, and the like indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to aid the understanding of the present invention, and the present invention is not limited at all. .

Application Example 1
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of forming a first reach state using a first decorative symbol,
The second display effect displays a second decorative pattern having higher transparency than the first decorative pattern at a first position, and has a third decorative pattern having higher transparency than the first decorative pattern. Is displayed at a second position different from the first position,
The third display effect moves the second decorative pattern from the first position, moves the third decorative pattern from the second position, and the second decorative symbol and the second decorative pattern. This is an effect in which the second decorative pattern and the fourth decorative pattern having lower transparency than the third decorative pattern are generated by overlapping the three decorative patterns.
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and the third display effect is performed after the second display effect. Using the first decorative symbol forming the first reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect A first symbol array is formed,
A game machine characterized by
Application Example 2
The gaming machine described in the application example 1,
The fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect is a symbol including a portion similar to the first decorative symbol that forms a first reach state in the first display effect.
A game machine characterized by
Application Example 3
The gaming machine according to Application Example 1 or Application Example 2, wherein
As the first symbol arrangement using the first decorative symbol forming the first reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect A jackpot symbol array is formed,
A game machine characterized by
Application Example 4
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Examples 1 to 3, which is:
The first display effect forms a first reach state using the first decorative symbol and a second reach state different from the first reach state using a fifth decorative symbol. It is an effect to form,
In the combination effect, using the fifth decorative symbol forming the second reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect, the second The symbol array of is formed,
A game machine characterized by
Application Example 5
The gaming machine according to any one of application examples 1 to 4, wherein
In the combination effect, after the first symbol array is formed, a feature effect is performed to move a predetermined feature,
A game machine characterized by

  According to the present invention, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is an enlarged view of indicators. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution by the side of the main control board of a game machine. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on a sub control board side of the gaming machine. It is a figure for demonstrating main ROM and main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating sub ROM and sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating the various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating determination tables T1-T4. It is an explanatory view of jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of a non-time-short state. It is explanatory drawing of fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time of time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of electric cho open | release pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of a big winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of V opening-and-closing member open pattern judging table T9. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. It is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a starting opening sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 prior determination processing. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of jackpot determination processing. It is a 1st flow chart of change pattern selection processing. It is a 2nd flow chart of change pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol variation. It is a flowchart of special symbol decision processing. 6 is a flowchart of gaming state management processing. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of special electric role processing. It is a flow chart of V opening and closing member operation processing. It is a flow chart of game state setting processing. It is a flow chart of V field sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of holding ball number processing. It is a flowchart which shows sub control main processing. It is a flowchart of sub side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of pre-reading production decision processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a prior determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flow chart of change production start processing. It is an explanatory view of main production pattern decision table T52. It is explanatory drawing of a chance improvement presentation pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing during change production. It is a flowchart of display control processing. It is an explanatory view which illustrated the 2nd mode of the 1st movable character item 14. It is an explanatory view which illustrated the 2nd mode of the 2nd movable character item 15. As shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating decorative symbol fluctuation production A. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a decorative symbol variation effect B. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a decorative symbol variation effect C. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a decorative symbol variation effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating decoration symbol target presentation A. [FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a decorative symbol target effect B. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a decorative symbol target effect C. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a decorative symbol target effect D. It is a figure for explaining decorative symbol superposition production A at the time of reach. It is a figure for explaining decorative symbol superposition production B at the time of reach. It is a figure for explaining decorative symbol superposition production C at the time of reach. It is a figure for explaining the decoration symbol superposition production D at the time of reach. It is a figure for demonstrating character appearance presentation A. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a character appearance effect B. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a character appearance effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating character appearance production D. FIG. It is a figure for explaining jackpot symbol arrangement display production A. It is a figure for explaining jackpot symbol arrangement display production B. It is a figure for explaining jackpot symbol array display production C. It is a figure for explaining jackpot symbol arrangement display production D. It is a figure for explaining a decoration design big hit suggestion production A. It is a figure for explaining decorative design big hit suggestion production B. It is a figure for explaining a decoration design big hit suggestion production C. It is a figure for explaining a decorative design big hit suggestion production D. It is a figure for demonstrating decorative symbol superimposition effect A. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a decorative symbol superposition effect B. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a decorative symbol superposition effect C. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a decorative symbol superposition effect D. It is a figure for explaining jackpot background display production A. It is a figure for explaining jackpot background display production B. It is a figure for explaining jackpot background display production C. It is a figure for explaining jackpot background display production D. It is a figure for demonstrating multiple timer presentation A. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a plurality of timer effects B. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a multiple timer effect C. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a multiple timer effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating timer presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating timer presentation B. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing timer effect C. FIG. 17 is a diagram for describing timer effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating timer speed presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating timer speed presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating timer speed presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating timer speed presentation D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating timer count presentation A. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing timer count effect B. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing timer count effect C. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing timer count effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating movable role thing timer production A. It is a figure for demonstrating movable role thing timer production B. As shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating movable character feature timer production C. It is a figure for demonstrating movable role thing timer production D. As shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating icon selection presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating icon selection presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating icon selection presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating icon selection presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating production A during change. It is a figure for demonstrating the production B under fluctuation. It is a figure for demonstrating the production C under fluctuation. It is a figure for demonstrating the production D under fluctuation. It is a figure for demonstrating character display production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating character display production B. FIG. It is a figure for explaining character indication production C. It is a figure for demonstrating character display production D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending inside continuation chan suggestion production A. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a pending inside consecutive chan suggestion effect B. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a pending inside consecutive chan suggestion effect C. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a pending inside consecutive chan suggestion effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating error display production A. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining an error display effect B. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining an error display effect C. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing an error display effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating predetermined information display effect A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating predetermined information display effect B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the predetermined information display effect C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the predetermined information display effect D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding icon movement presentation A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding icon movement presentation B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding icon movement presentation C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding icon movement presentation D. FIG. It is a figure for explaining pending icon superposition production A. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a pending icon superposition effect B. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a pending icon superposition effect C. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a pending icon superposition effect D. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding display pattern 1 and pending | holding display pattern 2 among pending special display effects. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding display pattern 3 and pending | holding display pattern 4 among pending special display effects. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding display pattern 5 and pending | holding display pattern 6 among pending special display effects. It is a figure for demonstrating pending | holding display pattern 7 and pending | holding display pattern 8 among pending special display effects. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation means image display production A. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation means image display production B. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation means image display production C. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation means image display production D. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production A during definite variation. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing positive change effect B. FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining an effect C during a probability change. FIG. 18 is a diagram for explaining a certain variation in effect D. It is a figure for explaining battle production A. It is a figure for demonstrating battle production B. FIG. It is a figure for explaining battle production C. It is a figure for demonstrating battle production D. FIG.

First Embodiment
1. Structure of gaming machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described in agreement with the left-right direction as viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the forward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the backward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player to the gaming machine 1.

  The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that causes a game ball to be fired based on a player's firing operation, and when the game ball is won in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. is there. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. In addition to the front frame (front frame portion) 53, the gaming machine frame 50 includes an outer frame (base frame portion) which forms an outer shell portion of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached Have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertical rectangular unit disposed on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and the handle 60, the ball striking plate supply plate (upper plate) 61, and the surplus ball tray (lower plate ), A presentation button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a frame movable body 600. An opening is formed at the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

  The handle 60 is disposed at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and causes the game ball to be fired with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation angle. A hit ball supply tray (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53, and stores gaming balls. The surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 is disposed below the ball hitting supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores gaming balls that can not be accommodated in the ball hitting supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit disposed in the vicinity of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of an effect or the like to be executed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation unit that simulates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of an effect or the like that is executed along with the progress of the game. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the handle of the sword, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of presentation etc. executed as the game progresses. Ru. The sword member 64 is configured to be capable of performing two different operations of a first operation for pushing the entire sword member 64 downward and a second operation for pushing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is disposed around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs a light emission effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are disposed on the upper left and the upper right of the front frame 53, and provide sound effects during a game or the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the top of the front frame 53. The movable frame 600 is configured to be displaceable from the stored state stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state projecting above the front frame 53.

  The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a fixed winning device (heso) 19, and a normally variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , A gate (through chucker) 28, a first big prize device (first attacker) 31, a second big prize device (second attacker) 36, a general winning opening 27 (normal winning opening 27), and a general winning A mouth 29 (normal winning opening 29), an out mouth 16 and indicators 40 are provided.

  The game area 3 is an area where game balls fired by the operation of the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided in a protruding manner. The rail member 4 is disposed at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game balls fired by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is disposed on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3.

  The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a first image display device 7A and a second image display device 7B. The first image display device 7A includes a display screen 7a. The second image display device 7B includes a display screen 7b. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screens 7a and 7b of the image display device 7 have a first effect symbol display area in which effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, A second effect design display area in which another decorative design different from 8C and 8R is variably displayed, a hold image display area in which the hold images 9A and 9B are displayed, and a hold digest image display in which the hold digest image 9C is displayed And an area. The holding images 9A and 9B are images representing holding, and are also referred to as holding icons 9A and 9B. The reserve digest image 9C is an image representing the reserve, and is also referred to as the reserve image 9C or the reserve icon 9C. The first hold icon and the second hold icon are collectively referred to simply as a hold icon.

  The first effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle" and "right". In the left symbol display area, a left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed. A middle effect pattern (middle decoration pattern) 8C is displayed in the middle symbol display area. A right effect design (right decoration pattern) 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are constituted by a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variation display of the rendering symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 is a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b described later by a combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (the jackpot lottery result) can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  For example, when the jackpot is won, the production symbols are stopped and displayed with a target such as "777". In the case of an out of place, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed with a loose eye such as "637". This makes it easy for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display 7 in addition to the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b. The position of the symbol display area may not be fixed. Moreover, as an aspect of the variation display of the effect pattern, it may be an aspect of scrolling in the vertical direction, or may be an aspect other than that. It is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set as to which combination of effect symbols is to be stopped and displayed according to each lottery result. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is also referred to as "change effect of effect symbol", "change effect of decorative symbol", or simply "change effect". In addition, this variation design of the decorative symbol counts the production in a period (also referred to as a special symbol variation period) from the start of the variation of the special symbol until the stop thereof as one variation production (one cycle of variation production). Therefore, even if there is a case where the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in a period from when the special symbol starts to change until it stops, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the change effect of the decorative symbol.

  The second effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas "left", "middle" and "right". A left effect design (left decoration pattern) not shown is displayed in the left symbol display area. In the middle symbol display area, a middle effect symbol (middle decorative symbol) not shown is displayed. A right effect design (right decoration pattern) not shown is displayed in the right symbol display area. The effect pattern displayed in the second effect pattern display area is similar to the effect pattern 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first effect pattern display area, and is smaller than the decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R Is displayed.

  The image display device 7 can display on the display screens 7a and 7b a jackpot effect performed in parallel to the jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demonstration effect for waiting for customers, etc. in addition to the effect symbol variation effect . In the effect pattern variation effect, in addition to the effect pattern, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Also, the image display device 7 can indicate that the special symbol is changing or can indicate the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (the fourth symbol, not shown) May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

  The hold image display area displays a hold image 9B according to the first hold display area for displaying the hold image 9A according to the number of memories of the first special figure hold described later and the number of memories for the second special view hold described later And a second reserved display area. By the display of the reserve images 9A and 9B, the storage number of the first special view reserve displayed on the first special view reserve display 43a described later and the second special view reserve displayed on the second special view reserve display 43b The memory number of can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The reserve digest image display area includes a reserve digest display area for displaying the reserve digest image 9C. The reserve digest image 9C corresponds to the effect pattern (effect pattern 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and the first special view reserve or the first one is displayed by the display of the reserve digest image 9C. [2] It can be displayed intelligibly for the player that the special figure reserve is digested ("special figure reserve digest" described later).

  Below the image display device 7, a movable first panel movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable role object 14), which is a movable type so-called gimmick, is provided. The plate-like member of the first movable part 14 is configured to be movable up and down. The first movable part 14 normally stands still at the retracted position (FIG. 1) below the display device 7 and moves upward (advances) from the retracted position and rests at the advanced position (FIG. 16) be able to. The first movable role object 14 covers a part of the image display 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

  The center decoration 10 is disposed near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. A movable second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable role article 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is attached to the center decoration 10. At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage portion 11 is formed. The stage unit 11 has a shape capable of guiding a gaming ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage unit 11 to a first starting opening 20 described later. A warp unit 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center decoration 10. The warp unit 12 includes an inlet where the gaming balls flow in and an outlet where the gaming balls flow out, and the gaming balls having flowed in from the inlet flow out to the stage 11 from the outlet.

  The fixed winning device (Heso) 19 is disposed below the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3 and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first entering ball) in which the ease of entering the gaming ball does not always change The mouth, the fixed start mouth) 20 is provided. The winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 20 is the trigger of the lottery of the first special symbol (big hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 20 is a trigger for obtaining a jackpot random number and the like, a jackpot determination, and the like.

  The normally variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is disposed below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3 and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entrance, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 21 is a trigger for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chow 22 includes the movable member 23 in front of the second start port 21, and opens and closes the second start port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by a power chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). The game ball can enter the second starting opening 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state. The electric chew 22 is only required to easily enter the second start opening 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. Entry into the ball may be possible.

  The gate (through chucker) 28 is disposed above the first big prize device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3 and is configured to allow passage of the game ball. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger of the normal symbol lottery which determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is opened. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for the acquisition of the normal symbol random number (the random number per hit) and the hit determination or the like.

  Here, with "lottery of special symbol", when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and this acquired random number is determined in advance. It is the processing which judges whether it is a big hit by comparing with the value corresponding to "big hit". The lottery result of the "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, but the variation display of the special symbol is performed in the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b described later, and the predetermined fluctuation is made. When the time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol is performed, and the lottery result of the big hit is notified to the player more effectively by this symbol matching game.

  In addition, when the game ball passes the gate 28, “random symbol lottery” acquires a random number for ordinary symbol determination, and compares the acquired random number with a value corresponding to a predetermined “hit”. It is a process of determining whether or not a hit is made. Also about the lottery result of this normal symbol, the game ball does not just pass the gate 28 and the lottery result is not notified immediately, but the variation display of the normal symbol is performed in the ordinary symbol indicator 42 to be described later When the time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (turned on or off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

  The first big prize device (the first attacker, the first special variable prize device) 31 is disposed on the upper right of the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and the first big prize port (the first special prize port) 30 , V region 39, non-V region 70, and V opening and closing member 71. The first large winning opening 30 is provided with an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 which permits or inhibits the reception of the game ball by the swing type opening / closing operation. The opening and closing member 32 is driven by the first big winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). In the first large winning opening 30, when the opening and closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball can enter.

  The first big winning device 31 includes a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (nonspecific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first big winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), the V opening and closing member 71, and the V opening and closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured as areas through which gaming balls having passed the first large winning opening 30 can pass inside the first large winning device 31 . The first large winning opening sensor 30a is disposed upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects a winning of the gaming ball to the first large winning opening 30. The V area sensor 39a is disposed in the V area 39 and detects the passage of the gaming ball to the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70 a is disposed in the non-V area 70 and detects the passage of gaming balls to the non-V area 70. The V opening and closing member 71 distributes the gaming balls having passed through the first big winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V open / close member solenoid 73 drives the V open / close member 71. The V opening and closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening and closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to In the first state (rotational state) distributed to the V area 39, when the V open / close member solenoid 73 is not energized, the second state (stop state) is positioned at the origin and distributes the gaming ball to the non-V area 70. . The V opening and closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, as long as it has a function of distributing gaming balls having passed through the first large winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70, for example, You may comprise so that it may move with respect to the game board 2 in the left-right direction. That is, when the V open / close member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is in the retracted state (first state) for distributing the gaming ball to the V area 39, and when the V open / close member solenoid 73 is not energized It may be configured to be (second state). In the gaming machine 1, passage of the gaming ball to the V area 39 is a trigger for transition to a high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a positive operating hole. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 does not serve as a positive change operation opening. The first big prize device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first big prize device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of gaming balls discharged from the first big prize device 31. The first winning device ejection sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of gaming balls having passed the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

  The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is disposed on the upper right of the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and a second big winning opening (second special winning opening) 35 Is equipped. The second big winning opening 35 is provided with an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 which inhibits or allows the reception of the game ball by the swing type opening / closing operation. The opening and closing member 37 is driven by the second big winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). The game ball can enter the second large winning opening 35 when the opening and closing member 37 is in the open state.

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The out port 16 is provided at the lower part of the game area 3 and discharges the game balls, which have not been won in any winning port, out of the game area 3. The indicator 40 is disposed near the center of the right side of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later.
The general winning opening 29 is located at the lower right of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right of the first large winning opening 30.

  The game area 3 has a left game area 3A on the left side and a right game area 3B on the right side from the center in the left-right direction. A method of hitting the game ball so that the game ball flows down is referred to as "left-hand strike". On the other hand, how to hit the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right-handed". In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for a winning to the first starting opening 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured such that winning to the gate 28, passing to the gate 28, the second starting opening 21, the first large winning opening 30, and the second large winning opening 35 can be aimed at right-handed.

  FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, an ordinary symbol display 42, a first special view reserve display 43a, and a second special view reserve display 43b. , And a general drawing reserve display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41 b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays an ordinary symbol. The first special view hold display 43a displays the number of stored operation reserve (first special view hold) of the first special symbol display 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of storage of the operation reserve (the 2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special symbol indicator 41b. The common drawing reserve display 44 displays the number of stored operation reserve (general drawing reserved) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 21. In the following, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "special symbol". In addition, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Also, the first special view hold indicator 43a and the second special view hold indicator 43b are collectively referred to as a "special view hold indicator 43".

  The special symbol display 41 variably displays (varying display) the special symbol (identification information) and then stops it to display a lottery based on the winning of the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 , Announce the result of the jackpot lottery). The special symbols (stop symbols, special symbols derived and displayed as display results of variable display) to be stopped and displayed are one special symbol selected from among a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) of a predetermined big hit stop mode, the first big winning opening 30 with an open pattern according to the type of the displayed big hit symbol (type of big hit winning) displayed. Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) for opening the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning opening (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and the special symbol according to the result of the lottery per special symbol is displayed according to the lighting mode. For example, when a jackpot (one of a plurality of types of jackpots described later) is won, “○○ ●● ○○ ●●” (○: on, ●: off) and so on from the left 1, 2 , 5,6 display the jackpot symbol that the LED lights up. In the case of a loss, a loss design in which only the LED at the rightmost side is lit, such as "●●●●●●● ○", is displayed. You may employ | adopt the aspect which makes all the LED light-extinguish as a lost design. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display (variable display) of the special symbol is made over a predetermined variation time. In the aspect of the variable display, for example, each LED may be lighted so that light repeatedly flows from the left to the right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not displayed for stopping (lighting display in a specific mode), and can be any lighting mode. For example, in the variation display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine 1, when there is a winning (entering) of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers obtained for the winning are , And is temporarily stored in the special-image storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a winning to the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special view reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as a first special view reservation, and if it is a winning to the second starting opening 21 , And is stored in the second special view reserve storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as a second special view reserve. There is an upper limit to the number of special view reservations that can be stored in each special view reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is both the first special view reservation storage area 85a and the second special view reservation storage area 85b. It is four. The special figure reservation stored in the special view reservation storage area 85 is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special view reservation becomes possible. "Digestion of special figure reservation" means that a jackpot random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation is determined, and variable display of a special symbol for showing the determination result is performed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 can not be made immediately after the winning, that is, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol. Even if there is a prize during the middle game or during the execution of the special game, it is possible to reserve the right of the jackpot lottery for the prize, with the predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of special feature reservations is displayed on the special feature reservation display 43. The first special view hold indicator 43a and the second special view hold indicator 43b are each configured of, for example, four LEDs. Each special feature reservation display 43 displays the number of special feature reservations by lighting the LEDs for the number of special feature reservations.

  The variable display of the normal symbol is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbol display device 42 displays the normal symbol variably (variable display) and then displays it in a stop to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbols stop-displayed (a common figure stop symbol, a normal symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) are one normal symbol selected from among a plurality of types of normal symbols by normal symbol lottery. In the case where the common figure stop symbol is a predetermined specified normal symbol (a normal symbol in a predetermined stop mode, ie, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game for opening the second starting opening 21 in the opening pattern according to the current gaming state. Is done. The opening pattern of the second start port 21 will be described later.

  The normal symbol display device 42 is configured of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the lighting mode. For example, when the lottery result is a hit, a normal hit symbol with both LEDs turned on is displayed as "○○" ((: on, ●: off). When the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol in which only the right LED is lit is displayed as "● ○". You may employ | adopt the aspect which makes all the LED light-extinguish as normal loss design. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable symbol of the normal symbol is displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time. In the aspect of the variable display, for example, both LEDs may light alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not displayed for stopping (lighting display in a specific mode), and can be any lighting mode. For example, in the variation display mode, all the LEDs may blink simultaneously.

  In the gaming machine 1, when there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (per random number) acquired for the passage is held as a common drawing reservation in the common drawing reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5) It is memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of common drawing reservations that can be stored in the common drawing reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit in this embodiment is four. The general drawing reservation stored in the common drawing reservation storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the common drawing reservation becomes possible. Digestion of a common drawing reserve refers to determination of a normal symbol random number (hit random number) corresponding to the common drawing reserve, and execution of variable display of a normal symbol to indicate the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 can not be made immediately after the passage, that is, winning is performed during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the auxiliary game. Even in the case where there is a certain number, the right of the normal symbol lottery for the passage can be reserved with the predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of common drawing reservations is displayed on the common drawing reservation display 44. The general drawing hold display 44 is constituted of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of common drawing holdings by lighting the LEDs by the number of general drawing holdings.

2. Electrical Configuration of Game Machine The electrical configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 4). 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that performs control relating to the game profit such as the jackpot lottery and the transition of the game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub control board 90 is an effect control board that performs control regarding effects to be executed with the progress of the game, and constitutes a sub control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the sound control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as at least the sub control substrate 90 is provided.

  The main control board 80 is provided with a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 stores a main ROM 83 storing a program for controlling the progress of a game, a main RAM 84 used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 executing a program stored in the main ROM 83. It contains. Details of data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of storage areas provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be incorporated in the game control microcomputer 81.

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from the sensors and outputs signals to the solenoids. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the first start opening sensor 20a, the second start opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, and the V region A sensor 39a, a non-V area sensor 70a, and a normal winning opening sensor 27a, 29a are illustrated. As the solenoids connected via the relay substrate 88, the electric chew solenoid 24, the first large winning opening solenoid 33, the second large winning opening solenoid 38, and the V open / close member solenoid 73 are exemplified. The first starting opening sensor 20 a is provided in the inside of the first starting opening 20, and detects a game ball winning the first starting opening 20. The second starting opening sensor 21 a is provided inside the second starting opening 21 and detects a gaming ball that has won a prize in the second starting opening 21. The gate sensor 28 a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects the gaming ball having passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects gaming balls that have won the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball winning in the second large winning opening 35. The V area sensor 39a is provided in the V area 39 in the inside of the first big winning opening 30, and detects gaming balls that have passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big winning opening 30, and detects gaming balls having passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won the normal winning opening 27. The normal winning opening sensor 29a detects the gaming ball that has passed through the inside of the normal winning opening 29. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first large winning opening solenoid 33 drives the open / close member 32 of the first large winning device 31. The second large winning opening solenoid 38 drives the open / close member 37 of the second large winning device 36. The V open / close member solenoid 73 drives the V open / close member 71 of the first big winning device 31.

  Indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 has a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special view hold indicator 43a, a second special view hold indicator 43b, a general drawing hold Display control of the display 44 is performed.

  A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives a signal from the payout control board 110 for dispensing monitoring. The payout control substrate 110 is connected to the winning ball dispenser 120, the rental ball dispenser 130, and the card unit 135, and the launcher 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball dispensing device 120 dispenses a prize ball. The payout control board 110 drives the winning ball motor 121 of the winning ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the winning balls. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out the rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the rental ball motor 131 of the rental ball payout device 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out the rental balls. The lent balls to be paid out are detected by the lent ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information related to the ball lending based on the information such as the inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. The launch device 112 detects a touch of the handle 60 by the touch switch 114 when the player operates the handle 60, and detects an amount of rotation of the handle 60 by the launch volume 115. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven so that the gaming ball is fired with a strength according to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

  A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection in which only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 is possible. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90, a not-shown unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) as a communication direction control means is interposed.

  The sub control board 90 includes a presentation control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 for storing a program for controlling effects as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a sub for executing the programs stored in the sub ROM 93 And the CPU 92. Details of data stored in sub ROM 93 and details of storage areas provided in sub RAM 94 will be described later. Sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another substrate via the input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input / output circuit 95.

  The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and performs display control of the image display 7 (the first image display 7A and the second image display 7B) according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In the ROM 103, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. Image data such as a background image etc. is stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes a program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to perform display control of the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on an instruction from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

  The speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. And so on. Sound data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may mount a ROM, and may store sound data in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to execute voice control. Furthermore, sound data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

  A frame lamp 66, a board lamp 5, a first movable part 14, and a second movable part 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and control them. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs lighting control of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as data for determining lighting / extinguishing, light emission color, etc., lamp data) for determining the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control substrate 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable combination 14 and the second movable combination 15 on the basis of the command received from the main control board 80. The first movable part 14 is a movable so-called gimmick provided below the image display device 7. The second movable character 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decoration 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of each of the first movable part 14 and the second movable part 15, and generates the first movable part 14 and the first movable part according to the operation pattern data. 2 Control the movement of the movable part 15. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and may have the CPU execute lamp lighting control based on a command and operation control of the movable roles 14 and 15. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data on the light emission pattern and the operation pattern.

  The effect button detection switch 63 a and the frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay substrate 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63 a to the sub control substrate 90 via the relay substrate 108. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the top of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the operation of the frame movable body 600 according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create operation pattern data. The relay substrate 108 is provided with a select button detection switch for detecting that the select button 68 (FIG. 1) has been pressed, a touch sensor or the like provided on the front frame 53 and outputting a detection signal when a human body comes in contact. It may be connected.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described based on FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. As shown in FIG. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for describing a table stored in sub ROM 93. Referring to FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in sub RAM 94. Referring to FIG.

  In the main ROM 83 (FIG. 5A), a big hit determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a big hit type determination table T5, and a variation pattern A determination table T6, a power chew open pattern determination table T7, a special winning opening open pattern determination table T8, and a V open / close member open pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific content of each determination table will be described later.

  The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special view reserve storage area 85, and a common view reserve storage An area 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command output from the main control unit to the sub control unit in the main control main process (described later) is set (output buffer). A change start command, a change stop command, an opening command, a round specification command, an ending command, a game state specification command, a V passage command, a customer wait standby command, etc. are set. The flag setting area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the gaming machine or the gaming state is set in the main control main process (described later), and the jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first winning flag, second winning flag, The V flag, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter setting area 84c is an area where a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84 d is an area in which the status in the special operation process described later is set. Special feature reserve storage area 85 includes a first special feature reserve storage area 85a in which a first special feature reserve is stored, and a second special feature reserve storage area 85b in which a second special feature reserve is stored. In the first special view reserve storage area 85a, a random number value group (reserve information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to each of the first, second, third and fourth special reserve for the first special figure reserve. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storing are provided. A first special-image retention storage area 85b is used to store a first random number group (retention information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth second special-image retentions. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The common drawing reservation storage area 86 stores a random number value group (holding information) such as a common symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to each of the first, second, third and fourth common drawing reservations. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. In the main RAM 84, in addition to the above areas, a hit type set buffer to which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable objects 14 and 15 and the frame movable body 600 are set. Drive data buffer etc. are provided.

  The sub ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in sub control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific content of each determination table will be described later.

  The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, a rendering command set area 94b, a prior determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which a command input from the main control unit side is stored in the sub control main process (described later), and the a priori determination command, the hold ball number command, the change start command, the change A stop command, an opening command, a round designating command, an ending command, a game state designating command, a V passing command, a customer waiting standby command and the like are stored. The effect command set area 94 b is an area where commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in sub control main processing (described later) An output buffer), and a change production start command, a change end command, a change production end command, an opening production start command, a round production start command, an ending production start command, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in the sub control main process (described later). The counter setting area 94d is an area where counters used in sub control main processing (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a first special view hold effect counter, a second special view hold effect counter, and a common view hold effect counter A probability variation effect counter, a time reduction effect counter, etc. are set.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7A shows the random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows the random numbers acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The gaming control microcomputer 81 acquires “big hit random number”, “big hit type random number”, “reach random number”, “variation pattern random number”, and “normal symbol random number (hit random number)” at a timing described later. Is configured as. The “big hit random number” is a random number used for a lottery for deciding whether or not a big hit (big hit determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The “big hit type random number” is a random number used for lottery of the type of the big hit that has won (big hit type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether to generate a reach in the effect design variation effect indicating the result when the big hit determination is a loss, and the value in the range of 0 to 127 Take The reach is a state in which one of the plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols) that are variably displayed among the effect symbols (decorative symbols) is left, and depending on which symbol the variably displayed effect symbols are stopped and displayed It is a state (for example, the state of "7 7 7") which becomes combination of the production design which shows jackpot winning. In addition, the effect pattern stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including a variation time, and has a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “normal symbol random number (hit random number)” is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) as to whether or not to play an auxiliary game to open the electric chew 22. Normal symbol random numbers take values in the range of 0-255. The “big hit random number”, the “big hit type random number”, the “reach random number”, and the “variation pattern random number” are acquired based on the entry into the starting opening (the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21). The random number value group acquired based on the entry to the first starting opening 20 is stored in the first special view reservation storage area 85a, and the random number value group acquired based on the entry to the second opening 21 is It is stored in the second special view reserve storage area 85b. The “normal symbol random number (per random number)” is obtained based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the common drawing reserve storage area 86.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire the “pre-read effect random number” and the “chance up random number” at timings described later. "Pre-read effect random number" is a random number used to determine pre-read effect at the time of change effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “chance up random number” is a random number used to determine the chance up performance at the time of the change performance, and takes a value ranging from 0 to 127. The “prediction effect random number” is acquired based on the output of the prior determination command from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The “chance up random number” is acquired based on the output of the change start command from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The acquired random value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. 8 (A) shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8 (B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8 (C) shows it. Is a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8 (D) is a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

  The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (one of 0 to 65535) acquired by the gaming control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "big hit" or "losing". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8A, in the “normal probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164”, it is determined to be “jackpot”, and the jackpot random number value is “numerical value other than 0 to 164 (165 to 65535 In the case of “)”, it is indicated that it is determined as “lost”. Also, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random number value is "0 to 649", it is determined to be "jackpot", and the jackpot random number value is "numerical value other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)" Is shown to be determined as "loss". The contents of the “normal probability state” and the “high probability state” will be described later.

  In the reach determination table T2, in the main control main process (described later) of the gaming control microcomputer 81, whether the reach random number value (one of 0 to 127) acquired corresponds to "reach" or "reach not". Is a table referenced to determine whether In FIG. 8B, when the reach random number is "0 to 13" in the "non-time-saving state", it is determined that "reach is present", and the reach random value is "numerical value other than 0 to 13 (14 to In the case of “127)”, it is indicated that “no reach” is determined. Further, in the “time saving state”, when the reach random number value is “0 to 5”, it is determined that “reach exists”, and the reach random number value is “numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)”. Is shown to be determined as "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, in the time saving state, the reach at the time of losing is less likely to be applied than in the non-time saving state. This is to speed up the speed of digesting the Tokusou reserve by selecting more reachless losses with short fluctuation time in the short time state.

  The normal symbol winning determination table T3 corresponds to whether the normal symbol random number value (one of 0 to 255) acquired by the gaming control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "lost". It is a table referenced to determine whether to In FIG. 8C, in the "non-time-saving state", when the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2", it is determined as "hit", and the normal symbol random number value is "numerical value other than 0 to 2 (3 In the case of "255", it is shown that it is judged as "lost". Also, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and if the normal symbol random number value is "numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)" It is shown that it is judged as "missing".

  The normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 determines how many seconds the variation period of the normal symbol is in accordance with the gaming state (non-time-short status or time-short status) in the main control main processing (described later). Is a table that is referenced to In (D) of FIG. 8, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be “30 seconds” in the “non-short time state”, and the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be “1 second” in the “time reduction state”. It is shown.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. In the jackpot type determination table T5, according to the jackpot type random number value (one of 0 to 127) acquired by the gaming control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later), "class of jackpot" and "special symbol of It is a table referenced to determine the type. In FIG. 9, when winning in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery, if the jackpot type random number value is "0 to 24", it is determined that the jackpot type is "16 RV passage planned jackpot", special figure The stop symbol of 1 (special stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "25 to 49", it is determined that the jackpot type is "16 RV passage planned jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number value is "50 to 55", it is determined that the jackpot type is "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled to pass through jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (essentially 13R) V scheduled to pass through jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 4". When the jackpot type random number value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (essentially 13R) V non-scheduled scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery, if the jackpot type random number value is "0 to 82", it is determined that the jackpot type is "16 RV passage planned jackpot", special figure 2 The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (essentially 13R) V non-scheduled scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5". In addition, by referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special view stop symbol, the "opening (OP) command" of the special game, the "round designated command", the "ending (ED) Commands can also be identified. For specific contents of "16 RV passing jackpot", "16R (15R substantial) V passing jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jacking" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" I will mention later.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-short time state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the gaming control microcomputer 81 for determining a variation pattern according to the acquired variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) in the main control main process (described later). . In FIG. 10, for example, the first starting opening 20 is won in the non-short time state, and it is determined as "lost" in the big hit determination table T1, and determined as "reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of holding balls is "1. When the variation pattern random number value is “0 to 60”, it is shown that the variation pattern is determined to be “P7”. In FIG. 11, for example, the second start hole 21 wins in a time saving state, is determined as "big hit" in the big hit determination table T1, is determined as "16 RV passing planned big hit" in the big hit type determination table T5, fluctuation pattern random value It is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61" when "is 0 to 10". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. Also, when reaching, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect where the fluctuation time after reach is longer than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) having different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to 3, it is evolved through normal reach. The difference between SP1 and SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo run.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chewing open pattern determination table T7. The electric chew open pattern determination table T7 is used by the gaming control microcomputer 81 to determine the open pattern of the electric chew 22 in accordance with the gaming state (non-short time state or short time state) in the main control main process (described later). It is a table to be referenced. In FIG. 12A, the open pattern of the electric chow 22 is determined to be "open pattern 11" in the "non-short time state", and the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 12" in the "time short state". It is shown. The contents of the release pattern 11 and the release pattern 12 are shown in FIG. In the opening pattern 11, the opening operation is performed once and the opening time 0.2 second is released. In the opening pattern 12, the number of times of opening is three, the opening time per one time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second is performed. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains if there is a predetermined number of game ball winnings (prescribed number of winnings, maximum 10).

  FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the special winning opening open pattern determination table T8. In the special winning opening open pattern determination table T8, the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening according to the special view stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main processing (described later) of the gaming control microcomputer 81. It is a table referenced to determine the 35 open patterns. In FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 is "open pattern 21. When it is determined that the special pattern stop symbol data is "14H", "15H", "22H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 22", and when the special pattern stop symbol data is "13H", it is open. It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 13B shows the contents of the release pattern 21, the release pattern 22 and the release pattern 23. The opening pattern 21 opens the first large winning opening 30 once for opening times 1 to 29.5 seconds (long opening) at opening times 1 to 13 and 15th, and opening times 1 to 14 times for opening 16th. The second big winning opening 35 is opened (long open) with an open time of 29.5 seconds. The opening pattern 22 opens the first big winning opening 30 (long opening) with the opening number of once and opening time of 29.5 seconds in the 1st to 13th eyes, and in the 14th and 16th eyes, the number of opening once, the opening time The second big winning opening 35 of 0.1 second is opened (short opening), and the opening number of the first big winning opening 30 of 0.1 second is opened (short opening) once at the 15th opening. . The opening pattern 23 opens the first large winning opening 30 (long opening) once for the opening times 1 to 29.5 seconds in the 1st to 13th and 15th eyes, and opens once for the opening number 14th. The second big winning opening 35 of 0.1 second is opened (short open), and the opening number of the second big winning opening 35 of 29.5 seconds is opened (long open) once at the opening frequency of 16R. . However, opening of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35, even if there is a predetermined number of game ball winning (predetermined number of winning, maximum 9), even if the opening time remains It is closed.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V open / close member open pattern determination table T9. The V open / close member open pattern determination table T9 is for the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 according to the special view stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main process (described later). It is a table to be referenced. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H" or "21H", the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 is determined to be "open pattern 31" and the special figure stop symbol When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 32", and when the special view stop symbol data is "14H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 33" and the special view stop symbol data is When "15H" or "22H", it is shown that the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34". The contents of the open pattern 31, the open pattern 32, the open pattern 33, and the open pattern 34 are shown in FIG. 14 (B). In the opening pattern 31, the second opening of the V opening and closing member 71 is performed for an opening time of 0.1 second when the first winning opening 30 has a first winning at the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth Rs. In 10th and 12th R, when there is the first winning of the first big winning opening 30, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short of 0.1 second, and when there is the second winning the opening time The V open / close member 71 is opened long for up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the second, fourth, sixth, and 12th eyes, when the first large winning opening 30 has a first winning, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 second. In the 8th and 10th eyes, when the first winning combination 30 has the first winning, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short of 0.1 second, and when the second winning is found the opening time The V open / close member 71 is opened long for up to 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, when there is the first winning on the first big winning opening 30 at the second and sixth R eyes, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short of 0.1 seconds for the opening time, and there is the second winning. When this is done, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. At the fourth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth Rs, when the first large winning opening 30 has a first winning, the V open / close member 71 is short-opened for an open time of 0.1 second. In the opening pattern 34, at the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth R, when the first large winning opening 30 has the first winning, the V open / close member 71 is opened for a short of 0.1 second. .

4. Description of jackpot, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpot" and "loss" as a result of a jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 41. When the jackpot is won, the jackpot game is made to open the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) with the opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol (the type of big hitting) stopped and displayed. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit opening game), an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the final round game is over There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the winning opening during the round game is included in the opening round game before the closing.

  There are several types of jackpots. The type of jackpot is as shown in FIG. Here, there are two major types of jackpots, "V passing scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". "V passing scheduled jackpot" operates the opening and closing member 32, the opening and closing member 37, and the V opening and closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V passage expected opening pattern) which allows passage of gaming balls to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot. Here, the jackpot of special figure stop symbol data 11H-14H and 21H corresponds to "V passing scheduled jackpot". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening and closing member 32 and the opening and closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening and closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (open pattern 21: open pattern 31), (open pattern 22: open pattern 33). Or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), it is possible to pass the gaming ball to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is an opening pattern (V non-passing planned opening pattern) in which passage of the gaming ball to the V area 39 is impossible during the jackpot game, the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 and the V opening / closing member 71 Is a jackpot to operate. Here, the jackpot of the special figure stop symbol data 15H, 22H corresponds to "V non-passing planned jackpot". When the combination of the open pattern of the open / close member 32 and the open / close member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (open pattern 22: open pattern 34) Passage of the game ball to 39 becomes impossible. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 doubles as the V-passing planned opening pattern and the V-non-passing planned opening pattern.

  "V passing scheduled jackpot" includes "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V passing scheduled jackpot" and "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled passing jackpot". The "16 RV scheduled jackpot" has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. 1R to 13R and 15R open the first large winning opening 30 for up to 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second large winning opening 35 for up to 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 is easily possible.

  Although "16R (essentially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, a substantial total number of rounds is 13R. That is, 1R to 13R opens the first large winning opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but 15R only opens the first large winning opening 30 for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and Even in the 16R, the second large winning opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V scheduled scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and it is a round in which the winning ball can not be expected. That is, "16R (essentially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" is a jackpot of substantially 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and passage to the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 is easily possible.

  Although "16R (15R real) V scheduled jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, a substantial total number of rounds is 15R. That is, 1R to 13R and 15R open the first large winning opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, 16R open the second large winning opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but 14R The second large winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second per 1 R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot", the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and it becomes an unforeseeable round of winning balls. That is, "16R (15R in real) V scheduled jackpot" is a jackpot in 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V open / close member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: open pattern 32), and passage to the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 is easily possible.

  The "V non-passing jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" of the opening pattern 22 having a total number of rounds of 16R but a substantial total number of rounds of 13. That is, 1R to 13R opens the first large winning opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but 15R only opens the first large winning opening 30 for 0.1 second per 1R, and 14R and Even in the 16R, the second large winning opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 second per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (effective 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and it becomes an unforeseeable round of winning balls. That is, "16R (13R substantially) V non-passing planned jackpot" is a jackpot of 13R substantially. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V open / close member 71 is open, its open is short open (FIG. 14: open pattern 34) It is almost impossible for game balls to pass.

  As is clear from the above description, "16R (essentially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (actually 13R) V scheduled planned jackpot" are the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 The open patterns of the open / close member 32 and the open / close member 37) are the same (open pattern 22), and only the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 is different (open pattern 34 and open pattern 33). That is, it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 in "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes a low probability time short state (low probability high base state). On the other hand, “16R (actually 13R) V scheduled to pass the jackpot” allows the game ball to easily pass to the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly probable It becomes time saving state (high probability high base state). From this, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between "16R (essentially 13R) V non-passable jackpot" and "16R (essentially 13R) V scheduled planned jackpot" and the gaming state after the jackpot is low certainty It becomes difficult to determine whether the time saving state (low probability high base state) or high probability time short state (high probability high base state) is reached. In other words, the gaming state after “16R (actually 13R) V scheduled to pass the jackpot” is a high probability time short state (high probability high base state when the gaming ball passes through the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 However, it is a latent state (a latent probability change state) that the probability is high.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for V-passing planned jackpot and 60/60 for V-not scheduled planned jackpot It is 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), V passing planned jackpot 83/128 (about 64.8%), V non passing scheduled jackpot 45/128 (about It is 35.2%). As described above, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot performed with the game ball in the second starting port 21 is performed rather than the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) performed with the game ball in the first starting port 20. The lottery (the second special symbol lottery) is set to be advantageous to the player.

5. Description of gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability fluctuation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, a state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs probability fluctuation control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called “high probability state”, and a state in which probability fluctuation control is not performed is simply referred to as “normal probability state ( Non-high probability state, low probability state) The game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be a jackpot is higher in the high probability state than the normal probability state as the probability variation control of the special symbol. The high probability state is realized by performing the jackpot determination. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability variation control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol indicator 41 is used as compared with the case where probability variation control is not executed. There is a high probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol will be a big hit symbol.

  In addition, the state where microcomputer 81 for game control controls the fluctuation time shortening control to the special symbol of special symbol indicator 41 is called “time saving state”, the state where fluctuation time shortening control is not performed is simply “non time saving state”. It is said. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of variation display to the time of derivation display of the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10, FIG. 11) determined so that selection of a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is more frequent than in the non-time-short state when in the time saving state The variation pattern used is judged. That is, when the microcomputer 81 for game control is executing the fluctuation time shortening control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol can be varied as compared to the case where the fluctuation time shortening control is not executed. It becomes easy to select short fluctuation time as fluctuation time of display. As a result, in the time saving state, the pace of the special figure reserve is increased, and a valid winning to the starting opening (a prize that can be stored as the special figure reserve) is easily generated. Thereby, it is possible to aim for a jackpot under the progress of the smooth game. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute probability variation control and variation time reduction control on the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 or may execute only one of them.

  The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control on the normal symbol in the case of the time saving state and does not execute it in the non-time shortening state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines the number of normal symbol random number values (hit random number values) determined to be successful as the probability variation control of the normal symbol per unit regular symbol per shot determination table T3 in which the time saving state is larger than the non time saving state. Hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed using FIG. 8 (C). Therefore, in the time saving state, the hit probability is higher than that of the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control on the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used compared to the case where probability fluctuation control is not executed. The display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the normal symbol hits and the probability of becoming a symbol increases. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than the non-time saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time-short state, but is 1 second in the time-short state (FIG. 8 (D)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the open time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time short state (FIG. 12). That is, the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes open time extension control on the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the power chew 22 in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes the opening count increase control on the power chew 22. Under circumstances where the gaming control microcomputer 81 is executing probability variation control and variation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 and open time extension control and opening number increase control for the electric chew 22, As compared with the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the gaming ball is more frequently won in the second starting opening 21. As a result, the base which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of firing balls becomes high. Therefore, a state in which these controls are being executed is called a "high base state", and a state not being executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls on hand. The high base state is a state in which so-called power supply control (control for supporting the winning of the second starting port 21 by the power control 22) is being executed. The high base state (power support control state) may not perform all the control described above. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening frequency increasing control for the elective chew 22 By performing one or more controls, it is only necessary that the electric tube 22 be more easily released than when the controls are not being executed. Further, the high base state (power support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the short time state.

  In gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning to V passing scheduled jackpot is a high probability state and time saving state and high base state if passage to V area 39 is made during the jackpot game . This gaming state is particularly referred to as "high probability high base state" or "high probability time short state". The high-accuracy high-base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 160 times), or the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning to the V non-scheduled scheduled jackpot, if the passage of V area 39 has not been made during the jackpot game (almost not done), normal probability state (non-high probability States (low probability states) and short and high base states. This gaming state is particularly referred to as "low probability high base state", "low probability time short state". The low probability high base state is ended by the variable display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) being executed, or the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. When the gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is the normal probability state, the non-time-short state and the low base state (non-power-supply control state). This gaming state is particularly called "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state may be referred to as "normal gaming state" or "low probability non-short state (also referred to simply as non-short state)". In addition, the state during the execution of the special game (big hit game) is referred to as "special game state (big hit game state)". Furthermore, a state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is referred to as a "specific gaming state".

  In a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously if the game ball is made to enter the right gaming area 3B (FIG. 1) by right hitting. The electric support 22 makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 compared to the low base state, and the second start opening 21 is easier to win than the first start opening 20. is there. From this, in the high base state, the game ball is passed to the gate 28 serving as a trigger for the normal symbol lottery, and the right strike is performed to win the game ball to the second starting opening 21. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of start winnings (winnings on the starting opening) rather than hitting the left. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, the game is played by hitting the right even during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously if the game ball is made to enter the left gaming area 3A (FIG. 1) by left hitting. Since the power support control is not executed, the power chew 22 is less likely to be released compared to the high base state, and it is easier to win the first start opening 20 than to the second start opening 21. It is because it has become. From this, in the low base state, in order to win the game ball to the first starting opening 20, the left strike is performed. This makes it possible to obtain a large number of starting winnings rather than right-handed.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. A counter, a flag, a status, a buffer and the like appearing in the operation explanation of the gaming control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the pass / fail judgment means (FIG. 23) and the pass / fail judgment means (FIG. 18, FIG. 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. Main Control In the main processing, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, status, counters and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting is performed only once after the power is turned on, and is not performed thereafter.

  After the initial setting, the gaming control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interruption of the interruption process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is configured to receive various random number counter values (big hit random number, big hit type random number value, reach random number value, variation pattern random value) shown in FIG. , Normal symbol random number value) is added 1 and updated. Each random number counter value is returned to "0" and added again when the set upper limit value is reached. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0”, or may be randomly changed. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

  After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 permits an interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is permitted, execution of the main timer interrupt process (step S005) is possible. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, after the end of the main timer interrupt processing, before the start of the main timer interrupt processing next time, the update processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing is repeatedly executed. . When an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7A. This random number updating process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process performed in the above-described main control main process (FIG. 15). That is, the update process of various random number counter values is the execution period of the main timer interrupt process and the other period (period from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process) And both.

  After the random number update process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1 and outputs payout data for the payout of a prize ball according to the type of winning opening to the main RAM 84. Set in buffer. The various sensors include, for example, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the normal winning opening sensor 27a, and the normal winning opening sensor 29a (see FIG. 3).

  After the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the start opening sensor detection process (step S103), the normal operation process (step S104), the special operation process (step S105), the V area sensor detection process (step S106), the holding ball The number process (step S107) is sequentially performed. Details of these processes will be described later. After the holding ball number process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs an output process (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs a command or the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above to the sub control board 90. After the output processing, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In the other processing, for example, the second special view suspension indicator 43b is controlled to the display mode indicating the number based on the special diagram 2 suspension ball number described later, and the first special diagram is based on the special view 1 suspension ball number The hold indicator 43a is controlled to a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting mouth sensor detection processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the gaming ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is performed based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the gaming ball passes the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of normal symbol holding balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal symbol holding balls is the number of common drawing holdings, and more specifically, is the value of a counter for counting the number of common drawing holdings provided in the main RAM 84. If the normal symbol holding ball number is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the normal symbol holding ball number is "3" or less (step S202: NO), "1" is added to the normal symbol holding ball number (step S203), and then a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the gaming control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-H), and the acquired random number is selected from the first to the first general drawing reserve storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. The fourth storage area is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbol holding balls.

  In step S205, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the gaming ball has won in the second starting opening 21. This determination is performed depending on whether or not the gaming ball has been detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. If the gaming ball has not won in the second starting opening 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If the gaming ball has won (step S205: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the special figure 2 holding ball number is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The special figure 2 holding ball number is the number of second special figure reservations, more specifically, the value of a counter for counting the number of second special figure reservations provided in the main RAM 84. If the special figure 2 reservation sphere number is "4" (Step S206: YES), processing will skip to Step S210. When special figure 2 reservation sphere number is below 3 (step S206: NO), after adding 1 to special figure 2 retention sphere number (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is done (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label-TRND-A), the value of jackpot type random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label-TRND-AS), the value of reach random number counter (FIG. 7: label -TRND-value of RC), value of fluctuation pattern random number counter (Figure 7: value of label-TRND-T1) is acquired. The gaming control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group out of the first to fourth storage areas of the second special view storage area 85b in a storage area corresponding to the current special map 2 storage ball count. The gaming control microcomputer 81 temporarily suspends the acquired random number value group also to a buffer (prejudging buffer for pre-judging) different from the second special-character drawing storage area 85b for the special drawing 2 prior determination processing (FIG. 18) described later. To remember (hold). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 2 prior determination process (step S209). The details of the special view 2 prior determination process will be described later.

  In step S210, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the gaming ball has been detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. If the gaming ball has not won in the first starting opening 20 (step S210: NO), this processing ends. When the game ball is won in the first starting opening 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 1 holding ball number is "4 (upper limit value)" ( Step S211). The special figure 1 holding ball number is the number of first special figure holdings, and more specifically, is the value of a counter for counting the number of first special drawing holdings provided in the main RAM 84. If the special figure 1 holding ball number is "4" (step S211: YES), this processing ends. When the special figure 1 holding ball number is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the special figure 1 holding ball number (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S2) S213). Here, the value of the big hit random number counter, the value of the big hit type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are obtained in the same manner as the special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (step S208). The gaming control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group out of the first to fourth storage areas of the first special view storage area 85a in the storage area corresponding to the current special view 1 suspension ball count. The gaming control microcomputer 81 temporarily suspends the acquired random number value group also to a buffer (prejudging buffer for pre-judging) different from the first special-character drawing storage area 85a for the special drawing 1 prior determination process (FIG. 19) described later. To remember (hold). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 1 advance determination process (step S214). The details of the special view 1 prior determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 prior judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special view 2 prior determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S301). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, the predetermination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot prior determination with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). Do. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the jackpot random number value to determine in advance whether or not a jackpot has occurred. Here, since the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the high probability state table (big hit determination value “0” to “649”) in the big hit determination table T1. Determine in advance whether it is a jackpot by reference. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", the jackpot is determined in advance as "jackpot", and when the value is any other value, it is determined in advance that it is "loss". In the present embodiment, pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table T1 used in the jackpot judgment process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, it is used for prejudgment different from the jackpot judgment table T1. Prior determination may be performed using the jackpot determination table of

  If the result of the jackpot prior determination is “lost” (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot prior determination is "big hit" (step S304: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type advance determination (step S305). In the jackpot type advance determination, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines the jackpot type random number as a determination value temporarily stored in the advance determination buffer by the special view 2 relationship random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208) To get Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs the preliminary determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random number value is any of “0” to “127”, it is determined in advance that “16 RV passage planned jackpot”. In the present embodiment, preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, the advance is different from the jackpot type determination table T5 Prior determination may be performed using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

  In step S306, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a fluctuation pattern prior determination. More specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines the fluctuation pattern random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). And, get reach random value. Next, here, since the time saving state (time saving flag is ON), the gaming control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time saving state, and the jackpot prior determination result of step S304, The fluctuation pattern is specified from the presence / absence prior determination result of the reach obtained from the reach random number value and the fluctuation pattern random value. In the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern to be selected may differ depending on the difference in the number of holding balls. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that may be selected due to differences in the number of holding balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot prior determination result and the reach presence / absence prior determination result, the reach presence loss is determined in advance, and when the variation pattern random number value is "60", the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of holding balls is "1-2 In the case of “”, two patterns of the variation pattern “P64” to be selected and the variation pattern “P68” to be selected when the number of holding balls is “3 to 4” are selected. In the present embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 The prior determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for prior determination different from.

  In step S307, the gaming control microcomputer 81 creates an advance determination command. The predetermination command includes a jackpot advance determination result, (in the case of a hit, a jackpot type predetermination result), and a fluctuation pattern predetermination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created prior determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this processing.

[Special figure 1 prior judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special view 1 prior determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-described special view 2 prior determination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is ON, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot prior determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the prior determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). Do. Next, here, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF), the gaming control microcomputer 81 is a table for the normal probability state (big hit determination value “0” to “164” in the big hit determination table T1. It determines beforehand whether it is a jackpot based on "). That is, when the jackpot random number value is “0” to “164”, the jackpot is determined in advance as the “jackpot”, and when the value is any other value, it is determined in advance that the “loss” is made. Note that the jackpot prior determination may use a jackpot determination table for prior determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Since the processes of steps S404 to S408 are the same as steps S304 to S308 of the special view 2 advance determination process (FIG. 18) described above, the description will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. If the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the symbol is changing normally (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the variation of the normal symbol is not in progress (step S502: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of holding balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). When the number of holding balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. If there is one or more holding ball number (step S503: NO), the normal symbol holding ball number is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes the gate 28 in the state where the number of balls in the normal symbol is "0", the number of balls in the normal symbol is temporarily "1" in step S203 of the start opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17). After that, in the present step S504, the reserve is digested and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". The same applies to the number of balls held for special symbols. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols temporarily becomes "1", and then step S1404 and steps in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the reserve is digested and the number of reserved balls in the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8C) (step S505). Specifically, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the normal symbol random number value (as the determination value) stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the common drawing suspension) of the common drawing suspension storage area 86 Read the random number value). Then, it is determined whether or not a hit is made using the normal symbol random number value, the gaming state (whether the time saving state or not), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3. For example, in the non-time saving state, if the normal symbol random number value is "0" to "2", it is determined to be "hit", and if the normal symbol random number value is other than that, it is determined to be "loss" (See FIG. 8 (C)).

  Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the gaming state (whether the time reduction state or not), and uses the determination result of the gaming state and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table T4 to change the normal symbol fluctuation. Select the variation time of the normal pattern as a pattern. Here, in the non-time-short state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time-short state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8D) . The game control microcomputer 81 starts the variation display of the normal symbol by setting the selected normal symbol variation pattern (step S507).

  In step S508, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and has ended. The normal symbol fluctuation time is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present processing. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time is over (step S508: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and in the case of "losing" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505). (Step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S510: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the power chew open pattern (step S511). The open pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew open pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines the gaming state (whether the time reduction state or not), and uses the determination result of the gaming state and the electric chew open pattern judgment table T7 to use the open pattern of the electric chew 22. Choose Here, the "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time-short state, and the "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time-short state. After the opening pattern is selected, the gaming control microcomputer 81 starts the power-on operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this processing.

  In the above-described step S501, when the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes for the electric chow 22 has reached a prescribed maximum winning number (for example, six), or the time for which the electric chow 22 is closed after the operation time of the electric chow 22 is closed It is that one of the achievements is satisfied. The operation time of the electric chow 22 is an operation time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521) Finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing relating to the special symbol display 41 and the big winning device (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is “1” of “special operation status”, Called "2", "3", "4". When the “special operation status” is “1” (step S1301: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, variation pattern selection and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol change process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, the output of the change stop command is executed after the change time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol determination processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, an output of an opening command or the like is executed at the time of a jackpot. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric combination processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric role processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is “1” in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special view 2 holding ball number is "0" (step S1401). When the special figure 2 reservation sphere number is “0” (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. If the special figure 2 holding ball number is “1” or more (step S1401: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the special figure 2 holding ball number is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 reads the storage location of the hold information (various random number values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special view hold storage area 85b to the side where the storage location is read from the current position. While shifting by one, the hold information stored in the farthest place from the side to be read out in the second special-image hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If there is, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above-described steps, the second Tokusou reserve is digested in the order in which it is suspended. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the holding image 9B (the leftmost holding image 9B among the four holding images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special It shifts to the reserve digest image display area side and is displayed as a reserve digest image 9C. In addition, the reserve images 9B (the second, third and fourth reserve images 9B from the left among the four reserve images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special view reserve storage area 85b are on the left side, respectively. Shift one (Figure 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one second Tokusetsu reserve has been digested. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process is set in the fluctuation time timer. Further, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". In addition, in the fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, information about the special figure stop symbol data set in the big hit judgment process (step S1402) and the fluctuation pattern selection process ( Information on the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information on fluctuation time) is included.

  In step S1401, when the special figure 2 holding ball number is “0” (step S1401: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the special figure 1 holding ball number is “0” ( Step S1407). When the special figure 1 reservation ball number is “0” (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, the random value group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the special figure 1 holding ball number is “1” or more (step S1407: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the special figure 1 holding ball number is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of the various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special view storage area 85a to the side read from the current position by one. At the same time, the hold information stored in the farthest place from the side to be read out in the first special image hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above-described steps, the first special map reservation is digested in the order in which it is held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold image 9A (the hold image 9A at the right end of the four hold images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special It shifts to the reserve digest image display area side and is displayed as a reserve digest image 9C. In addition, reserve images 9A (the second, third and fourth reserve images 9A from the left among the four reserve images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special view reserve storage area 85a are on the right side, respectively. Shift one (Figure 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one first Tokusetsu reserve has been digested. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process is set in the fluctuation time timer. Further, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, in the fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, information about the special figure stop symbol data set in the big hit judgment process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process ( Information on the variation pattern set in step S1409) (including information on variation time) is included.

  In step S1407, when the special figure 1 holding ball number is “0” (step S1407: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demonstration screen for waiting for customers. The gaming control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by turning on / off the demonstration screen display flag for waiting for a customer. If it is the standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer waiting standby command for displaying a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined standby time has elapsed. (Step S1414), this processing ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variation display of the special symbol based on the first special view suspension is executed only when the second special view suspension is "0". That is, the second special view reserve digest is executed prior to the first special view reserve digest. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the second special view suspension is a jackpot (V passing scheduled jackpot) for the player with a larger profit than the lottery based on the first special view suspension It is easy to win the

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 have the same process flow, and therefore will be collectively described. In the jackpot determination process, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). If the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special view 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special view hold) of the second special view hold storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process of the special view 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the first special view hold) of the first special view hold storage area 85a is read. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a jackpot is made using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), whether or not the big hit is made based on the high probability state table (big hit determination value is “0” to “649”) in the big hit determination table T1. judge.

  In step S1501, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot determination with reference to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) ( Step S1504). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads the jackpot random number value by the same method as step S1502. Next, here, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF), whether the jackpot based on the table for the normal probability state (jackpot determination value “0” to “164”) in the jackpot determination table T1 It is determined whether or not.

  If the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random number value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special view 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special view reservation storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process of the special view 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special view reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After the determination of the jackpot type, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) according to the identified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, when the result of the big hit determination is "loss", the special figure stop symbol data (01H) according to the lost symbol is set in the big hit type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520) , End this process.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 have the same process flow, and therefore will be collectively described. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the gaming state is the short time state (step S1600). The determination as to whether or not the time saving state is made depends on whether the time saving flag is ON. When it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. If the time saving state is not set (step S1600: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot is the special view 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is the special view 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always the V-passing scheduled jackpot, so the process skips to step S1605. If the jackpot is special view 1 (step S1603: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is the V passage scheduled jackpot (step S1604). It is carried out based on the special figure stop symbol data being done.

  If the jackpot type is V passage planned jackpot (step S1604: YES), the microcomputer for gaming control 81 changes with reference to the non-time-short state V passage planned jackpot table of the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random number value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special view 2, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special view suspension) of the second special view suspension storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the first special figure retention) of the first special figure retention storage area 85a is read out. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random number value. Here, as a table for the non-time short state V passing scheduled jackpot, a portion corresponding to the V passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time short status shown in FIG. 10 (the variation pattern is “P1 in FIG. The part from “P3” to “P3”, and from “P21” to “P23” as the variation pattern in Special Figure 2 is referred to (address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as a variation pattern in Special Figure 1 and any one from "P21" to "P23" is selected in Special Figure 2.

  If the jackpot type is V non-passing planned jackpot (step S1604: NO), the microcomputer for game control 81 refers to the table for non-time-short state V non-passing planned jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. Then, the variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time short state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, a portion ("P4" to "P6") corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot among the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time short Part) is referenced. One of “P4” to “P6” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S1602 (step S1602: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number is a reach establishment random number (step S1607). Specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random number value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special view 2, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special view hold) of the second special view hold storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special view 1, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the first special view hold) of the first special view hold storage area 85a is read. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of the reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8 (B)) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is in the non-time-short state, in the reach determination table T2, the table for the non-time-short state (the reach presence determination value (reach establishment random number value) is a portion of “0” to “13”) Determine the presence or absence.

  If the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, if there is a reach presence loss, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time-short state of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The variation pattern is selected with reference to the reach presence loss table (step S1608). Here, as a table for loss with non-time-short status reach, a portion corresponding to reach-with-miss in fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for non-time-short status shown in FIG. 10 (the variation pattern is “P7” in In the part "P14", in the special figure 2, the variation pattern is referred to as "P24" to "P31"). In Special Figure 1, any one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current special figure 1 holding ball number (1 to 4). In Special Figure 2, any of "P24" to "P31" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current special figure 2 holding ball number (1 to 4). Since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of holding balls, the function of the shortening variation according to the number of holding balls works. That is, in both of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, when the number of holding balls is “3” to “4”, the fluctuation time is compared with when the number of holding balls is “1” to “2”. Short variation patterns are more likely to be selected. This makes it possible to speed up the speed at which special figures are suspended when the number of balls held is large.

  If the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: NO), that is, if there is no reach loss, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the non-time-short state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. The variation pattern is selected with reference to the no reach loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-short time reach non-reach loss, a portion corresponding to non-reach non-reach out of fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for non-time short state shown in FIG. 10 (the fluctuation pattern is “P15” in special figure 1 In the part "P16", in the special figure 2, the variation pattern is referred to as "P32" to "P33". In Special Figure 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current special figure 1 holding ball number (1 to 4). In the special figure 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random number value and the current special figure 2 holding ball number (1 to 4). Here also, since the variation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of holding balls, the function of the shortening variation according to the number of holding balls works.

  When it is determined in step S1600 that the gaming state is the short time state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). The processes in steps S1613 to S1619 are the same as the processes in steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points. The difference between the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 is that the portions of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 to be referred to in steps S1615, S1616, S1618 and S1619 have already been described in steps S1605, S1606, S1608 and S1609 It is different from Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, while the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-short time state is referred to, in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the time short state is used. The variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is V passage scheduled jackpot, a portion corresponding to V passage scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for time shortening state shown in FIG. Are referred to as “P41” to “P43”, and the special pattern 2 refers to “P61” to “P63” as the variation pattern. From the read variation pattern random number value, any one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as a variation pattern in Special Figure 1 and any one of "P61" to "P63" is selected in Special Figure 2. Also, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is V non-passing planned jackpot, a portion corresponding to V non-passing planned jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the short time state shown in FIG. "To" P46 "is referred to. One of “P44” to “P46” is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value.

  After selecting the fluctuation pattern as described above, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the selected fluctuation pattern (step S1630) and ends the present processing. The information of the set fluctuation pattern is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). Thereby, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Process during special symbol change]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed and has ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the above-mentioned variation pattern selection process (FIG. 24, FIG. 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this processing ends. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing in response to the fluctuation stop (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variation display of the special symbol with a symbol according to the set special symbol stop symbol data. Thereafter, the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of special symbol determination processing (FIG. 21: step S1306). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs gaming state management processing (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of times of ST and the number of times of time reduction, and the contents will be described later. After the gaming state management processing, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and the present process is ended. Thereby, the jackpot game is not started, and the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination etc. for the next hold is executed.

  If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member according to the type of the jackpot winning (step S1803). Specifically, with reference to the special winning opening open pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening from the special view stop symbol data, and the determined open pattern set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the special winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 from the special view stop symbol data with reference to the V open / close member open pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14) and sets the determined open pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "open pattern 31" is set as the open pattern of the V open / close member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the jackpot which has been won, together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, “16” is set to the round counter (FIG. 13 (B)).

  After setting the release pattern, the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs gaming state reset processing (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, the jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and the process ends.

[Playing state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S2001). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of times of variation of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, “160” is set in the probability change counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the probability change counter by 1 (step S2003). If the value of the probability change counter is not “0” (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. If the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

  In step S2005, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time saving counter is to count the number of times of variation of the special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, at the time of transition to the time saving state, "100" is set in the time reduction counter if the low probability high base state, and "160" is set in the time reduction counter if the high probability high base state. The microcomputer for game control 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time reduction counter by 1 (step S2007). If the value of the time saving counter is not “0” (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the value of the time saving counter is “0” (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

  In step S2009, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets a gaming state designating command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and completes this processing. The game state specification command includes information on the currently set game state (whether or not a probability change state, a probability change counter value, a time reduction state or not, a time reduction counter value, etc.).

[Playing state reset process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the probability change flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. If the probability change flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process ends. If the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched OFF (step S2104). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, the non-high probability state and the non-short time state. In the gaming machine 1, since the low base state is always in the non-time-short state, the low base state is in progress during the jackpot game.

[Special electric role processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric symbol processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). First, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) are completely opened based on the opening pattern in the running big hit game. If the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the big hit end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening and closing member operation processing for operating the V opening and closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V open / close member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of gaming balls are won in the first big winning opening 30, and in the V open / close member operation process, according to the V open / close member open pattern T9. The V opening and closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when the predetermined number of game balls are to be won. Details of the V open / close member operation process will be described later. After the V open / close member operation process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) is open (step S2202). If it is open (YES in step S2202), the process proceeds to step S2210.

  When the special winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the special winning opening (step S2203). In the time of opening the big winning opening, for example, when the opening time of the big hit has passed and it has reached the opening start time in the first round game, or the big winning opening which is temporarily closed after opening is reopened It includes the time when the interval time (closing time) has passed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the special winning opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

  If it is time to open the special winning opening (timing) (step S2203: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large winning opening (the first large winning opening 30 or the second large winning opening 35) in accordance with the opening pattern (FIG. 13) corresponding to the type of the big hit. After the special winning opening opening process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets a round designating command (step S2208). The round designating command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the round designating command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In addition, in this embodiment, the opening of the big winning a prize opening of a plurality of times is not made in one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the gaming control microcomputer 81 is configured to open the large winning opening in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first release, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first release. After setting the round designation command, the process ends.

  In step S2202 described above, if the special winning opening is open (YES in step S2202), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes for the special winning opening in the round game has reached the prescribed maximum winning number (for example, 9 per round), or it has reached the time for closing the special winning mouth That is, either (that is, that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the closing condition of the special winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present processing. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the special winning opening (step S2211).

  If it is not the time (timing) to open the special winning opening in the above-described step S2203, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening is closed. As mentioned above, it is because time (interval time) of closing of a big winning opening between round games is included in the opening round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed after closing the special winning opening. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends the present process.

  When the round game is over (step S2220: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221), and the value of the round counter is "0" or not A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the defined number of round games has not been digested yet, this processing is ended to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is “0”, the jackpot ending command is set as the jackpot end processing for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when there is a passage of gaming balls to the V region 39 in “16R (essentially 13R) V planned to pass jackpot” is “16R (essentially 13R) V non-passable scheduled It is the same length as the ending time when there is no passage of the gaming ball to the V area 39 in the "big hit". As a result, even if the game ball passes to the V region 39 in the "16R (essential 13R) V scheduled planned jackpot" for the player, the "16R (essentially 13R) V non-scheduled projected jackpot" And the passage of the gaming ball to the V area 39 can be recognized. In addition, the ending time when there is no passage of the game ball to V field 39 in "16R (actually 13R) V passage planned jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and the process ends.

  In the above-mentioned step S2200, when the big hit end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), since the last round is finished, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ending time of the big hit has passed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present processing. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns off the big hit end flag (step S2231) and turns off the big hit flag (step S2232), and the special operation status Is set to "1" (step S2233). Thereby, special symbol standby processing (step S1302) is executed again in the next special operation processing. Thereafter, a game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed to complete this process.

[V opening and closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the current round game (the round) is the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71. When the value of the round counter is “15”, “13”, “11”, “9”, “7”, “5”, the gaming control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round. When it is not the open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V open / close member 71 in the round.

  If it is the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The “first winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has a first prize in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. If the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether a first winning is detected (step S2503). If the first ball winning combination has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning in the first large winning opening 30 in the round, and there is no need to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

  When the first ball winning combination is detected (step S2503: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 opens the V open / close member 71 for short and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened, regardless of whether “short opening” or “long opening”, the first ball is won Sometimes it is to execute short release (here 0.1 second). Since the open time of the V open / close member 71 is very short in the short open of the V open / close member 71, the first game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 does not pass the V area 39 and is not It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V effective period setting process, while the V open / close member 71 is open and for several seconds after the V open / close member 71 is closed, the V effective period in which the detection of the gaming ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective is set. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V open / close member 71 for short in accordance with the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 (FIG. 14B) and opens the V open / close member 71. And 1 second after closing is set to V effective period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V-effective period (including the case where the jackpot game is not executed) as a V-ineffective period in which the detection of the gaming ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be ineffective. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is effective" means that the V flag is turned on based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later) Processing (see FIG. 33)). In addition, “determining the detection of the gaming ball by the V area sensor 39a as invalid” means that the V flag is not turned on even when the detection of the gaming ball by the V area sensor 39a is performed. The reason why the V effective period includes a few seconds after the closing of the V open / close member 71 (ball brushing period) is because there is a physical distance between the V open / close member 71 and the V region sensor 39a. It takes into consideration the period until the gaming ball having entered the V area 39 side immediately before the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V area sensor 39a. That is, in this case, the V flag is turned ON only when V passage (V game region passes to V region 39) during the V effective period is detected, and V flag is detected when V passage is detected outside the V effective period (V invalid period). It is decided not to turn it on. When the V flag is ON, the probability change flag is ON, that is, the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (see later-described gaming state setting processing (FIG. 32)). By doing this, the V flag is turned on based on the V passage due to the fraudulent action, and the high probability state is not set. After the short open of the V open / close member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

  In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if there is already a first ball winning (step S2502: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the second winning flag is ON or not (Step S2520). The “second winning flag” is a flag indicating that the first large winning opening 30 has a second winning in a case where the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 in the round is long open. If the second winning flag is ON (step S 2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S 2540. If the second winning flag is OFF (step S 2520: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 in the round is long open (step S 2521). If the long release is not performed (step S 2521: NO), that is, if the short release is performed, the process proceeds to step S 2540. On the other hand, if the game player is in the long open state (step S 2521: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S 2522). If the second winning combination has not been detected (step S 2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S 2540.

  When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 long and performs V effective period setting processing (step S2523). The V open / close member 71 is long open in the open pattern of the V open / close member 71 (FIG. 14B), in the case of “long open”, the long open at the winning of the second ball (here, up to 31.5 seconds) ) To execute. In this case, since one round game time is 31.5 seconds at the longest (29.5 seconds for the big winning opening maximum opening time + 2 seconds for the interval closing time), generally, the second game winning a prize The time from time to the end of the round is less than 31.5 seconds. As described later, since the V open / close member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the open time of the long open of the V open / close member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the open time of the V open / close member 71 is relatively long, at least a part of the game balls after the second ball winning a prize in the first large winning opening 30 has the V area 39 It is configured to pass. In the V effective period setting process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the V open period as the V open period during the opening and closing of the V open / close member 71 and sets the V inactive period together with the closing of the V open / close member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V open / close member 71 and the V effective period setting process, the gaming control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S 2524), and proceeds to step S 2540.

  In step S 2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V open / close member 71 is open. If the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S 2540: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round game has ended (step S 2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (two seconds in this case) has elapsed since the big winning opening was closed. Make a decision.

  When the round game is over (step S 2550: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S 2551), and the V open / close member closing process and the V invalid period A setting process is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V open / close member 71, and after a few seconds (1 second in this case) after the V open / close member 71 is closed, Set and finish this process.

  If the round game has not ended (step S 2550: NO), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S 2560). The closing condition of the V open / close member 71 can be exemplified by, for example, that a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening of the V open / close member 71 if the short open is open. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V open / close member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process ends. When the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the processing is ended while the V opening / closing member 71 is in the open state and the V effective period is continued.

  In step S2540, when it is determined that the V opening / closing member 71 is closing (NO in step S2540), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is over (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this processing. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), this process ends.

[Playing state setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the gaming state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The gaming control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the V flag is ON (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set in the time saving counter (step S2303). As a result, the gaming state after the present jackpot game becomes the "non-high probability state", the "time saving state" and the "high base state" (that is, the low probability high base). This low-probability high-base state ends when either of the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or the next jackpot is won, or the condition is met.

On the other hand, if the V flag is ON in step S2301 (step S2301: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), and sets "10,000" in the probability variation counter (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Also, the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307), and sets "160" in the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the gaming state after the present jackpot game becomes "high probability state" and "time saving state" and "high base state" (that is, high probability high base). This high-accuracy high-base state ends when either of the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10000 times or when the next jackpot is won, the condition being satisfied.
In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is about 1/10, and practically, it will be about a big jackpot before performing the 10000 jackpot lottery in the high probability high base state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot (special figure stop symbol data 21H) which is a jackpot at the special symbol 2 (via the second starting opening) in the time saving state and which is scheduled to pass V is the jackpot game. If V passes, it is almost guaranteed that the gaming state after that jackpot will be the high probability high base state until the next jackpot.

  In step S2309, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets a gaming state designating command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and completes this processing. The gaming state designation command includes information on the gaming state which has just been set.

[V-area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not there is a detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If there is no detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V-valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V open / close member operation process (FIG. 31). The V validity period is set to the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the opening and closing seconds of the V opening / closing member 71 during the twelfth round (ball brushing period) Be done. If the V effective period is not in progress (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is during the V effective period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V pass command (step S2604), and ends this processing. .

[Holding ball processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the holding ball number process (FIG. 16: step S107). The gaming control microcomputer 81 first reads out the special figure 1 holding ball number, the special figure 2 holding ball number, and the normal symbol holding ball number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S 2701). Next, the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the hold ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The ball holding ball number command is a command for notifying the sub control board 90 of the ball holding number, and includes information about the special figure 1 holding ball number, the special figure 2 holding ball number, and the normal symbol holding ball number . After setting of the holding ball number command, the gaming control microcomputer 81 ends the present process.

7. Operation of Effect Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub control substrate 90 (FIG. 4) will be described on the basis of FIGS. A counter, a flag, a status, a buffer and the like appearing in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub control main process]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub control main process. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, setting of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, status, counters and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

  After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number updating process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. Each random number counter value is returned to "0" and added again when the set upper limit value is reached. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0”, or may be randomly changed. In addition to adding one by one, two or more random numbers may be added. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

  After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4025). While the interrupt is permitted, execution of the sub timer interrupt processing (step S4035) is possible. The sub timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, after the sub timer interrupt processing ends, the random number updating process is repeatedly executed until the sub timer interrupt processing is started next.

[Sub side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a process during variation effect (step S4305). The processing during fluctuation presentation is processing for setting a command before the end of fluctuation at a specific timing during fluctuation presentation and causing the display screen 7a to execute a particular display presentation, and the details will be described later. After the fluctuation effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs switch processing (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display content of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. . After the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs command transmission processing (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 by the reception command analysis process etc. as the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , Transmit to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands executes display effects corresponding to the received commands using the image display device 7. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 according to the received command. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes lamp effects for controlling the light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 according to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends the process. In the other processes, for example, a random number update process or the like is performed.

[Receive command analysis process]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a predetermination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it is received (step S4415: YES), pre-reading effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The “pre-reading effect determination process” is a process of determining whether or not pre-reading effect is to be performed, and a pre-reading effect pattern in the case of performing the pre-reading effect. Details of the pre-reading effect determination processing will be described later. On the other hand, when not having received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned pre-reading effect determination processing is skipped. The preread effect is an effect that indicates that there is a high possibility that a jackpot is included in the hold information newly stored in the special view hold storage area 85, and is executed during the change effect.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it is received (step S4445: YES), a suspension display process is performed (step S4450). In the suspension display process, provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 based on the information about the special figure 1 reserve ball number, the special figure 2 reserve ball number, and the normal symbol reserve ball number included in the reserve ball number command The values of the first special view hold effect counter, the second special view hold effect counter, and the common drawing hold effect counter are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub control board 90 side can hold the information of the number of holding balls. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special view hold effect counter, the second special view hold effect counter, and the general drawing hold effect counter, Update 9B. On the other hand, when the holding ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned holding display process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the change start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it is received (step S4455: YES), the fluctuation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The "variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during special symbol variation. Details of the change production start process will be described later. On the other hand, when not received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned change production start process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the change stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it is received (step S4465: YES), the fluctuation effect end process is performed (step S4470). "Variation production end processing" is processing for stopping the fluctuation production performed during special symbol variation. In the fluctuation effect end process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter and the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation effect end command for ending the fluctuation effect. As a result, the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 during the change is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs an advance determination information shift process (FIG. 39) described later. If the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect ending process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If it is received (step S4475: YES), an opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The “opening effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of the special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets in the sub RAM 94 information related to the special figure stop symbol data set at the big hit winning determination included in the opening command. Then, an effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special view stop symbol data is selected, and an opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is displayed in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94 Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94 b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 ROMs a predetermined opening effect image. , And displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. When the opening command is not received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If it is received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The “round effect pattern determination process” is a process for selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the special winning opening or in the interval between open in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designating command, and sets information relating to the special figure stop symbol data included in the round designating command and information relating to the number of rounds in the sub RAM 94 Do. Then, a special effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is produced by the sub RAM 94 It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and causes the display screen 7a to display the same. When the round designation command is not received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-described round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If it is received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). The “ending effect pattern determination process” is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of the special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets information on special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the type of hit indicated by the special view stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and causes the display screen 7a to display the same. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives a game state designating command, information relating to the game state included in the game state designating command (high probability state or not, time change state or not, definite variation The sub RAM 94 holds the counter, the value of the time reduction counter, and the like. Further, when the V control command is received, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the sub RAM 94 to hold the V-passed information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (wait for customer wait command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Pre-reading effect determination processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of pre-reading effect determination processing (FIG. 37: step S4420). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs predetermination information rewriting processing (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 is included in the advance determination command received from the main control board 80, the jackpot advance determination result (jackpot determination information), the jackpot type advance determination result (jackpot type information), The pattern predetermination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the predetermination information storage area 94c.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram for describing the configuration of the prior determination information storage area 94c. In addition to the above-described jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information, the advance determination information storage area 94c stores prefetch presentation effect pattern information. Pre-reading effect pattern information is information which shows the contents of pre-reading effect which is executed during fluctuation production, is selected in step S4604 which it mentions later. FIG. 39 (A) shows the jackpot determination information "losing" and fluctuation pattern information "P72" and "P73" as the first to third special determination results respectively corresponding to the first to third special drawing 2 reservations. It is stored in the storage area, and a state in which the prior determination result corresponding to the change is stored in the area is shown. In FIG. 39 (B), there is a prize in the special figure 2 from the state of FIG. 39 (A), and the preliminary determination information included in the preliminary determination command received from the main control board 80 is the fourth in the special figure 2 reserve. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the prior determination information, the big hit determination information “big hit”, the big hit type information “21H”, and the fluctuation pattern information “P61” are stored. In addition, together with the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth special drawing 2 suspension and the corresponding area corresponding to the fluctuation, “pattern A "Is set. FIG. 39C shows a state in which the predetermination information shift process is performed after the change ends from the state of FIG. 39B. Specifically, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the area, and the prior determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, 4 The prior determination information of the storage area is cleared. The prior determination information shift process is executed in the fluctuation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

  Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the prior determination information storage area 94 c and the first to fourth storage areas. If pre-reading effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this processing ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the prior determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, pre-reading effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not "reach with loss" (step S4603). Whether the "big hit" or the "reach with loss" can be determined, for example, by the change pattern prior determination result (change pattern information). If the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is “loss without reach” (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends the present process. This is because there is no need to perform pre-reading effects. On the other hand, when the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "big hit" or "reach with loss" (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution determination to determine whether to perform pre-reading effect, And, pre-reading effect pattern selection is done (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the prefetch effect random number, and refers to the acquired random value and the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the prefetch effect Whether or not to perform, and a pre-reading effect pattern when performing pre-reading effect is decided.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the preliminary determination result is "big hit" and the pre-reading effect random number value is "0 to 55", the pre-reading effect is "none", and the pre-reading effect random number value is "56 to 67" as a pre-reading effect When “pattern A” is selected and the pre-reading effect random number value is “68 to 127”, “pattern B” is selected as pre-reading effect. In addition, when the pre-determination result is “reach with loss” and the pre-reading effect random number value is “0 to 107”, the pre-reading effect is “none”, and the pre-reading effect random number value is “108 to 114” as the pre-reading effect When “pattern A” is selected and the pre-reading effect random number value is “115 to 127”, “pattern B” is selected as pre-reading effect. The type and content of the pre-reading effect pattern, and the range of the random value to be selected can be set arbitrarily.

  Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-reading effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the prior determination information storage area 94c, among the first to fourth storage areas, not only the storage area corresponding to the received prior determination command but also the storage before the corresponding storage area. The preread effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only “pattern A” is set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received prior determination command, but also the first to third storage areas, and the area concerned Also set "pattern A". Thus, the prefetching effect pattern A is executed also in the fluctuation effect (variation effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas) executed before the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed. . In addition, it is based on the progress condition of the said fluctuation production whether the prefetch effect is performed by the fluctuation production corresponding to the said area | region. That is, if the timing to execute the pre-reading effect has already passed in the variation effect, the pre-reading effect is not executed, but if it is before the timing to execute the pre-reading effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-reading effect is not performed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Change production start process]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the fluctuation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets information on the special view stop symbol data included in the change start command and information on the change pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes gaming state information indicating the current gaming state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination processing of the special view 1 or the special view 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 as appropriate.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs key effect pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is based on the basic configuration of the change effect (for example, the display and switching of the background image on the image display device 7, the display and operation of a predetermined character, and the output of melody and sound effect using the speaker 67 , And lighting control of lamps, etc.). The fluctuation effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as chance-up effect and pre-reading effect on this basic effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the main effect pattern with reference to the main effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining a base effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of backbone rendering patterns for performing normal reach rendering, a plurality of types of backbone rendering patterns for performing SP1 rendering, a plurality of types of backbone rendering patterns for performing SP2 rendering, and a plurality of types of backbone rendering patterns for performing SP3 rendering A plurality of basic effect patterns are set to perform a no reach non-stop effect. The type of the core rendering pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1”, a key effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P72”, a base effect pattern for performing a no reach loss effect is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the main effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the fluctuation effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the chance-up random number counter, and determines the chance-up effect pattern with reference to the acquired random value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only a portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 for determining the change effect pattern of the special view 1 in the non-time-short state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1” to “P16”. In addition, the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 is a portion that determines the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the variation pattern is “P21” to “P33” “P41” to “P56” “61” to “73”. It may or may not be provided.

  In FIG. 43, as the chance-up effect pattern, “2-NO”, “2-SP1”, “2-SP2”, “2-SP3”, “3-NO”, “3-SP1”, “3-SP2”, “3-SP3” “ “4-NO”, “4-SP1”, “4-SP2”, “4-SP3” and “ANO” are set. These chance presentation patterns correspond to the various chance-up presentation described later.

  Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and combines the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R etc. You may decide By these, it is determined what kind of effect to be performed as the fluctuation effect.

  The effect control microcomputer 91 sets a change effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that a change effect based on the change effect pattern determined in the above steps S5010 to S5015 is realized ( Step S5020). When the fluctuation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 changes the fluctuation effect image. It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a variation effect timer (step S5030), and ends the present process. A fluctuation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is set in the fluctuation production timer. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set to the fluctuation effect timer.

[Processing during variation production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the process (FIG. 36: step S 4305) in the time of the variable effect production. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a change effect is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the variation effect is being performed can be determined, for example, based on whether or not the variation effect timer is zero. If the variable performance is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the variable effect is being performed (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether it is the timing to set the command before the end of the change in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command to notify the image control board 100 or the like that the effect control microcomputer 91 has a specific timing during the variable stage effect, and the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command. Switching of the effect contents, display of a specific image, and the like are performed according to the information included in the command before the end of fluctuation.

  If it is not the timing to set the command before the end of change (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is time to set a command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: YES), it is judged whether or not there is prefetch presentation effect pattern information in the area of the prior judgment information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation end command including pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation end command not including pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the sub command generation area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). Thereby, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command including pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the changing effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 causes the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 to start the pre-reading effect for displaying the pre-reading effect image. On the other hand, even when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a command before the end of change is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the change. Here, when the preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade effect in which the preview image is faded.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIG. A buffer or the like appearing in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 is provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after CPU initialization processing, display control processing is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a fluctuation presentation start command has been received from the sub control board 90 (step S5001). If it is received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the fluctuation effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received change effect start command, reads a predetermined change effect image instructed in the change effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Display. On the other hand, when not having received (step S5001: NO), the above-mentioned processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a command before the end of fluctuation is received from the sub control substrate 90 (step S5003). If it is received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the pre-reading effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes a command before the end of change, and when the command before the end of change includes pre-reading effect pattern information, reads out a predetermined pre-reading effect image from the ROM 103, and displays the image display device 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition, even if the pre-reading effect pattern information is not included in the command before the end of the fluctuation, if the preliminary image is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, the preliminary fading effect is to fade the preliminary image. Do. On the other hand, when not having received (step S5003: NO), the above-mentioned processing is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a fluctuation rendering end command has been received from the sub control board 90 (step S5005). If it is received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out from the ROM 103 the image on which the change effect is displayed in a stopped state, and displays the changed effect stop display on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if not received (step S5005: NO), the above process is skipped.

  Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In the other processes, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, it reads out from the ROM 103 a predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command, and displays the display screen of the image display device 7 Display on 7a. Further, when the round effect start command is received, the predetermined round effect image instructed in the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Also, when the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image instructed in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and the present process is ended.

9. Operation of the Plate Movable Body (First Movable Character 14 and Second Movable Character 15) With reference to FIGS. 46 to 47, the motion of the plate Movable body (first movable character 14 and second movable character 15) explain. FIG. 46 is an explanatory view exemplifying a second aspect of the first movable part 14. FIG. 47 is an explanatory view illustrating the second mode of the second movable part 15. As shown in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable object 14 and the second movable object 15 in an initial operation or the like during game effect (display effect) or power on.

  The first movable part 14 is configured such that the plate-like member can move up and down, and can stand still at the retracted position (home position) shown in FIG. 1 (first aspect). At this time, the first movable role item 14 is visible to the player. The first movable part 14 can move to the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 46 by moving (advance) upward from the state of FIG. 1 and can stand there (No. 2 modes). In the second aspect, a part of the image display device 7 is covered. Further, the first movable part 14 can be moved to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (retracting) downward from the state of FIG. 46, and can stand there. The first movable part 14 is configured to increase the area covering the display screen 7 a when transitioning from the first aspect to the second aspect.

  The second movable character 15 includes a rotating body on which a face is drawn. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable part 15 can stand still at a retracted position (home position) where the rotating body is stored in the center decoration 10 (first aspect). At this time, a part of the lower side of the rotating body is in a visible state. In the second movable part 15, the rotating body advances downward from the state shown in FIG. 1, and in the front of the display screen 7a, a rotation effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 47 (second aspect).

10. An example of effects according to the present embodiment, an example of effects, a modification, and an example of an example of each effect according to the present embodiment (an example of a display effect, an example of a movable object effect). Moreover, the effect example with respect to the presentation example, a modification, and an aspect example are also match | combined and demonstrated. As described above, the effects to be described below are based on various information (such as jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, fluctuation pattern information, and prior determination information) transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 81, the microcomputer 91 (for presentation control) This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is performed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Moreover, although there may be a case where the hold display (hold icon) is omitted in the display effect example, it is actually displayed unless otherwise noted.

  The decorative symbol variation effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 48 to 51. The decorative symbol variation presentation can be performed, for example, during the variation presentation of the decorative symbol. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction to execute the decoration symbol fluctuation effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read out from the ROM 103 This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Decorative design variation effect A]
FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect A. In the decorative symbol variation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 48A, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the positions of these display screens 7a in the vertical direction may be the same or different. In the stop display of FIG. 48 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C have the same position in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R has the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C. Is also located at the top. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may be stopped and displayed in the same vertical position. The hold icons 9A are displayed side by side along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

  At the start of the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display), first, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L moves upward. Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (C), the inside decoration pattern 8C moves upward. The upward moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L which has been moved upward decreases as if gravity is acting downward, and is folded over the display screen 7a to start moving downward. Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (D), the right decorative symbol 8R moves upward. The upward moving speed of the inside decorative symbol 8C which has been moved upward decreases as if gravity is acting downward, and is folded over the display screen 7a to start moving downward. The downward moving speed of the left decorative symbol 8L which has been moved downward increases. Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (E), the moving speed in the upward direction of the right decorative symbol 8R which has been moved upward decreases as if gravity is acting in the downward direction, and the display screen 7a is Turn over at the top and start moving downward. As for the inside decorative design 8C which has been moved downward, the moving speed downward is increased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (F) and FIG. 48 (G), in the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the moving speed in the downward direction increases in order, and in order It becomes an aspect in which numbers can not be viewed. FIG. 48 (G) shows a mode in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed at high speed (constant speed). The moving direction of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during movement is the same as the direction in which the holding icon 9A is arranged.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48H, the left decorative symbol 8L variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (I), the middle decorative symbol 8C variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (J), the right decorative symbol 8R variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a, and all the variable symbols of the decorative symbol are in a state of being difficult to visually recognize.

[Decorative design variation effect B]
FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect B. First, as shown in FIG. 49A, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. The stop display mode is the same as that of FIG. 48 (A) of the decorative symbol variation effect A. Next, the decorative symbol variation effect of FIG. 49 (B) is executed. The decorative symbol variation effect is the same as that of FIG. 48 (G) of the decorative symbol variation effect A. That is, between the stop display of FIG. 49 (A) and the variable display of FIG. 49 (B), FIGS. 48 (A) to (G) of the decorative symbol fluctuation effect A may be executed. Next, the decorative symbol disappearing effect of FIG. 49 (C) is executed. The decorative symbol disappearance effect is the same as that of FIG. 48 (J) of the decorative symbol variation effect A. That is, FIGS. 48 (G) to (J) of the decorative symbol fluctuation effect A may be executed between the variable display of FIG. 49 (B) and the decorative symbol disappearance effect of FIG. 49 (C).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 49 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R which are variably displayed are displayed. In the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, the moving speed in the downward direction decreases, and as shown in FIG. 49 (E), numbers become gradually visible. Next, as shown to 49 (F), the right-and-left symbol reverse direction movement production is performed. Specifically, with the left decorative symbol 8L continuing to move downward, the right decorative symbol 8R starts moving upward (in the reverse direction). Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R may have different positions in the vertical direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 49H, a middle decorative symbol 8C variably displayed is displayed between the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R being stopped and displayed. In the inside decorative symbol 8C, the moving speed in the downward direction decreases, and as shown in FIG. 49 (I), numbers become gradually visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (J), all symbols are stopped and displayed.

[Decorative design variation production C]
FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect C. First, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), a decorative symbol change effect is executed. The decorative symbol variation effect is the same as that of FIG. 48 (G) of the decorative symbol variation effect A. That is, before the change display of FIG. 50 (A), FIGS. 48 (A) to (G) of the decorative symbol change effect A may be executed. Next, the decorative symbol disappearing effect of FIG. 50 (B) is executed. The decorative symbol disappearance effect is the same as that of FIG. 48 (J) of the decorative symbol variation effect A. That is, FIGS. 48 (G) to (J) of the decorative symbol fluctuation effect A may be executed between the variable display of FIG. 50 (A) and the decorative symbol disappearance effect of FIG. 50 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (C), the left decorative symbol appearance effect is executed. Specifically, as the left decorative symbol 8L decreases in moving speed, it becomes gradually visible that it moves from the upper side to the lower side on the curved track curved in the left direction. More specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L appears from the upper left of the display screen 7a, and draws an arc toward the center, and draws an arc toward the lower left of the display screen 7a. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L moves along a curved trajectory to draw an arc. At this time, the image of the left decorative symbol 8L becomes gradually larger as it is moved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (D), the right decorative symbol appearance effect is executed. Specifically, as the moving speed decreases, the right decorative symbol 8R becomes gradually visible as it moves from the upper side to the lower side on the curved track bent to the right. More specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R appears from the upper right of the display screen 7a, goes toward the center while drawing an arc, and goes toward the lower right of the display screen 7a while drawing an arc. That is, the right decorative pattern 8R moves along a curved track to draw an arc. At this time, the image of the right decorative symbol 8R becomes gradually larger as it moves.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (E), the middle decorative symbol appearance effect is executed. Specifically, in a state where the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at a reach, the middle decorative symbol 8C moves downward from above on a linear trajectory while the moving speed decreases. Gradually become visible. At this time, the image of the inside decoration pattern 8C becomes gradually larger as it moves. After that, as shown in FIG. 50 (F), the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize again. Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R become a display in which the three-dimensional figures are horizontally rotated. Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (H), special reach effect is executed. As the contents of the special reach effect, any effect can be performed. Here, as an example thereof, a battle effect in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight is performed. When defeated in the battle effect, as shown in FIG. 50 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a state in which the three-dimensional figures are horizontally rotated, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is the left decorative symbol 8L And a number different from the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed.

[Decorative design variation production D]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol variation effect D. The decorative symbol variation effect D differs from the decorative symbol variation effect A of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 51A, the upper decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L are stopped and displayed. When the upper decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L are stopped and displayed, the positions of these display screens 7a in the left-right direction may be the same or different. In the stop display of FIG. 51 (A), the upper decoration pattern 8R and the middle decoration pattern 8C have the same position in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a, and the lower decoration pattern 8L has the upper decoration pattern 8R and the middle decoration pattern 8C. It is located more to the left. The upper decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L may be stopped and displayed in the same position in the left-right direction. The hold icons 9A are displayed side by side along the left-right direction below the display screen 7a.

  At the start of the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display), first, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), the upper decorative symbol 8R moves in the right direction. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (C), the middle decoration pattern 8C moves in the right direction. The moving speed to the right decreases as if the upper decorative symbol 8R that has been moved to the right is drawn to the left, and is folded at the right side of the display screen 7a to start moving to the left. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (D), the lower decorative symbol 8L moves in the right direction. The moving speed in the right direction decreases as if the inner decorative symbol 8C moving in the right direction is drawn in the left direction, and is folded at the right side of the display screen 7a to start moving in the left direction. In the upper decorative symbol 8R which has been moved to the left, the moving speed to the left is increased. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (E), the lower decorative symbol 8L that has been moved to the right decreases in moving speed to the right as if drawn to the left, and the lower right of the display screen 7a Move back and start moving to the left. The moving speed in the left direction of the inside decorative symbol 8C moving in the left direction is increased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (F) and FIG. 51 (G), the upper decoration pattern 8R, the middle decoration pattern 8C, and the lower decoration pattern 8L are sequentially increased in moving speed in the left direction. It becomes an aspect in which numbers can not be viewed. FIG. 51 (G) shows an aspect in which the upper decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the lower decorative symbol 8L are variably displayed at high speed (constant speed). The moving direction of the upper decoration pattern 8R, the middle decoration pattern 8C, and the lower decoration pattern 8L when moving is the same as the direction in which the storage icon 9A is arranged.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 51H, the upper decorative symbol 8R variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the lower decorative symbol 8L are variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (I), the middle decorative symbol 8C variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a, and the lower decorative symbol 8L is variably displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 51 (J), the lower decorative pattern 8L variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a, and all the variable display of the decorative symbol is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of a decorative symbol change production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, a first effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a (FIG. (A) and after the first effect, the second effect (FIG. 48 (G)) in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. Third effect (FIG. 48 (H)) in which the left decorative symbol 8L variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a and the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. After the third effect, the fourth effect (FIG. 48 (I)) in which the inside decorative symbol 8C variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a and the right decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed it can. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48 (B) to (F), the variable display in the second effect includes the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Each moves along the vertical direction, and at the start of the variable display, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R sequentially move upward, and then sequentially move downward. Do. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48A, in the stop display in the first effect, one of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The decorative pattern is different in position in the vertical direction from the positions of the other two decorative patterns. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, in the second effect, a plurality of reserved icons are arranged along the vertical direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48 (I) and (J), after the fourth effect, the fifth effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a, As shown in FIGS. 49C and 49D, after the fifth effect, the sixth effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed again is shown in FIG. 49F. Thus, after the sixth effect, with the left decorative symbol 8L moving downward, it is possible to execute the seventh effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R moves upward. ing. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49H, after the seventh effect, in the state in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the middle decorative symbol 8C is again displayed. It is possible to execute an eighth effect in which is displayed in a variable manner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48 (I), (J), and 50 (B), the right decorative symbol 8R variably displayed disappears from the display screen 7a after the fourth effect. As shown in FIG. 50C, a fifth effect and a sixth effect in which a left decorative symbol 8L moving along a curved track so as to draw an arc after the fifth effect is displayed, As shown in FIG. 50 (D), after the sixth effect, the seventh effect in which the right decorative symbol 8R moving along a curved track so as to draw an arc is displayed, and FIG. 50 (E) As shown, after the seventh effect, it is possible to execute an eighth effect in which a middle decorative symbol 8C moving in the vertical direction is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, in the sixth effect, the image of the left decorative symbol 8L becomes larger as it moves, and in the seventh effect, the right decorative symbol 8R becomes moving. In the seventh effect, the image of the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes larger as it moves. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a decorative symbol fluctuation production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 48B to 48D, the timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start moving upward can be set arbitrarily. The interval at which each starts movement may be, for example, an interval of 1 second or an interval of 0.01 second. The same applies to FIGS. 51 (B) to 51 (D).

[Modification 2]
In (H) to (J) of FIG. 48, the timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are variably displayed, disappear from the display screen 7a can be set arbitrarily. The interval at which each disappears may be, for example, an interval of 1 second or an interval of 0.01 second. The same applies to FIG. 51 (H) to FIG. 51 (J).

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative pattern,
A first effect in which the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are stopped and displayed on the display means;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol are variably displayed.
After the second effect, a third effect in which the first decorative symbol variably displayed disappears from the display means, and the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are variably displayed;
After the third effect, it is possible to execute a fourth effect in which the second decorative symbol variably displayed disappears from the display means and the third decorative symbol is variably displayed. A gaming machine to be.
[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
The variable display in the second effect is that the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol move along a first direction, respectively. At the start of the variable display, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol sequentially move toward one side of the first direction, and then the first A game machine characterized by moving toward the other side of the direction.
[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2,
In the stop display in the first effect, one of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol is a position in the first direction. Is different from the position of the other two decorative symbols.
[Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-2 or aspect A1-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
In the second effect, a plurality of the hold icons are arranged along the first direction.
[Aspect A1-5]
A game machine according to any one of modes A1-2 to A1-4, wherein
After the fourth effect, a fifth effect in which the third decorative symbol variably displayed disappears from the display means,
After the fifth effect, the sixth effect in which the first decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are variably displayed again,
After the sixth effect, the third decorative symbol is the one side in the first direction, with the first decorative symbol moving toward the other side in the first direction. A game machine characterized by being capable of performing a seventh effect of moving toward.
態 様 [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-5,
After the seventh effect, it is possible to execute an eighth effect in which the second decorative symbol is variably displayed again in a state where the first decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. A game machine characterized by
態 様 [Aspect A1-7]
A game machine according to any one of modes A1-2 to A1-4, wherein
After the fourth effect, a fifth effect in which the third decorative symbol variably displayed disappears from the display means,
After the fifth effect, a sixth effect in which the first decorative symbol moving along a curved track to draw an arc is displayed;
After the sixth effect, a seventh effect in which the third decorative symbol moving along a curved track to draw an arc is displayed;
It is possible to execute an eighth effect in which the second decorative symbol moving along the first direction is displayed after the seventh effect.
[Aspect A1-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-7,
In the sixth effect, the image of the first decorative pattern becomes larger as it moves.
In the seventh effect, the image of the third decorative pattern becomes larger as it moves.
In the seventh effect, a game is characterized in that the image becomes larger as the second decorative symbol moves.

  The decorative symbol target effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. The decorative symbol target effect may be executed during a change effect of the decorative symbol, during a jackpot game, or the like. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction to execute the decoration symbol target effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read out from the ROM 103 This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Adorning design target production A]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol target effect A.
In the decorative symbol target effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), a target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 is set (displayed) in the area where the decorative symbol 8L has been changed. The target area A21 is associated with the decorative symbol 8L and represents a state where the display screen 7a is broken, and becomes a target when stopping the decorative symbol as described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L is set on the reach line LAA. In addition, the decorative symbol 8L is variably displayed in the target area A21. As a result, it appears to the player that the decorative symbol 8L is variably displayed on the other side of the target area A21 on the display screen 7a. The other decorative symbols 8C and 8R are variably displayed in the same manner as the variation start effect. In the following, in the decorative symbol target effect A, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined decorative symbol stops in the target area A21 is also referred to as target effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (C), the decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the target area A21, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LAA with the “6” symbol, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed on the reach line LAB with the “7” symbol. In the target area A21, since the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (D), chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a chance-up image A22 including an ally character CRA and a character representing "super heat" is displayed, and a state in which the ally character CRA shouts "high heat" is displayed. The "super heat" represented by the chance-up image A22 indicates that the jackpot expectation is very high.
In addition, it may be made to perform other production instead of this chance up production. For example, a timer display effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a prefetch effect, a feature moving effect, or the like may be performed. In addition, the pseudo-series effect is an effect executed at the start of change deformation or during reach effect, etc. For example, an effect which repeats the effect of starting the fluctuation of the decorative symbol and temporarily stopping it, a predetermined symbol array of the decorative symbol Along with an effect that repeats at least a part of temporary stop, a effect that repeats a temporary stop of a predetermined logo, or a display that reminds of a pseudo sequence such as “x 2”, “x 3”, “pseudo” It includes an effect of executing a change effect of a decorative symbol. The same is true for the pseudo series effect shown below.

  In addition, in FIG. 52 (C), there is a case (for example, a case where a blank symbol is stopped and displayed) when the decoration symbol is not stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decoration symbol 8L. In this case, the target effect is a failure, and the chance-up effect of FIG. 52 (D) is not performed.

[Decoration target target production B]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol target effect A.
In the decorative symbol target effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), a target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, a target area A21 is set (displayed) on each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. That is, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative symbol 8L has been changed, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative symbol 8C has been changed, and the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative symbol 8R has changed. It is set. The target area A21 is associated with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, respectively, and represents a state in which the display screen 7a is broken, and becomes a target when stopping the decorative symbol as described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L is set on the reach line LAA, and the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbols 8C and 8R is set on the LBB. Further, each decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R is variably displayed in the corresponding target area A21. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is variably displayed in the target area A21, the decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed in the target area A21, and the decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed in the target area A21. As a result, it appears to the player that each decorative symbol is variably displayed on the other side of the target area A21 on the display screen 7a. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol target effect B, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined decorative symbol is stopped in the target area A21 is also referred to as a target effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (C), the decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the target area A21. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed. Is displayed stopped in the target area A21 corresponding to. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped on the reach line LAA with the "6" symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped on the reach line LAB with the "6" symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is on the reach line LAB. Is stopped and displayed with "7" symbol. In each target area A21, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, whereby the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (D), chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a chance-up image A22 including an ally character CRA and a character representing "super heat" is displayed, and a state in which the ally character CRA shouts "high heat" is displayed. The "super heat" represented by the chance-up image A22 indicates that the jackpot expectation is very high.
In addition, it may be made to perform other production instead of this chance up production. For example, a timer display effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a prefetch effect, a feature moving effect, or the like may be performed.

  In FIG. 53 (C), there is a case (for example, when a blank symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific target region A21) in each target region A21, there is a target region A21 in which the decoration symbol is not stopped and displayed. In this case, the target effect is a failure, and the chance-up effect of FIG. 53 (D) is not performed.

[Decoration target target production C]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol target effect C.
In the decorative symbol target effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), a target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, a target area A21 is set (displayed) on each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. That is, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative symbol 8L has been changed, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative symbol 8C has been changed, and the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative symbol 8R has changed. It is set. The target area A21 is associated with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, respectively, and represents a state in which the display screen 7a is broken, and becomes a target when stopping the decorative symbol as described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L is set on the reach line LAA, and the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbols 8C and 8R is set on the LBB. Further, each decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R is variably displayed in the corresponding target area A21. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is variably displayed in the target area A21, the decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed in the target area A21, and the decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed in the target area A21. As a result, it appears to the player that each decorative symbol is variably displayed on the other side of the target area A21 on the display screen 7a. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol target effect C, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined decorative symbol stops in the target area A21 is also referred to as a target effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (C), the decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the target area A21. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed. Is displayed stopped in the target area A21 corresponding to. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LAA with the “6” symbol, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed on the reach line LAB with the “6” symbol. In each target area A21, since the same decorative symbol (here, “6” symbol) is stopped and displayed, the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (D), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the teammate character CRA and the timer image A23 are displayed. The timer image A23 represents a predetermined timer value, and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 00:00), it indicates that an effect with a high degree of expectation is to be executed.
Note that instead of this timer display effect, other effects may be performed. For example, a chance-up display effect, a pseudo-sequence effect, a pre-reading effect, a feature moving effect or the like may be performed.

  In FIG. 54C, in each target area A21, there is a case where the same decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed (for example, a blank symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific target area A21). In this case, the target effect is a failure, and the timer display effect of FIG. 54 (D) is not performed.

[Decorative design target direction D]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol target effect D.
In the decorative symbol target effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), a target area display effect is executed. In this target area display effect, a target area A21 is set (displayed) on each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. That is, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative symbol 8L has been changed, the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative symbol 8C has been changed, and the target area A21 is set in the area where the decorative symbol 8R has changed. It is set. The target area A21 is associated with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, respectively, and represents a state in which the display screen 7a is broken, and becomes a target when stopping the decorative symbol as described later. In this target area display effect, the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L is set on the reach line LAA, and the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbols 8C and 8R is set on the LBB. Further, each decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R is variably displayed in the corresponding target area A21. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is variably displayed in the target area A21, the decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed in the target area A21, and the decorative symbol 8R is variably displayed in the target area A21. As a result, it appears to the player that each decorative symbol is variably displayed on the other side of the target area A21 on the display screen 7a. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol target effect D, an effect indicating whether or not a predetermined decorative symbol stops in the target area A21 is also referred to as a target effect.

  Further, in this target area display effect, a target symbol suggestive image A25 and a button image A24 are displayed. The button image A24 is an image for prompting the player to press the effect button 63. The target symbol suggesting image A25 suggests a specific decorative symbol to be displayed stopped on the target area A21 in the target effect. Here, the target symbol suggesting image A25 suggests that the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the target area A21 in the target effect is the “6” symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (C), the decorative symbol stop effect (button depression effect) is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, when the player presses the effect button 63, each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8L, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the target area A21 corresponding to the decorative symbol 8C, and the decorative symbol 8R is displayed. Is displayed stopped in the target area A21 corresponding to. In this case, the decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed on the reach line LAA with the “6” symbol, and the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are stopped and displayed on the reach line LAB with the “6” symbol. In each target area A21, the decorative symbol (here, the “6” symbol) suggested by the target symbol suggesting image A25 is stopped and displayed, whereby the target effect is successful.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (D), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, the teammate character CRA and the timer image A23 are displayed. The timer image A23 represents a predetermined timer value, and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 00:00), it indicates that an effect with a high degree of expectation is to be executed.
Note that instead of this timer display effect, other effects may be performed. For example, a chance-up display effect, a pseudo-sequence effect, a pre-reading effect, a feature moving effect or the like may be performed.

  In addition, in FIG. 55 (C), in each target area A21, when the decorative symbol suggested by the target symbol suggestive image A25 is not stopped and displayed (for example, when the blank symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific target area A21) (In the case where a decoration pattern other than the decoration pattern suggested by the target pattern suggestion image A25 is stopped and displayed) in the target area A21). In this case, the target effect is a failure, and the timer display effect of FIG. 55 (D) is not performed.

  The decorative symbol target effects A to D are executed before the reach condition is formed by the decorative symbols and the reach effect is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbol target effects A to D may be performed during reach effect.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of a decoration design target production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the target area A21 is displayed when the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed in the decoration symbol target effect, based on the fact that the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed in the target area A21. , The chance up effect and the timer display effect are done. According to this configuration, whether or not the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is performed is determined based on whether or not the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the target area A21 when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The player can be made to pay attention to the stop display of the decorative symbol, and the interest at the time of stop display of the decorative symbol can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol target effect, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, the target area A21 is set corresponding to each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. According to this configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the stop display of each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the interest at the time of the stop display of the decorative symbols can be further improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol target effect, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 55, a chance is based on the fact that one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in each target area A21 in the target area display effect. Up effects and timer display effects are being performed. According to this configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the stop display of each one of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the interest at the time of the stop display of the decorative symbols is further improved. it can. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the decorative symbol target effect is performed from the start of variation of the decorative symbol to the start of the reach effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop display of the decorative symbol even before the reach effect, and it is possible to further improve the interest at the time of the stop display of the decorative symbol. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol target effect, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, based on the stop display of the specific decorative symbol (the decorative symbol "6" in the above) in the target area A21, A predetermined effect (timer display effect) is performed. According to this configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the stop display of the specific decorative symbol, and the interest at the time of the stop display of the decorative symbol can be further improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a decorative symbol target production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol target effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed in the target area A21 instead of one in the target area A21.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol target effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, not the decorative symbol but another object such as a character or a character may be stopped and displayed on the target area A21.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol target effects B to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the target area A21 may be set to the same reach line, or may be set to different reach lines. For example, the target area A21 may be set to the reach line LAA, the reach line LAB, and the reach line LAC, respectively.

[Modification 4]
When setting the target area A21 in the decorative symbol target effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of target areas A21 are set instead of one target area A21 for each decorative pattern 8L, 8C, 8R. You may do it.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, another display device (also referred to as another display device) may be provided in front of the display device 7. Then, in the decorative symbol target effect, the target area A21 may be set in another display device, and the display 7 may display the fluctuation and the stop of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, the target area A21 may be set in the display device 7, and the variation and stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be performed by another display device.

[Modification 6]
In the decorative symbol target effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the target area A21 is set and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the target area A21 is moved so that the specific decorative pattern is included in the target area A21. May be

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of changing the decorative symbol,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a target area for stopping the decorative symbol on the display means,
The third display effect is an effect for performing a predetermined effect,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and the target region is displayed in the second display effect. The third display effect is performed based on the stop display of the decorative symbol.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-1,
The decoration pattern has a plurality of decoration pattern groups,
The target area has a plurality of target areas,
The first display effect is an effect of performing each variation of the plurality of decorative symbol groups,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the plurality of target areas on the display means,
In the second display effect, the plurality of target areas are displayed by the same number as the number of the plurality of decorative symbol groups, and one decorative symbol group is associated with one target area.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-2,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed based on the stop display of one decorative symbol in each of the plurality of target areas in the second display effect.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect A2-4]
A game machine according to any one of modes A2-1 to A2-3, wherein
The combination effect is performed from the start of change of the decorative symbol to the start of reach effect,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect A2-5]
A game machine according to any one of modes A2-1 to A2-4, wherein
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and the target region is displayed in the second display effect. The third display effect is performed on the basis of the stop display of the specific decorative symbol.
A game machine characterized by

  The decorative symbol superposition effect at the time of reach will be described below with reference to FIGS. The reach-time decorative symbol superposition effect can be performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol (during reach effect) or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol overlapping effect at reach time, the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 Is an effect to display an image on the display screen 7a.

[At the time of reach decorative symbol superposition effect A]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol overlapping effect A at the time of reaching.
In reach-time decorative symbol superposition effect A, first, reach effect 1 is executed as shown in FIG. 56 (A). In the reach effect 1, a reach state is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be displayed in a stopped state on the reach line LX1 and displaying the decorative symbol 8C at high speed. In FIG. 56 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the “7” symbol, and the reach state is formed using the “7” symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C changes at a low speed, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative patterns 8L and 8R forming the reach state. Also, the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed between the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R. In FIG. 56 (B), the “7” symbol is displayed as the two decorative symbols 8C. Hereinafter, in the two decorative symbols 8C, one decorative symbol 8C is also referred to as a first decorative symbol 8C, and the other decorative symbol 8C is also referred to as a second decorative symbol 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (C), reach effect 3 is executed. In the reach effect 3, an effect in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach is performed. Specifically, as the first decorative symbol 8C approaches the second decorative symbol 8C, the second decorative symbol 8C approaches the first decorative symbol 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol 8C may be stopped, and the second decorative symbol 8C may be moved so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a higher speed than the other. In addition, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves toward the first decorative symbol 8C, and then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol is moved. The symbol 8C may be moved so as to approach the direction of the second decorative symbol 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (D), reach effect 4 is performed. In this reach effect 4, the two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined) and the effect to be one decorative symbol 8C is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R ("7" symbols are executed on the reach line LX1 The jackpot symbol arrangement using) is displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C after being superimposed has a lower degree of transparency than the two decorative patterns 8C before being superimposed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (E), a jackpot symbol display effect is executed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, a jackpot symbol array using the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R ("7" symbol) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after the jackpot symbol display effect is executed, the second movable role object 15 is moved and moved to the deployed position, and an effect of emphasizing the jackpot is performed.

[At the time of reach decorative symbol superposition effect B]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol overlapping effect B at the time of reach.
At the time of reach, in the decorative symbol superposition effect B, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), reach effect 1 is executed. In this reach effect 1, the W reach state (double reach state) is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be stopped on the reach line LX1 and reach line LX3 and displaying the decorative symbol 8C at high speed . In FIG. 57A, on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "7" symbol, and the reach condition is formed using the "7" symbol. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "6" symbol, and the reach state is formed using the "6" symbol. That is, the W reach state of "6" symbol and "7" symbol is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C changes at a low speed, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative patterns 8L and 8R forming the reach state. Also, the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed between the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R. In FIG. 57 (B), the "6" symbol is displayed as the two decorative symbols 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), reach effect 3 is executed. In the reach effect 3, an effect in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach is performed. Specifically, as the first decorative symbol 8C approaches the second decorative symbol 8C, the second decorative symbol 8C approaches the first decorative symbol 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol 8C may be stopped, and the second decorative symbol 8C may be moved so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a higher speed than the other. In addition, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves toward the first decorative symbol 8C, and then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol is moved. The symbol 8C may be moved so as to approach the direction of the second decorative symbol 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 57D, reach effect 4 is performed. In this reach effect 4, the two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined) and the effect of becoming one decorative symbol 8C is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R ("6" symbols on the reach line LX3 The jackpot symbol arrangement using) is displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C after being superimposed has a lower degree of transparency than the two decorative patterns 8C before being superimposed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), a jackpot symbol display effect is executed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, a jackpot symbol array using the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R ("6" symbol) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after the jackpot symbol display effect is executed, the second movable role object 15 is moved and moved to the deployed position, and an effect of emphasizing the jackpot is performed.

[At the time of reach decorative symbol superposition production C]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol overlapping effect C at the time of reaching.
In reach-time decorative symbol superposition effect C, first, reach effect 1 is executed as shown in FIG. 58 (A). In this reach effect 1, the W reach state (double reach state) is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be stopped on the reach line LX1 and reach line LX3 and displaying the decorative symbol 8C at high speed . In FIG. 58A, on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "7" symbol, and the reach condition is formed using the "7" symbol. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "6" symbol, and the reach state is formed using the "6" symbol. That is, the W reach state of "6" symbol and "7" symbol is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C changes at a low speed, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative patterns 8L and 8R forming the reach state. Also, the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed between the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R. In FIG. 58 (B), the "6" symbol is displayed as the two decorative symbols 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58C, reach effect 3 is performed. In the reach effect 3, an effect in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach is performed. Specifically, as the first decorative symbol 8C approaches the second decorative symbol 8C, the second decorative symbol 8C approaches the first decorative symbol 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol 8C may be stopped, and the second decorative symbol 8C may be moved so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a higher speed than the other. In addition, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves toward the first decorative symbol 8C, and then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol is moved. The symbol 8C may be moved so as to approach the direction of the second decorative symbol 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58D, reach effect 4 is performed. In this reach effect 4, two decorative symbols 8C are united and the effect to be one decorative symbol 8C is executed. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C before combining is the "6" symbol, but the decorative symbol 8C after combining is the "8" symbol. The decorative pattern 8C after being combined is less transparent than the two decorative patterns 8C before being combined. Thereby, on the reach line LX3, a lost symbol arrangement using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58E, the reach effect 5 is performed. In the reach effect 5, the decorative symbol 8C is again subjected to the low speed fluctuation, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative patterns 8L and 8R forming the reach state. Also, the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed between the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R. In FIG. 58 (E), the "7" symbol is displayed as the two decorative symbols 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58F, reach effect 6 is performed. In the reach effect 3, an effect in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach is performed. Specifically, as the first decorative symbol 8C approaches the second decorative symbol 8C, the second decorative symbol 8C approaches the first decorative symbol 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol 8C may be stopped, and the second decorative symbol 8C may be moved so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a higher speed than the other. In addition, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves toward the first decorative symbol 8C, and then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol is moved. The symbol 8C may be moved so as to approach the direction of the second decorative symbol 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (G), reach effect 7 is executed. In this reach effect 7, two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined) and the effect of becoming one decorative symbol 8C is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R ("7" symbols are executed on the reach line LX3 The jackpot symbol arrangement using) is displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C after being superimposed has a lower degree of transparency than the two decorative patterns 8C before being superimposed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58H, a jackpot symbol display effect is executed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, a jackpot symbol array using the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R ("7" symbol) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after the jackpot symbol display effect is executed, the second movable role object 15 is moved and moved to the deployed position, and an effect of emphasizing the jackpot is performed.

[At the time of reach decorative symbol superposition effect D]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superposition effect D at the time of reaching.
In reach-time decorative symbol superposition effect D, first, reach effect 1 is executed as shown in FIG. 59 (A). In the reach effect 1, a reach state is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be displayed in a stopped state on the reach line LX1 and displaying the decorative symbol 8C at high speed. In FIG. 59 (A), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "7" symbol, and the reach state is formed using the "7" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C changes at a low speed, and the two decorative symbols 8C are displayed so as not to overlap on the line LX2. In this case, the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed with higher transparency than the decorative patterns 8L and 8R forming the reach state. Also, the two decorative patterns 8C are displayed between the decorative pattern 8L and the decorative pattern 8R. In FIG. 59 (B), the "7" symbol is displayed as the two decorative symbols 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), reach effect 3 is executed. In the reach effect 3, an effect in which the two decorative symbols 8C gradually approach is performed. Specifically, as the first decorative symbol 8C approaches the second decorative symbol 8C, the second decorative symbol 8C approaches the first decorative symbol 8C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol 8C may be stopped, and the second decorative symbol 8C may be moved so as to approach the first decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the decorative symbols 8C may move at the same speed as each other, or one may move at a higher speed than the other. In addition, the first decorative symbol 8C is stopped, the second decorative symbol 8C moves toward the first decorative symbol 8C, and then the second decorative symbol 8C is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol is moved. The symbol 8C may be moved so as to approach the direction of the second decorative symbol 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (D), reach effect 4 is executed. In this reach effect 4, the two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined) and the effect to be one decorative symbol 8C is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R ("7" symbols are executed on the reach line LX1 The jackpot symbol arrangement using) is displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C after being superimposed has a lower degree of transparency than the two decorative patterns 8C before being superimposed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), the jackpot symbol display effect 1 is executed. In this jackpot symbol display effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed as compared to the reach effect 4 o'clock. In this case, the decorative symbol 8C may be displayed large enough to overlap with the decorative symbols 8L and 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (F), the jackpot symbol display effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot symbol display effect 2, a jackpot symbol array using the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R ("7" symbol) is displayed on the line LX2.
Next, after the execution of the jackpot symbol display effect 2, the second movable role 15 is moved and moved to the deployed position, an effect to emphasize the jackpot is performed.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of a decoration pattern superposition production at the time of reach is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the reach-time decorative symbol superposition effect, in the reach effects 2 and 5, two decorative symbols 8C are arranged so as not to overlap on the line LX2, and in the reach effect 3 and 6, two The decorative symbol 8C is made to approach, and two reachable symbols 8C are superimposed (combined) by reach production 4 and 7, and the decorative symbol 8C with low permeability is generated, and the decorative symbol 8C and the decoration which forms a reach state A jackpot symbol array is formed using the symbols 8L and 8R. According to this configuration, since the two highly permeable decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined) to form a big hit symbol array, the player pays attention to the two decorative symbols 8C, and the superimposed We will expect (coalescence). As a result, the interest in the reach production can be greatly improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the two decorative symbols 8C to be superimposed in the reach effect and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state are the same symbol in the decorative symbol overlapping effect at the time of reaching. According to this configuration, the player can recognize that two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined) to be a big hit, and the superimposed effect of the two decorative symbols 8C is greatly enhanced, and the fun of the game is It can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative symbol 8C generated by overlapping the two decorative symbols 8C in the reach effect and the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state in the reaching decorative symbol superimposing effect Used to construct a jackpot symbol array. According to this configuration, if two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed (combined), the player will win a jackpot, so the superimposed effect of the two decorative symbols 8C will be greatly enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the decorative symbol overlapping effects B and C at reach, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed to form the W reach state, and two decorative symbols 8C are superimposed. Then, in reach decorative pattern superimposing effect B, a large hit symbol array is formed on reach line LX3 using overlapping decorative symbol 8C, and in reach decorative pattern superimposing effect C, using superimposed decorative pattern 8C Thus, the jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LX1. According to this configuration, if the superposition of the two decorative symbols 8C is successful in either of the two overlapping effects using the two decorative symbols 8C, it becomes a big hit, so for the player, a single reach state A greater sense of expectation can be given to the superimposed effect in the W reach state than at time. As a result, the superimposed effect of the two decorative symbols 8C is greatly enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the second movable prize 15 is moved and moved to the unfolded position after the big hit symbol display effect is executed in the reaching decorative symbol superimposing effect, and the effect of emphasizing the big hit is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize that the player has made a big hit by superimposing effect of two decorative symbols 8C in the reach state, and then, the player has two decorative symbols in the reach state. When experiencing the superimposed effect of 8C, a feeling of expectation can be given to the superimposed effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the decorative symbol superposition production at the time of reach is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the at-reach decorative symbol superposition effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a decorative effect 8C generated by superimposing two decorative symbols 8C in a reach effect and decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming a reach state are used. In order to form not a jackpot symbol arrangement but a chance eye symbol arrangement representing a chance eye, a pre-reading suggestion symbol arrangement that suggests pre-reading effect (pre-decision making effect), and a pseudo-series effect suggestion pattern array that suggests pseudo-series effect It is also good.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol overlapping effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect of moving the second movable role 15 and moving it to the unfolded position is performed when superposition of the two decorative symbols 8C is successful. It is also good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the at-reach decorative symbol superposition effect and the character appearance effect described later may be performed with the same variation. For example, in the same variation, after the character appearance effect is performed, the decoration pattern overlap effect may be performed at the reach time, or after the decoration pattern overlap effect at the reach time, the character appearance effect may be performed. The decorative symbol superposition effect and the character appearance effect may be performed simultaneously.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the two decorative symbols 8C having high transparency are displayed, predetermined characters and characters are displayed on the background of these two decorative symbols 8C in the decorative symbol overlapping effect at the time of reaching. May be After that, when superimposition of the two decorative symbols 8C is successful, a part or all of these characters or characters may be made invisible by the decorative symbol 8C generated by the superimposition.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state, and the decorative symbol 8C formed by overlapping the first decorative symbol 8C and the second decorative symbol 8C are exactly the same symbol. Although the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the decorative symbol 8C formed by overlapping the first decorative symbol 8C and the second decorative symbol 8C may be a symbol including portions similar to the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state. For example, the numeral portion of the decorative symbol 8C formed by overlapping the first decorative symbol 8C and the second decorative symbol 8C is the same as the numeral portion of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R forming the reach state, and the other The parts may be different.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of forming a first reach state using a first decorative symbol,
The second display effect displays a second decorative pattern having higher transparency than the first decorative pattern at a first position, and has a third decorative pattern having higher transparency than the first decorative pattern. Is displayed at a second position different from the first position,
The third display effect moves the second decorative pattern from the first position, moves the third decorative pattern from the second position, and the second decorative symbol and the second decorative pattern. This is an effect in which the second decorative pattern and the fourth decorative pattern having lower transparency than the third decorative pattern are generated by overlapping the three decorative patterns.
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and the third display effect is performed after the second display effect. Using the first decorative symbol forming the first reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect A first symbol array is formed,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
The fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect is a symbol including a portion similar to the first decorative symbol that forms a first reach state in the first display effect.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2,
As the first symbol arrangement using the first decorative symbol forming the first reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect A jackpot symbol array is formed,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect A3-4]
A game machine according to any one of modes A3-1 to A3-3, wherein
The first display effect forms a first reach state using the first decorative symbol and a second reach state different from the first reach state using a fifth decorative symbol. It is an effect to form,
In the combination effect, using the fifth decorative symbol forming the second reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect, the second The symbol array of is formed,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect A3-5]
A game machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4, wherein
In the combination effect, after the first symbol array is formed, a feature effect is performed to move a predetermined feature,
A game machine characterized by

  Character appearance effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. This character appearance presentation may be executed during variation presentation of a decorative symbol, during a jackpot game, or the like. That is, the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the target area display effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103 This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Character appearance effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect A.
In the character appearance effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 60A, a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped in the lost symbol arrangement. In FIG. 60A, the decorative symbol 8L is "6" symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is "8" symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is "7" symbol. In this state, the special symbol has not changed yet.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 60C, a reach formation effect is performed. In this reach formation effect, the W reach state (double reach state) is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be stopped on the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3 and displaying the decorative symbol 8C at high speed. . In FIG. 60A, on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "6" symbol, and the reach state is formed using the "6" symbol. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "7" symbol, and the reach condition is formed using the "7" symbol. That is, the W reach state of "6" symbol and "7" symbol is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60D, character appearance effect 1 is executed. In this character appearance effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C changes at a low speed, and is displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In addition, in the character appearance effect 1, the character image A41 is disposed on the back (rear) of the decorative pattern 8C that changes at a low speed. In this case, the entire area of the character image A41 is located on the back (rear) of the decorative pattern 8C. Further, the decorative symbol 8C is a degree of transparency that makes the character image A41 completely invisible when viewed from the player. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbol 8C may have a transparency that allows the character image A41 to be seen slightly. In FIG. 60 (D), the "7" symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60E, a character appearance effect 2 is executed. In the character appearance effect 2, the low speed fluctuation is continued in the decorative symbol 8 C, and the transparency is higher than that in the character appearance effect 1. Therefore, in the character appearance effect 2, the player can visually recognize the character image A41 positioned on the back of the decorative symbol 8C.

  In the character appearance effects 1 and 2, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at a low speed, but may stop.

  If the character image A41 appears in the character appearance effect 2, then super reach effect is performed. Thus, the appearance of the character image A41 suggests that the character image A41 develops into a super reach effect.

[Character appearance effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect B.
In the character appearance effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped in the lost symbol arrangement. In FIG. 60A, the decorative symbol 8L is "6" symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is "8" symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is "7" symbol. In this state, the special symbol has not changed yet.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), a fluctuation start effect is performed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 61C, a reach formation effect is performed. In this reach formation effect, the W reach state (double reach state) is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be stopped on the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3 and displaying the decorative symbol 8C at high speed. . In FIG. 61A, on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "6" symbol, and the reach state is formed using the "6" symbol. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "7" symbol, and the reach condition is formed using the "7" symbol. That is, the W reach state of "6" symbol and "7" symbol is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61D, character appearance effect 1 is executed. In this character appearance effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C changes at a low speed, and is displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In addition, in the character appearance effect 1, the character image A41 is disposed on the back (rear) of the decorative pattern 8C that changes at a low speed. In this case, a part of the character image A41 is located on the back of the decorative symbol 8C, and a part of the character image A41 protrudes from the decorative symbol 8C. Further, the decorative symbol 8C is a degree of transparency that makes the character image A41 completely invisible when viewed from the player. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbol 8C may have a transparency that allows the character image A41 to be seen slightly. In FIG. 61 (D), the "7" symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 61E, character appearance effect 2 is executed. In the character appearance effect 2, the low speed fluctuation is continued in the decorative symbol 8 C, and the transparency is higher than that in the character appearance effect 1. Therefore, in the character appearance effect 2, the character image A41 (part) located on the back of the decorative symbol 8C can be visually recognized by the player, that is, the entire character image A41 can be visually recognized by the player.

  In the character appearance effects 1 and 2, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at a low speed, but may stop.

  If the character image A41 appears in the character appearance effect 2, then super reach effect is performed. Thus, the appearance of the character image A41 suggests that the character image A41 develops into a super reach effect.

[Character appearance effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect C.
In the character appearance effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 62A, a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped in the lost symbol arrangement. In FIG. 60A, the decorative symbol 8L is "6" symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is "8" symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is "7" symbol. In this state, the special symbol has not changed yet.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), a fluctuation start effect is performed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 62C, a reach formation effect is performed. In this reach formation effect, the W reach state (double reach state) is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be stopped on the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3 and displaying the decorative symbol 8C at high speed. . In FIG. 62A, on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "6" symbol, and the reach state is formed using the "6" symbol. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "7" symbol, and the reach condition is formed using the "7" symbol. That is, the W reach state of "6" symbol and "7" symbol is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), a jackpot determination effect is executed. In this jackpot determination effect, the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the "7" symbol, all of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R become "7" symbols, and the decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R forms a big hit symbol array. This indicates that the player has made a big hit. Further, in this jackpot determination effect, the character image A41 is disposed on the back (rear) of the decorative symbol 8C. In this case, the entire area of the character image A41 is located on the back of the decorative pattern 8C. Further, the decorative symbol 8C is a degree of transparency that makes the character image A41 completely invisible when viewed from the player. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbol 8C may have a transparency that allows the character image A41 to be seen slightly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 62E, a character appearance effect is executed. In this character appearance effect, the decorative symbol 8C is higher in transparency than in the case of a big hit finalization effect. Therefore, in this character appearance effect, the character image A41 located on the back of the decorative symbol 8C can be visually recognized by the player.

  In the jackpot decision effect described above, the character image A41 is configured such that the entire area is located on the back of the decorative symbol 8C, but a portion of the character image A41 is located on the back of the decorative symbol 8C and a part is decorative It may be a configuration that protrudes from the symbol 8C.

  When the character image A41 appears in the character appearance effect, the appearance of the character image A41 suggests that something advantageous for the player occurs. For example, when the character image A41 appears, the appearance of the character image A41 may indicate that there is a big hit in the hold (held ball continuous chan), or in the big hit game, 16R (maximum round) Number) It may indicate that it is a determined jackpot, or may indicate that the gaming state after the jackpot game is a state advantageous to the player (probable change state).

[Character appearance effect D]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the character appearance effect D.
In the character appearance effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 63A, a decorative symbol stop effect is executed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped in the lost symbol arrangement. In FIG. 60A, the decorative symbol 8L is "6" symbol, the decorative symbol 8C is "8" symbol, and the decorative symbol 8R is "7" symbol. In this state, the special symbol has not changed yet.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.
Next, as shown in FIG. 63C, a reach formation effect is performed. In this reach formation effect, the W reach state (double reach state) is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be stopped on the reach line LX1 and the reach line LX3 and displaying the decorative symbol 8C at high speed. . In FIG. 63A, on the reach line LX1, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "6" symbol, and the reach condition is formed using the "6" symbol. On the reach line LX3, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "7" symbol, and the reach condition is formed using the "7" symbol. That is, the W reach state of "6" symbol and "7" symbol is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63D, character appearance effect 1 is executed. In this character appearance effect 1, the decorative symbol 8C changes at a low speed, and is displayed between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. Further, in the character appearance effect 1, two character images A43 are disposed on the back (rear) of the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. In this case, a part of the character image A41 protrudes from the decorative symbol, and a part is located on the back of the decorative symbol 8C. Also, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R have a degree of transparency that makes the character image A43 completely invisible when viewed from the player. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may have a degree of transparency with which the character image A43 is slightly visible. In FIG. 63 (D), the "7" symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol 8C.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 63E, character appearance effect 2 is executed. In the character appearance effect 2, the low speed fluctuation is continued in the decorative symbol 8C, and the transparency of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is higher than that in the character appearance effect 1. Therefore, in the character appearance effect 2, the player can visually recognize the character image A43 positioned on the back of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the character appearance effects 1 and 2, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at a low speed, but may stop. Further, in the character appearance effect 1 described above, the character image A43 may be configured such that the entire area is disposed on the back of the decorative symbol 8L or the decorative symbol 8R.

  If the character image A43 appears in the character appearance effect 2, then super reach effect is performed. Thus, the appearance of the character image A43 suggests that the character image A43 develops into a super reach effect.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of a character appearance presentation is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the character image A41 is disposed on the back of the eight decorative symbols 8C when displaying the decorative symbols 8C in a relatively high transparency state in the character appearance effects A to C, Thereafter, when the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a relatively low transmittance state, the character image A41 is displayed through the decorative symbol 8C so as to be visible. In addition, in the character appearance effect D, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a relatively high transmittance state, the character image A43 is arranged on the back (rear) of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Thereafter, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a relatively low transmittance state, the character image A43 is displayed so as to be visible through the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. According to this configuration, the character image hidden in the decorative symbol appears due to an increase in the degree of transparency of the decorative symbol, so that a great surprise can be given to the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the character image A41 is arranged on the back of the eight decorative symbols 8C when the decorative symbol 8C is variably displayed in a relatively high transmittance state in the character appearance effects A and B. Thereafter, when the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a relatively low transmittance state, the character image A41 is displayed through the decorative symbol 8C so as to be visible. According to this configuration, the character image hidden in the decorative symbol 8C during the variable display appears due to an increase in the degree of transparency of the decorative symbol, so that the player is given a big surprise feeling during the variable display of the decorative symbol. Can. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the decorative symbol 8C is displayed at high speed in the character appearance effects A and B, a character image is displayed when the decorative pattern 8C is displayed at low speed in a relatively high transmittance state. When A41 is arranged on the back of the decorative symbol 8C and then the decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a relatively low transmittance state, the character image A41 is displayed so as to be visible through the decorative symbol 8C. According to this configuration, since the character image hidden in the decorative symbol 8C in the low-speed variable display appears due to an increase in the degree of transparency of the decorative symbol, the appearance of the character image can be impressed on the player. Can give a big sense of surprise. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the character appearance effect C, the character image A41 is arranged on the back of the decorative symbol 8C which is the decorative symbol 8C having a relatively high degree of transparency and which is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, since the character image A41 is displayed so as to be visible to the player through the decorative symbol 8C on which the stop display is displayed, the appearance of the character image can be carefully impressed on the player. As a result, even when the decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed, it is possible to give the player a big surprise, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the character image may be disposed on the back of the decorative symbol in a relatively low transmittance state, such as the character appearing effect 1 or the big hit determined effect in the character appearing effect. Sometimes, the character image (all or part of the character image) becomes invisible to the player due to the decorative pattern. According to this configuration, the appearance of the next character can be emphasized by creating the invisible state, and the appearance of the character can be made more interesting. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a character appearance presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the character appearance effects A, B and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the appearance of the character image A 41 suggests that the character image A 41 develops into a super reach effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the appearance of the character image A41 may be suggested to develop into a pseudo-sequence effect, a pre-reading effect, a chance-up effect, or the like. In this case, when the character image A41 appears, the pseudo sequential effect, the pre-reading effect, and the chance-up effect are performed.
Also, the appearance of the character image A41 may indicate a jackpot.

[Modification 2]
In the character appearance effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the appearance of the character images A41 and A43 is at the character appearance effect 1 and the big hit finalization effect, but at the time of the decorative symbol stop effect, at the fluctuation start effect, reach formation effect It may be performed at the time of day. Thereafter, the character appearance effect or the jackpot determination effect shown in FIGS. 60 to 63 may be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the character appearance effects A, B and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, first, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed at low speed with the "6" symbol, and at that time, the character appearance effect 1 is executed, and then the decorative symbol 8C May be displayed at a low speed with the “7” symbol, and at that time, the character appearance effect 2 may be executed. That is, in the character appearance effects A, B and D, the character appearance effect 1 is performed first in the reach of one reach line in the W reach state, and the character appearance effect 2 is performed in the reach of the other reach line. May be

[Modification 4]
In the character appearance effects A to C of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the character image A41 is a character appearance effect, the character image A41 is a decorative pattern 8C (for example, can be configured a large hit symbol array together with the decorative symbols 8L and 8R In FIG. 60, it is arranged so as to be hidden by “7” symbol) and appears as the degree of transparency of the decorative symbol 8C is increased. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the character appearance effect, when the character image A41 is stopped, the decorative symbol 8C which can not constitute a big hit symbol array with the decorative symbols 8L and 8R (for example, "8" symbol in the situation of FIG. 60) It may be arranged so as to be hidden by and appear as the degree of transparency of the decorative pattern 8C is increased.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a decorative pattern with a first transmittance,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the decoration pattern with a second transmittance higher than the first transmittance,
The third display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined character,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed. When the second display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed. The predetermined character in the third display effect may be disposed behind the decorative symbol displayed with the second degree of transmission, and may be visible and visible through the decorative symbol.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect of forming a reach state using the decorative symbol,
The reachable decorative design includes a stationary decorative design and a fluctuating decorative design,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect in some cases.
In the combination effect, when the fourth display effect is being performed, the second display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the decorative symbol in the variation state is the second transmittance And the predetermined character may be disposed behind the decorative symbol in the fluctuating state, and may be displayed visibly through the decorative symbol.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-2,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the decorative symbol in the fluctuating state is changed from the high-speed variable display to the low-speed variable display, and the predetermined character is arranged behind the decorative symbol to be displayed in the low-speed variable display. , May be visible and visible through the decorative symbol,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect A4-4]
A game machine according to aspect A4-2 or aspect A4-3, wherein
In the combination effect, when the fourth display effect is being performed, the second display effect is performed, and in the second display effect, the decorative symbol in the stopped state is the second transmittance And the predetermined character may be arranged behind the decorative symbol in the stopped state, and may be displayed visibly through the decorative symbol.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect A4-5]
A game machine according to any one of modes A4-1 to A4-4, wherein
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed when the first display effect or the second display effect is being performed, and the first display effect is being performed. When the third display effect is performed, the predetermined character may be disposed behind the decorative symbol displayed at the first transmittance, and may not be visible by the decorative symbol. ,
A game machine characterized by

  The jackpot symbol array display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. The jackpot symbol array display effect may be performed during the change effect of the decoration symbol, during the jackpot game, or the like. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the jackpot symbol array display effect, the corresponding image data and drive data from the ROM 103 are It is an effect of reading out and displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Big win symbol array display effect A]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot symbol array display effect A.
In the jackpot symbol array display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, a reach state is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be in a stopped display state on the reach line LN1 and displaying the decorative symbol 8C at high speed. In FIG. 64 (A), the decoration symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "6" symbol, and the reach state is formed using the "6" symbol. The reach line LN1 is a line extending obliquely upward to the right.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), W reach effect is performed. In this W reach effect, while keeping the decorative symbol 8C in the high-speed variation display mode, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are further stopped on the reach line LN2, and the W reach state is reached on the reach line LN1 and reach line LN2. Is formed. In FIG. 64 (C), the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol, and the W reach state is formed using the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol. The reach line LN2 is a line extending obliquely upward to the left. Therefore, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 cross each other to form a letter "X" in the two lines.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the jackpot display effect 1 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 1, by stopping and displaying the "6" symbol of the decorative symbol 8C on the reach line LN1, a jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LN1 using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In FIG. 64 (D), a big hit symbol arrangement of “6” symbols is formed on the reach line LN1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), the jackpot display effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 2, a jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN4. The line LN4 is a line which is the upper left of the display screen 7a and is parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array disposed on the line LN4 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol array disposed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 64 (E), the big hit symbol arrangement of the same "6" symbol as the big hit display effect 1 is formed on the line LN4.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), a jackpot game effect is executed. The jackpot game effect is a display effect during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot game effect, in the jackpot game effect, the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array displayed in the jackpot display effect is displayed on the line LN5. The line LN5 is a line located at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array disposed on the line LN5 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol array disposed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 64 (F), the big hit symbol arrangement of the same "6" symbol as the big hit display effect 2 is formed on the line LN5. Further, in the jackpot game effect, a jackpot symbol array image A51 is displayed. The jackpot symbol array image A51 is a capture screen for the jackpot display effect 1, that is, it represents the reach line and the jackpot symbol array information hit in the jackpot display effect 1. Further, in the jackpot game effect, an image indicating round information, an image indicating right hitting, an image indicating acquired ball withdrawal information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

  The effects shown in FIGS. 64A to 64E are performed during the same change, and the effects shown in FIG. 64F are performed during a jackpot game immediately after any change. In addition, it is not restricted to this, the presentation of FIG. 64 (E)-(F) may be performed during a jackpot game.

[Big win symbol array display effect B]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for describing the jackpot symbol array display effect B.
In the jackpot symbol array display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, a reach state is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be in a stopped display state on the reach line LN1 and displaying the decorative symbol 8C at high speed. In FIG. 65A, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "6" symbol, and the reach state is formed using the "6" symbol. The reach line LN1 is a line extending obliquely upward to the right.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65C, W reach effect is performed. In this W reach effect, while keeping the decorative symbol 8C in the high-speed variation display mode, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are further stopped on the reach line LN2, and the W reach state is reached on the reach line LN1 and reach line LN2. Is formed. In FIG. 65 (C), the W reach state is formed by stopping and displaying the decorative symbols 8L and 8R with the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol and using the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol. The reach line LN2 is a line extending obliquely upward to the left. Therefore, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 cross each other to form a letter "X" in the two lines.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the jackpot display effect 1 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 1, by stopping and displaying the "6" symbol of the decorative symbol 8C on the reach line LN1, a jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LN1 using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In FIG. 65 (D), a big hit symbol arrangement of “6” symbols is formed on the reach line LN1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the jackpot display effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 2, a jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN4. The line LN4 is a line which is the upper left of the display screen 7a and is parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array disposed on the line LN4 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol array disposed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 65 (E), the big hit symbol arrangement of “6” symbols same as the big hit display effect 1 is formed on the line LN4.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the jackpot display effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 3, a jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN6. The line LN6 is a line substantially at the center of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array disposed on the line LN6 is displayed larger than the jackpot symbol array disposed on the line LN4 in the jackpot display effect 2. In FIG. 65 (F), the big hit symbol arrangement of the same "6" symbol as the big hit display effect 1 is formed on the line LN6.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), a jackpot game effect is executed. The jackpot game effect is a display effect during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot game effect, in the jackpot game effect, the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array displayed in the jackpot display effect is displayed on the line LN5. The line LN5 is a line located at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array disposed on the line LN5 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol array disposed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 65 (G), a big hit symbol arrangement of the same "6" symbol as the big hit display effect 2 is formed on the line LN5. Further, in the jackpot game effect, a jackpot symbol array image A51 is displayed. The jackpot symbol array image A51 is a capture screen for the jackpot display effect 1, that is, it represents the reach line and the jackpot symbol array information hit in the jackpot display effect 1. Further, in the jackpot game effect, an image indicating round information, an image indicating right hitting, an image indicating acquired ball withdrawal information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

  The effects shown in FIGS. 65A to 65F are performed during the same change, and the effects shown in FIG. 65G are performed during a jackpot game immediately after any change. In addition, it is not restricted to this, the effects of FIGS. 65 (E) to (G) may be performed during the jackpot game.

[Big hit design sequence display production C]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for describing the jackpot symbol array display effect C.
In the jackpot symbol array display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, a reach state is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be in a stopped display state on the reach line LN1 and displaying the decorative symbol 8C at high speed. In FIG. 66 (A), the decoration symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "6" symbol, and the reach state is formed using the "6" symbol. The reach line LN1 is a line extending obliquely upward to the right.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66C, W reach effect is performed. In this W reach effect, while keeping the decorative symbol 8C in the high-speed variation display mode, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are further stopped on the reach line LN2, and the W reach state is reached on the reach line LN1 and reach line LN2. Is formed. In FIG. 66C, the W reach state is formed by stopping and displaying the decorative symbols 8L and 8R with the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol and using the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol. The reach line LN2 is a line extending obliquely upward to the left. Therefore, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 cross each other to form a letter "X" in the two lines.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), the jackpot display effect 1 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 1, by stopping and displaying the "6" symbol of the decorative symbol 8C on the reach line LN1, a jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LN1 using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In FIG. 66 (D), a big hit symbol arrangement of “6” symbols is formed on the reach line LN1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66E, the jackpot display effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C displayed on the reach line LN1 is enlarged and displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C overlaps the decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), the jackpot display effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 3, a jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN4. The line LN4 is a line which is the upper left of the display screen 7a and is parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array disposed on the line LN4 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol array disposed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 66 (F), the big hit symbol arrangement of the same "6" symbol as the big hit display effect 1 is formed on the line LN4.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (G), the jackpot display effect 4 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 4, a jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN6. The line LN6 is a line substantially at the center of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array disposed on the line LN6 is displayed larger than the jackpot symbol array disposed on the line LN4 in the jackpot display effect 3. In FIG. 66 (G), the big hit symbol arrangement of the same "6" symbol as the big hit display effect 1 is formed on the line LN6.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 66H, a jackpot game effect is executed. The jackpot game effect is a display effect during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot game effect, in the jackpot game effect, the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array displayed in the jackpot display effect is displayed on the line LN5. The line LN5 is a line located at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array disposed on the line LN5 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol array disposed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 66 (G), a jackpot symbol array of the same "6" symbol as the jackpot display effect 2 is formed on the line LN5. Further, in the jackpot game effect, a jackpot symbol array image A51 is displayed. The jackpot symbol array image A51 is a capture screen for the jackpot display effect 1, that is, it represents the reach line and the jackpot symbol array information hit in the jackpot display effect 1. Further, in the jackpot game effect, an image indicating round information, an image indicating right hitting, an image indicating acquired ball withdrawal information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

  The effects shown in FIGS. 66 (A) to 66 (G) are performed during the same change, and the effects shown in FIG. 66 (G) are performed during a jackpot game immediately after any change. In addition, it is not restricted to this, the presentation of FIG. 66 (F)-(H) may be performed during a jackpot game.

[Big win symbol array display effect D]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for describing the jackpot symbol array display effect D.
In the jackpot symbol array display effect, first, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, a reach state is formed by causing the decorative symbols 8L and 8R to be in a stopped display state on the reach line LN1 and displaying the decorative symbol 8C at high speed. In FIG. 67A, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with the "6" symbol, and the reach state is formed using the "6" symbol. The reach line LN1 is a line extending obliquely upward to the right.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), W reach effect is performed. In this W reach effect, while keeping the decorative symbol 8C in the high-speed variation display mode, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are further stopped on the reach line LN2, and the W reach state is reached on the reach line LN1 and reach line LN2. Is formed. In FIG. 67C, the W reach state is formed by stopping and displaying the decorative symbols 8L and 8R with the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol and using the "6" symbol and the "7" symbol. The reach line LN2 is a line extending obliquely upward to the left. Therefore, the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2 cross each other to form a letter "X" in the two lines.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), the jackpot display effect 1 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 1, by stopping and displaying the "6" symbol of the decorative symbol 8C on the reach line LN1, a jackpot symbol array is formed on the reach line LN1 using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In FIG. 67 (D), a big hit symbol arrangement of “6” symbols is formed on the reach line LN1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), the jackpot display effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 2, the decorative symbol 8C displayed on the reach line LN1 is enlarged and displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 8C overlaps the decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), an accessory movable effect is executed. In this feature moving effect, the second movable role 15 is moved to the advanced position and moved to the front of the display screen 7a. In this case, on the display screen 7a, the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the reach line LN1. That is, the jackpot symbol array on the reach line LN1 can be visually recognized from the area not covered by the second movable role 15 on the display screen 7a from the player.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (G), the jackpot display effect 3 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 3, a jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN4. The line LN4 is a line which is the upper left of the display screen 7a and is parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array disposed on the line LN4 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol array disposed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 67 (F), the big hit symbol arrangement of the same "6" symbol as the big hit display effect 1 is formed on the line LN4.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67H, the jackpot display effect 4 is executed. In the jackpot display effect 4, a jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN6. The line LN6 is a line substantially at the center of the display screen 7a and parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN6 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN4 in the jackpot display effect 3. In FIG. 67 (G), the big hit symbol arrangement of the same "6" symbol as the big hit display effect 1 is formed on the line LN6.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (I), a jackpot game effect is executed. The jackpot game effect is a display effect during the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot game effect, in the jackpot game effect, the same jackpot symbol array as the jackpot symbol array displayed in the jackpot display effect is displayed on the line LN5. The line LN5 is a line located at the lower right of the display screen 7a and parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The jackpot symbol array disposed on the line LN5 is displayed smaller than the jackpot symbol array disposed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1. In FIG. 67 (G), the big hit symbol arrangement of the same "6" symbol as the big hit display effect 2 is formed on the line LN5. Further, in the jackpot game effect, a jackpot symbol array image A51 is displayed. The jackpot symbol array image A51 is a capture screen for the jackpot display effect 1, that is, it represents the reach line and the jackpot symbol array information hit in the jackpot display effect 1. Further, in the jackpot game effect, an image indicating round information, an image indicating right hitting, an image indicating acquired ball withdrawal information, a predetermined character, and the like are displayed.

  Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 67A to 67H are performed during the same change, and the effects shown in FIG. 67I are performed during a jackpot game immediately after any change. In addition, it is not restricted to this, the presentation of FIG. 67 (G)-(I) may be performed during a jackpot game.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of jackpot design arrangement display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot symbol array display effect, the reach state is formed on the reach line LN1, the W reach state is formed on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and thereafter, on the reach line LN1. The jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed, and then the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the line LN4 or the line LN5. According to this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the effect of the decorative symbol on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and then the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the reach line LN1 and the line LN4 or the line LN5, The player can change the viewpoint to display the jackpot symbol array, and the jackpot can be emphasized to amplify the jackpot pleasure of the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot symbol array display effect, the reach state is formed on the reach line LN1, the W reach state is formed on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and thereafter, on the reach line LN1. The jackpot symbol array is displayed, and then the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN4, and the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN5 during the subsequent jackpot game. According to this configuration, it is possible to enjoy the effect of the decorative symbol on the reach line LN1 and the reach line LN2, and then the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the reach line LN1 and on the line LN4. Since the jackpot symbol array can be displayed by changing the viewpoint and the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the line LN 5 during the jackpot game, the jackpot is emphasized to make the player's jackpot pleasure more It can be amplified. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot symbol array display effect (for example, FIG. 64 (D)), on the line LN4, on the line LN5, or The effect (for example, FIG. 64E) in which the big hit symbol arrangement is displayed on the line LN6 is performed during the same change. According to this configuration, since it is possible to change the viewpoint to the player during the same change and display the jackpot symbol array, the jackpot is emphasized during the same change, and the player's jackpot pleasure is further amplified. be able to. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot symbol array display effect, the jackpot symbol array displayed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1 is larger than the jackpot symbol array arranged on the line LN4 or the line LN5. Is displayed. According to this configuration, the jackpot can be emphasized by displaying the jackpot symbol arrangement large at the beginning of the jackpot display effect, and the player's jackpot pleasure can be further amplified. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the jackpot symbol array is displayed on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 1 in the jackpot symbol array display effect D, the jackpot symbol array on the reach line LN1 in the jackpot display effect 2 After a part is enlarged and displayed, the jackpot symbol arrangement is displayed on the line LN 4 in the jackpot display effect 3. According to this configuration, the jackpot can be emphasized by displaying the jackpot symbol array large, and the player's jackpot pleasure can be further amplified. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of big hit design arrangement display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the jackpot symbol array display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot symbol array displayed on the line LN4 may be displayed larger than the jackpot symbol array displayed on the reach line LN1.

[Modification 2]
In the jackpot symbol array display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot symbol array disposed on the reach line LN1, on the reach line LN2, on the line LN4, on the line LN5, on the line LN6 is one of the decorative symbols Part or all may overlap. Also, the jackpot symbols arranged on the reach line LN1, the reach line LN2, the line LN4, the line LN5, and the line LN6 may be enlarged or reduced, or may be shrunk. You may move.

[Modification 3]
In the jackpot symbol array display effect D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a feature movable effect is performed between the jackpot display effect 2 and the jackpot display effect 3, but the character movable effect is a jackpot display effect 1 Between the jackpot display effect 2 and the jackpot display effect 3 and the jackpot display effect 4, between the jackpot display effect 4 and the jackpot game effect, or during the jackpot display effect or jackpot game effect May be In addition, the size of the jackpot symbol array and the line on which the jackpot symbol array is displayed may be changed before and after the accessory movable effect.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect in which a reach state is obtained by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol on the first line in the display means,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the first jackpot symbol array by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol on the first line,
The third display effect is an effect of setting the reach pattern by stopping and displaying the decorative pattern on the second line different from the first line in the display means,
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a second jackpot symbol array by stopping and displaying a decorative symbol on a third line different from the first line and the second line,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed, the third display effect is performed, and the first display effect and the third display effect are performed. After the display effect, the second display effect is performed, and after the second display effect, the fourth display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is a third jackpot symbol arrangement by stopping and displaying a decorative symbol on the fourth line different from the first line, the second line, and the third line. It is an effect that displays
The combination effect is an effect that may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the fourth display effect and during a jackpot game.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-2,
In the combination effect, the second display effect and the fourth display effect are performed during the same change,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-3,
The first jackpot symbol array in the second display effect is larger than the second jackpot symbol array in the fourth display effect,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect 5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4,
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display effect is an effect of enlarging and displaying the first jackpot symbol array,
The combination effect is an effect that may include the sixth display effect,
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed after the second display effect is performed, and the fourth display effect is performed after the sixth display effect.
A game machine characterized by

  The decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 71. This decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect can be performed in connection with the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "special symbol"). In addition, decorative design big hit suggestion production A, B, C is the big hit suggestion within the retention, decorative design big hit suggestion production D is the big hit suggestion of the said fluctuation.

[Decorative design jackpot suggestion A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining a decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect A.
In the decorative symbol big hit suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 68A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).
Further, at the left end of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed side by side vertically. H1 shows the number of reservations for the first special symbol, and H2 shows the number of reservations for the second special symbol. In the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 68 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it indicates that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "3" and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is "0".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the variation result shown in FIG. 68 (A) has been lost. When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are provided with the upper line JL and the lower line GL as defined stop positions, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are usually stopped after being changed to indicate the symbol arrangement, it is usually The alignment is stopped horizontally along the upper line JL and the lower line GL. That is, in the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (B), the lost symbol array is shown in the upper and lower two stages. In this example, the lost symbol arrangement is indicated by “869” in the upper line JL and “958” in the lower line GL.

On the other hand, in place of FIG. 68 (B), as shown in FIG. 68 (C), the left decorative symbol down shift stop effect may be executed. The left decorative symbol downward shift stop effect indicates that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped after variation, and the decorative symbols 8C, 8R are stopped at the upper line JL and the lower line GL, which are defined stop positions. However, the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. In this example, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are shown as "77" in the upper line JL and "66" in the lower line GL, and the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL by "5" and the lower line Shifting down from the GL, it shows "6". That is, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the left decorative symbol downward shift stop production is the left of the symbol arrangement "666" in which "5" of "577" is shifted downward from the upper line JL. "6" of has shown the symbol arrangement | sequence which shifted below from lower line GL. If any one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R deviates from the prescribed stop position, it becomes a lost symbol array. Therefore, if it stops at the upper line JL or the lower line GL which is the specified stop position, the big hit symbol array “666” which is the big hit symbol array is also lost pattern alignment in the left decoration symbol down shift stop effect shown in FIG. Become.
In this example, the left decorative pattern 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. However, although the illustration is omitted, the right decorative pattern 8R or the middle decorative pattern 8C is the upper stage. There is also a case where the line JL and the lower line GL are similarly shifted downward and stopped.

Furthermore, instead of FIG. 68 (B), as shown in FIG. 68 (D), there may be a case where a right decoration symbol upshift stop effect is executed. This right decoration symbol upper gap stop production has shown the state where the decoration design 8L, 8C and 8R stop after fluctuation, the decoration design 8L and 8C stop to the upper line JL which is specified stop position and the lower line GL However, the left decorative symbol 8R is shifted upward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. In this example, the decorative symbols 8L and 8C show "68" in the upper line JL and "77" in the lower line GL, and the left decorative symbol 8L deviates upward from the upper line JL by "8" and the lower line It is shifted up from GL to indicate "7". That is, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the right decorative symbol upshift stop production is the symbol arrangement in which the right "8" of "688" is shifted upward from the upper line JL, "777" “7” on the right of the figure shows the symbol arrangement shifted upward from the lower line GL. Therefore, "777" which will be a big hit symbol array if stopped on the upper line JL or the lower line GL which is the specified stop position is also a lost symbol array in the right decoration symbol upshift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (D). Become.
In this example, the right decorative symbol 8R is shifted upward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. However, although the illustration is omitted, the left decorative symbol 8L or the middle decorative symbol 8C is the upper row. There is also a case where the line JL and the lower line GL are similarly shifted upward and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68E, the jackpot determination effect is performed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect is an effect performed after the left decorative symbol downward shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (C) or the right decorative symbol upward shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (D) is performed. In this jackpot finalization effect, the number of reservations H2 indicates the same "0" as before, but the number of reservations H1 is changed from "3" to "1". That is, in this jackpot finalization effect, the first special symbol is reserved from the left decorative symbol downward shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (C) or the right decorative symbol upward shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (D). It shows the appearance of two being digested. And the jackpot symbol array “777” indicated by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicates the result of the change of the second suspension of the first special symbol. Further, in the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 68 (E), the jackpot symbol array “777” is displayed alone (one row) substantially at the center of the display screen 7a, and above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The characters "Big win ~!" Are displayed. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot.
In the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 68 (E), the left decoration symbol down shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (C) or the right decoration symbol up shift stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (D) was performed. Even if it is a case, it is not always performed, and there may be a case where the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 68 (B) is performed with a predetermined probability.

  That is, in the decorative symbol big hit indication effect A shown in FIG. 68, when any of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shifted from the prescribed stop position and stopped in the predetermined variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Is likely to become a jackpot in the change related to the suspension after the predetermined change. In other words, in the predetermined variation of the decorative symbol 8L, 8C, 8R, when there is a big hit by prefetching the content of the hold, the decorative symbol 8L as a big hit suggestion effect with a predetermined probability (lottery using random numbers etc. It is designed to stop either 8C or 8R from the specified stop position. Moreover, in the decorative symbol big hit indication effect A, since the symbol arrangement (the lost symbol arrangement) which is shifted from the specified stop position and stopped is indicated by the symbol arrangement which becomes the big hit symbol arrangement if stopped at the specified stop position, This indicates that the player will win a jackpot.

[Decorative design jackpot suggestion B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining a decorative symbol jackpot suggestion B.
In the decorative symbol big hit indication effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), the decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 69A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).
Further, at the left end of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed side by side vertically. H1 shows the number of reservations for the first special symbol, and H2 shows the number of reservations for the second special symbol. In the decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 69 (A), H1 indicates "3" and H2 indicates "0". That is, it indicates that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "3" and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the left decoration symbol down shift stop blue effect presentation is executed. The left decorative symbol downward shift stop blue effect effect indicates that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped after variation, and the decorative symbols 8C, 8R are the upper stop line JL and the lower stop line GL, which are defined stop positions. However, the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. In this example, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are shown as "77" in the upper line JL and "66" in the lower line GL, and the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL by "5" and the lower line Shifting down from the GL, it shows "6". That is, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the left decorative symbol downward shift stop production is the left of the symbol arrangement "666" in which "5" of "577" is shifted downward from the upper line JL. "6" of has shown the symbol arrangement | sequence which shifted below from lower line GL. If any one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R deviates from the prescribed stop position, it becomes a lost symbol array. Therefore, if it stops at the upper line JL or the lower line GL which is the specified stop position, the big hit symbol array “666” which is the big hit symbol array is also lost pattern alignment in the left decoration symbol down shift stop effect shown in FIG. Become.
In this example, the left decorative pattern 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. However, although the illustration is omitted, the right decorative pattern 8R or the middle decorative pattern 8C is the upper stage. There is also a case where the line JL and the lower line GL are similarly shifted downward and stopped.
Furthermore, in the symbol arrangement in which the left "6" of "666" is shifted downward from the lower line GL, the water droplets are surrounded so as to surround "6" which is each stop symbol of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The simulated blue effect image is displayed.

  On the other hand, in place of FIG. 69 (B), as shown in FIG. 69 (C), the left decoration symbol down shift stop red effect presentation may be executed. Similarly to the left decorative symbol downward shift stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) described above, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is “577” as in the left decorative symbol downward shift stop red effect effect. The symbol arrangement in which “5” of them is shifted downward from the upper line JL, and the “6” on the left of “666” shows the symbol arrangement shifted downward from the lower line GL, but out of “666” The red effect image imitating a flame so as to surround "6" which is each stop design of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R in the symbol arrangement which left "6" of left shifted down from lower line GL It is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost design stop effect is produced after the left decorative symbol downward shift stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) or the left decorative symbol downward shift stop red effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (C). It is. In this lost symbol stop effect, the pending number H2 indicates the same "0" as before, but the pending number H1 is changed from "3" to "1". That is, in this lost symbol stop effect, the first left decoration symbol down shift stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) or the left decoration symbol down shift stop red effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (C). It shows a situation where two special symbols are suspended. That is, the lost symbol array indicated by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shows the result of the change of the second reserve of the first special symbol, and the upper line JL is "869" and the lower line GL is "958 "It is shown.
It should be noted that the probability that the lost symbol stop effect is performed is the left decorative symbol lower position shift shown in FIG. 69 (C) when the left decorative pattern lower shift stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) is performed. Stop Red The effect is higher than when it was performed.

On the other hand, instead of FIG. 69 (D), as shown in FIG. 69 (E), there may be a case in which the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This big hit finalization effect is shown in the left decorative symbol downward shift stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) or in FIG. It is an effect to be performed after the left decorative symbol downward shift stop red effect effect is performed. In this jackpot finalization effect, the number of reservations H2 indicates the same "0" as before, but the number of reservations H1 is changed from "3" to "1". That is, in this jackpot finalization effect, the first decorative pattern downward shift stop blue effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (B) or the left decorative pattern downward shift stop red effect effect shown in FIG. 69 (C), the first special It shows a state where two pieces of reserve of symbol are digested. That is, the jackpot symbol array "777" indicated by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicates the result of the change of the second suspension of the first special symbol. In the jackpot decision effect shown in FIG. 69 (E), the jackpot symbol array "777" is displayed alone (one row) substantially at the center of the display screen 7a, and above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The characters "Big win ~!" Are displayed. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot.
It should be noted that the probability that the jackpot decision effect will be performed is the left decorative symbol downward shift stop shown in FIG. 69 (B) when the left decorative symbol downward shift stop red effect presentation shown in FIG. 69 (C) is performed. It is higher than the blue effect effect.

  That is, in the decorative symbol big hit indication effect B shown in FIG. 69, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop fluctuating, a plurality of types of effect effects (in this example, blue effect effect and red effect effect) can be executed Thus, the jackpot assignment rate changes according to the type of effect presentation. In other words, in the predetermined variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, if there is a big hit by prefetching the content of the hold, with a predetermined probability (lottery etc. using random numbers), a plurality of effects as a big hit suggestion effect A predetermined effect is produced from the effect.

[Decorative design jackpot suggestion C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for describing a decorative symbol jackpot suggestion C.
In the decorative symbol big hit indication effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 70 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).
Further, at the left end of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed side by side vertically. H1 shows the number of reservations for the first special symbol, and H2 shows the number of reservations for the second special symbol. In the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 70 (A), H1 indicates "3" and H2 indicates "0". That is, it indicates that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "3" and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is "0".

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), the left decorative symbol “6” downward shift stop effect is executed. The left decorative symbol "6" downward shift stop effect indicates that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped after variation, and the decorative symbols 8C, 8R are the upper line JL and the lower line which are the specified stop positions. Although stopped at GL, the left decorative pattern 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. In this example, the decorative symbols 8C and 8R are shown as "77" in the upper line JL and "66" in the lower line GL, and the left decorative symbol 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL by "5" and the lower line Shifting down from the GL, it shows "6". That is, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the left decorative symbol "6" downward shift stop effect is "666" in which "5" of "577" is shifted downward from the upper line JL. The left “6” in the figure shows the symbol array shifted downward from the lower line GL. If any one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R deviates from the prescribed stop position, it becomes a lost symbol array. Therefore, "666" which will be a big hit symbol array if it stops in the upper line JL or the lower line GL which is the specified stop position will also be a big hit symbol array, the left decorative symbol "6" shown in FIG. 70 (B) It becomes a pattern arrangement.
In this example, the left decorative pattern 8L is shifted downward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. However, although the illustration is omitted, the right decorative pattern 8R or the middle decorative pattern 8C is the upper stage. There is also a case where the line JL and the lower line GL are similarly shifted downward and stopped.

On the other hand, in place of FIG. 70 (B), as shown in FIG. 70 (C), there may be a case where the right-decision symbol "7" top shift stop effect is executed. The right decorative symbol “7” on the top shows the state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped after variation, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C are the upper line JL and the lower line which are the specified stop positions. Although stopped at GL, the left decorative symbol 8R is shifted upward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. In this example, the decorative symbols 8L and 8C show "68" in the upper line JL and "77" in the lower line GL, and the left decorative symbol 8L deviates upward from the upper line JL by "8" and the lower line It is shifted up from GL to indicate "7". That is, the symbol arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the right decorative symbol "7" upshift stop effect is a symbol array in which the right "8" of "688" is shifted upward from the upper line JL, "777 "7" of the right of "" has shown the symbol arrangement which shifted up from lower line GL. Therefore, if it stops in the upper line JL or the lower line GL which is the specified stop position, the big hit symbol array "777" will be the big hit symbol array, too. It becomes a pattern arrangement.
In this example, the right decorative symbol 8R is shifted upward from the upper line JL and the lower line GL and stopped. However, although the illustration is omitted, the left decorative symbol 8L or the middle decorative symbol 8C is the upper row. There is also a case where the line JL and the lower line GL are similarly shifted upward and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), reach effect is performed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the effect to be performed after the left decorative symbol "6" downward shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (B) or the right decorative symbol "7" upper offset stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (C) is performed It is. In this reach effect, the hold number H2 indicates the same "0" as before, but the hold number H1 is changed from "3" to "1". That is, in this reach effect, from the left decorative symbol "6" lower offset stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (B) or the right decorative symbol "7" upper offset stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (C), the first It shows a situation where two special symbols are suspended. And, the lost symbol array “68” of the upper line JL and the reach symbol array “77” of the lower line GL corresponding to the second variation of the first special symbol, in which the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped ing. Further, in the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D), characters “reach!” Are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.
In the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D), the left decorative symbol "6" lower offset stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (B) or the right decorative symbol "7" upper offset stop shown in FIG. 70 (C) Even when the rendition is performed, it will not necessarily be performed, and it may not be reachable. In addition, the probability that this reach effect is performed is the left decorative pattern "6" shown in FIG. 70 (B) when the stop effect on the right decorative pattern "7" shown in FIG. 70 (C) is performed. It is higher than when the lower gap stop rendition was performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle effect is an effect performed by switching from the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D), and instead of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the player-side ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle The image is displayed. That is, the battle effect shown in FIG. 70 (E) is performed when the gaming state is reach. In this battle effect, the numbers of reservations H1 and H2 indicate “1” and “0” as in the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D).
The battle effect shown in FIG. 70 (E) is not necessarily performed even when the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D) is performed, and does not develop from the reach effect to the battle effect. There is also a possibility. Also, the probability (battle development rate) that this battle effect is performed is the one shown in FIG. 70 (B) when the stop effect on the right decorative symbol "7" shown in FIG. 70 (C) is performed. It is higher than the case where the decorative symbol "6" down shift stop effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), the jackpot determination suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot finalization suggestion effect, as a result of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle, the character “winning!” Indicating that the ally character CRA has won is largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character "winning!", The player can be made to think that the current reach will be a jackpot (the player is given an advantageous benefit). In this jackpot finalization suggestion effect, the number of reservations H1 and H2 indicate "1" and "0" as well as the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D) and the battle effect shown in FIG. 70 (E). ing.
Further, although illustration is omitted, there is also a case where the ally character is eliminated in the battle rendition, and in this case, the jackpot decision suggestion effect shown in FIG. 70 (F) is not performed but instead indicates that the ally character is eliminated. The letters "!" Are displayed large at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character “Delivery!”, The player can be made to think that the current reach will not be a jackpot (the advantage advantageous to the player is not given).
The probability that the allied character CRA will win in the battle production (battle victory expectation degree) is shown in FIG. 70 (B) when the right decoration symbol “7” upward displacement stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (C) is performed. It is higher than when the left decorative symbol “6” downward shift stop effect shown in) is performed. In other words, the probability that the teammate character CRA is eliminated in the battle production is the right decoration shown in FIG. 70 (C) when the left decoration symbol “6” downward shift stop effect shown in FIG. 70 (B) is performed. The symbol "7" is higher than in the case where the upshift stop effect is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot finalization effect, a jackpot symbol array “777” is displayed in place of the character “winning!” Which indicates that the ally character CRA has won in the jackpot finalization suggestion effect shown in FIG. 70 (F). The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot. In the jackpot decision effect shown in FIG. 70 (G), the jackpot symbol array "777" is displayed alone (one row) substantially at the center of the display screen 7a, and above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The characters "Big win ~!" Are displayed.
As described above, when the reach effect shown in FIG. 70 (D) was not performed (when it did not reach), the reach effect was not developed from the battle effect shown in FIG. 70 (E). If the ally character CRA is eliminated in the battle rendition and the jackpot decision suggestion effect shown in FIG. 70 (F) is not performed, the jackpot decision effect shown in FIG. 70 (G) is performed. Instead, a loss determination effect is performed (see FIG. 68 (B) and FIG. 69 (D)).

  That is, in the decorative symbol big hit indication effect C shown in FIG. 70, in a predetermined change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, when any of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is shifted from the specified stop position The rate of becoming a reach, the rate of development to a post-reach battle, and the battle victory expectation in the battle production are changed by the type of the shifted symbol array in the change related to the suspension after the predetermined change. There is. For example, as described above, the rate at which the shifted symbol array is “777” is higher than the “666”, the rate at which the reach is achieved, the rate of development to reach after battle, and the battle victory expectation degree in the battle production is higher. ing. That is, in the decorative symbol jackpot suggestion effect C, a plurality of game indexes such as the reach rate, the battle development rate and the battle victory expectation are simultaneously suggested by one effect of displaying the shifted symbol array.

[Decorative design jackpot suggestion D]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for describing a decorative symbol jackpot suggestion D.
In the decorative symbol big hit indication effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 71 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).
Further, at the left end of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed side by side vertically. H1 shows the number of reservations for the first special symbol, and H2 shows the number of reservations for the second special symbol. In the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 68 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it indicates that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "3" and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is "0".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the lower stage "6" symbol reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The lower "6" symbol reach effect indicates that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are sequentially stopped in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 71 (A), resulting in reach. When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are provided with the upper line JL and the lower line GL as symbol arrangement lines, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped after variation and show the symbol arrangement, 2 symbols Simultaneously stop, align horizontally and stop along the upper line JL and the lower line GL. That is, in the lower “6” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (B), the symbol array is shown in upper and lower two stages, and in this example, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are “57” in the upper row JL In the lower line GL, "66" indicating the reach state is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71C, on the display screen 7a, the lower stage "6" symbol reach loss effect is executed. The lower "6" symbol reach loss effect shows that the result of the lower "6" symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (B) is lost. That is, in the lower "6" symbol reach loss effect shown in FIG. 71C, the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped, and the lost symbol array is shown in the upper and lower two stages as the variation result. In this example, the lost symbol arrangement is indicated by “587” in the upper line JL and “676” in a lower line GL indicating a reach lost condition.

  On the other hand, in place of FIG. 71 (B), as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the lower stage “7” symbol reach effect may be executed. The lower stage “7” symbol reach effect indicates that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are sequentially stopped in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 71 (A), resulting in reach. That is, in the lower "7" symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (D), the symbol array is shown in the upper and lower two stages, and in this example, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are "67" in the upper row JL, In the lower line GL, "77" indicating the reach state is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), on the display screen 7a, the “7” symbol jackpot determination effect is executed. The “7” symbol jackpot determination effect is an effect performed after the lower “7” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (D) is performed. The “7” symbol jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the lower “7” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (D) has made a big hit. In the "7" symbol jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 71 (E), the jackpot symbol array "777" is displayed alone (one step) substantially at the center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed. On the upper side, the characters "big hit-!" Are displayed. The player is convinced that the player has made a big hit with the "7" symbol by the "7" symbol jackpot determination effect.

  Furthermore, instead of FIG. 71 (B) and FIG. 71 (D), as shown in FIG. 71 (F), the upper row “8” symbol reach effect may be executed. The upper stage “8” symbol reach effect indicates that in the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 71A, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are sequentially stopped, resulting in reach. That is, in the upper stage “8” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (F), the symbol array is shown in upper and lower two stages, and in this example, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R indicate the reach state in the upper stage line JL "88" and "97" are displayed on the lower line GL.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (G), on the display screen 7a, the "8" symbol jackpot determination effect is executed. The “8” symbol jackpot determination effect is an effect performed after the upper stage “8” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (F) is performed. The “8” symbol jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the upper stage “8” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (F) has made a big hit. In the "8" symbol jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 71 (G), the jackpot symbol array "888" is displayed alone (one step) substantially at the center of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed. On the upper side, the characters "big hit-!" Are displayed. The player is convinced that the player has made a big hit with the "8" symbol by the "8" symbol jackpot determination effect.

The lower "6" symbol reach loss effect shown in FIG. 71 (C) described above is necessarily performed even when the lower "6" symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (B) is performed. Instead, similarly to FIGS. 71 (E) and (G), the “6” symbol jackpot determination effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. Also, the "7" symbol jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 71 (E) described above is always performed even when the lower "7" symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (D) is performed. Instead, similarly to FIG. 71 (C), the lower stage “7” symbol reach loss effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the big hit finalization effect will be performed will be the lower “7” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (D) than when the lower “6” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (B) is performed. The case is higher.
In addition, the "8" symbol jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 71 (G) described above is always performed even when the upper stage "8" symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (F) is performed. Instead, similarly to FIG. 71 (C), the upper row “8” symbol reach loss effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. Although illustration is omitted, even when reach production is performed with a symbol other than the “8” symbol on the upper line JL, as with FIG. 71 (G), the jackpot decision effect is performed with a predetermined probability It may be possible. However, the probability that the jackpot decision effect will be performed will be the upper stage “8” symbol reach effect shown in FIG. 71 (F) than the case where the reach effect is performed with symbols other than “8” symbol in the upper line JL. The case is higher.

  That is, in the decorative symbol big hit indication effect D shown in FIG. 71, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped plurally at a predetermined change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a plurality of symbol array lines (book In the example, the upper line JL and the lower line GL) can be displayed, and a predetermined left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped at a predetermined pattern array line among a plurality of symbol array lines (in this example) The reach of the “88” symbol on the upper line JL, and the reach of the “77” symbol on the lower line GL is likely to be a big hit in the predetermined change. That is, in the decorative symbol big hit suggestion effect D, when reaching a predetermined symbol arrangement line in a predetermined symbol arrangement line, the jackpot expectation is high. In other words, in the predetermined variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, if the variation is a big hit, it is given a predetermined symbol arrangement line as a big hit suggestion effect with a predetermined probability (lottery using random numbers, etc.) Reach effect is to be performed by the symbol arrangement.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of a decorative design big hit suggestion is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68 to FIG. 70, when the decorative symbol is stopped at the prescribed stop position and when it is shifted from the prescribed stop position and stopped, in the predetermined variation of the decorative symbol. When the vehicle is stopped at a position where it deviates from the specified stop position, it is more likely to become a big hit in the change related to the suspension after the predetermined change than when it stops at the specified stop position. According to this configuration, the player can face the game with great expectation when any of the decorative symbols deviates from the prescribed stop position. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, it becomes possible to change the jackpot expectation degree depending on the type of the decoration symbol which is shifted by relating the decorative symbol shifted with the jackpot expectation degree.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68 to FIG. 70, it has a first decorative symbol, a second decorative symbol and a third decorative symbol, and stops the decorative symbol at a prescribed stop position. In the case of stopping the first decoration pattern, the second decoration pattern and the third decoration pattern in a line, and stopping the decoration pattern from the specified stop position, the first decoration pattern and the first decoration pattern One of the two decorative symbols and the third decorative symbol is shifted from the line and stopped. According to this configuration, when the decorative symbol is stopped from being shifted from the specified stop position, it becomes possible for the player to easily display in various modes. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68 to FIG. 70, a plurality of types of effect effects can be executed in connection with the stop of the decorative symbol, and the jackpot award rate to the player is the effect effect. It is configured to change depending on the type. According to this configuration, the player can enjoy the game with great expectation when the effect presentation is performed with a high expectation when the effect presentation is performed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, the decorative symbol has the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol is the first one. It is possible to stop after the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern, and to stop a plurality of the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern at a predetermined variation of the decorative pattern to simultaneously display a plurality of graphic array lines When the predetermined first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped in a predetermined symbol array line among the plurality of symbol array lines, the predetermined variation is likely to be a big hit. According to this configuration, when the predetermined first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped in the predetermined symbol array line, the jackpot expectation is increased, and the player is then stopped. While changing the decorative pattern, you can watch while maintaining great expectation. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, the plurality of symbol arrangement lines are displayed in steps, and the first decorative symbols are displayed in predetermined steps of the plurality of symbol arrangement lines displayed in steps. When the second decorative symbol stops and reaches a predetermined symbol arrangement, the predetermined variation is likely to be a big hit. According to this configuration, when the player reaches a predetermined symbol array in a predetermined array of symbol array lines, the jackpot expectation becomes extremely high, and then the third decorative symbol being stopped is stopped. You can watch closely while maintaining great expectations. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, it is possible to change the jackpot expectation according to the type of reach symbol by associating the reach symbol and the jackpot expectation in the symbol array line of the predetermined stage.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a decoration design big hit suggestion production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, two stages of the upper line JL and the lower line GL are shown as stop positions defined by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Is not limited to this. For example, the predetermined stop positions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be three stages of the upper line, the middle line, and the lower line, or four or more upper and lower stages. Furthermore, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are horizontally scrolled, a plurality of vertical lines (left line, middle line, right line) in the left-right direction may be set as specified stop positions.
Also, as shown in FIG. 71, the symbol array line shows two lines of the upper line JL and the lower line GL, but the upper line, middle line and lower line 3 lines and the same as the stop position defined above , Or four or more lines above and below. Furthermore, when there are three or more upper and lower symbol array lines, diagonal symbol array lines may be provided in addition to this (for example, in the case of upper and lower three lines, two diagonal symbols with upper right and lower right) Array lines). Furthermore, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R scroll horizontally, a plurality of vertical symbol array lines (for example, left symbol array line, middle symbol array line, right symbol array line) are provided in the left-right direction. You may

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68 to FIG. 70, the symbol array in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are shifted from the prescribed stop position and stopped is stopped at the prescribed stop position. Although it was set as the symbol arrangement used as a jackpot symbol arrangement, this invention is not limited to this. For example, the symbol array that is shifted from the prescribed stop position and stopped may be a specific loose pattern or a symbol array of reach. Furthermore, in the case of the symbol array that will be the big hit symbol array if the symbol array stopped in the offset position is stopped at the specified stop position, and then the symbol array stopped in the offset position if it becomes a big hit in the hold. The jackpot symbol arrangement may be displayed in the same symbol arrangement. By this configuration, not only the jackpot suggestion but also the jackpot symbol arrangement can be suggested, and as a result, the player can determine in advance whether or not the present jackpot is a certainty jackpot.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are shifted from the prescribed stop position and stopped, an effect using the color of blue effect effect or red effect is performed, Although the jackpot assignment rate is changed depending on the type of effect presentation, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect presentation may use three or more colors and change the jackpot assignment rate depending on the difference in these colors. Alternatively, the effect presentation may use a plurality of types of characters instead of colors, and may change the jackpot assignment rate depending on the type of these characters. Of course, color and character may be used in combination to produce effect effects. Furthermore, although the effect effect uses a blue effect image that simulates a water droplet and a red effect image that simulates a flame, these water droplets and flames are not particularly limited, and the effect image is any image May be (but an image that makes you feel a specific color is desirable).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are shifted from the prescribed stop position and stopped, the battle effect is performed with a predetermined probability, and the result of this battle effect is Although the suggestion of the jackpot has been made, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of a battle effect, a story effect may be performed, and a jackpot may be suggested according to the contents of the story effect. In this case, depending on the type of the shifted symbol array, the rate at which the user reaches reach within the subsequent hold, the rate of development to the post-reach story effect, and the content of the story effect (big hit expectation) may be changed. If configured in this way, a single effect of displaying the shifted symbol array simultaneously suggests a plurality of game indexes such as the reach ratio in the subsequent hold, the story effect development rate, and the jackpot expectation in the story effect As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol are placed on a predetermined symbol array line among a plurality of symbol array lines in predetermined variations of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Although 8R is stopped and a predetermined reach symbol is displayed, it indicates that the predetermined fluctuation is likely to be a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in a predetermined symbol array line and a specific loose eye other than reach is displayed, it is suggested that the predetermined variation is likely to be a big hit. Good. In this case, after the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the open end, so-called pseudo-links are performed to re-change the decorative symbols 8L and 8R, and then the left decorative symbol 8L and the predetermined symbol array line The right decoration symbol 8R may be stopped to display a predetermined reach symbol. If configured in this way, the interest of the game can be further improved.
In addition, a pseudo ream is an effect which makes it appear that fluctuation display of a decoration symbol has continued in a fixed number of times in a pseudo | simulated, and is an effect which may be performed at the time of the start of fluctuation or reach effect. For example, the pseudo ream is an effect that repeats the effect of causing the decorative symbol to start fluctuating and temporarily stopping, an effect that repeats the effect of temporarily stopping at least a part of the predetermined symbol array of the decorative symbol, a predetermined logo (for example, NEXT) It includes an effect of repeating the effect of temporarily stopping, or an effect of performing a fluctuation effect of a decorative symbol together with a display that reminds of a pseudo sequence such as “× 2”, “× 3”, “pseudo”. The number of effects to be repeated may be referred to as a pseudo run number, and may be written as “pseudo 2” or “x 2” if it is two, “pseudo 3” or “x 3” if it is three.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A6-1]
Symbol display means capable of displaying variable display of symbols;
Decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol according to the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means;
A gaming machine equipped with
In the predetermined variation of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display means, there are cases where the decorative symbol is stopped at a prescribed stop position and cases where the decorative symbol is shifted from the prescribed stop position and stopped.
When stopping from the specified stop position, it is easier for the player to be given an advantageous benefit in the fluctuation related to the suspension after the predetermined change than when stopping at the specified stop position.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect A6-2]
The decorative pattern has a first decorative pattern, a second decorative pattern, and a third decorative pattern.
The decorative symbol display means is
When stopping the decorative pattern at the specified stop position, the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern are stopped in a row.
When stopping the decorative pattern from the predetermined stop position, any one of the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern is shifted from the one row and stopped. ,
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1 characterized in that
[Aspect A6-3]
Equipped with display means capable of executing multiple display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a plurality of types of effect effects in connection with stopping of the decorative symbol as one of the plurality of display effects.
The awarding rate of advantageous benefits to the player varies depending on the type of the effect presentation,
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1 or aspect A6-2 characterized in that
[Aspect A6-4]
Symbol display means capable of displaying variable display of symbols;
Decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol according to the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The decoration pattern has a first decoration pattern, a second decoration pattern, and a third decoration pattern, and the third decoration pattern is more than the first decoration pattern and the second decoration pattern. Shall stop later,
The decorative symbol display means can stop a plurality of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol and display a plurality of symbol array lines at the same time with a predetermined variation.
When the predetermined first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped in a predetermined symbol array line among the plurality of symbol array lines, a benefit advantageous to the player is given in the predetermined fluctuation. Cheap,
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect A6-5]
The plurality of symbol arrangement lines are displayed in steps.
When the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped in a predetermined row of the plurality of symbol arrangement lines displayed in the step shape and the predetermined symbol array is reached, the predetermined variation It is easy to give the player advantageous benefits at
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-4, characterized in that

  The decorative symbol superposition effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. The decorative symbol superposition effect may be performed, for example, during a change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction to execute the decorative symbol overlapping effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read out from the ROM 103 This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Decorative symbol superposition effect A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superposition effect A. In the decorative symbol superposition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), the decorative symbol non-display effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed during the variable effect To be executed. The decorative symbol non-display effect is the same as the decorative symbol disappearance effect of the decorative symbol variation effect A shown in FIG. 48 (J). That is, before the decorative symbol non-display effect of FIG. 72 (A), the effects of FIG. 48 (A) to FIG. 48 (I) of decorative symbol variation effect A may be performed. The decorative symbol non-display effect in FIG. 72 (A) is only that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed, and any other image is displayed. Good. For example, any special reach effect may be performed.

  Next, the decorative symbol enlarged display effect shown in FIG. 72 (B) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are partially out of the display screen 7a, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is a left decorative symbol 8L and a right decorative symbol 8R. It is displayed overlapping the part. Next, as shown in FIG. 72C, a jackpot image superimposed display effect is executed. Specifically, the first jackpot image MF1 is displayed overlapping the left decorative symbol 8L, the second jackpot image MF2 is displayed overlapping the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the third jackpot image MF3 overlaps the right decorative symbol 8R. Is displayed. The first jackpot image MF1, the second jackpot image MF2, and the third jackpot image MF3 are images written as "jackpot", respectively, and the left decoration pattern 8L, the middle decoration pattern 8C, and the right decoration It suggests that it is a combined jackpot of the symbol 8R. The inner decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping with a portion of the first jackpot image MF1, and the inner decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping with a portion of the third jackpot image MF3.

  Next, the decorative symbol reduction display effect shown in FIG. 72 (D) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are respectively reduced and displayed. At this time, the first jackpot image MF1, the second jackpot image MF2, and the third jackpot image MF3 are also reduced and displayed. By this reduction, the middle decoration pattern 8C is not overlapped with the first jackpot image MF1, and the middle decoration pattern 8C is not overlapped with the third jackpot image MF3. That is, by transitioning from FIG. 72 (C) to FIG. 72 (D), from the state in which the middle decoration pattern 8C overlaps the first big hit image MF1, the middle decoration pattern 8C does not overlap the first big hit image MF1. A transition is made from the state in which the middle decoration pattern 8C is superimposed on the third jackpot image MF3 to a state in which the middle decoration pattern 8C is not superimposed on the third jackpot image MF3.

  Next, the special jackpot image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 72 (E) is executed. Specifically, the first special jackpot image MS1 is displayed overlapping the first jackpot image MF1, the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed overlapping the second jackpot image MF2, and the third special jackpot image MF3 is displayed. The jackpot image MS3 is displayed overlapping. The first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 are images written as "special jackpot", respectively, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, And, it is suggested that the combined jackpot of the right decorative symbol 8R is special, that is, it is a definite variation jackpot. In other words, the first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 indicate the jackpot type. The second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed overlapping with a portion of the first special jackpot image MS1, and the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed overlapping with a portion of the third special jackpot image MS3. The first special jackpot image MS1 is displayed in an overlapping manner so that a part of the first jackpot image MF1 becomes visible, and the second special jackpot image MS2 becomes that a part of the second jackpot image MF2 becomes visible And the third special jackpot image MS3 is displayed in an overlapping manner so that a part of the third jackpot image MF3 is visible.

[Decorative symbol superposition effect B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for describing the decorative symbol superposition effect B. The decorative symbol superimposing effect B is different from the decorative symbol superimposing effect A in timing at which the big hit images MF1 to MF3 are displayed. The decorative symbol non-display performance of FIG. 73 (A) is the same as that of FIG. 72 (A) of the decorative symbol superposition effect A. Next, a jackpot image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 73 (B) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are newly displayed from the state where they are not displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the first jackpot image MF1 is already displayed overlapping the left decorative symbol 8L, the second jackpot image MF2 is displayed overlapping the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the third jackpot image MF3 is superimposed on the right decorative symbol 8R. It is displayed. The first jackpot image MF1, the second jackpot image MF2, and the third jackpot image MF3 are images written as "jackpot", respectively, and the left decoration pattern 8L, the middle decoration pattern 8C, and the right decoration It suggests that it is a combined jackpot of the symbol 8R. The inner decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping with a portion of the first jackpot image MF1, and the inner decorative pattern 8C is displayed overlapping with a portion of the third jackpot image MF3.

  Next, the decorative symbol reduction display effect shown in FIG. 73 (C) is executed. The decorative symbol reduction display effect of FIG. 73 (C) is the same as that of FIG. 72 (D) of the decorative symbol overlapping effect A. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are respectively reduced and displayed. At this time, the first jackpot image MF1, the second jackpot image MF2, and the third jackpot image MF3 are also reduced and displayed. By this reduction, the middle decoration pattern 8C is not overlapped with the first jackpot image MF1, and the middle decoration pattern 8C is not overlapped with the third jackpot image MF3.

  Next, the special jackpot image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 73 (D) is executed. The special jackpot image superimposed display effect of FIG. 73 (D) is the same as that of FIG. 72 (E) of the decorative symbol superimposed effect A. Specifically, the first special jackpot image MS1 is displayed overlapping the first jackpot image MF1, the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed overlapping the second jackpot image MF2, and the third special jackpot image MF3 is displayed. The jackpot image MS3 is displayed overlapping. The first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 are images written as "special jackpot", respectively, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, And, it is suggested that the combined jackpot of the right decorative symbol 8R is special, that is, it is a definite variation jackpot. The second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed overlapping with a portion of the first special jackpot image MS1, and the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed overlapping with a portion of the third special jackpot image MS3.

[Decorative symbol superposition effect C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superposition effect C. Compared to the decorative symbol superposition effect A, the decorative symbol superposition effect C differs in the contents of the images MF1 to MF3 and the images MS1 to MS3. The decorative symbol non-display performance of FIG. 74 (A) is the same as that of FIG. 72 (A) of the decorative symbol superposition effect A. The decorative symbol enlarged display effect of FIG. 74 (B) is the same as that of FIG. 72 (B) of the decorative symbol overlapping effect A.

  Next, a predetermined image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 74 (C) is executed. Specifically, the first image MF1 is displayed overlapping the left decorative symbol 8L, the second image MF2 is displayed overlapping the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the third image MF3 is displayed overlapping the right decorative symbol 8R. . The first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3 are images written as "HELLO", respectively. The inner decoration pattern 8C is displayed overlapping with a portion of the first image MF1, and the inner decoration pattern 8C is displayed overlapping with a portion of the third image MF3.

  Next, the decorative symbol reduction display effect shown in FIG. 74 (D) is executed. Specifically, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are respectively reduced and displayed. At this time, the first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3 are also reduced and displayed. By this reduction, the middle decoration pattern 8C is not overlapped with the first image MF1, and the middle decoration pattern 8C is not overlapped with the third image MF3. That is, by transitioning from FIG. 74 (C) to FIG. 74 (D), transition from the state in which the middle decorative symbol 8C overlaps the first image MF1 to a state in which the middle decorative symbol 8C does not overlap the first image MF1 The transition from the state in which the middle decoration pattern 8C is overlapped to the third image MF3 to a state in which the middle decoration pattern 8C does not overlap to the third image MF3 is transitioned.

  Next, the special jackpot image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 74 (E) is executed. Specifically, the special jackpot image MS is displayed superimposed on the first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3. The special jackpot image MS is an image written as "special jackpot", and the combination jackpot of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is special, that is, a definite variation jackpot Suggests that. In other words, the special jackpot image MS suggests a jackpot type. The special jackpot image MS is displayed so as to overlap so that a part of each of the first image MF1, the second image MF2, and the third image MF3 is visible.

[Decorative symbol superposition effect D]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol superposition effect D. FIG. The decorative symbol overlapping effect D differs from the decorative symbol overlapping effect A in the contents of the images MF1 to MF3 and the images MS1 to MS3 and the displayed conditions. First, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), a state in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped with a missing eye is displayed during variation production. Next, a suggestive image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 75 (B) is performed. Specifically, the first suggestion image MF1 is displayed overlapping the left decorative pattern 8L, the second suggestion image MF2 is displayed overlapping the middle decoration pattern 8C, and the third suggestion image MF3 overlaps the right decoration pattern 8R. Is displayed. The first suggestion image MF1, the second suggestion image MF2, and the third suggestion image MF3 are images in which "if they are!" The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R suggest that the display may not be finalized yet. In addition, inside decoration design 8C may be displayed overlapping with a part of 1st suggestion picture MF1, and inside decoration design 8C may be displayed overlapping with a part of 3rd indication picture MF3.

  Next, a special suggestion image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 75 (C) is executed. Specifically, the special suggestion image MS is displayed superimposed on the first suggestion image MF1, the second suggestion image MF2, and the third suggestion image MF3. The special suggestion image MS is an image written “Masaha !!!”, and there is a high possibility that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the temporary stop display are not definite display Suggest that. In other words, the special suggestion image MS suggests the start of the pseudo-sequence effect and also suggests that the jackpot's expectation has increased. The special suggestion image MS is displayed in an overlapping manner so that a part of each of the first suggestion image MF1, the second suggestion image MF2, and the third suggestion image MF3 is visible. Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R during temporary stop display are variably displayed again, and the pseudo-link effect is executed.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of a decorative symbol superposition production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the first big hit image MF1 is displayed overlapping the left decorative symbol 8L, and the second big hit image MF2 is displayed overlapping the middle decorative symbol 8C. The first special jackpot image MS1 is superimposed and displayed on the first jackpot image MF1 after the first effect and the first effect in which the third jackpot image MF3 is displayed overlapping the right decorative symbol 8R. It is possible to execute a second effect in which the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed superimposed on the jackpot image MF2 and the third special jackpot image MS3 is displayed superimposed on the third jackpot image MF3. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72C and 73C, in the first effect, after the middle decoration symbol 8C is displayed overlapping with the third jackpot image MF3, the figure is shown. As shown in FIG. 72 (D) and FIG. 73 (D), the state is transitioned to a state in which the middle decorative symbol 8C does not overlap the third jackpot image MF3. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72C and 73C, in the first effect, the middle decoration symbol 8C is displayed overlapping the first jackpot image MF1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72 (E) and FIG. 73 (E), in the second effect, the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed superimposed on the first special jackpot image MS1. The second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed superimposed on the third special jackpot image MS3. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72 (E) and FIG. 73 (E), in the second effect, the first special jackpot so that a part of the first jackpot image MF1 becomes visible. Image MS1 is displayed in an overlapping manner, and the second special jackpot image MS2 is displayed in an overlapping manner so that a part of the second jackpot image MF2 can be viewed, and a part of a third jackpot image MF3 can be viewed The third special jackpot image MS3 is displayed overlapping. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 72 (E) and 73 (E), in the second effect, a combination of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R Indicates a jackpot, and the first special jackpot image MS1, the second special jackpot image MS2, and the third special jackpot image MS3 suggest a jackpot type. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a decorative symbol superposition production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 72 (B) to 72 (E), images other than the images exemplified above may be included. For example, in FIGS. 72 (B) to 48 (E), a right-handed image or the like may be displayed in addition to the decorative symbol. The same applies to FIGS. 73 and 74.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image having the same content as the first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image having the same content as the first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a fourth image having a content different from that of the first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a fifth image having the same content as the fourth image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a sixth image having the same content as the fourth image,
The first image is displayed overlapping the first decorative symbol, the second image is displayed overlapping the second decorative symbol, and the third image overlaps the third decorative symbol. The first effect to be displayed,
After the first effect, the fourth image is displayed superimposed on the first image, the fifth image is displayed superimposed on the second image, and the third image is displayed on the third image. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a second effect in which images of 6 are superimposed and displayed.
態 様 [Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1,
In the first effect, after the second decorative symbol is displayed overlapping with the third image, transition is made to a state in which the second decorative symbol does not overlap with the third image. Gaming machine.
[Aspect A7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A7-1 or aspect A7-2,
In the first effect, the second decorative symbol is displayed overlapping the first image.
[Aspect A7-4]
A game machine according to any one of Aspects A7-1 to A7-3, wherein
In the second effect, the fifth image is displayed overlapping the fourth image, and the fifth image is displayed overlapping the sixth image.
態 様 [Aspect A7-5]
A game machine according to any one of Aspect A7-1 and A7-4, wherein
In the second effect, the fourth image is displayed so as to overlap so that a part of the first image can be viewed, and the second image can be viewed a part of the second image. 5. A game machine characterized in that the fifth image is displayed in an overlapping manner, and the sixth image is displayed in an overlapping manner so that a part of the third image can be viewed.
態 様 [Aspect A7-6]
A game machine according to any one of Aspects A7-1 to A7-5, wherein
In the second effect, the combination of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol suggests a jackpot, and the fourth image and the fifth A game machine characterized in that the image of and the sixth image indicate the type of jackpot.

  The jackpot background display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79. The jackpot background display effect may be performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol, during the jackpot game, or the like. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction for executing the big hit background display effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103 This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Big win background display effect A]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for describing the jackpot background display effect A.
The big hit background display effect A is a effect executed when the big hit symbol array is displayed after the reach effect. In the jackpot background display effect A, first, a jackpot effect 1 is executed as shown in FIG. 76 (A). In this jackpot effect 1, a background image HK1 and a jackpot symbol array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which an ally character and an enemy character are performing battle rendition. The big hit symbol array A81 is composed of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are Zoromes with the "6" symbol. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the near side (front side) of the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol arrangement of the “6” symbol is a jackpot arrangement of symbols in which it can not be determined whether the gaming state after the jackpot game is a normal state or a definite change state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), jackpot effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot effect 2, a background image HK 2 (cross hatch portion) is displayed as a background image of the jackpot symbol array A 81. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed in the background image HK2 and displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK2. In addition, the background image HK2 is disposed in the background image HK1 and displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. The size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76C, jackpot effect 3 is executed. In this jackpot effect 3, the jackpot symbol array A81 is re-varied on the background image HK2.
Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), jackpot effect 4 is executed. In this jackpot effect 4, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the background image HK2 again. The big hit symbol array A81 is constituted by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are Zoromes of the "7" symbol. The jackpot symbol array A81 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 at the jackpot effect 2 and is a jackpot symbol array which suggests that the gaming state after the jackpot will be a definite change state.

  The jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in jackpot effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in jackpot effect 2 and suggests that the gaming state after jackpot will be a definite variation state Although it is jackpot symbol arrangement, it is not restricted to this, and it may be the same jackpot symbol arrangement as jackpot symbol arrangement A81 at the time of jackpot effect 2.

[Big win background display effect B]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for describing the jackpot background display effect B.
The jackpot background display effect B is an effect executed when the jackpot symbol array is displayed after the reach effect. In the jackpot background display effect B, first, a jackpot effect 1 is executed as shown in FIG. 77 (A). In this jackpot effect 1, a background image HK1 and a jackpot symbol array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which an ally character and an enemy character are performing battle rendition. The big hit symbol array A81 is composed of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are Zoromes with the "6" symbol. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the near side (front side) of the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol arrangement of the “6” symbol is a jackpot arrangement of symbols in which it can not be determined whether the gaming state after the jackpot game is a normal state or a definite change state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), jackpot effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot effect 2, a background image HK 2 (cross hatch portion) is displayed as a background image of the jackpot symbol array A 81. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed in the background image HK2 and displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK2. In addition, the background image HK2 is disposed in the background image HK1 and displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. Furthermore, a boundary line KL is displayed at the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. The size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), jackpot effect 3 is executed. In this jackpot effect 3, the jackpot symbol array A81 is re-varied on the background image HK2. Further, in the jackpot effect 3, a button image BTN is displayed. The button image BTN is arranged on the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2 (on the boundary line KL). The button image BTN is displayed to urge the player to press the effect button 63.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), jackpot effect 4 is executed. In the jackpot effect 4, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed again on the background image HK2 by the player pressing the effect button 63. The big hit symbol array A81 is constituted by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are Zoromes of the "7" symbol. The jackpot symbol array A81 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 at the jackpot effect 2 and is a jackpot symbol array which suggests that the gaming state after the jackpot will be a definite change state.

  The jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in jackpot effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in jackpot effect 2 and suggests that the gaming state after jackpot will be a definite variation state Although it is jackpot symbol arrangement, it is not restricted to this, and it may be the same jackpot symbol arrangement as jackpot symbol arrangement A81 at the time of jackpot effect 2.

[Big win background display effect C]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for describing the jackpot background display effect C.
The jackpot background display effect C is an effect executed when the jackpot symbol array is displayed after the reach effect. In the jackpot background display effect B, first, a jackpot effect 1 is executed as shown in FIG. 78 (A). In this jackpot effect 1, a background image HK1 and a jackpot symbol array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which an ally character and an enemy character are performing battle rendition. The big hit symbol array A81 is composed of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are Zoromes with the "6" symbol. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the near side (front side) of the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol arrangement of the “6” symbol is a jackpot arrangement of symbols in which it can not be determined whether the gaming state after the jackpot game is a normal state or a definite change state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), jackpot effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot effect 2, a background image HK 2 (cross hatch portion) is displayed as a background image of the jackpot symbol array A 81. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed in the background image HK2 and displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK2. In addition, the background image HK2 is disposed in the background image HK1 and displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. Furthermore, a boundary line KL is displayed at the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. The size of background image HK2 is larger than the size of background image HK1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78C, jackpot effect 3 is executed. In this jackpot effect 3, the jackpot symbol array A81 is re-varied on the background image HK2. Further, in the jackpot effect 3, a button image BTN is displayed. The button image BTN is arranged on the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2 (on the boundary line KL). The button image BTN is displayed to urge the player to press the effect button 63.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (D), jackpot effect 4 is executed. In the jackpot effect 4, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed again on the background image HK2 by the player pressing the effect button 63. The big hit symbol array A81 is constituted by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are Zoromes of the "7" symbol. The jackpot symbol array A81 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 at the jackpot effect 2 and is a jackpot symbol array which suggests that the gaming state after the jackpot will be a definite change state.

  The jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in jackpot effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in jackpot effect 2 and suggests that the gaming state after jackpot will be a definite variation state Although it is jackpot symbol arrangement, it is not restricted to this, and it may be the same jackpot symbol arrangement as jackpot symbol arrangement A81 at the time of jackpot effect 2.

[Big win background display effect D]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for describing the jackpot background display effect D.
The big hit background display effect D is a effect executed when the big hit symbol arrangement is displayed after the reach effect. In the jackpot background display effect B, first, a jackpot effect 1 is executed as shown in FIG. 79 (A). In this jackpot effect 1, a background image HK1 and a jackpot symbol array A81 are displayed. The background image HK1 represents a scene in which an ally character and an enemy character are performing battle rendition. The big hit symbol array A81 is composed of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are Zoromes with the "6" symbol. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the near side (front side) of the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol arrangement of the “6” symbol is a jackpot arrangement of symbols in which it can not be determined whether the gaming state after the jackpot game is a normal state or a definite change state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), jackpot effect 2 is executed. In the jackpot effect 2, a background image HK 2 (cross hatch portion) is displayed as a background image of the jackpot symbol array A 81. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed in the background image HK2 and displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK2. In addition, the background image HK2 is disposed in the background image HK1 and displayed on the front side (front side) of the background image HK1. Furthermore, a boundary line KL is displayed at the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2. The size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79C, jackpot effect 3 is executed. In this jackpot effect 3, the jackpot symbol array A81 is re-varied on the background image HK2. Further, in the jackpot effect 3, a button image BTN is displayed. The button image BTN is arranged on the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2 (on the boundary line KL). The button image BTN is displayed to urge the player to press the effect button 63.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), jackpot effect 4 is executed. In the jackpot effect 4, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed again on the background image HK2 by the player pressing the effect button 63. The big hit symbol array A81 is constituted by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and these decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are Zoromes of the "7" symbol. The jackpot symbol array A81 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 at the jackpot effect 2 and is a jackpot symbol array which suggests that the gaming state after the jackpot will be a definite change state.

  The jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in jackpot effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in jackpot effect 2 and suggests that the gaming state after jackpot will be a definite variation state Although it is jackpot symbol arrangement, it is not restricted to this, and it may be the same jackpot symbol arrangement as jackpot symbol arrangement A81 at the time of jackpot effect 2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 79E, the jackpot effect 5 is executed. In the jackpot effect 5, the background image HK2 is erased, and the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the near side (front side) of the background image HK1. In the big hit symbol array A 81, the display position moves to the middle of the display screen 7 a and is displayed larger than in the case of the big hit effect 4.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of a big hit background display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot background display effect, when the background image HK1 is displayed and the background image HK1 is displayed, the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed, and the jackpot symbol array A81 is the background image HK1. Of the background image HK2 is displayed when the background image HK1 is displayed, and the background image HK2 is displayed in front of the background image HK1. When the display of the background image HK2 is performed, the display of the jackpot symbol array A81 is performed, and the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed in front of the background image HK2. According to this configuration, at the time of big hit, the background image HK2 is displayed in front of the background image HK1 and the big hit symbol array A81 is displayed in front of this background image HK2. While doing, it is possible to emphasize the jackpot symbol arrangement A81. Therefore, the player can enjoy the joy of the jackpot symbol array A81 while enjoying the effect in the background image HK1. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the boundary line KL is provided between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2 in the jackpot background display effect. According to this configuration, since the boundary between the background image HK1 and the background image HK2 is clear, it is possible for the player to clarify the division between the effect performed in the background image HK1 and the display of the jackpot symbol array A81. it can. Therefore, the player can enjoy the joy of the jackpot symbol array A81 while enjoying the effect in the background image HK1. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot background display effects A, B and D, the size of the background image HK2 is smaller than the size of the background image HK1. According to this configuration, even if the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed, it is possible to enjoy the predetermined effect in the background image HK1 in a meaningful manner. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot background display effect, the jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot effect 2 can not be determined whether the gaming state after the jackpot game is the normal state or the definite change state. The jackpot symbol array A81 displayed in the jackpot effect 4 is a jackpot symbol array different from the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 2 and suggests that the gaming state after the jackpot will be a definite change state It is a jackpot symbol arrangement to do. Then, the jackpot design 2 for both jackpot effect 2 and jackpot effect 4 is performed in the area where the background image HK2 is displayed before the background image HK2 and the background image HK2 is displayed. According to this configuration, the re-lottery effect for changing to the jackpot symbol array that indicates the relative advantage for the player from the jackpot symbol array that indicates the relative disadvantage for the player is placed in front of the background image HK1. Since the background image HK2 to be displayed can be executed as a background, this re-lottery effect can be impressed on the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot background display effect D, the background image HK2 is erased after the re-lottery effect, and the jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the background image HK1. The jackpot symbol array A81 is displayed on the near side (front side) of the background image HK1. According to this configuration, it is possible to further emphasize the jackpot symbol array A81, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the jackpot background display effect, the jackpot symbol array A81 in the jackpot effect 1 and the jackpot effect 2 is a symbol array using the same symbol. According to this configuration, it is possible to further emphasize the jackpot symbol array A81, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a decorative symbol fluctuation production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the jackpot background display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the jackpot symbol array A 81 may be different between the jackpot effect 1 and the jackpot effect 2.

[Modification 2]
In the jackpot background display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the position of the background image HK2 may be the upper left, lower left, lower right, or middle of the background image HK1. Further, the gaming machine 1 may have a display device different from the image display device 7. Then, the background image HK1 may be displayed on a display device different from the image display device 7, and the background image HK2 may be displayed on the display device.

[Modification 3]
In the jackpot background display effect B of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display mode (for example, color and pattern) of the button image BTN may have a plurality of patterns. In this case, the jackpot expectation may differ depending on the display mode of the button image BTN. In addition, when the button image BTN is displayed, the effect button 63 may be illuminated in a plurality of patterns. In this case, the jackpot expectation may be different depending on how the effect button 63 is lighted.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A8-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first background image,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a first jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot,
The third display effect is an effect of displaying a second background image,
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a second jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed, and the first jackpot in the second display effect The symbol array is displayed in front of the first background image of the first display effect, and after the second display effect is performed, when the first display effect is performed. The third display effect is performed, and the second background image in the third display effect is arranged in front of the first background image in the first display effect, and the third display effect The fourth display effect is performed when the second display effect of the fourth display effect is performed in front of the second background image of the third display effect. Is displayed,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect A8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-1,
When the second background image is disposed in front of the first background image, a predetermined line is disposed at the boundary between the second background image and the first background image.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect A8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-2,
When the second background image is arranged in the first background image, the area where the second background image is displayed is smaller than the area where the first background image is displayed,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect A8-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-3,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is an effect of changing the second jackpot symbol array into a third jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot,
The jackpot represented by the third jackpot symbol array is a jackpot advantageous to the player than the jackpot represented by the second jackpot symbol array,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect in some cases.
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the fourth display effect, and the fifth display effect is an area in which the second background image of the third display effect is displayed. Takes place in
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect A8-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A8-4,
In the combination effect, the display of the second background image in the third display effect is ended after the fifth display effect, and thereafter, the third jackpot symbol array is the one of the first background image Displayed in the foreground,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect A8-6]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 5, which is:
The first jackpot symbol array and the second jackpot symbol array are the same symbol array,
A game machine characterized by

  The multiple timer effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83. The multiple timer effect may be executed during the change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the plural timer effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103 It is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Multi-timer effect A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the multiple timer effect A. The timer effects shown in FIG. 80 (A) to FIG. 80 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the multiple timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), the change effect of the decorative symbol is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, a timer image display effect shown in FIG. 80 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed while the decorative symbol is changed. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point in time (here, The number of seconds of 01 "to" 99 "is displayed. Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when a certain point in time is reached, it is not necessary that some change in display occurs. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation degree suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point at which the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point at which the operation reception period ends. In addition, it may be the time when the operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, random number display / countdown effect shown in FIG. 80 (C) and FIG. 80 (D) is executed. Specifically, when the first timer TM1 is displayed, "30" is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started). On the other hand, the second timer TM2 is not started at the time of display (the countdown is not started), and is displayed as a random number. The random number display here is that numerical values between "00" and "99" are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1.

  After the random number display / countdown effect is performed for a while, as shown in FIG. 80E, the countdown of the second timer TM2 is started (started). When the second timer TM2 is started, a remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1 is displayed. Here, in a state where the remaining period of the first timer IM1 is displaying "28", after the random number is displayed, the second timer TM2 displays "10" as the remaining period, and thereafter, the countdown is started. Ru. At the start of the countdown, the switching speed of the second timer TM2 becomes slower. Thus, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

  After the second timer TM2 starts counting down (after being started), for a while, as shown in FIG. 80 (F), each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 counts down (double countdown effect ). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 80 (H), the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image is displayed that suggests a probability (expected degree) of becoming a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation production. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation "Chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 80 (J), the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. Similarly to the first expectation degree indication effect, the second expectation degree indication effect displays an image indicating a probability (expected degree) to be a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second drawn “super heat!” At the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is such that the expectation of the jackpot is higher than that of the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Multi-timer effect B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for describing the multiple timer effect B. The multiple timer effect B is different from the multiple timer effect A in the number of displayed timer images and the number of digital digits to be displayed. The timer effects shown in FIG. 81 (A) to FIG. 81 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the multiple timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), the first timer TM1 is displayed in a state in which the change effect of the decorative symbol is executed. Here, the first timer TM1 is a timer image in which a 3-digit digital display is shown inside a rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point in time by the countdown (here, “001” to “999 The "number of seconds" is displayed. When the first timer TM1 is displayed, "100" is displayed as the remaining period, and then the countdown is started (started). As in the multiple timer effect A, a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when a certain point is reached, it is not necessary to cause any change in display. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation degree suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point at which the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point at which the operation reception period ends. In addition, it may be the time when the operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the second timer TM2 is displayed while the first timer TM1 is displayed. The first timer TM1 is a 3-digit digital display timer image, and is not started (when the countdown is not started) and displayed in random numbers. The random number display here is that numerical values between "000" and "999" are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. The first timer TM1 continues the countdown.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81C, in a state where the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed, the third timer TM3 is displayed. The third timer TM3 is a 3-digit digital display timer image, and displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 displays "86", the remaining period of the second timer TM2 is displayed as "60", and the countdown is started (started). Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (D), the countdown of the second timer TM2 is started (started). When the second timer TM2 is started, a remaining period shorter than the remaining periods displayed by the first timer TM1 and the third timer TM3 is displayed. Here, in the state where the remaining period of the first timer IM1 displays "55" and the remaining period of the third timer IM3 displays "55", the second timer TM2 displays the remaining after displaying the random numbers. “10” is displayed as a period of, and then the countdown is started. At the start of the countdown, the switching speed of the second timer TM2 becomes slower. Thus, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

  After each of the three timers TM1 to TM3 executes the countdown, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", as shown in FIG. 81 (F) , The first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image is displayed that suggests a probability (expected degree) of becoming a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation production. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation "Chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (G), when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 81 (H), the third expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. In the third expectation degree indication effect, similarly to the first expectation degree indication effect, an image is displayed that suggests a probability (expected degree) to be a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero "0", the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the third "TMHAGE !!" is drawn at the position where the third timer TM3 is displayed. An expectation degree suggestion image EI3 is displayed. Here, in the third expectation degree suggestion image EI3, contents having a high expectation level of the jackpot are displayed than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 81 (J), the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. Similarly to the first and third expected degree suggestive effects, the second expected degree suggestive effect displays an image indicating a probability (expected degree) of becoming a jackpot in the fluctuation during the variable effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second drawn “super heat!” At the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the second expectation level suggestion image EI2 is displayed with contents having a higher expectation level of the jackpot than the first expectation level suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation degree suggestion image EI3.

[Multi-timer effect C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the multiple timer effect C. The multiple timer effect C is different from the multiple timer effect A in the configuration of the timer image and the display content of the timer image before the start. The timer effects shown in FIG. 82 (A) to FIG. 82 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the multiple timer effect C, first, a timer image display effect shown in FIG. 82 (A) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed while the decorative symbol is changed. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 have a frame image formed around a 2-digit digital display, and have “ON” or “OFF” display next to the frame image. In the second timer TM2, the shutter is closed and the digital display can not be seen. “ON” and “OFF” shown beside the frame images of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate whether the shutter is open or not. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 display the remaining period until reaching a certain point (here, the number of seconds from "01" to "99") by counting down. Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when a certain point in time is reached, it is not necessary that some change in display occurs. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation degree suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point at which the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point at which the operation reception period ends. In addition, it may be the time when the operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (B) and FIG. 82 (C), the first timer countdown effect is executed. Specifically, when the first timer TM1 is displayed, "30" is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started). On the other hand, the second timer TM2 is not started at the time of display (the countdown is not started), and the shutter is closed. Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), when the shutter of the second timer TM2 is opened, the digital display displayed as “10” becomes visible. That is, a remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (E), the second timer TM2 countdown is started (started).

  After the second timer TM2 starts counting down (after being started), for a while, as shown in FIG. 82 (F), each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 counts down (double countdown effect ). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 82 (H), the first expected degree suggestion effect is performed. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image is displayed that suggests a probability (expected degree) of becoming a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation production. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation "Chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 82 (J), the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. Similarly to the first expectation degree indication effect, the second expectation degree indication effect displays an image indicating a probability (expected degree) to be a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second drawn “super heat!” At the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is such that the expectation of the jackpot is higher than that of the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Multi-timer effect D]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the multiple timer effect D. The multiple timer effect D is different from the multiple timer effect A in that the timer is not digital. The timer effects shown in FIG. 83 (A) to FIG. 83 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the multiple timer effect D, first, a timer image display effect shown in FIG. 83 (A) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed while the decorative symbol is changed. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are rod-shaped meters, and represent the remaining time until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a point in time. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate that the remaining period of the meter will be shortened as the remaining amount of the meter decreases, and reaching a certain point by having the remaining amount of the meter disappear (become zero) Suggest. Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when a certain point in time is reached, it is not necessary that some change in display occurs. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation degree suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point at which the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point at which the operation reception period ends. In addition, it may be the time when the operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), the first timer start effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 is displayed with the meter being full, and then the reduction of the remaining meter amount is started (started). On the other hand, the second timer TM2 is not started at the time of display, and the meter does not decrease. Next, as shown in FIG. 83C, the third timer TM3 is displayed while the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed. The third timer TM3 is a rod-shaped meter, and represents the remaining time until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a point in time. When the third timer TM3 is displayed, the remaining amount smaller than the remaining amount of the meter of the first timer TM1 is displayed. Then, the reduction of the remaining meter amount is started. Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), the second timer TM2 is started. That is, the reduction of the remaining meter amount of the second timer TM2 is started. Immediately after startup, the second timer TM2 has a remaining amount smaller than the remaining amount of the first timer TM1 and is larger than the remaining amount of the third timer TM3. Then, the reduction of the remaining meter amount is started. For a while thereafter, the remaining amount of meter decreases in each of the three timers. Then, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the third timer TM3 becomes zero, as shown in FIG. 83 (F), the third expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. In the third expectation degree indication effect, an image indicating a probability (expected degree) of becoming a big hit is displayed in the fluctuation during the fluctuation production. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the third timer TM3 becomes zero, the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the third "TM" is drawn at the position where the third timer TM3 was displayed. 3 Expected degree indication image EI3 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (G), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero, as shown in FIG. 83 (H), the first expected degree suggestive presentation is performed . In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image is displayed that suggests a probability (expected degree) of becoming a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation production. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and “heat !!” is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed. Here, the content of the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 is such that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is higher than that of the third expectation degree suggestion image EI3.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (I), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, as shown in FIG. 83 (J), the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 83 (J) . In the second expectation degree indication effect, an image indicating the probability (expected degree) of becoming a big hit is displayed in the fluctuation during the fluctuation production. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and "super heat!" Was drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the second expectation level suggestion image EI2 is displayed with contents having a higher expectation level of the jackpot than the first expectation level suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation degree suggestion image EI3.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of multiple timer production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, display is performed as shown in FIGS. 80 (B) (C), 81 (B) (C), 82 (B) (C) and 83 (B) (C). The first effect that the first timer TM1 is started in a state where the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed on the screen 7a and the second timer TM2 is not started, and FIG. 80 (D) As shown in FIG. 81 (D), FIG. 82 (D), and FIG. 83 (D), the second timer TM2 starts after the first effect, and the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1. A second effect in which the second timer TM2 displays a shorter remaining period can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (B) (C), 81 (B) (C) and 82 (B) (C), in the first effect, the second timer TM2 is used. Is a digital display of random numbers. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (G) (H), 81 (G) (H), 82 (G) (H) and 83 (G) (H), After the effect of 2, with the first timer TM1 displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expected degree is at the position at which the second timer TM2 is displayed. A third effect in which the suggestion image EI1 is displayed can be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (I) (J), 81 (I) (J), 82 (I) (J) and 83 (I) (J), After the effect of 3, the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1 disappears, and the fourth effect that the second expected degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed may be executed at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. it can. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (H) (J), 81 (H) (J), 82 (H) (J) and 83 (H) (J), The 1st production, the 2nd production, the 3rd production and the 4th production are executed during the fluctuation production, and the first expected degree suggestion image EI1 and the second expected degree suggestion image EI2 is a suggested image that indicates the jackpot expectation. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 (H) (J), 81 (H) (J), 82 (H) (J) and 83 (H) (J), 2 Expectation degree of the jackpot indicated by the expectation degree suggestion image EI2 may be higher than the expectation degree of the jackpot indicated by the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of multiple timer presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above (for example, FIG. 80 (J)), it is assumed that the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed as a content having a higher expectation level of the jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1. However, the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 may display contents having a lower expectation level of the jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 or may display contents having the same expectation degree. Further, in FIG. 81 (J), it is assumed that the second expectation level suggestion image EI2 displays a content with a higher expectation level of the jackpot than the first expectation level suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation degree suggestion image EI31. . However, the second expectation level suggestion image EI2 may be displayed with a content having a lower expectation level of the jackpot than at least one of the first expectation level suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation degree suggestion image EI3; The contents may be displayed.
[Modification 2]
In the above (for example, FIG. 80), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 becomes "0", the expectation degree indication images EI1 and EI2 are displayed. However, an image other than the expectation degree suggestion image may be displayed. For example, an operation unit image may be displayed, or an image may be displayed in which the decorative symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed.
[Modification 3]
In the above (for example, FIG. 80 (B)), the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. However, the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 may be the same as or lower than the switching speed (1 second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. In addition, the second timer TM2 may not be displayed as a random number, and may be stopped in a state where a specific numerical value is displayed.
[Modification 4]
As described above (eg, FIG. 80), the timer may include other image elements as well as portions that change with the passage of time (eg, digital display portions). For example, the timer may be an image digitally displayed in the middle of a triangular image. In this case, the triangular image portion also corresponds to the timer. In addition, an image in which the digital display portion temporarily becomes difficult to view corresponds to the timer.
[Modification 5]
In the above-described timer speed effect, the timer effect is performed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). However, the timer speed effect described above may be executed across multiple changes.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer indicating a remaining period until reaching a certain point in time;
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer indicating a remaining period until reaching a certain point in time;
A first effect in which the first timer and the second timer are displayed on the display means, and the first timer is started in a state where the second timer is not started;
After the first effect, the second timer starts, and the second timer displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the first timer. , A game machine characterized by being executable.
[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
The second timer indicates the remaining period by counting down the digital display.
In the first effect, the second timer is configured to display a random number in the digital display.
[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect B1-1 or the aspect B1-2, wherein
One of the plurality of types of images is a first predetermined image,
After the second effect, with the first timer displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the second timer disappears, and the second timer is displayed at the position A game machine characterized by being capable of executing a third effect in which the first predetermined image is displayed.
態 様 [Aspect B 1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second predetermined image,
After the third effect, there is no remaining period indicated by the first timer, and a fourth effect is performed in which the second predetermined image is displayed at the position where the first timer was displayed. A game machine characterized by what is possible.
態 様 [Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-4,
The first effect, the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect are performed during a fluctuation effect,
A game machine characterized in that the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are suggestion images that suggest an expectation of a jackpot.
[Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-5,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the jackpot expectation suggested by the second predetermined image may be higher than the jackpot expectation suggested by the first predetermined image.

  The timer effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. This timer effect can be executed in accordance with the variation display of the decoration symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "special symbol"). For example, at the start of the change display of the special symbol, the start of the change effect of the decoration symbol, or during the reach effect (super reach effect) or the like.

[Timer production A]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect A.
In timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), timer effect executability is performed. In this timer effect executability effect, the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L in the symbol display area on the left A middle decoration pattern 8C is displayed in the display area, and a right decoration pattern 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 84A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).
Further, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, an image in which the ally character CRA on the player side and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed. This battle effect is an effect for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect, and as a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA wins, and the timer is executed when the ally character CRA is eliminated The production is not performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), on the display screen 7a, the timer effect impossibility suggestive effect is executed. As a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 84 (A), in the timer effect non-recommendation effect, the characters “Lone out!” Indicating that the ally character CRA has been eliminated are largely displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying this character "loss out!", It is suggested that the timer effect is not executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R this time.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), on the display screen 7a, a lost symbol stop effect is executed. This lost symbol stopping effect indicates that the variation results of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 84 (A) are lost. In this example, this lost symbol arrangement is shown as "958".

  On the other hand, in place of FIG. 84 (B), as shown in FIG. 68 (D), a timer effect suggestive effect may be executed. In the timer effect suggestive effect, as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 84 (A), the characters “winning!” Indicating that the teammate character CRA has won are largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying this character "winning!", It is suggested that the timer effect is executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R this time.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), a timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 84 (A). The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. The timer image TM shown in FIG. 84E shows 10 seconds as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), the timer stop reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop reach effect, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 84 (E) is counted down to 0 seconds, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol array. It has become. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (G), the jackpot expected degree suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This big hit expectation degree suggestion production is the production which is done when the timer value of timer picture TM stops in 0 seconds. In this big hit expectation degree suggestion effect, the timer image TM is erased, the left decoration symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, the right decoration symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and a predetermined big hit expectation degree suggestion at the center of the display screen 7a The production DKE is to be performed. In addition, this big hit expectation degree suggestion production DKE is not something which especially is limited, if it is the production which suggests the big hit expectation degree such as battle production and story production, it is good being any production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (H), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the reach result shown in FIG. 84 (F) (G) was a jackpot. That is, the jackpot symbol array “777” indicated by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicates the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot.
The jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 84 (E) is not always performed, and the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 84 (C) may be performed with a predetermined probability.

  That is, in the timer effect A shown in FIG. 84, the timer effect executability effect (battle effect) is performed as the first effect of whether or not to perform the timer effect, and the ally character CRA has won as a result of the battle effect. The timer effect is provided as a second effect. Then, when the timer value is counted down by the timer effect and reaches "0", that is, when the timer value is stopped at the predetermined value, the timer image TM is erased (the timer effect is ended), suggesting a big hit expectation as the third effect. It is supposed that big hit expectation degree suggestion DKE is performed.

[Timer production B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect B.
In timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), timer effect executability is performed. In this timer effect executability effect, the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L in the symbol display area on the left A middle decoration pattern 8C is displayed in the display area, and a right decoration pattern 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 85A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).
Further, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, an image in which the ally character CRA on the player side and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed. This battle effect is an effect for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect, and as a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA wins, and the timer is executed when the ally character CRA is eliminated The production is not performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the timer effect suggestive effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In the timer effect suggestive effect, as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 85 (A), the characters “winning!” Indicating that the teammate character CRA has won are largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying this character "winning!", It is suggested that the timer effect is executed during the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R this time.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85C, the timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 85 (A). The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. The timer image TM shown in FIG. 85C shows 10 seconds as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (D), the timer stop reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop reach effect, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 85C is counted down to 0 seconds, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol arrangement. It has become. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), the character display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This character display effect is an effect to be performed when the timer value of the timer image TM is stopped at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed instead of the erased timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is an effect indicating the jackpot expectation of the variation, and in FIG. 85 (E), the character MKE "chance" is displayed at substantially the same position as the timer image TM was displayed. Be done.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F), on the display screen 7a, a lost symbol stop effect is executed. This lost symbol stopping effect indicates that the reach result shown in FIG. 85 (E) has been lost. In this example, this lost symbol arrangement is shown as "958". That is, the lost symbol array “958” indicated by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicates the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

  On the other hand, character display effects may be executed as shown in FIG. 85 (G) instead of FIG. 85 (E). This character display effect is an effect to be performed when the timer value of the timer image TM is stopped at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed instead of the erased timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is an effect that indicates the jackpot expectation of the variation, and in FIG. 85 (E), the character MKE "superheat" is at substantially the same position as the position at which the timer image TM was displayed. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85H, the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the reach result shown in FIG. 85 (G) was a jackpot. That is, the jackpot symbol array “777” indicated by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicates the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot.
In addition, the big hit finalization effect shown in FIG. 85 (H) is not always performed, and the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 85 (F) may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 85 (F) described above is not necessarily performed, and the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 85 (H) may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot decision effect is performed is higher when the character display effect shown in FIG. 85 (G) is performed than when the character display effect shown in FIG. 85 (E) is performed. There is.

  That is, in the timer effect B shown in FIG. 85, the timer effect executability effect (battle effect) is performed as the first effect of whether or not the timer effect is performed, and the ally character CRA wins as a result of the battle effect. The timer effect is provided as a second effect. Then, when the timer value is counted down by the timer effect and reaches "0", that is, when the timer value is stopped at the predetermined value, the timer image TM is erased (the timer effect is ended), suggesting a big hit expectation as the third effect. Character display production is performed. Then, a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the character display effect, and the jackpot expectation degree is suggested by the content of the displayed predetermined character MKE. That is, the character display effect is an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation degree, and the jackpot expectation degree is changed according to the content of the character displayed in the character display effect.

[Timer production C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect C.
In the timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the timer effect executability is performed. In this timer effect executability effect, the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L in the symbol display area on the left A middle decoration pattern 8C is displayed in the display area, and a right decoration pattern 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 86A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).
Further, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, an image in which the ally character CRA on the player side and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed. This battle effect is an effect for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect, and as a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA wins, and the timer is executed when the ally character CRA is eliminated The production is not performed.

  When the ally character CRA wins in the battle effect in the timer effect executability in FIG. 86 (A), timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 86 (B). In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed. The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 86 (B), 10 seconds is shown as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86C, the timer stop reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop reach effect, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 86 (B) is counted down to 0 seconds, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol arrangement It has become. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), character display effects are executed on the display screen 7a. This character display effect is an effect to be performed when the timer value of the timer image TM is stopped at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed instead of the erased timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is an effect that indicates the jackpot expectation of the variation, and in FIG. 86 (D), the character MKE "chance" is displayed at substantially the same position as the timer image TM was displayed. Be done.
And although illustration is omitted, when the character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (D) is executed, next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F) described above, the lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a Be done.

  On the other hand, in place of FIG. 86 (B), as shown in FIG. 86 (E), a decorative symbol variation effect may be executed. The decorative symbol change is an effect to be performed after the ally character CRA has won in the battle effect in the timer effect executability as shown in FIG. 86 (A). In this decorative symbol change effect, only the change effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are performed, and the timer image TM is not displayed yet. That is, the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 86 (E) is an image in which the battle effect is eliminated by the timer effect executability shown in FIG. 86 (A).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (F), the timer display reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This timer display reach effect is when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol array by the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 86 (E), or the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are When a predetermined time has elapsed after stopping in the reach symbol arrangement (before the middle decorative symbol 8C stops), the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 86 (F), 50 seconds as the timer initial value is shown. That is, in the timer display reach effect shown in FIG. 86 (E), the display timing of the timer image TM is later than when the reach is established due to the fluctuation and later than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 86 (B) Further, the timer initial value is longer than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 86 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (G), the timer stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop effect, a predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 86 (F) is counted down to 0 seconds. . In this timer stop effect, the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and a predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is performed at the center of the display screen 7a. It has become. The predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is not particularly limited, and may be battle effect or story effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (H), a character display effect is executed. This character display effect is an effect to be performed when the timer value of the timer image TM is stopped at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed instead of the erased timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is an effect that indicates the jackpot expectation of the variation, and in FIG. 86 (E), the character MKE “superheat” is at substantially the same position as the position at which the timer image TM was displayed. Is displayed.
And although illustration is omitted, when the character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (H) is executed, next, as shown in FIG. 85 (H) described above, the jackpot decision effect is executed on the display screen 7a. Ru.
It should be noted that the jackpot determination effect after the character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (H) is not necessarily performed, and the lost symbol stop effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the lost symbol stop effect after the character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (D) described above is not necessarily performed, and there may be a case where the jackpot decision effect is performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot decision effect is performed is higher when the timer display reach effect shown in FIG. 86 (F) is performed than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 86 (B), and FIG. The case where the character display effect shown in FIG. 86 (H) is performed is higher than the case where the character display effect shown in D) is performed.

  That is, in the timer effect C shown in FIG. 86, the timer effect executability effect (battle effect) is performed as the first effect of whether or not to perform the timer effect, and the ally character CRA wins as a result of the battle effect. The timer effect is provided as a second effect. Here, in the timer effect, as the display timing of the timer image TM is later, and as the time of the timer initial value of the timer image TM is longer, the jackpot expectation is higher. That is, the display timing of the timer image TM and the timer initial value of the timer image TM are effects that indicate the jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is determined by the difference between the display timing of the timer image TM and the timer initial value of the timer image TM. It is supposed to change. Then, when the timer value is counted down by the timer effect and reaches "0", that is, when the timer value is stopped at the predetermined value, the timer image TM is erased (the timer effect is ended), suggesting a big hit expectation as the third effect. Character display production is performed. Then, a predetermined character MKE is displayed in the character display effect, and the jackpot expectation degree is suggested by the content of the displayed predetermined character MKE. That is, the character display effect is an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation degree, and the jackpot expectation degree is changed according to the content of the character displayed in the character display effect.

[Timer production D]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the timer effect D.
In the timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), the timer effect executability is performed. In this timer effect executability effect, the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L in the symbol display area on the left A middle decoration pattern 8C is displayed in the display area, and a right decoration pattern 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 87 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).
Further, in the lower part of the display screen 7a, an image in which the ally character CRA on the player side and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed. This battle effect is an effect for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect, and as a result of the battle, the timer effect is executed when the ally character CRA wins, and the timer is executed when the ally character CRA is eliminated The production is not performed.

  When the ally character CRA wins in the battle effect in the timer effect executability in FIG. 87 (A), the timer display effect is executed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 87 (B). In this timer display effect, the timer image TM is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed. The timer image TM is displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image TM shown in FIG. 87 (B), 10 seconds is shown as the timer initial value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87C, the timer stop reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer stop reach effect, when the timer value of the timer image TM shown in FIG. 87 (B) is counted down to 0 seconds, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R stop in the reach symbol arrangement It has become. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), character display effects are executed on the display screen 7a. This character display effect is an effect to be performed when the timer value of the timer image TM is stopped at 0 seconds. In this character display effect, the timer image TM is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed instead of the erased timer image TM. The predetermined character MKE is an effect that indicates the jackpot expectation of the variation, and in FIG. 87 (D), the character MKE "chance" is displayed at substantially the same position as the timer image TM was displayed. Be done.
And although illustration is omitted, when the character display effect shown in FIG. 87 (D) is executed, next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F) mentioned above, the missing symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a Be done.

  On the other hand, although the illustration is omitted in place of FIG. 87 (B), when the timer effect executability shown in FIG. 87 (A) is executed, as shown in FIG. 86 (E) described above. In the display screen 7a, a decorative symbol variation effect may be executed. In this decorative symbol change effect, only the change effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are performed, and the timer image TM is not displayed yet. That is, the decorative symbol change effect is an image in which the battle effect has been eliminated by the timer effect execution execution effect shown in FIG. 87 (A).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87E, the timer W (double) display reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer W display reach effect, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol array by the decorative symbol variation effect, or the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol array When a predetermined time has elapsed since (before the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped), the timer image TM1 and the timer image TM2 are displayed on the lower left of the display screen 7a. The timer images TM1 and TM2 are displayed in a countdown mode in which the timer value counts down. In FIG. 87E, the timer image TM1 shows 50 seconds as the timer initial value, and the timer image TM2 shows 30 seconds as the timer initial value. That is, in the timer W display reach effect shown in FIG. 86 (E), the display timing of the timer images TM1 and TM2 is when or when the reach is established due to the fluctuation, and the timer display effect shown in FIG. 87 (B) The timer initial value is longer than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 87 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87F, the timer TM2 stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this timer TM2 stop effect, when the timer value of the timer image TM2 shown in FIG. 87E is counted down to 0 seconds, a predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is performed. There is. At this time, the timer image TM1 is similarly counted down to 20 seconds. In this timer TM2 stop effect, the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and a predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is performed at the center of the display screen 7a. It is supposed to be. The predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) RE is not particularly limited, and may be battle effect or story effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (G), a timer TM2 character display effect is executed. The timer TM2 character display effect is an effect that is performed when the timer value of the timer image TM2 is stopped at 0 seconds. In this timer TM2 character display effect, the timer image TM2 is erased, and a predetermined character MKE is displayed instead of the erased timer image TM2. The predetermined character MKE is an effect that indicates the jackpot expectation of the variation, and in FIG. 87 (E), the character MKE2 of "chance" is displayed at substantially the same position as the timer image TM2 was displayed. Be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87H, a timer TM 1 character display effect is executed. The timer TM1 character display effect is an effect performed when the timer value of the timer image TM1 is stopped at 0 seconds. In this timer TM1 character display effect, the timer image TM1 is erased, and a predetermined character MKE1 is displayed instead of the erased timer image TM1. The predetermined character MKE1 is an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation of the variation, and in FIG. 87 (H), the character MKE1 of "superheat" is at substantially the same position as the position where the timer image TM1 was displayed. Is displayed.
Then, although illustration is omitted, when the timer TM 1 character display effect shown in FIG. 87 (H) is executed, next, as shown in FIG. To be executed.
In addition, the big hit decision production after timer TM 1 letter indication production which is shown in this figure 87 (H) is not always done, there are times when lost design stop production is done with specified probability. Similarly, the lost symbol stop effect after the character display effect shown in FIG. 87 (D) described above is not necessarily performed, and there may be a case where the jackpot decision effect is performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot decision effect is performed is higher in the case where the timer W display reach effect shown in FIG. 87 (E) is performed than the timer display effect shown in FIG. 87 (B), and FIG. The case where the character display effect shown in FIG. 87 (G) (H) is performed is higher than the case where the character display effect shown in (D) is performed.

  That is, in the timer effect D shown in FIG. 87, the timer effect executability effect (battle effect) is performed as the first effect of whether or not the timer effect is performed, and the ally character CRA wins as a result of the battle effect. The timer effect is provided as a second effect. Here, in the timer effect, the larger the display timing of the timer image TM, the longer the time of the timer initial value of the timer image TM, and the larger the number of display of the timer image TM, the higher the jackpot expectation rate is. . That is, the display timing of the timer image TM, the timer initial value of the timer image TM, and the display number of the timer image TM are effects indicating the big hit expectation, and the display timing of the timer image TM, the timer initial value of the timer image TM and The jackpot expectation is changed by the difference in the number of display of the timer image TM. Then, when the timer value is counted down by the timer effect and reaches "0", that is, when the timer value is stopped at a predetermined value, the timer images TM1 and TM2 are sequentially erased (timer effect end), and the big hit expectation as the third effect A character display effect is given to indicate the degree. Then, predetermined characters MKE1 and MKE2 are sequentially displayed in the character display effect, and by the contents of the displayed predetermined characters MKE1 and MKE2, the jackpot expectation degree is suggested. That is, the character display effect is an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation degree, and the jackpot expectation degree is changed according to the content of the character displayed in the character display effect.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of timer production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 84 to 87, predetermined first effects, second effects, and third effects can be executed, and the first effects are displayed in the first mode. The second effect is an effect including an effect and an effect to be displayed in the second mode, and a second effect is a display that displays a predetermined timer image and counts the timer value using the timer image, and a timer value with a predetermined value The third effect is an effect including a display that suggests a large hit expectation, and the second effect is displayed when the effect displayed in the first mode is performed in the first effect. When the timer value is stopped at a predetermined value in the second effect, the third effect is performed. According to this configuration, when the player performs the effect displayed in the first mode in the first effect, the timer value is stopped at the predetermined value in the second effect, and the third effect is performed. You can expect to play games with great expectations. In addition, since it is determined whether or not to perform an effect that suggests a big hit expectation with a timer image in which a timer value visually changes with time, it is possible for the player to maintain a sense of expectation with time. In addition, by stopping the timer value with various values, it is possible to make the player happy. Furthermore, it is also possible to change the jackpot expectation by the numerical value of the stopped timer value by associating the stopped timer value with the jackpot expectation. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84 to FIG. 87, the first effect is a battle effect in which an ally character on the player side and an enemy character fight against each other, and a first mode is a battle effect. The effect is that the ally character wins, and the second mode is the effect that the ally character is eliminated in the battle effect. According to this configuration, a battle effect that determines whether or not to perform the second effect is performed, and the second effect is performed when the ally character on the player side wins with this battle effect. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the determination as to whether or not to perform the second effect in an easy-to-understand manner, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, the second effect is an effect of counting down and stopping the timer value at a predetermined value, and the third effect is that the timer value is a predetermined value. It is a character effect which displays a predetermined character when it stops at, and the jackpot expectation degree is configured to change depending on the content of the character displayed in the character effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to change the jackpot expectation by displaying characters of various contents by the character effect. As a result, the player can enjoy the content of the displayed characters and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, the jackpot expectation is configured to change depending on the display timing of the timer image in the second effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to display the timer image at various timings and change the jackpot expectation. As a result, the player can enjoy the game by the display timing of the timer image and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, the jackpot expectation varies with the number of timer images to be displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to easily change the jackpot expectation by changing the number of timer images in various ways. As a result, the player can enjoy the game depending on the number of timer images displayed, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of timer presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84 to FIG. 87, in the timer display effect, the display is performed by the countdown method in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is limited to this. Absent. For example, the timer display effect may cause the timer value to change irregularly (randomly change). Alternatively, the timer display effect may be displayed by a count-up method in which the timer value is counted up.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84 to FIG. 87, when the timer value is stopped at the predetermined value (0 seconds), the big hit expected degree suggestion effect is performed and the big win is shown. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the predetermined value at which the timer value is stopped is associated with the jackpot expectation degree suggestive effect, and the type of jackpot (eg, type of jackpot, regular variation jackpot or normal jackpot, or jackpot with different number of rounds) is suggested You may do so. By this configuration, not only the suggestion of the jackpot but also the type (jackpot arrangement of the jackpot) of the jackpot can be suggested, and as a result, the player can determine whether or not the present jackpot is a probability change jackpot, or It can be determined in advance whether it is a big hit or not.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, two timer images are displayed in the timer display effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, three or more timer images may be displayed. Also, the coloration of the timer image may not be the same color, but may be different. According to this configuration, it is possible to indicate the jackpot expectation depending on the color arrangement and the number of timer images. In addition, the display of the two timer images (a plurality of timer images) may be displayed such that the timer values are visible and partially superimposed. Furthermore, the display timings of the two timer images (a plurality of timer images) may not be simultaneous, and a time difference may be provided and displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85 to FIG. 87, the characters suggesting the jackpot expectation degree displayed in the character display effect indicate two types of “chance” and “extensive heat”. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, there may be a plurality of characters that indicate the jackpot expectation degree displayed in the character display effect, "fever", "NEXT", and "jackpot". Also, in this case, the character type and the type of jackpot (jackpot symbol arrangement) are associated, and the type of jackpot (for example, a type of jackpot, a probability variation jackpot or a usual jackpot, or a jackpot with different number of rounds) is suggested It is also good. By this configuration, not only the suggestion of the jackpot but also the type (jackpot arrangement of the jackpot) of the jackpot can be suggested, and as a result, the player can determine whether or not the present jackpot is a probability change jackpot, or It can be determined in advance whether it is a big hit or not. In addition, the display of the two characters (plural characters) of “chance” and “extensive heat” may be displayed such that the characters are visible and partially superimposed. Furthermore, the display of characters (a plurality of characters) may not be displayed simultaneously, and the previously displayed characters may be erased before the characters are displayed next.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84 to FIG. 87, the effect of determining whether or not to execute the timer effect is. Although the battle rendition has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect for determining whether or not to execute the timer effect may be a button effect (for example, when the meter is fully filled by continuously pressing the button, or when an effect indicating success is performed by the button push) It may be an effect such as winning at a lottery (eg, an effect such as winning a roulette), or an effect such as becoming first in a competition (eg, an effect such as winning a sprint) However, it is desirable that the player can distinguish victory or defeat, or success or failure).

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
The display means is capable of executing a first predetermined effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means can execute a predetermined third effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is an effect including an effect displayed in the first mode and an effect displayed in the second mode,
The second effect is an effect that includes a display for displaying a predetermined timer image and counting a timer value using the timer image, and a display for stopping the timer value at a predetermined value,
The third effect is an effect including a display that suggests a jackpot expectation,
The display means performs the second effect when the effect to be displayed in the first mode is performed in the first effect, and the timer value is stopped at a predetermined value in the second effect. Perform the third effect,
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect B2-2]
The first effect is a battle effect in which an ally character on the player side and an enemy character fight against each other,
The first aspect is an effect that the ally character wins in the battle effect,
The game machine according to mode B2-1, wherein the second mode is an effect in which the ally character is eliminated in the battle effect.
[Aspect B2-3]
The second effect is an effect of performing a countdown display to stop the timer value at a predetermined value,
The third effect is a character effect that displays a predetermined character when the timer value stops at a predetermined value,
The said jackpot expectation degree changes with the contents of the character displayed by the said character production,
The gaming machine according to the aspect B2-1 or the aspect B2-2, characterized in that
[Aspect B2-4]
The big hit expectation changes according to the display timing of the timer image in the second effect,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3, characterized in that
[Aspect B2-5]
The jackpot expectation varies with the number of timer images displayed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-4, characterized in that

  The timer speed effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. The timer speed effect may be executed during the change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when the instruction for executing the timer speed effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103 It is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Timer speed effect A]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the timer speed effect A. The timer effects shown in FIG. 88 (A) to FIG. 88 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the timer speed effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), the change effect of the decorative symbol is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, a timer image display effect shown in FIG. 88 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed while the decorative symbol is changed. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point in time (here, 01 "to" 99 "is displayed. Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when a certain point in time is reached, it is not necessary that some change in display occurs. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation degree suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point at which the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point at which the operation reception period ends. In addition, it may be the time when the operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (C), a countdown effect is performed. Specifically, when the first timer TM1 is displayed, "20" is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started). When the second timer TM2 is displayed, "30" is displayed, and thereafter, the countdown is started (started). The switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the first timer TM1 is 1 second, but the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is Faster than switching speed (1 second) (for example, 0.5 seconds). Here, it is assumed that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is 0.5 seconds. That is, in the second timer TM2, since the numerical value (digital display) is switched (the numerical value is decremented) twice per second (the numerical value is decremented), the numerical value is switched twice as fast as the first timer TM1. The value of the first timer TM1 is the same as the number of seconds. The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 can be set to any speed other than 0.5 seconds.

  Thereby, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), although the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 were “30” and “20” at the time of display, the difference between the numerical values (count values) is decreasing . Here, the difference between the numerical values (count values) is “10” at the time of display, but the difference is “8”. Then, the difference between the numerical values (count values) is gradually reduced, and as shown in FIG. 88 (E), the count values temporarily match, and then, as shown in FIG. 88 (F), the count values reverse . After the count value is reversed, as shown in FIG. 88 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0” first, as shown in FIG. 88 (H), the first expectation suggested A presentation is performed. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image is displayed that suggests a probability (expected degree) of becoming a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation production. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation "Chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 88 (J), the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. Similarly to the first expectation degree indication effect, the second expectation degree indication effect displays an image indicating a probability (expected degree) to be a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second drawn “super heat!” At the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is such that the expectation of the jackpot is higher than that of the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Timer speed effect B]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for describing the timer speed effect B. The timer speed effect B is different from the timer speed effect A in that the timer is not digital. The timer effects in FIG. 89A to FIG. 89J are executed within the same change (within one change effect period). In timer speed effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), a change effect of a decorative symbol is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the first timer image display effect shown in FIG. 89 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 is displayed while the decorative symbol is changed. Here, the first timer TM1 is a rod-shaped meter, and represents the remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a point in time. The first timer TM1 suggests that the remaining period of the meter is shortened as the remaining amount of the meter decreases, and indicates that a certain point is reached when the remaining amount of the meter is exhausted (becomes zero). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when a certain point in time is reached, it is not necessary that some change in display occurs. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation degree suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point at which the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point at which the operation reception period ends. In addition, it may be the time when the operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed. At the time of display, the first timer TM1 is displayed with the meter being full, and thereafter, reduction of the remaining amount of the meter is started (started).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89C, with the first timer TM1 displayed, the second timer TM2 is displayed. The second timer TM2 is a rod-shaped meter and represents the remaining time until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a point in time. At the time of display, the second timer TM2 is displayed with the meter being full, and thereafter, the reduction of the remaining meter amount is started (started). The decreasing speed of the meter of the second timer TM2 (the speed at which the remaining period changes) is faster than the decreasing speed of the meter of the first timer TM1.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 89D, the difference between the meter remaining amount of the first timer TM1 and the meter remaining amount of the second timer TM2 is gradually reduced. Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (E), the meter remaining amount temporarily matches, and then, as shown in FIG. 89 (F), the meter remaining amount reverses. After the meter remaining amount is reversed, as shown in FIG. 89 (G), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero, as shown in FIG. 89 (H), the first expected Indications are given. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image is displayed that suggests a probability (expected degree) of becoming a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation production. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and “heat !!” is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (I), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, as shown in FIG. 89 (J), the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 89 (J). . In the second expectation degree indication effect, an image indicating the probability (expected degree) of becoming a big hit is displayed in the fluctuation during the fluctuation production. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and "super heat!" Was drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is such that the expectation of the jackpot is higher than that of the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Timer speed effect C]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the timer speed effect C. . The timer speed effect C is different from the timer speed effect A in that the speed of the timer changes in the middle. The timer effects shown in FIG. 90 (A) to FIG. 90 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the timer speed effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), the change effect of the decorative symbol is executed. At this time, the timer image is not yet displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, a timer image display effect shown in FIG. 90 (B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed while the decorative symbol is changed. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point in time (here, 01 "to" 99 "is displayed. Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when a certain point in time is reached, it is not necessary that some change in display occurs. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation degree suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point at which the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point at which the operation reception period ends. In addition, it may be the time when the operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (C), a countdown effect is performed. Specifically, when the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are both displayed, "20" is displayed, and thereafter, the countdown is started (started). The switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the first timer TM1 and the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 are the same and one second. Therefore, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 display the same numerical value (count value) for a while after being displayed.

  Thereafter, the speed-up start effect shown in FIG. 90 (D) is executed. Specifically, a suggestion image C1 is displayed on the display screen 7a that suggests that the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 is to be fast. Here, an image drawn as "Speed UP" is displayed. Then, the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed (one second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. Here, it is assumed that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is 0.5 seconds. That is, in the second timer TM2, since the numerical value (digital display) is switched (the numerical value is decremented) twice per second (the numerical value is decremented), the numerical value is switched twice as fast as the first timer TM1. The value of the first timer TM1 is the same as the number of seconds. The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 can be set to any speed other than 0.5 seconds.

  As a result, although the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 have the same count value (the difference between the count values is “0”) for a while after being displayed, they are shown in FIGS. 90 (E) and 90 (F). Thus, the difference between the count values increases. In FIG. 90 (E), the difference between the count values is “1”, and in FIG. 90 (F), the difference between the count values is “3”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0” first, as shown in FIG. 90 (H), the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed as shown in FIG. 90 (H). In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image is displayed that suggests a probability (expected degree) of becoming a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation production. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation "Chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 90 (J), the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. Similarly to the first expectation degree indication effect, the second expectation degree indication effect displays an image indicating a probability (expected degree) to be a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second drawn “super heat!” At the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is such that the expectation of the jackpot is higher than that of the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Timer speed effect D]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the timer speed effect D. As compared with the timer speed effect A, the timer speed effect D differs in the number of displayed timer images and the number of digital digits displayed. The timer effects in FIG. 91A to FIG. 91J are executed within the same change (within one change effect period). In the timer speed effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), the third timer TM3 is displayed in a state in which the change effect of the decorative symbol is executed. Here, the third timer TM3 is a timer image in which a 3-digit digital display is shown inside the rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point in time by the countdown (here, “001” to “999 ") Is displayed. A certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and it is not necessary that some indication change occur when a certain point in time is reached. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation degree suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point at which the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point at which the operation reception period ends. In addition, it may be the time when the operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.
The third timer TM3 is not started at the time of display (the countdown has not started), and is displayed as a random number. The random number display here is that numerical values between "000" and "999" are displayed randomly (irregularly).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), in a state where the third timer TM3 is displayed, the first timer TM1 is displayed. The first timer TM1 is a 3-digit digital display timer image, and "100" is displayed as the remaining period at the time of display, and then the countdown is started (started). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the third timer TM3 is faster than the switching speed (one second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 81C, with the third timer TM3 and the first timer TM1 displayed, the second timer TM2 is displayed. The second timer TM2 is a 3-digit digital display timer image, and displays a remaining period longer than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 displays "86", the remaining period of the second timer TM2 is displayed as "100", and the countdown is started (started).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), the countdown of the third timer TM3 is started (started). When the third timer TM3 is started, a remaining period shorter than the remaining period displayed by the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 is displayed. Here, in the state where the remaining period of the first timer IM1 displays "70" and the remaining period of the second timer IM2 displays "68", the third timer TM3 displays the remaining after displaying the random numbers. “10” is displayed as a period of, and then the countdown is started. At the start of the countdown, the third timer TM3 makes the switching speed of the numerical values slower. Thus, the player can recognize that the countdown has started. In addition, the speed-up start effect of the second timer TM2 is executed around the start of the countdown of the third timer TM3. Specifically, a suggestion image (not shown) indicating that the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 becomes fast is displayed on the display screen 7a. Then, the switching speed (switching interval) of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is faster than the switching speed (one second) of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. Here, it is assumed that the switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 is 0.5 seconds. That is, in the second timer TM2, since the numerical value (digital display) is switched (the numerical value is decremented) twice per second (the numerical value is decremented), the numerical value is switched twice as fast as the first timer TM1. The value of the first timer TM1 is the same as the number of seconds. The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the second timer TM2 can be set to any speed other than 0.5 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 91 (F), the third expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. In the third expectation degree indication effect, an image indicating a probability (expected degree) of becoming a big hit is displayed in the fluctuation during the fluctuation production. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero "0", the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the third expectation "Chance!" Is drawn at the position where the third timer TM3 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI3 is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 91 (H), the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. Similarly to the third expectation degree indication effect, the first expectation degree indication effect displays an image indicating a probability (expected degree) to be a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first “heat !!” is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 is displayed. An expectation degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed. Here, the content of the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 is such that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is higher than that of the third expectation degree suggestion image EI3.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (I), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 91 (J), the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. Similarly to the first and third expected degree suggestive effects, the second expected degree suggestive effect displays an image indicating a probability (expected degree) of becoming a jackpot in the fluctuation during the variable effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second drawn “super heat!” At the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed. Here, the second expectation level suggestion image EI2 is displayed with contents having a higher expectation level of the jackpot than the first expectation level suggestion image EI1 and the third expectation degree suggestion image EI3.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of timer speed production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, with the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 displayed on the display screen 7a, the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1. Can change the speed at which the second timer TM2 changes and the speed at which the second timer TM2 changes the first effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, FIG. 90, and FIG. 91, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate the remaining period by counting down the digital display. In the production, the speed of each countdown is different. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 each indicate the remaining period by changing so that the length of a specific image becomes short. In the first effect, the speed at which the length of each specific image is shortened is different. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed prior to the first effect, and the remaining first timer TM1 is shown. A second effect can be performed in which the speed at which the period changes and the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 changes is the same. According to this configuration, since the speed at which the remaining period changes changes in the middle, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, in the first effect, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 changes is the change in the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1. In the state where the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed faster than the speed and before the first effect, the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1 is longer than the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2. After the second effect and the first effect, with the first timer TM1 displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 disappears, and the second timer TM2 is displayed The third effect that the predetermined image is displayed can be performed at the predetermined position. According to this configuration, since the remaining period is reversed, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, in the first effect, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 changes is the remaining period indicated by the first timer TM1. A second effect in which the first timer TM1 is displayed and the second timer TM2 is newly displayed from a state in which the second timer TM2 is not displayed before the first effect, which is faster than the speed at which the And, after the first effect, in a state where the first timer TM1 displays the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 disappears, and the second timer TM2 is not displayed on the display screen 7a. The effect of 3 can be performed. According to this configuration, since the timer displayed later becomes zero first, it is possible to visually entertain the player and to improve the interest.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of timer speed presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above (for example, FIG. 88), the switching speed of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 may be at least temporarily different from the switching speed of the numerical value of the first timer TM1. For example, the switching speed of the numerical value (digital display) of the second timer TM2 may temporarily become slower than the switching speed of the numerical value of the first timer TM1, or the switching speed changes, and the switching speed temporarily However, it may be faster or slower than the first timer TM1. In the above (for example, FIG. 89), the reduction rate of the meter of the second timer TM2 may be at least temporarily different from the reduction rate of the meter of the first timer TM1. For example, the decrease rate of the meter of the second timer TM2 may temporarily become slower than the decrease rate of the meter of the first timer TM1, or the decrease rate changes, so that the decrease rate temporarily decreases It may be faster or slower than the timer TM1.
[Modification 2]
In the above (for example, FIG. 88), at least one of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 may move during the countdown. Moreover, it may move and a part of each other may overlap. In addition, at least one of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 may disappear from the display screen 7a during the countdown.
[Modification 3]
In the above-described timer speed effect, the timer effect is performed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). However, the timer speed effect described above may be executed across multiple changes.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B 3-1]
A gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer indicating a remaining period until reaching a certain point in time;
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer indicating a remaining period until reaching a certain point in time;
With the first timer and the second timer displayed on the display means, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes and the remaining period indicated by the second timer A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a first effect which is different from the speed at which the.
態 様 [Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
The first timer and the second timer indicate the remaining period by counting down the digital display,
In the first effect, the speeds of the respective countdowns are different.
[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
Each of the first timer and the second timer indicates the remaining period by changing the length of a specific image to be short,
The gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein speeds at which the lengths of the specific images are shortened are different.
態 様 [Aspect B3-4]
A game machine according to any one of modes B3-1 to B3-3, wherein
Before the first effect, in a state where the first timer and the second timer are displayed, the speed at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes, and the second timer A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a second effect in which the remaining period indicated by is the same as the changing speed.
態 様 [Aspect B3-5]
A game machine according to any one of modes B3-1 to B3-3, wherein
In the first effect, the rate at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes is faster than the rate at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer changes.
In the state where the first timer and the second timer are displayed before the first effect, the remaining period indicated by the second timer is longer than the remaining period indicated by the first timer. With a short second rendition,
After the first effect, in a state where the second timer displays the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the first timer disappears, and the first timer is displayed at the position And a third effect capable of displaying a predetermined image.
態 様 [Aspect B3-6]
A game machine according to any one of modes B3-1 to B3-3, wherein
In the first effect, the rate at which the remaining period indicated by the first timer changes is faster than the rate at which the remaining period indicated by the second timer changes.
Before the first effect, a second effect in which the second timer is displayed and the first timer is newly displayed from a state in which the first timer is not displayed;
After the first effect, with the second timer displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the first timer disappears, and the first timer is displayed on the display means. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a third effect which will disappear.

  The timer count effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 92 to 95. The timer count effect may be performed, for example, during the change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the change effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the timer count effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103 It is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Timer count effect A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for describing the timer count effect A. The timer effects in FIG. 92A to FIG. 92J are executed within the same change (within one change effect period). In the timer count effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 92A, a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed while the decorative symbol is changed. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point in time (here, The number of seconds of 01 "to" 99 "is displayed. Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when a certain point in time is reached, it is not necessary that some change in display occurs. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation degree suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point at which the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point at which the operation reception period ends. In addition, it may be the time when the operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, random number display / countdown effect shown in FIG. 92 (B) and FIG. 92 (C) is executed. Specifically, when the second timer TM2 is displayed, "2" is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started). On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started at the time of display (the countdown is not started), and is displayed as a random number. The random number display here is that numerical values between "00" and "99" are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the first timer TM1 is faster than the switching speed (one second) of the numerical value of the second timer TM2.

  The interlocked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion) in the second timer TM2 that has started counting down (started). The interlocked image RM here is an image (area image) showing an area indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside a rectangular image surrounding the digital display part (number part). The interlocked image RM periodically changes in area inside a rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (A) to FIG. 92 (D), the area of the interlocking image RM decreases with the passage of time, and when the area of the interlocking image RM disappears, the digital display portion (number portion , The next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocked image RM again covers the entire inside of the rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) (area is restored). In this manner, the interlocked image RM changes in shape (area decreases) constantly between the time one count is displayed during countdown and the time it switches to the next count, and each time the count is switched (one second Constant change (area reduction) is repeated. The change in the shape of the interlocked image RM makes it possible to strongly impress the player with the countdown.

  After the random number display / countdown effect is performed for a while, as shown in FIG. 92D, the countdown of the first timer TM1 is started (started). When the first timer TM1 starts counting down (starts up), the linked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display part (numeric part). Here, after the random number is displayed, the first timer TM1 displays "5" as the remaining period. By displaying the interlocked image RM on the first timer TM1, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

  After the first timer TM1 starts counting down (after being started), each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 counts down as shown in FIG. 92 (E) to FIG. 92 (H) for a while. Execute (double countdown effect). At this time, the interlocked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes corresponding to the switching of each count. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 92 (J), the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image is displayed that suggests a probability (expected degree) of becoming a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation production. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation "Chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", and the second expectation degree indication effect is performed. Similarly to the first expectation degree indication effect, the second expectation degree indication effect displays an image indicating a probability (expected degree) to be a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second drawn “super heat!” At the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation degree suggestion image is displayed. Here, in the second expectation degree suggestion image, contents having a high expectation of the jackpot as compared to the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 are displayed.

[Timer count effect B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect B. As compared with the timer count effect A, the timer count effect B is different in the operation mode of the interlocked image RM and the mode until the timer starts. The timer effects in FIG. 93A to FIG. 93J are executed within the same change (within one change effect period). In the timer count effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed while the decorative symbol is changed. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a 2-digit digital display is shown inside the circular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point in time (here, The number of seconds of 01 "to" 99 "is displayed. Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when a certain point in time is reached, it is not necessary that some change in display occurs. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation degree suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point at which the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point at which the operation reception period ends. In addition, it may be the time when the operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, 88 display / countdown effects shown in FIG. 93 (B) and FIG. 93 (C) are executed. Specifically, when the second timer TM2 is displayed, "2" is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started). On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started at the time of display (the countdown is not started), “88” is displayed, and it is stopped in that state. The interlocked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion) in the second timer TM2 that has started counting down (started). The interlocked image RM here is an image (area image) showing an area indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside a circular image surrounding the digital display part (number part). In the interlocked image RM, the area periodically changes in a manner such as a radar image or a circle graph inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 93A to 93D, in the interlocked image RM, the area increases with the passage of time, and the image region of the interlocked image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image. , The next count is displayed in the digital display part (numeric part). When the next count is displayed, the interlocked image RM is not displayed again inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion) (start from zero again). In this manner, the interlocked image RM changes in shape (area increases) constantly between the time when one count in the countdown is displayed and the time when the next count is switched, and each time the count is switched (one second Constant change (area increase) is repeated. The change in the shape of the interlocked image RM makes it possible to strongly impress the player with the countdown.

  After the random number display / countdown effect is executed for a while, as shown in FIG. 93D, the countdown of the first timer TM1 is started (started). When the first timer TM1 starts counting down (starts up), the linked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display part (numeric part). Here, after the random number is displayed, the first timer TM1 displays "5" as the remaining period. By displaying the interlocked image RM on the first timer TM1, the player can recognize that the countdown has started.

  After the first timer TM1 starts counting down (after being started), each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 counts down as shown in FIG. 93 (E) to FIG. 93 (H) for a while Execute (double countdown effect). At this time, the interlocked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes corresponding to the switching of each count. After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 93 (J), the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image is displayed that suggests a probability (expected degree) of becoming a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation production. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation "Chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", and the second expectation degree indication effect is performed. Similarly to the first expectation degree indication effect, the second expectation degree indication effect displays an image indicating a probability (expected degree) to be a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second drawn “super heat!” At the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation degree suggestion image is displayed. Here, in the second expectation degree suggestion image, contents having a high expectation of the jackpot as compared to the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 are displayed.

[Timer count effect C]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect C. The timer count effect C is different from the timer count effect A in the operation mode of the interlocked image RM and the combination effect mode with the movable role. The timer effects shown in FIG. 94 (A) to FIG. 94 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the timer count effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed while the decorative symbol is changed. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a 2-digit digital display is shown inside the circular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point in time (here, The number of seconds of 01 "to" 99 "is displayed. Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when a certain point in time is reached, it is not necessary that some change in display occurs. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation degree suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point at which the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point at which the operation reception period ends. In addition, it may be the time when the operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 94 (B) to FIG. 94 (E) is executed. Specifically, when the first timer TM1 is displayed, "10" is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started). When the second timer TM2 is displayed, "2" is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started). In the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 that have started counting down (started), the interlocked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocked image RM here is an image (area image) showing an area indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside a circular image surrounding the digital display part (number part). In the interlocked image RM, the area periodically changes in a manner such as a radar image or a circle graph inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). On the other hand, the interlocked image RM of the first timer TM1 and the interlocked image RM of the second timer TM2 are different in timing (period) of switching. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 94 (B) to (E), in the interlocked image RM of the first timer TM1, the image area of the interlocked image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image at the display time point, and the area is counted down Decreases and the count becomes zero, the area of the linked image RM also disappears. That is, the linked image RM of the first timer TM1 represents the remaining time until the count reaches zero. Even in this case, since the area is constantly reduced along with the counting, it can be said that the linked image RM is linked to the counting. On the other hand, the interlocked image RM of the second timer TM2 increases in area as time passes, as in the timer count effect B, and the digital display portion (numbers) when the image area of the interlocked image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image In part), the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocked image RM is not displayed again inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion) (start from zero again). The interlocked image RM of the second timer TM2 changes its shape (the area increases) constantly between the time one count is displayed during countdown and the time it switches to the next count, and each time the count is switched (one A constant change (area increase) is repeated every second.

  During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 94 (F), a movable role feature drive effect may be executed. Specifically, the first movable object 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position and stands still at the advanced position. By this. A portion of the display screen 7 a is covered by the first movable character 14. At this time, about the lower half of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 is covered by the first movable part 14, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the player can recognize that the countdown of the timer continues by the change of the visible portion of the interlocked image RM.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 94 (H), the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image is displayed that suggests a probability (expected degree) of becoming a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation production. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation "Chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (I), the countdown of the first timer TM1 is continued, and as shown in FIG. 94 (J), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the second An expectation degree suggestion production is performed. Similarly to the first expectation degree indication effect, the second expectation degree indication effect displays an image indicating a probability (expected degree) to be a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the second drawn “super heat!” At the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. An expectation degree suggestion image is displayed. Here, in the second expectation degree suggestion image, contents having a high expectation of the jackpot as compared to the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 are displayed.

[Timer count effect D]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the timer count effect D. The timer count effect D is different from the timer count effect A in the operation mode of the interlocked image RM and the combination effect mode with the movable role. The timer effects in FIG. 95A to FIG. 95J are executed within the same change (within one change effect period). In the timer count effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 95A, a first timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 is displayed while the decorative symbol is changed. Here, the first timer TM1 is a timer image in which a 3-digit digital display is shown inside a rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point in time by the countdown (here, “1” to “999” The "number of seconds" is displayed. Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when a certain point in time is reached, it is not necessary that some change in display occurs. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation degree suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point at which the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point at which the operation reception period ends. In addition, it may be the time when the operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 95 (B) is executed. Specifically, when the first timer TM1 is displayed, "100" is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started). The interlocked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion) in the first timer TM1 that has started counting down (started). The interlocked image RM here is an image (area image) showing an area indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside a rectangular image surrounding the digital display part (number part). The interlocked image RM periodically changes in area inside a rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). Specifically, as in the timer count effect A, the interlocked image RM decreases in area with the passage of time, and when the area of the interlocked image RM disappears, the next count is displayed in the digital display portion (numerical portion) Be done. When the next count is displayed, the interlocked image RM again covers the entire inside of the rectangular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion) (area is restored). In this manner, the interlocked image RM changes in shape (area decreases) constantly between the time one count is displayed during countdown and the time it switches to the next count, and each time the count is switched (one second Constant change (area reduction) is repeated. The change in the shape of the interlocked image RM makes it possible to strongly impress the player with the countdown.

  Next, a second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 95 (C) is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 is newly displayed in a state in which the first timer TM1 is counting down while the decorative symbol is being changed. Here, the second timer TM2 is a timer image in which a two-digit digital display is shown inside the circular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point in time by the countdown (here, “01” to “99 The "number of seconds" is displayed. Note that, as described above, a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when a certain point in time is reached, it is not necessary to cause some display change.

  Next, the countdown effect shown in FIG. 95 (D) is executed. Specifically, "2" is displayed when the second timer TM2 is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started). The interlocked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion) in the second timer TM2 that has started counting down (started). The interlocked image RM here is an image (area image) showing an area indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside a circular image surrounding the digital display part (number part). In the interlocked image RM, the area periodically changes in a manner such as a radar image or a circle graph inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). Similar to the timer count effect B, the area of the interlocked image RM of the second timer TM2 increases with time, and when the image area of the interlocked image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion (number portion) The next count is displayed at. When the next count is displayed, the interlocked image RM is not displayed again inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion) (start from zero again). The interlocked image RM of the second timer TM2 changes its shape (the area increases) constantly between the time one count is displayed during countdown and the time it switches to the next count, and each time the count is switched (one A constant change (area increase) is repeated every second. The change in the shape of the interlocked image RM makes it possible to strongly impress the player with the countdown.

  Next, a third timer image display effect shown in FIG. 95 (E) is executed. Specifically, while the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are counting down, the third timer TM3 is newly displayed. Here, the third timer TM3 is not superimposed on the interlocked image RM, and is displayed at a position close to the interlocked image RM. The third timer TM3 is a two-digit digital display, and displays a remaining period until reaching a certain point (here, the number of seconds from "01" to "99") by countdown. The interlocked image RM is an image (area image) showing an area indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside a rectangular image. The interlocked image RM periodically changes in area inside a rectangular image that does not surround the digital display portion (numerical portion). Specifically, the area of the interlocked image RM decreases with the passage of time, and when the area of the interlocked image RM is exhausted, the next count is displayed on the digital display portion (numerical portion). When the next count is displayed, the linked image RM again covers the entire inside of the rectangular image (area is restored). In this manner, the interlocked image RM changes in shape (area decreases) constantly between the time one count is displayed during countdown and the time it switches to the next count, and each time the count is switched (one second Constant change (area reduction) is repeated. The change in the shape of the interlocked image RM makes it possible to strongly impress the player with the countdown.

  During the countdown effect by the three timers, as shown in FIG. 95 (F), the movable feature driving effect may be executed. Specifically, the first movable object 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position and stands still at the advanced position. By this. A portion of the display screen 7 a is covered by the first movable character 14. At this time, about the lower half of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 is covered by the first movable part 14, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, the player can recognize that the countdown of the timer continues by the change of the visible portion of the interlocked image RM.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (G), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 95 (H), the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image is displayed that suggests a probability (expected degree) of becoming a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation production. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the first expectation "Chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (I), when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 95 (J), the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. Similarly to the first expectation degree indication effect, the second expectation degree indication effect displays an image indicating a probability (expected degree) to be a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero "0", the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the second "heat !!" is drawn at the position where the third timer TM3 is displayed. The expectation degree indication image EI2 is displayed. Here, the content of the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is such that the expectation of the jackpot is higher than that of the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of timer count production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, in a state where the first timer TM1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, it is superimposed on the first timer TM1 to count down the first timer TM1. The interlocked image RM interlocked can be displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the interlocking image RM has a shape in a predetermined manner from when one count during countdown is displayed until it switches to the next count. It changes, and the change of the shape in a predetermined manner is repeated each time the count is switched. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, the interlocked image RM changes in area as time passes during one count. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, after the first effect that the first timer TM1 not started is displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the first effect, the first The 1st timer TM1 can execute the 2nd production which starts countdown, in the 1st production, interlocking picture RM is not displayed, in the 2nd production, interlocking picture RM is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, in the first effect, the first timer TM1 displays a random number in digital display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the first effect, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed, and the first timer TM1 is not started. The second timer TM2 is started, and the interlocked image RM superimposed on the second timer TM2 and interlocked with the countdown of the second timer TM2 is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of timer count production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above (for example, FIG. 95 (J)), it is assumed that the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 is displayed as the content with a higher expectation level of the jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1. However, the second expectation degree suggestion image EI2 may display contents having a lower expectation level of the jackpot than the first expectation degree suggestion image EI1 or may display contents having the same expectation degree.
[Modification 2]
In the above (for example, FIG. 95), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 and the third timer TM3 becomes "0", the expectation degree indication images EI1 and EI2 are displayed. However, an image other than the expectation degree suggestion image may be displayed. For example, an operation unit image may be displayed, or an image may be displayed in which the decorative symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed.
[Modification 3]
In the above (for example, FIG. 93D), the first timer TM1 displays a longer period than the remaining period displayed by the second timer TM2 at the time of start-up, but the second timer TM2 displays it. A period longer than the remaining period may be displayed.
[Modification 4]
In the above-described timer speed effect, the timer effect is performed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). However, the timer speed effect described above may be executed across multiple changes.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B4-1]
A gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer indicating a remaining period until reaching a certain point by countdown,
A game machine characterized by being capable of displaying an interlocked image linked to a countdown of the first timer superimposed on the first timer in a state where the first timer is displayed on the display means.
[Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
The interlocked image changes its shape in a predetermined manner after one count in the countdown is displayed until it switches to the next count, and the shape change in the predetermined manner is repeated every time the count is switched. Game machine characterized by being
態 様 [Aspect B 4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the area of the interlocking image changes with the passage of time during one count.
[Aspect B 4-4]
A game machine according to any one of modes B4-1 to B4-3, wherein
Execute the first effect that the first timer that is not started is displayed on the display means, and the second effect that the first timer starts to count down after the first effect Is possible,
In the first effect, the interlocked image is not displayed, and in the second effect, the interlocked image is displayed.
[Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-4,
In the first effect, a random number is displayed by digital display in the first timer.
態 様 [Aspect B 4-6]
A game machine according to aspect B4-4 or aspect B4-5, wherein
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer indicating a remaining period until reaching a certain point by countdown,
In the first effect, the first timer and the second timer are displayed, and the second timer is started in the state where the first timer is not started, and the second timer is started. A game machine characterized in that a linked image linked to the countdown of the second timer is displayed superimposed on the second timer.

  The movable character feature timer effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. The movable character feature timer effect may be executed, for example, during the change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and the instruction for executing the movable character function timer effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are outputted from the ROM 103. It is an effect of reading out and displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Moveable role timer production A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the movable character feature timer effect A. The timer effects shown in FIG. 96 (A) to FIG. 96 (J) are executed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). In the movable character feature timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed while the decorative symbol is changed. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a 2-digit digital display is shown inside the circular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point in time (here, The number of seconds of 01 "to" 99 "is displayed. Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when a certain point in time is reached, it is not necessary that some change in display occurs. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation degree suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point at which the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point at which the operation reception period ends. In addition, it may be the time when the operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, random number display / countdown effect shown in FIG. 96 (B) is executed. Specifically, when the second timer TM2 is displayed, "22" is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started). On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started at the time of display (the countdown is not started), and is displayed as a random number. The random number display here is that numerical values between "00" and "99" are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the first timer TM1 is faster than the switching speed (one second) of the numerical value of the second timer TM2.

  The interlocked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion) in the second timer TM2 that has started counting down (started). The interlocked image RM here is an image (area image) showing an area indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside a circular image surrounding the digital display part (number part). In the interlocked image RM, the area periodically changes in a manner such as a radar image or a circle graph inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). Specifically, as shown in timer count effect B in FIG. 93, the interlocked image RM increases in area with the passage of time, and when the image region of the interlocked image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion In (numeric part), the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocked image RM is not displayed again inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion) (start from zero again). In this manner, the interlocked image RM changes in shape (area increases) constantly between the time when one count in the countdown is displayed and the time when the next count is switched, and each time the count is switched (one second Constant change (area increase) is repeated. The change in the shape of the interlocked image RM makes it possible to strongly impress the player with the countdown.

  During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), a moveable role product advance effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable role object 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position. Thereby, a part of the display screen 7 a is covered by the first movable part 14. During the movement of the first movable part 14, about the lower half of the second timer TM2 is covered by the first movable part 14, and it becomes difficult to view. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet and is displayed as a random number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), a movable role stationary presentation effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable combination 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position, it stops at the advanced position. As a result, substantially the entire second timer TM2 is covered by the first movable part 14, which makes it difficult to view. The second timer TM2 may be completely covered by the first movable part 14 so as to be in a state in which it is completely difficult to visually recognize, or a part may be in a visually recognizable state. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet and is displayed as a random number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96E, a movable combination reverse effect is performed. Specifically, after the first movable combination 14 moves (retracts) downward from the advanced position, it stops at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2, which is substantially entirely covered by the first movable part 14, becomes visible again. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet and is displayed as a random number.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 96F, the countdown of the first timer TM1 is started (started). When the first timer TM1 starts counting down (starts up), the linked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display part (numeric part). Here, after the random number is displayed, the first timer TM1 displays "5" as the remaining period. That is, the first timer TM1 starts and displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2. In addition, the player can recognize that the countdown has been started by displaying the interlocked image RM on the first timer TM1.

  After the first timer TM1 starts counting down (after being started), for a while, each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 executes the counting down (double countdown effect). At this time, the interlocked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes corresponding to the switching of each count. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (G), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 96 (H), the first expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image is displayed that suggests a probability (expected degree) of becoming a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation production. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the first expectation "Chance!" Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 96 (J), the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. Similarly to the first expectation degree indication effect, the second expectation degree indication effect displays an image indicating a probability (expected degree) to be a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the second expectation "Chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The suggestion image is displayed. Note that the second expectation level suggestion image EM1 may display content having a higher expectation level of the jackpot than the first expectation level suggestion image EI1.

[Mobile role-effect timer effect B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the movable character feature timer effect B. As compared with the movable character feature timer effect A, the movable character feature timer effect B is different in that the first timer TM1 is started from the display time. The timer effects shown in FIGS. 97A to 97J are performed within the same change (within one change effect period). In the movable character feature timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed while the decorative symbol is changed. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a 2-digit digital display is shown inside the circular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point in time (here, The number of seconds of 01 "to" 99 "is displayed. Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when a certain point in time is reached, it is not necessary that some change in display occurs. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation degree suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point at which the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point at which the operation reception period ends. In addition, it may be the time when the operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, a double countdown effect shown in FIG. 97 (B) is executed. Specifically, when the first timer TM1 is displayed, "17" is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started). When the second timer TM2 is displayed, "23" is displayed, and thereafter, the countdown is started (started).

  In the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 that have started (counting started) counting down, the linked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion). The interlocked image RM here is an image (area image) showing an area indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside a circular image surrounding the digital display part (number part). In the interlocked image RM, the area periodically changes in a manner such as a radar image or a circle graph inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). Specifically, as shown in timer count effect B in FIG. 93, the interlocked image RM increases in area with the passage of time, and when the image region of the interlocked image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion In (numeric part), the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocked image RM is not displayed again inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion) (start from zero again). In this manner, the interlocked image RM changes in shape (area increases) constantly between the time when one count in the countdown is displayed and the time when the next count is switched, and each time the count is switched (one second Constant change (area increase) is repeated. The change in the shape of the interlocked image RM makes it possible to strongly impress the player with the countdown.

  During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), the movable role advanced item effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable role object 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position. Thereby, a part of the display screen 7 a is covered by the first movable part 14. During the movement of the first movable part 14, about the lower half of the second timer TM2 is covered by the first movable part 14, and it becomes difficult to view. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue counting down. Therefore, the linked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes corresponding to the switching of the respective counts.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), the movable role stationary presentation effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable combination 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position, it stops at the advanced position. As a result, substantially the entire second timer TM2 is covered by the first movable part 14, which makes it difficult to view. The second timer TM2 may be completely covered by the first movable part 14 so as to be in a state in which it is completely difficult to visually recognize, or a part may be in a visually recognizable state. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue counting down.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (E), a movable combination reverse effect is performed. Specifically, after the first movable combination 14 moves (retracts) downward from the advanced position, it stops at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2, which is almost entirely covered by the first movable part 14, becomes visible again. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue counting down. Therefore, the linked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, and the area changes corresponding to the switching of the respective counts.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (F), the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue the countdown again in a state in which the whole can be visually recognized (double countdown effect). The interlocked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (G), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 97 (H), the first expected degree suggestion effect is performed. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image is displayed that suggests a probability (expected degree) of becoming a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation production. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the first expectation "Chance!" Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 97 (J), the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. Similarly to the first expectation degree indication effect, the second expectation degree indication effect displays an image indicating a probability (expected degree) to be a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the second expectation "Chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The suggestion image is displayed. Note that the second expectation level suggestion image EM1 may display content having a higher expectation level of the jackpot than the first expectation level suggestion image EI1.

[Mobile role timer production C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining a movable character feature timer effect C. As compared with the movable character feature timer effect A, the movable character feature timer effect C is different in the number of timers displayed. The timer effects in FIG. 98A to FIG. 98J are executed within the same change (within one change effect period). In the movable character feature timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed while the decorative symbol is changed. Here, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are timer images in which a 2-digit digital display is shown inside the circular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain point in time (here, The number of seconds of 01 "to" 99 "is displayed. Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when a certain point in time is reached, it is not necessary that some change in display occurs. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation degree suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point at which the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point at which the operation reception period ends. In addition, it may be the time when the operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed.

  Next, random number display / countdown effect shown in FIG. 98 (B) is executed. Specifically, when the second timer TM2 is displayed, "22" is displayed, and then the countdown is started (started). On the other hand, the first timer TM1 is not started at the time of display (the countdown is not started), and is displayed as a random number. The random number display here is that numerical values between "00" and "99" are displayed randomly (irregularly). The switching speed of the numerical value displayed on the first timer TM1 is faster than the switching speed (one second) of the numerical value of the second timer TM2. Furthermore, during the random number display / countdown effect, the third timer TM3 is displayed. The third timer TM3 is a timer image in which a 3-digit digital display is shown inside a rectangular image, and the remaining period until reaching a certain time point (here, "001" to "999" seconds) by the countdown. Display the number). When the third timer TM3 is displayed, "100" is displayed as the remaining period, and then the countdown is started (started).

  The interlocked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display portion (numerical portion) in the second timer TM2 that has started counting down (started). The interlocked image RM here is an image (area image) showing an area indicated by a specific color (for example, red) inside a circular image surrounding the digital display part (number part). In the interlocked image RM, the area periodically changes in a manner such as a radar image or a circle graph inside a circular image surrounding the digital display portion (number portion). Specifically, as shown in timer count effect B in FIG. 93, the interlocked image RM increases in area with the passage of time, and when the image region of the interlocked image RM occupies the entire inside of the circular image, the digital display portion In (numeric part), the next count is displayed. When the next count is displayed, the interlocked image RM is not displayed again inside the circular image surrounding the digital display portion (numerical portion) (start from zero again). In this manner, the interlocked image RM changes in shape (area increases) constantly between the time when one count in the countdown is displayed and the time when the next count is switched, and each time the count is switched (one second Constant change (area increase) is repeated. The change in the shape of the interlocked image RM makes it possible to strongly impress the player with the countdown. The interlocked image RM is not displayed on the third timer TM3 that has started (counting started) the countdown. Thereby, it is possible to give different characteristics to each timer, and to improve the interest.

  During the countdown effect, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the movable role product advance effect is executed. Specifically, the first movable role object 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position. Thereby, a part of the display screen 7 a is covered by the first movable part 14. During the movement of the first movable part 14, the third timer TM3 and the second timer TM2 are covered by the first movable part 14 in order from the lower side, and it becomes difficult to view. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet and is displayed as a random number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), the movable role stationary presentation effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable combination 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position, it stops at the advanced position. As a result, the entire third timer TM3 and substantially the entire second timer TM2 are covered by the first movable part 14, which makes it difficult to view. The second timer TM2 may be completely covered by the first movable part 14 so as to be in a state in which it is completely difficult to visually recognize, or a part may be in a visually recognizable state. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet and is displayed as a random number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98E, a movable combination reverse effect is performed. Specifically, after the first movable combination 14 moves (retracts) downward from the advanced position, it stops at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2 and the third timer TM3 which have been substantially entirely covered by the first movable part 14 become visible again. The first timer TM1 has not been started yet and is displayed as a random number.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 98F, the countdown of the first timer TM1 is started (started). When the first timer TM1 starts counting down (starts up), the linked image RM is displayed superimposed on the digital display part (numeric part). Here, after the random number is displayed, the first timer TM1 displays "5" as the remaining period. That is, the first timer TM1 starts and displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 and the third timer TM3. In addition, the player can recognize that the countdown has been started by displaying the interlocked image RM on the first timer TM1.

  After the first timer TM1 starts counting down (after being started), for a while, each of the first timer TM1, the second timer TM2, and the third timer TM3 executes the countdown (double countdown effect). At this time, the interlocked image RM is displayed on each of the first timer TM1, the second timer TM2, and the third timer TM3, and the area changes corresponding to the switching of the respective counts. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (G), when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 98 (H), the first expected degree suggestion effect is performed. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image is displayed that suggests a probability (expected degree) of becoming a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation production. Here, when the remaining period of the first timer TM1 becomes zero "0", the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and the first expectation "Chance!" Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (I), when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero (“0”), as shown in FIG. 98 (J), the second expectation degree suggestion effect is performed. Similarly to the first expectation degree indication effect, the second expectation degree indication effect displays an image indicating a probability (expected degree) to be a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect. Here, when the remaining period of the second timer TM2 becomes zero "0", the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and the second expectation "Chance!" Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The suggestion image is displayed. Note that the second expectation level suggestion image EM1 may display content having a higher expectation level of the jackpot than the first expectation level suggestion image EI1. After that, the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero "0", and the third expectation degree indication effect is performed. Similarly to the first and second expected degree suggestive effects, the third expected degree suggestive effect displays an image indicating a probability (expected degree) of becoming a jackpot in the fluctuation during the variable effect. Here, when the remaining period of the third timer TM3 becomes zero "0", the display of the third timer TM3 disappears, and the third one is drawn with "super heat!" At the position where the third timer TM3 was displayed An expectation degree suggestion image is displayed.

[Mobile role-effect timer effect D]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the movable character feature timer effect D. As compared with the movable character feature timer effect A, the movable character feature timer effect D is different in that the timer is not digital. The timer effects shown in FIGS. 99A to 99J are executed within the same change (within one change effect period). In the movable character feature timer effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 99 (A), a timer image display effect is executed. Specifically, the second timer TM2 is displayed while the decorative symbol is changed. Here, the second timer TM2 is a rod-shaped meter, and represents the remaining period until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a point in time. The second timer TM2 suggests that the remaining period of the meter is shortened as the remaining amount of the meter decreases, and indicates that a certain point is reached when the remaining amount of the meter is exhausted (zero). Note that a certain point in time is an arbitrary point in time, and when a certain point in time is reached, it is not necessary that some change in display occurs. Here, a certain point in time means a point in time when an expectation degree suggestion image to be described later is displayed. The certain time point may be a time point at which the operation reception period (operable period) of the operation unit is started, or may be a time point at which the operation reception period ends. In addition, it may be the time when the operation unit image representing the appearance of the operation unit is displayed. At the time of display, the second timer TM2 is displayed with the meter being full, and thereafter, the reduction of the remaining meter amount is started (started).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (B), while the second timer TM2 is displayed, the first timer TM1 is displayed. The first timer TM1 is a rod-shaped meter, and represents the remaining time until the remaining amount of the meter reaches a point in time. At the time of display, the first timer TM1 is displayed with the meter being full, and thereafter, reduction of the remaining amount of the meter is started (started). The decreasing speed of the meter of the first timer TM1 (the speed at which the remaining period changes) is the same as the decreasing speed of the meter of the second timer TM2. Note that the reduction speed of the meter of the first timer TM1 (the speed at which the remaining period changes) may be faster than the meter of the second timer TM2.

  While the meter remaining amounts of both the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are decreasing, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the first movable role object 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position. Thereby, a part of the display screen 7 a is covered by the first movable part 14. During the movement of the first movable part 14, about the lower half of the second timer TM2 is covered by the first movable part 14, and it becomes difficult to view. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to decrease the remaining meter amount.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), the movable role stationary rendition effect is executed. Specifically, after the first movable combination 14 moves (advances) upward from the retracted position, it stops at the advanced position. As a result, substantially the entire second timer TM2 is covered by the first movable part 14, which makes it difficult to view. The second timer TM2 may be completely covered by the first movable part 14 so as to be in a state in which it is completely difficult to visually recognize, or a part may be in a visually recognizable state. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to decrease the remaining meter amount.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (E), a movable combination reverse effect is performed. Specifically, after the first movable combination 14 moves (retracts) downward from the advanced position, it stops at the retracted position. As a result, the second timer TM2, which is almost entirely covered by the first movable part 14, becomes visible again. The first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 continue to decrease the remaining meter amount.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), in the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2, again, the reduction of the remaining meter amount continues in the state in which the whole can be viewed (double meter remaining amount reduction effect). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (G), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, as shown in FIG. 99 (H), the first expected degree suggestive effect is It is carried out. In the first expectation degree suggestion effect, an image is displayed that suggests a probability (expected degree) of becoming a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation production. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the first timer TM1 becomes zero “0”, the display of the first timer TM1 disappears, and “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the first timer TM1 was displayed. The first expected degree suggestion image EI1 is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (I), when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, as shown in FIG. 99 (J), the second expectation degree suggestion effect is It is carried out. Similarly to the first expectation degree indication effect, the second expectation degree indication effect displays an image indicating a probability (expected degree) to be a jackpot in the fluctuation during the fluctuation effect. Here, when the meter remaining amount (remaining period) of the second timer TM2 becomes zero “0”, the display of the second timer TM2 disappears, and “Chance!” Is drawn at the position where the second timer TM2 was displayed. The second expected degree suggestion image is displayed. Note that the second expectation level suggestion image EM1 may display content having a higher expectation level of the jackpot than the first expectation level suggestion image EI1.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of movable character feature timer production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 99, the first effect that the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 are displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the first effect The second effect that makes at least a part of the second timer TM2 difficult to visually recognize due to the advance of the first movable role item 14 can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, in the first effect, the second timer TM2 is started in a state where the first timer TM1 is not started, and the second timer TM2 is started. In the effect, the first timer TM1 has not started. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, the first timer TM1 and the second timer TM2 indicate the remaining period by counting down the digital display, and in the first effect, The first timer TM1 is not started, a random number is displayed in digital display, the second timer TM2 counts down, and in the second effect, the first timer TM1 is not started, A random number is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, after the second effect, the first movable character object 14 retreats to make the second timer TM2 visible. ,
After the third effect, the first timer TM1 is started, and the fourth effect in which the first timer TM1 displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the second timer TM2 is executed. be able to. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, after the fourth effect, with the second timer TM2 displaying the remaining period, the remaining one shown by the first timer TM1. A fifth effect can be executed in which the first expected degree suggesting image EI1 is displayed at the position where the first timer TM1 has been displayed because the period has disappeared. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 98, in the first effect, it is possible to display the interlocked image RM which is superimposed on the 2 timer TM2 and interlocked with the countdown of the 2 timer TM2. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of movable character feature timer presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described movable combination stationary presentation effect (for example, FIG. 96 (D)), the second timer TM2 may be completely invisible by the first movable combination 14. Further, the second timer TM2 may be configured to be in a plurality of difficult states by moving the first movable part 14 in the vertical direction a plurality of times. The first movable part 14 may be configured to make it difficult to visually recognize not only the second timer TM2 but also at least a part of the first timer TM1.
[Modification 2]
In the above-described timer effect, at least a part of the second timer TM2 is configured to be difficult to visually recognize by the first movable role item 14. However, for example, at least a part of the second timer TM2 may be configured to be invisible by an accessory or the like other than the first movable accessory 14, such as the second movable accessory 15.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 96 and 98, after being displayed, the first timer TM1 is displayed as random numbers until the countdown is started. However, after being displayed, the first timer TM1 may be displayed other than the random number display until the countdown is started. For example, the first timer TM1 may be stopped at 88 after the display until the countdown is started.
[Modification 4]
The above-described timer effect is performed within the same fluctuation (within one fluctuation effect period). However, the timer speed effect described above may be executed across multiple changes.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
態 様 [Aspect B 5-1]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
It is a game machine provided with the movable role thing which can advance to the whole surface of the said display means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer indicating a remaining period until reaching a certain point in time;
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer indicating a remaining period until reaching a certain point in time;
A first effect in which the first timer and the second timer are displayed on the display means;
It is possible to execute a second effect in which at least a part of the second timer becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the advance of the movable character after the first effect.
態 様 [Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
In the first effect, the second timer is started in a state where the first timer is not started,
In the second effect, the first timer is not started.
[Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-2,
The first timer and the second timer indicate the remaining period by counting down the digital display,
In the first effect, the first timer is not started, and a random number is displayed by digital display, and the second timer counts down.
In the second effect, the first timer is not started, and the random number is displayed.
[Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-3,
After the second effect, a third effect in which the movable combination retreats and the second timer can be viewed;
After the third effect, the first timer is started, and the fourth effect is that the first timer displays a remaining period shorter than the remaining period indicated by the second timer. , A game machine characterized by being executable.
[Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-4,
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
After the fourth effect, with the second timer displaying the remaining period, the remaining period indicated by the first timer disappears, and the first timer is displayed at the position where it is displayed A game machine characterized by being capable of executing a fifth effect in which the predetermined image is displayed.
態 様 [Aspect B5-6]
A game machine according to any one of modes B5-3 to B5-5, wherein
In the first effect, it is possible to display an interlocking image linked to the second timer and interlocked with the countdown of the second timer.

  The icon selection effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 100 to 103. The icon selection effect may be performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol, during the jackpot game, or the like. That is, the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when the instruction for executing the icon selection effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103 It is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Icon selection effect A]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection effect A.
In the icon selection effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 100 (A), the first icon display effect 1 is executed. In the first icon display effect 1, the icon B62A, the icon B62B and the icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display effect 1, a button image B61 is displayed. In each of the first icons B62, a star mark is associated with a character image. The star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and the larger the number of stars, the higher the jackpot expectation. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1 to 5. When there is one star mark, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is very low, and when there are two star marks, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and when there are three star marks, the jackpot expectation is moderate. If there are four star marks, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and if there are five star marks, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is very high. The character image represents the type of reach effect to be developed from now, and more specifically, indicates the reach effect in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four stars, which indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62A appears. In addition, the icon B62B indicates that the icon B62A has three stars and the jackpot expectation degree is medium, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C indicates that there are two star marks and the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62C appears. The icon B 62 A, the icon B 62 B, and the icon B 62 C are different from each other in the character of the icon image, so the reach effect of the suggested development destination is also different. The first icons B62 each have a circular shape.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), the second icon display effect 1 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, a second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image in which a character representing "NEXT" is displayed. The character "NEXT" indicates that when the icon is selected in an icon selection effect described later, the icon selection effect is performed again. The second icon B63 has a rectangular shape.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100C, icon selection effect 1 is executed. In the icon selection effect 1, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (the icon B62A, the icon B62B, the icon B62C) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in the icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to urge the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are sequentially selected (selected icons are hatched. And one icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 100C shows that the second icon B63 is selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), an effect of changing the number of icons is executed. In the icon number change presentation, the icon number reduction suggestion image B64 and the re-icon selection suggestion image B65 are displayed. The re-icon selection suggestion image B65 is an image indicating that an icon selection effect is to be performed again next time, and the character "NEXT" is displayed. The character "NEXT" also suggests that the icon number change presentation is a pseudo-sequence presentation. The icon number reduction suggestion image B64 suggests that the number of icons decreases in the icon selection effect to be performed again next time.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100E, the first icon display effect 2 is executed. In the first icon display effect 2, the icon B62A and the icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display mode 2, a button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon display effect 2, the first icon B62 is reduced by one as compared to the first icon display effect 1. Specifically, the icon B62C has disappeared.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100F, a second icon display effect 2 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, a second icon B63 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (G), icon selection effect 2 is executed. In this icon selection effect 2, one icon is selected from the plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (the icon B62A and the icon B62B) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in the icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to urge the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are sequentially selected (the selected icons are hatched. And one icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 100G shows that the icon B62B of the first icon B62 is selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in the icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62B is selected in the icon selection effect 2, it develops into reach effect in which the character included in the icon B62B appears. This reach effect suggests that the jackpot expectation is moderate because the number of stars included in the icon B62B is three.
When the second icon B 63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In the present embodiment, the icon selection effect can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Icon selection effect B]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for describing an icon selection effect B.
In the icon selection effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the first icon display effect 1 is executed. In the first icon display effect 1, the icon B62A, the icon B62B and the icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display effect 1, a button image B61 is displayed. In each of the first icons B62, a star mark is associated with a character image. The star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and the larger the number of stars, the higher the jackpot expectation. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1 to 5. When there is one star mark, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is very low, and when there are two star marks, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and when there are three star marks, the jackpot expectation is moderate. If there are four star marks, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and if there are five star marks, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is very high. The character image represents the type of reach effect to be developed from now, and more specifically, indicates the reach effect in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four stars, which indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62A appears. In addition, the icon B62B indicates that the icon B62A has three stars and the jackpot expectation degree is medium, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C indicates that there are two star marks and the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62C appears. The icon B 62 A, the icon B 62 B, and the icon B 62 C are different from each other in the character of the icon image, so the reach effect of the suggested development destination is also different. The first icons B62 each have a circular shape.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the second icon display effect 1 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, a second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image in which a character representing "NEXT" is displayed. The character "NEXT" indicates that when the icon is selected in an icon selection effect described later, the icon selection effect is performed again. The second icon B63 has a rectangular shape.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101C, icon selection effect 1 is executed. In the icon selection effect 1, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (the icon B62A, the icon B62B, the icon B62C) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in the icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to urge the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are sequentially selected (selected icons are hatched. And one icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 101 (C) shows that the second icon B63 is selected.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), an effect of changing the number of icons is executed. In the icon number change presentation, an icon number increase suggestion image B 66 and a re-icon selection suggestion image B 65 are displayed. The re-icon selection suggestion image B65 is an image indicating that an icon selection effect is to be performed again next time, and the character "NEXT" is displayed. The character "NEXT" also suggests that the icon number change presentation is a pseudo-sequence presentation. The icon number increase suggestion image B66 suggests that the number of icons increases in the icon selection effect to be performed again next time.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101E, the first icon display effect 2 is executed. In the first icon display effect 2, the icon B62A and the icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display mode 2, a button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon display effect 2, the first icon B62 is increased by one as compared to the first icon display effect 1. Specifically, the icon B62D is newly displayed. The icon B62D has five stars, which indicates that the jackpot expectation is very high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62D appears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101F, the second icon display effect 2 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, a second icon B63 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (G), icon selection effect 2 is executed. In the icon selection effect 2, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (the icon B62A, the icon B62B, the icon B62C, the icon B62D) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in the icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to urge the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are sequentially selected (the selected icons are hatched. And one icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 101 (G) shows that the icon B62D of the first icon B62 is selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in the icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62D is selected in the icon selection effect 2, it develops into reach effect in which the character included in the icon B62D appears. This reach effect suggests that the jackpot expectation is very high because there are five stars included in the icon B62D.
When the second icon B 63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In the present embodiment, the icon selection effect can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Icon selection effect C]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection effect C.
In the icon selection effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 102A, the first icon display effect 1 is executed. In the first icon display effect 1, the icon B62A, the icon B62B and the icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display effect 1, a button image B61 is displayed. In each of the first icons B62, a star mark is associated with a character image. The star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and the larger the number of stars, the higher the jackpot expectation. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1 to 5. When there is one star mark, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is very low, and when there are two star marks, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and when there are three star marks, the jackpot expectation is moderate. If there are four star marks, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and if there are five star marks, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is very high. The character image represents the type of reach effect to be developed from now, and more specifically, indicates the reach effect in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four stars, which indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62A appears. In addition, the icon B62B indicates that the icon B62A has three stars and the jackpot expectation degree is medium, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C indicates that there are two star marks and the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62C appears. The icon B 62 A, the icon B 62 B, and the icon B 62 C are different from each other in the character of the icon image, so the reach effect of the suggested development destination is also different. The first icons B62 each have a circular shape.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), the second icon display effect 1 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, a square second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image in which a character representing "NEXT" is displayed, and a star mark. The character "NEXT" indicates that when the icon is selected in an icon selection effect described later, the icon selection effect is performed again. Also, this star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and the larger the number of stars, the higher the jackpot expectation. The number of star marks included in the second icon B63 is 1 to 5. If there is one star mark, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is very low, if two stars, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and if there are three stars, the jackpot expectation is moderate. If there are four star marks, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and if there are five star marks, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is very high. The second icon B63 shown in FIG. 102B indicates that the number of star marks is three and the jackpot expectation is medium.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102C, icon selection effect 1 is executed. In the icon selection effect 1, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (the icon B62A, the icon B62B, the icon B62C) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in the icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to urge the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are sequentially selected (selected icons are hatched. And one icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 102C shows that the second icon B63 has been selected. Since the selected second icon B63 has three star marks, this indicates that the jackpot expectation degree is expected to be medium in the future.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), an effect of changing the number of icons is executed. In the icon number change presentation, the icon number reduction suggestion image B64 and the re-icon selection suggestion image B65 are displayed. The re-icon selection suggestion image B65 is an image indicating that an icon selection effect is to be performed again next time, and the character "NEXT" is displayed. The character "NEXT" also suggests that the icon number change presentation is a pseudo-sequence presentation. The icon number reduction suggestion image B64 suggests that the number of icons decreases in the icon selection effect to be performed again next time.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102E, the first icon display effect 2 is executed. In the first icon display effect 2, the icon B62A and the icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display mode 2, a button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon display effect 2, the first icon B62 is reduced by one as compared to the first icon display effect 1. Specifically, the icon B62C has disappeared.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102F, the second icon display effect 2 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, a second icon B63 is displayed. In this case, the second icon B63 includes a star mark. The number of star marks is three as in the case of the icon selection effect 1 in FIG. 102 (C), suggesting that the jackpot expectation is moderate.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (G), icon selection effect 2 is executed. In this icon selection effect 2, one icon is selected from the plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (the icon B62A and the icon B62B) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in the icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to urge the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are sequentially selected (the selected icons are hatched. And one icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 102 (G) shows that the icon B62B of the first icon B62 is selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in the icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62B is selected in the icon selection effect 2, it develops into reach effect in which the character included in the icon B62B appears. The number (three) of star marks included in the icon B 62 B suggests that the jackpot expectation of this reach effect is moderate.
When the second icon B 63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In the present embodiment, the icon selection effect can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Icon selection effect D]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for describing the icon selection effect D.
In the icon selection effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the first icon display effect 1 is executed. In the first icon display effect 1, the icon B62A, the icon B62B and the icon B62C are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display effect 1, a button image B61 is displayed. In each of the first icons B62, a star mark is associated with a character image. The star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and the larger the number of stars, the higher the jackpot expectation. The number of star marks included in each first icon B62 is 1 to 5. When there is one star mark, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is very low, and when there are two star marks, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and when there are three star marks, the jackpot expectation is moderate. If there are four star marks, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and if there are five star marks, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is very high. The character image represents the type of reach effect to be developed from now, and more specifically, indicates the reach effect in which the character represented by the character image appears. For example, the icon B62A has four stars, which indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62A appears. In addition, the icon B62B indicates that the icon B62A has three stars and the jackpot expectation degree is medium, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62B appears. The icon B62C indicates that there are two star marks and the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and suggests a reach effect in which the character indicated by the icon B62C appears. The icon B 62 A, the icon B 62 B, and the icon B 62 C are different from each other in the character of the icon image, so the reach effect of the suggested development destination is also different. The first icons B62 each have a circular shape.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the second icon display effect 1 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, a square second icon B63 is displayed. The second icon B63 includes an image in which a character representing "NEXT" is displayed, and a star mark. The character "NEXT" indicates that when the icon is selected in an icon selection effect described later, the icon selection effect is performed again. Also, this star mark represents the jackpot expectation, and the larger the number of stars, the higher the jackpot expectation. The number of star marks included in the second icon B63 is 1 to 5. If there is one star mark, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is very low, if two stars, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, and if there are three stars, the jackpot expectation is moderate. If there are four star marks, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, and if there are five star marks, it indicates that the jackpot expectation is very high. The second icon B63 shown in FIG. 103 (B) indicates that there are two star marks and the jackpot expectation is relatively low.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103C, icon selection effect 1 is executed. In the icon selection effect 1, one icon is selected from a plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (the icon B62A, the icon B62B, the icon B62C) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in the icon selection effect 1, the color of the button image B61 changes to urge the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are sequentially selected (selected icons are hatched. And one icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 103C shows that the second icon B63 is selected. Since the selected second icon B63 has three star marks, this indicates that the jackpot expectation degree is expected to be medium or higher in the future.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), an effect of changing the number of icons is executed. In the icon number change presentation, the icon number reduction suggestion image B64 and the re-icon selection suggestion image B65 are displayed. The re-icon selection suggestion image B65 is an image indicating that an icon selection effect is to be performed again next time, and the character "NEXT" is displayed. The character "NEXT" also suggests that the icon number change presentation is a pseudo-sequence presentation. The icon number reduction suggestion image B64 suggests that the number of icons decreases in the icon selection effect to be performed again next time.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103E, the first icon display effect 2 is executed. In the first icon display effect 2, the icon B62A and the icon B62B are displayed as the first icon B62. Further, in the first icon display mode 2, a button image B61 is displayed. In the first icon display effect 2, the first icon B62 is reduced by one as compared to the first icon display effect 1. Specifically, the icon B62C has disappeared.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103F, the second icon display effect 2 is executed. In the second icon display effect 1, a second icon B63 is displayed. In this case, the second icon B63 includes a star mark. The number of star marks is increased by one to three as compared with the icon selection effect 1 in FIG. 103C, which suggests that the jackpot expectation is moderate.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (G), icon selection effect 2 is executed. In this icon selection effect 2, one icon is selected from the plurality of icons of the first icon B62 (the icon B62A and the icon B62B) and the second icon B63. Specifically, in the icon selection effect 2, the color of the button image B61 changes to urge the player to press the effect button 63, and a plurality of icons are sequentially selected (the selected icons are hatched. And one icon is selected based on the player pressing the effect button 63. FIG. 103G shows that the icon B62B of the first icon B62 is selected.

Next, an effect based on the icon selected in the icon selection effect 2 is performed. Specifically, since the icon B62B is selected in the icon selection effect 2, it develops into reach effect in which the character included in the icon B62B appears. This reach effect suggests that the jackpot expectation is moderate because the number of stars included in the icon B62B is three.
When the second icon B 63 is selected in the icon selection effect 2, the icon selection effect is executed again. In the present embodiment, the icon selection effect can be performed up to four times. When the icon selection effect is the fourth time, the first icon B62 is always selected.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of icon selection presentation is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the icon selection effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display of the first icon B62 and the display of the second icon B63 are performed, and one icon is selected from the first icon B62 and the second icon B63. When the icon selection effect 1 to be selected is performed and the second icon B 63 is selected, the display of the first icon B 62 and the display of the second icon B 63 are performed, and the icon selection effect 2 is performed again. According to this configuration, when the second icon B 63 different from the first icon B 62 associated with the jackpot expectation degree and the character is selected in the icon selection effect 1, the icon selection effect 2 is performed again. Thus, while maintaining the expectation to the jackpot of the player, the expectation to the jackpot can be amplified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the icon selection effects A, C, D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of icons of the first icon B 62 in the icon selection effect 2 is smaller than the number of icons of the first icon B 62 in the icon selection effect 1. According to this configuration, in the icon selection effect 2, the number of first icons B62 is smaller than the number of icons of the first icon B62 in the icon selection effect 1, so in the icon selection effect 2, the player This makes it possible to feel that the first icon B 62 desired to be selected is easily selected, and the interest of the icon selection effect 2 can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the icon selection effects A, C and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of icons of the first icon B 62 in the icon selection effect 2 is one less than the number of icons of the first icon B 62 in the icon selection effect 1 . According to this configuration, in icon selection effect 2, the number of first icons B62 is one less than the number of icons of first icon B62 in icon selection effect 1, so in icon selection effect 2, the player selects This makes it possible for the player to feel that it is easy to select the first icon B62 which he / she desires to select, while suppressing the exclusion of the first icon B62 which wants to It can be done. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the icon selection effects A, C, D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the lowest jackpot expectation of the jackpot expectation indication included in the icon of the first icon B 62 in the icon selection effect 2 Higher than the lowest jackpot expectation degree of the jackpot expectation degree indication display included in the icon of the first icon B 62 in 1. According to this configuration, it is more likely that the expectation of the jackpot will be higher if the icon is selected in the icon selection effect 2 than in the icon selection effect 1, so when switching to the icon selection effect 2 Expectation can be given. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the icon selection effects A and B of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second icon B 63 in the icon selection effect 1 and the icon selection effect 2 does not include the suggestion (star mark) of the jackpot expectation. According to this configuration, when the second icon B 63 is selected, the player can be excited because the next development is unknown. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of an icon selection presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the icon selection effect A of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the icon selection effect 2, two or more icons may be reduced as compared with the icon selection effect 1. Further, in the icon selection effect B, in the icon selection effect 2, two or more icons may be increased as compared to the icon selection effect 1. Further, in the icon selection effects A to D, there may be a plurality of second icons B63.

[Modification 2]
In the icon selection effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first icon B 62 and the second icon B 63 may have the same icon shape. For example, both the first icon B62 and the second icon B63 may have a circular shape. In addition, the first icons B62 may have different shapes.

[Modification 3]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first icon display effect 2, an icon with the largest number of star marks in the first icon B 62 in the first icon display effect 1 (big hit expectation is high) An icon with more star marks (an icon with a higher expected jackpot) may appear than the icon).
Further, in the icon selection effects A to D, in the first icon display effect 2, of the first icons B 62 in the first icon display effect 1, the star having the least star mark (the icon with the highest probability of winning) is the star An icon with a large number of marks (an icon with a high hit probability) may be displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first icon display effect 2, an icon with the smallest star mark in the first icon B 62 in the first icon display effect 1 (big hit expectation is low) An icon having the same number of icons and a star mark (an icon with a high probability of winning) may appear. Further, in the icon selection effects A to D, in the first icon display effect 2, of the first icons B 62 in the first icon display effect 1, the star having the least star mark (the icon with the highest probability of winning) is the star An icon with a small number of marks (an icon with a high hit probability) may be displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, each icon of the second icon B 63 of the first icon display effect 2 has the same character as each icon of the first icon B 62 in the first icon display effect 1 It may be used as it is and the number of star marks may be increased or decreased.

[Modification 6]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the highest jackpot expectation degree of the jackpot expectation degree indication display included in the icon of the first icon B 62 in the icon selection effect 2 is the icon selection effect 1 in the icon selection effect 1 It may be made higher than the highest jackpot expectation degree of the jackpot expectation degree suggestion display included in the icon of the first icon B62. According to this configuration, when an icon is selected by the icon selection effect 2 rather than the icon selection effect 1, it is possible to select an icon with a very high expectation of the jackpot, so when transitioning to the icon selection effect 2 People can be given great expectations. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 7]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first icon B 62 and the second icon B 63 are not star marks but numbers (eg, percentages), colors, patterns, sizes of icons, icons It is also possible to indicate the jackpot expectation by the density, the position of the icon, or the like.

[Modification 8]
In the icon selection effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the second icon B 63 is selected in the icon selection effect 1, in the next icon selection effect 2, the star associated with the second icon B 63 The number of marks may be configured to be equal to or more than the number of star marks of the second icon B 63 selected in the icon selection effect 1. Further, in the icon selection effect 2, the first icon B62 with a star mark smaller than the number of star marks of the second icon B63 may not be displayed. That is, the jackpot expectation may be configured to be higher as the number of icon selection effects increases.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B6-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect that performs a first display of displaying a plurality of icons including a character display indicating the development destination of the reach effect by the character and a jackpot expectation indication indicating the jackpot expectation. Yes,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second display for displaying an icon different from the icon in the first display,
In the third display effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and one icon is selected from the icon of the first display and the icon of the second display. It is an effect that performs the first selection effect to be selected,
The fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect, and when the icon of the second display is selected in the first selection effect of the third display effect, the first display effect is performed. By performing the second display effect and the second display effect, and performing the second selection effect of selecting one icon from the first display icon and the second display icon. is there,
A game machine characterized by

Application Example B6-2
The gaming machine according to the application example B6-1,
The number of icons of the first display in the second selection effect is smaller than the number of icons of the first display in the first selection effect.
A game machine characterized by

Application Example B6-3
The gaming machine according to the application example B6-1 or the application example B6-2.
The number of icons of the first display in the second selection effect is one less than the number of icons of the first display in the first selection effect,
A game machine characterized by

Application Example B6-4
The gaming machine according to any one of application examples B6-1 to B6-3, wherein
The lowest jackpot anticipation degree among the jackpot expectation degree suggestion display included in the icon of the first display in the second selection effect is the jackpot included in the icon of the first display in the first selection effect Higher than the lowest jackpot expectation of the expectation indication,
A game machine characterized by

Application Example B6-5
The gaming machine according to any one of application examples B6-1 to B6-4, wherein
The icon of the second display in the first selection effect does not include the jackpot expectation indication.
A game machine characterized by

  The effects during variation will be described below with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. This during-reproduction can be performed in association with the change display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "special symbol"). For example, at the start of the change display of the special symbol, the start of the change effect of the decoration symbol, or during the reach effect (super reach effect) or the like.

[During production A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the effect A during variation.
In the in-varying effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 68A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), a transparent logo effect is performed on the display screen 7a. This transparent logo effect is the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 104 (A), and the display screen 7a is switched before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are still stopped. When the display screen 7a is switched, the character (logo) image TLG1 "G" is displayed large at the center of the display screen 7a. The entire “G” logo image TLG1 is colored in blue, and is displayed in a mode in which the degree of transmission of the logo is small (the degree of transmission is almost zero). That is, in the transmission logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (B), it is an effect that suggests the big hit expectation degree by the transmission degree and color of the “G” logo image TLG1. The degree is smaller (the jackpot expectation is blue <green <red).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104C, reach effect is performed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, after the "G" logo image TLG1 shown in FIG. 104 (B) is displayed for a predetermined period, the display screen 7a is switched again, and the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 104 (A) is displayed. It shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R have stopped at the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "8 ↓ 8". Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (D), a lost symbol stop effect is performed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the result of the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 104 (A) is lost (reach lost) after reaching the reach in FIG. 104 (C) . In this example, this lost symbol arrangement is shown as "858".

  On the other hand, in place of FIG. 104 (B), a transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (E) may be executed. This transparent logo effect is the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 104 (A), and the display screen 7a is switched before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are still stopped. When the display screen 7a is switched, the character (logo) image TLG2 "G" is displayed large at the center of the display screen 7a. In the "G" logo image TLG2, the outline of the logo is bordered in dark red and the whole is colored in light red. As a result, the “G” logo image TLG2 is displayed in a mode in which the degree of transparency of the logo is large (the background behind is almost visible). That is, in the transmission logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (E), it is an effect that indicates the expectation of a big hit by the degree of transmission and color of the "G" logo image TLG1, and the degree of transmission is large. The degree increases (the jackpot expectation is blue <green <red).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104F, the reach effect is performed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, after the "G" logo image TLG2 shown in FIG. 104 (E) is displayed for a predetermined period, the display screen 7a is switched again and the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. It shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R have stopped at the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (G), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 104 (A) has reached a jackpot after reaching the reach in FIG. 104 (F). In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot.
The big hit finalization effect shown in FIG. 104 (G) is the case where the transmission logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (E) (a high transparency of the red logo and a high hit probability for the big hit) is performed. Also, it is not always performed, and there may be cases where the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (D) is performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 104 (D) described above is the case where the transmission logo effect shown in FIG. 104 (B) (the effect that the degree of transmission of the blue logo is small and the jackpot expectation is low) is performed. Even in this case, the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 104 (G) may be performed with a predetermined probability.

  That is, in the changing production A shown in FIG. 104, it is possible to execute a transparent logo effect that suggests a big hit expectation while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing, and the type of the transparent logo effect is expected to produce a big hit. The degree is supposed to change. That is, in the logo image (character image) displayed in the transparent logo effect, the jackpot expectation is low when the logo transmission degree is small, and the jackpot expectation is high when the logo transmission degree is large. Further, in the logo image (character image), when the logo is blue, the jackpot expectation is low, and when the logo is red, the jackpot expectation is high. In other words, when the variation result of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is a big win, a plurality of different degrees of transparency of the logo as a big hit suggestion effect with a predetermined probability (lottery using random numbers, etc.) during the variation. It is designed to perform predetermined transparent logo effects from various types of transparent logo effects.

[During production B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for describing the effect B during variation.
In the effect B during variation, first, as shown in FIG. 105 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 68A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), a transparent logo effect is performed on the display screen 7a. This transparent logo effect is the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 105 (A), and the display screen 7a is switched before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped. When the display screen 7a is switched, a character (logo) image TLG3 "G" is displayed large at the center of the display screen 7a. The “G” logo image TLG3 is colored in green as a whole, and displayed in a mode in which the degree of transparency of the logo is medium (translucent, and the background behind can be seen by about 50 percent). That is, in the transmission logo effect shown in FIG. 105 (B), it is an effect that suggests the big hit expectation degree by the transmission degree and color of the “G” logo image TLG3, and this transmission degree is medium and the color is green. And the jackpot expectation is moderate (the jackpot expectation is blue <green <red).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105C, reach effect is performed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, after the "G" logo image TLG3 shown in FIG. 105 (B) is displayed for a predetermined period, the display screen 7a is switched again and the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. It shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R have stopped at the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "8 ↓ 8". Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (D), a lost symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This lost symbol stop effect indicates that the result of the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 105 (A) is lost (reach lost) after reaching the reach in FIG. . In this example, this lost symbol arrangement is shown as "858".

  On the other hand, in place of FIG. 105 (B), there may be a case where a logo combination moving effect shown in FIG. 105 (E) is executed. During the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 105A, this logo feature movable effect is such that the logo feature LYA is lowered from the home position and stopped for a predetermined time at the front approximate center of the display screen 7a. ing. The logo feature LYA has the same "G" logo as the "G" logo image TLG3 shown in FIG. 105 (B) at the tip, and in this logo feature movable effect, the "G" logo is The entire display is stopped at the front approximately center of the display screen 7a so as to be visible. At this time, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are erased, and instead, a display effect is made as if the periphery of the "G" logo body is as if it were glowing. This enhances the rendering effect. A logo combination LYA as a movable combination shown in the figure is provided as a part of the above-described movable plate combination 15 (see FIG. 1).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105F, on the display screen 7a, a transparent logo effect is performed. In this transparent logo effect, as shown in FIG. 105 (F), the logo character LYA rises so that the "G" logo body stopped at the front approximately center of the display screen 7a is about half hidden. The letter “G” image TLG3 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a immediately below the logo. The “G” logo image TLG3 is colored in green as a whole, and displayed in a mode in which the degree of transparency of the logo is medium (translucent, and the background behind can be seen by about 50 percent). Also, the "G" logo image TLG3 is displayed in the same size as the "G" logo body. This enhances the rendering effect. That is, in the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 105 (B), the "G" logo image TLG3 is displayed in relation to the movement of the logo combination LYA. Although the "G" logo image TLG3 is the same as the display itself shown in FIG. 105 (B), the jackpot expectation degree is as shown in FIG. The transmission logo effect shown in Fig. 105 is higher than the transmission logo effect shown in Fig. 105 (B).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), reach effect is performed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, after the “G” logo image TLG3 shown in FIG. 105 (F) is displayed for a predetermined period, the logo role product LYA ascends and returns to the home position, and the display screen 7a is switched again to FIG. The decorative symbol variation effect shown in A) is displayed, indicating that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105H, on the display screen 7a, a jackpot determination effect is executed. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 105 (A) is a jackpot after reaching the reach in FIG. 105 (G). In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot.
The big hit finalization effect shown in FIG. 105 (H) is the case where the transmission logo effect shown in FIG. 105 (F) (the transmission logo effect performed in connection with the movement of the logo feature LYA) is performed. However, it is not always performed, and the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 105 (D) may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, in the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 105 (D) described above, the transparent logo effect shown in FIG. 105 (B) (the transparent logo effect not performed in connection with the movement of the logo feature LYA) is performed. Even in the case, the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 105 (H) may be performed with a predetermined probability without being always performed.

  That is, in the changing production B shown in FIG. 105, it is possible to carry out a transparent logo effect that suggests a big hit expectation while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changing, and this transparent logo effect is that The degree of expectation of the jackpot is to be changed depending on whether or not it is performed in connection with the movement. That is, when the logo image (character image) displayed by the transparent logo effect is displayed in relation to the movable of the movable role, the jackpot expectation level is high, and it is displayed regardless of the movable of the movable role. Is less likely to hit the jackpot. In other words, when the variation result of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is a big hit, the logo image is more likely to be displayed in relation to the movable of the movable character regardless of the movable of the movable character It is higher than the probability displayed on.

[Changing stage production C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the effect C during variation.
In the effect C during change, first, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), the decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 106A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward). In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, it is an effect stage that is displayed on the display screen 7a behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and is the first stage as a background image HG1 having the motif of "mountain" (The stay stage) is displayed. In addition, the effect stage is such that an effect stage selected from among a plurality of effect stages having different background images is displayed when a predetermined condition is established (for example, the variation of the symbol as a predetermined line is established) When the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times, when a predetermined time has elapsed, when the gaming state has changed, or when the player has performed an effect stage selection operation, etc. may be mentioned.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), a reach symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The reach symbol stop effect is the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 106 (A), and shows that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106C, on the display screen 7a, the first stage dedicated reach effect is executed. The first stage dedicated reach effect is a dedicated reach effect corresponding to the first stage, which is performed only when the first stage is staying. In the first stage dedicated reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and the predetermined reach reaches the character CRA1 dedicated to the first stage at the center of the display screen 7a. It is supposed to be directing. The predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) is not particularly limited, and may be battle effect or story effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (D), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot finalization effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 106 (A) is a jackpot after reaching the reach in FIG. 106 (B). In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot. The jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 106 (D) is not always performed, and may be lost with a predetermined probability.

  On the other hand, in place of FIG. 106 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 106 (E) may be executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display 7, the left decorative symbol 8L in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the right symbol display area Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 106 (E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward). In addition, in this decorative symbol variation effect, it is an effect stage that is displayed on the display screen 7a behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and is a second stage as a background image HG2 having a “tree” as a motif (The stay stage) is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (F), the reach symbol stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The reach symbol stop effect is the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 106 (E) in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped in the reach symbol arrangement. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (G), on the display screen 7a, the second stage dedicated reach effect is executed. This second stage dedicated reach effect is a dedicated reach effect corresponding to the second stage, which is performed only when the second stage is staying. In the second stage dedicated reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a, the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and the predetermined reach reaches the character CRA2 dedicated to the second stage in the center of the display screen 7a. It is supposed to be directing. The predetermined reach effect (super reach effect) is not particularly limited, and may be battle effect or story effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106H, on the display screen 7a, a jackpot determination effect is executed. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 106 (E) is a jackpot after reaching the reach in FIG. In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot. The jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 106 (H) is not always performed, and may be lost with a predetermined probability. However, there is a difference between the jackpot expectation (big hit reliability) between the first stage dedicated reach production shown in FIG. 106C and the second stage dedicated reach production shown in FIG. 106G. Therefore, the expected value to be a jackpot when the first stage dedicated reach or the second stage dedicated reach is performed is the same.

  That is, in the effect C during variation shown in FIG. 106, the effect stage selected from among the effect stages having different background images is displayed as the stay stage, and further, each effect on each of the effect stages It is possible to execute a dedicated reach effect that does not have a difference in the jackpot expectation degree (big hit reliability) corresponding to the stage.

[During production D]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the effect A during variation.
In the in-varying effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 68A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), G zone rush effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This G zone rush effect is performed with the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 107 (A), with the display screen 7a switched before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are still stopped. That is, the entry timing to the G zone in the G zone entry effect shown in FIG. 107 (B) is in the process of changing before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped. When the display screen 7a is switched, a character image "G zone!" Is largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, G zone is an effect with the display of the information which suggests a big hit expectation degree, Comprising: It is a specific image effect in which a background, a motif, etc. differ from the decorative symbol fluctuation effect shown to FIG. 107 (A).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (C), G zone fluctuation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This G zone change effect is performed by switching the character image "G zone!" Shown in FIG. 107 (B). When the G zone change effect is executed, the upper telop (subtitle) UT and the lower telop (subtitle) ST flow in the upper part and the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the upper telop UT, a horizontal band is displayed from the left end of the display screen 7a in a tapered manner over the right end, and characters of "G zone" and "chance" are alternately displayed in the horizontal band. The characters "G zone" and "chance" flow repeatedly in the direction (rightward) indicated by the arrow YAR. In the lower telop ST, a horizontal band is displayed from the right end of the display screen 7a so as to be tapered upward from the right end, and the characters "G zone" and "chance" are alternately displayed in the horizontal band. The characters "G zone" and "chance" flow repeatedly in the direction (leftward) indicated by the arrow YAL. Also, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed between the upper telop UT and the lower telop ST. As shown in FIG. 107 (C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in the variation before stopping, which is the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. It indicates that the production is continuing.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (D), on the display screen 7a, a lost symbol stop effect is executed. The lost symbol stop effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. In this example, this lost symbol arrangement is shown as "958".

  On the other hand, after the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 107 (A) is executed, the reach effect shown in FIG. 107 (E) may be executed instead of FIG. 107 (B). In this reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the reach symbol arrangement as a result of the variable symbols of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R being displayed by the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 107 (A). It shows a picture. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (F), G zone rush effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This G zone rush effect is a reach effect shown in FIG. 107 (E), and the display screen 7a is switched before the decorative symbol 8C is stopped. That is, the entry timing to the G zone in the G zone entry effect shown in FIG. 107 (F) is in reach before the decorative symbol 8C is stopped. That is, the entry timing to the G zone shown in FIG. 107 (B) is changing before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop, while the entry to the G zone shown in FIG. The timing is in reach after the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped. When the display screen 7a is switched, a character image "G zone!" Is largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (G), G zone reach presentation is performed on the display screen 7a. This G zone reach effect is performed by switching the character image "G zone!" Shown in FIG. 107 (F). When the G zone reach effect is executed, the upper telop (subtitle) UT and the lower telop (subtitle) ST flow in the upper part and the lower part of the display screen 7a. In the upper telop UT, a horizontal band is displayed from the left end of the display screen 7a in a tapered manner over the right end, and characters of "G zone" and "fever" are alternately displayed in the horizontal band. The characters "G zone" and "fever" flow repeatedly in the direction (rightward) indicated by the arrow YAR. In the lower telop ST, a horizontal band is displayed extending from the right end of the display screen 7a in a tapered manner over the left end, and characters of "G zone" and "fever" are alternately displayed in the horizontal band. The characters "G zone" and "fever" flow repeatedly in the direction (leftward) indicated by the arrow YAL. The reach effect is displayed between the upper telop UT and the lower telop ST. As shown in FIG. 107G, in the reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left end of the display screen 7a, the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right end, and a predetermined character CRA appears in the center of the display screen 7a. It is supposed to perform the reach production of. The predetermined reach effect is not particularly limited, and may be a battle effect or a story effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107H, on the display screen 7a, a jackpot determination effect is executed. This big hit finalization effect shows that the said fluctuation of the decoration design 8L, 8C and 8R which are shown in Figure 107 (A), as a result of the reach production of Figure 107 (E) and Figure 107 (G), it is big hit . In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot. Note that the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 107 (H) is not always performed, and the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 107 (D) may be performed with a predetermined probability. Similarly, the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 107 (D) described above is not necessarily performed, and there may be cases where the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 107 (H) is performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot decision effect will be performed is that the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped than when the rushing into the G zone is changing before the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped. During the later reach is higher (the later the timing of entering the G zone is late, the probability of a big hit finalization effect being performed is higher), and the character in the telop in the G zone performance is "fever" than "chance" Is higher.

  That is, in the variable production D shown in FIG. 107, zone presentation with display of information suggesting the jackpot expectation can be executed, and the jackpot expectation is the timing of entering the G zone and the character display in the G zone It is supposed to change depending on the content of That is, when the variation result of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is a big hit, the probability that the entry timing to the G zone is delayed is high, and the character in the telop in the G zone effect is "fever" The probability of being is high.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of the effect during fluctuation is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, it is possible to execute display of a character image or a mark image as the first display, and the first effect is that of the first display. The effect of changing the degree of transmission of the image is such that the effect of suggesting the jackpot expectation degree is performed by the degree of transmission of the first display image. According to this configuration, since the jackpot expectation changes due to the difference in the degree of transmission of the first display image, the player will be at a standstill due to the difference in the degree of transmission of the first display image. Further, by displaying the first display image with different degrees of transmission, it is possible to easily change the jackpot expectation degree in various ways. Furthermore, as shown in the effect B during fluctuation, by displaying the first display image in relation to the movable of the movable character or relating the color arrangement of the first display image and the degree of transmission, the jackpot expectation factor It also becomes possible to change the In particular, by making the movable part and the first display image the same, more relevance can be provided. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the jackpot expectation is configured to be higher as the degree of transmission of the first display image is larger. According to this configuration, the player can play the game with great expectation when the first display image is displayed as an image with a high degree of transparency. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, it is possible to execute the display of the effect stage selected from among the effect stages having different background images as the second display, and the second effect Is configured to perform a dedicated reach corresponding to the presentation stage displayed in the second display. According to this configuration, since the dedicated reach specialized for each of the presentation stages is provided, the player can easily determine the presentation stage at the current time by viewing the dedicated reach. . For example, if the game state is related to the effect stage, the player can easily determine the current game state simply by looking at the dedicated reach. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, each of the dedicated reach corresponding to the effect stage has a configuration in which no difference is provided in the jackpot expectation. According to this configuration, the player can have a feeling of expectation for the jackpot even when the dedicated reach is performed in any of the rendering stages. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, it is possible to execute the display of a certain zone effect accompanied by the display of information suggesting the jackpot expectation as the third display, and the third effect is It is possible to execute an effect to make a zone effect enter at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot expectation degree is configured to change according to the inrush timing of the zone effect. According to this configuration, since the jackpot expectation level changes at the timing of entering the zone effect, the player will be at a standstill by the difference of the timing of entering the zone effect. In addition, it is possible to easily change the jackpot expectation degree in various ways by performing the timing of entering the zone effect at different timings. Furthermore, it is also possible to vary the jackpot expectation degree by associating the timing of rushing into zone production and the information display of the jackpot expectation suggested by the zone production. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of an effect during variation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104 and FIG. 105, the first display having different degrees of transparency is shown as a character (logo) image of “G”, but the present invention It is not limited to this. For example, the first display may be an image such as a symbol or mark, or an object or article having a specific shape, instead of a character (logo) image.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104 and FIG. 105, the expectation of the jackpot changes according to the transparency of the first display and the color arrangement, but the present invention is limited to this. Absent. For example, the degree of expectation of the jackpot may be changed depending on the size of the first display, the number of the display, or the timing of the display.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, each of the plurality of presentation stages is shown to be subjected to dedicated reach presentation corresponding to each presentation stage, but the present invention is limited to this It is not a thing. For example, a plurality of dedicated reach effects may be performed on one effect stage, or the number of dedicated reach effects to be set may be different in each effect stage.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, the jackpot expectation of the variation is suggested by the difference in the entry timing to the zone effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the content of the hold may be read ahead, and the jackpot expectation of the change relating to the hold may be suggested by the difference in the timing of entering the zone effect. In this way, it is possible to indicate the jackpot expectation across multiple fluctuations. In addition, although the rushing timing to zone effect was shown during symbol variation and reaching with symbol D during fluctuation shown in FIG. 107, this is, for example, at the start of symbol variation, at the end of symbol variation, immediately after reach, super It may be during reach.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, in the zone effect, the characters indicating the jackpot expectation displayed in the upper telop and the lower telop are the same, but the present invention is limited thereto It is not a thing. For example, the characters displayed in the upper telop and the lower telop may be different. In this way, the jackpot expectation can be further changed by the combination of the characters displayed in the upper telop and the lower telop.
In addition, the characters displayed in the telop flow in the horizontal band of the telop, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the jackpot expectation is extremely high, the characters displayed in the telop may be displayed in a large size out of the horizontal band of the telop. Alternatively, the horizontal band itself may be erased to display only characters.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B 7-1]
Production means capable of executing multiple effects,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
The first display is a display of a character image or a mark image,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is an effect that changes the degree of transmission of the first display image, and is an effect that suggests a jackpot expectation degree by the degree of transmission of the first display image.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect B7-2]
The jackpot expectation degree is higher as the degree of transmission of the first display image is larger,
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-1, characterized in that
[Aspect B7-3]
One of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The second display is a display of a plurality of background images selected from among different presentation stages,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is an effect for performing a dedicated reach corresponding to the effect stage displayed in the second display,
The gaming machine according to the aspect B7-1 or the aspect B7-2, characterized in that
[Aspect B7-4]
Each of the dedicated reach corresponding to the presentation stage has no difference in the jackpot expectation.
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-3, characterized in that
[Aspect B7-5]
One of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The third display is a display of a zone effect accompanied by a display of information indicative of the jackpot expectation,
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that causes the zone effect to be entered at a predetermined timing,
The big hit expectation changes with the rush timing of the zone effect,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B7-1 to B7-4, characterized in that

  The character display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 108 to 111. This character display effect is an effect that displays characters (including kanji, hiragana, katakana, alphabets, numbers, symbols, marks, etc.) displayed on the display screen in a predetermined mode, and the gaming state is in a predetermined state. And so on.

[Character display effect A]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect A.
In the character display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 108 (A), the decorative symbol fluctuation effect is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 108 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (B), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 108 (A) is a jackpot. In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108C, on the display screen 7a, the number of rounds is extended and display effect is executed. When the jackpot is reached, the display of the jackpot symbol array “777” shown in FIG. 108 (B) is switched to the round display RSH indicating the number of rounds of the present jackpot shown in FIG. 108 (C). In the round display RSH, a part of the number indicating the number of rounds is displayed in a mode in which the number of rounds protrudes from the display screen 7a. That is, among the "16R" displays indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot this time, the numeral 16 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end and the lower end is displayed as it protrudes from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. It is done. In addition, R of the display of "16R" is displayed on the lower right of the number of 16 in the aspect which fits on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (D), on the display screen 7a, the number of popped-out balls is displayed and the display effect is executed. The pop-out number is projected from the screen of the round display RSH showing the number of rounds shown in FIG. 108 (C), and the jackpot number suggested display DSH indicating the number of pop-out balls of this time is displayed. It is an effect. The number of pop-out balls is displayed in the out-of-round display effect, in which a part of the number indicating the number of pop-out balls is projected out of the display screen 7 a in the big hit pop-up ball number indication display DSH. That is, among the "2200 MAX" indicating the number of pop-out balls this time, the number 2200 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end is displayed as it protrudes from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 108 (D). (A part of the left end of the left end 2 is also displayed protruding from the display screen 7a). In addition, MAX of the display of "2200 MAX" is displayed under the number 2200 in a manner to fit on the display screen 7a. In addition, MAX has suggested the upper limit of the number of balls in this 16R jackpot.

  That is, in the character display effect A shown in FIG. 108, part of the characters in the round display RSH at the time of the big hit and the number-of-balls suggested display DSH as the letter display related to the big hit are from the display screen 7a. It is designed to be displayed in an out-of-round manner.

[Character display effect B]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect B.
In the character display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 109 (A), the decorative symbol fluctuation effect is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 109A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (B), a jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109C, on the display screen 7a, the number of rounds is pushed out and display effect is executed. When the jackpot is reached, the display of the jackpot symbol array “777” shown in FIG. 109 (B) is switched to the round display RSH indicating the number of rounds of the present jackpot shown in FIG. 109 (C). In the round display RSH, a part of the number indicating the number of rounds is displayed in a mode in which the number of rounds protrudes from the display screen 7a. That is, among the "16R" displays indicating the number of rounds of the big hit this time, the number 16 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end and the lower end is projected out of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. It is done. In addition, R of the display of "16R" is displayed on the lower right of the number of 16 in the aspect which fits on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (D), on the display screen 7a, the number of popped-out balls is displayed and the display effect is executed. The pop-out number is projected from the screen of the round display RSH showing the number of rounds shown in FIG. 109 (C), and displays the jackpot number-of-outs suggestion display DSH indicating the number of pop-out balls of this time. It is an effect. The number of pop-out balls is displayed in the out-of-round display effect, in which a part of the number indicating the number of pop-out balls is projected out of the display screen 7 a in the big hit pop-up ball number indication display DSH. That is, among the "2200 MAX" indicating the number of pop-out balls this time, the number 2200 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end is displayed being protruded from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 109 (D) (A part of the left end of the left end 2 is also displayed protruding from the display screen 7a). In addition, MAX of the display of "2200 MAX" is displayed under the number 2200 in a manner to fit on the display screen 7a. In addition, MAX has suggested the upper limit of the number of balls in this 16R jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109E, on the display screen 7a, the display of the fever V is performed. This Fever V is an out-of-order indication effect, switching from the screen of the out-of-big-out ball number indication indication DSH indicating the out-of-out ball number shown in FIG. 109 (D) It is an effect to be displayed. In the overdrive display effect, in the jackpot suggestion display FEHV, a part of a specific character of a character string (alphabet) indicating a jackpot is displayed in a mode in which the particular character of the letter V is projected from the display screen 7a. That is, of the words "FEVER" indicating that a big hit has been made, only the letter V is displayed enlarged, and a part of the upper end and the lower end protrudes from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 109 (E). Is displayed. Then, in this jackpot suggestion display FEHV, the letter of V displayed in a mode which is protruded from the display screen 7 a is so as to cover a part of other letters (letters of E that are both sides of V) constituting the character string It is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (F), on the display screen 7a, a right-handed V winning instruction directing effect is executed. The jackpot of this time is the planned 16 RV passage jackpot, and in this right-handed V winning instruction directing effect, the V opening and closing member 71 is opened long and passage to the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 becomes easy It takes place at the start of the round game. In this right-handed V prize instruction effect, on the display screen 7a, a message MGL consisting of the letters "Aim for V!" Is displayed at the center, and in this message MGL, the letter "V" is larger than other letters. It is displayed (about twice). On the message MGL, a right-handed arrow YAR1 for prompting the player to hit the right is displayed, and in the display area of the right-handed arrow YAR1, a message MGU1 consisting of the characters "right-handed" is displayed . The player can win a game ball in the V area 39 in the first large winning opening 30 by being prompted by the display of the right hitting arrow YAR1 and hitting the right.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (G), on the display screen 7a, V protrusion display effect is executed. This V protrusion display effect is performed when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in a round game in which passage to the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30 is easy. That is, when the game ball passes the V area 39, the V protrusion display effect switches from the screen of the right-handed V winning instruction effect shown in FIG. 109 (F) and the game ball passes the V area 39. It is an effect of displaying a suggested V region passage indication display VRH. In this V protrusion display effect, in the V area passage suggestion display VRH, a part of a single character indicating that the gaming ball has passed the V area 39 is displayed in a mode in which it is protruded from the display screen 7a. That is, the letter "V" indicating that the gaming ball has passed V area 39 is displayed in a large size, and a part of the upper end and the lower end is displayed being protruded from display screen 7a as shown in FIG. ing.

  That is, in the character display effect B shown in FIG. 109, part of the characters in the round display RSH at the time of the big hit and the number-of-balls suggested display DSH as the letter display related to the big hit It is designed to be displayed in an out-of-round manner. In addition, a part of a specific character in the jackpot indication FEHV indicating a jackpot as a character display relating to a jackpot is displayed in a mode in which it protrudes from the display screen 7a. Furthermore, in the jackpot suggestion display FEHV, a specific character enlarged and displayed in a manner of protruding from the display screen 7a is displayed so as to cover a part of other characters constituting the character string. In addition, a part of the characters in the V area passage indication VRH indicating that the gaming ball has passed the V area 39 as a character display related to the jackpot is displayed in a mode in which it protrudes from the display screen 7a.

[Character display effect C]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect B.
In the character display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), the decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 110 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are moving (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 110 (A) has been a jackpot. In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110C, on the display screen 7a, the number of rounds is pushed out and display effect is executed. When the jackpot is reached, the display of the jackpot symbol array “777” shown in FIG. 110 (B) is switched to the round display RSH indicating the number of rounds of the present jackpot shown in FIG. 110 (C). In the round display RSH, a part of the number indicating the number of rounds is displayed in a mode in which the number of rounds protrudes from the display screen 7a. That is, among the "16R" displays indicating the number of rounds of the big hit this time, the numeral 16 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end and the lower end is projected out of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. It is done. In addition, R of the display of "16R" is displayed on the lower right of the number of 16 in the aspect which fits on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (D), on the display screen 7a, the number of popped-out balls is displayed and the display effect is executed. The pop-out number is projected from the screen of the round display RSH indicating the number of rounds shown in FIG. 110C, and the jackpot number-of-outs suggestion display DSH indicating the number of pop-out balls of this time is displayed. It is an effect. The number of pop-out balls is displayed in the out-of-round display effect, in which a part of the number indicating the number of pop-out balls is projected out of the display screen 7 a in the big hit pop-up ball number indication display DSH. That is, among the "2200 MAX" indicating the number of pop-out balls this time, the number 2200 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end is displayed to be protruded from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. (A part of the left end of the left end 2 is also displayed protruding from the display screen 7a). In addition, MAX of the display of "2200 MAX" is displayed under the number 2200 in a manner to fit on the display screen 7a. In addition, MAX has suggested the upper limit of the number of balls in this 16R jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110E, on the display screen 7a, a feverish display effect is performed. This feverish display indication effect is performed by switching from the screen of the jackpot number indication display DSH indicating the jackpot number indicating the jackpot number shown in FIG. 110 (D). In this feverish display effect, a character string (alphabet) indicating that it has become a jackpot is moved and displayed while being separated by one character. That is, the character string "FEVER" indicating that the player has made a big hit this time is dislocated one character at a time and moved and displayed from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 110E, the character string "FEVER" is separated by one character each in the order of "R", "E", "V", "E" and "F" and the far side from the front side of the display screen 7a The movement is displayed while rocking. Therefore, in FIG. 110E, “R” moved and displayed first is displayed in the smallest size, and “F” moved and displayed last is displayed in the largest. And as for this "F", a part of the lower end is displayed protruding from the display screen 7a as shown to FIG. 110 (E). That is, when each character separated and moved and displayed by one character is positioned on the front side of the display screen 7a, a part of the character is displayed to be out of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110F, on the display screen 7a, the whole fever reduction display effect is executed. In this whole fever reduction display effect, each character of “R”, “E”, “V”, “E”, and “F” is displayed on the display screen 7 a as a result of the flick-over display effect shown in FIG. After all are moved to the back side and displayed in a reduced size, they are arranged to form a character string of "FEVER", and all characters are displayed in full on the display screen 7a. That is, the whole fever reduction display effect is an effect of displaying a jackpot indication display FEHS indicating that a jackpot has been made. As shown in FIG. 110F, this jackpot suggestion display FEHS has all characters reduced and displayed substantially in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. However, of the "FEVER", only the letter V is displayed larger than the other letters, and the other letters are displayed in the same size.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (G), on the display screen 7a, the fever V is pushed out and an enlarged display effect is executed. This Fever V is an enlarged enlarged display effect, the character string of “FEVER” which is reduced to substantially the center of the display screen 7 a in the entire Fever reduced display effect shown in FIG. It is an effect of moving and displaying the display screen 7a integrally from the back side to the front side and displaying it in an enlarged manner. That is, the Fever V is an effect that displays a jackpot indication FEHV indicating that a jackpot has become a jackpot. Like the jackpot suggestion FEHS shown in FIG. 110 (F), the jackpot suggestion FEHV is enlarged by displaying the letter V of “FEVER” which indicates that the jackpot has been hit, and the upper end and the top A part of the lower end is displayed as protruding from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 110 (G). Then, in this jackpot suggestion display FEHV, the letter of V displayed in a mode which is protruded from the display screen 7 a is so as to cover a part of other letters (letters of E that are both sides of V) constituting the character string It is displayed.

  That is, in the character display effect C shown in FIG. 110, some of the characters in the round display RSH at the time of the big hit and the number-of-balls suggested display DSH as the letter display related to the big hit are from the display screen 7a. It is designed to be displayed in an out-of-round manner. In addition, the jackpot indication FEHS that indicates that the jackpot has become a character display related to the jackpot is that all characters are reduced and displayed entirely in the display screen 7a, and only a specific character is displayed than the other characters. It is enlarged and displayed. In addition, the jackpot indication FEHV indicating that the jackpot has become a letter display relating to the jackpot, the jackpot indication FEHS is enlarged and displayed, and a part of the specific character is out of the display screen 7a. It is supposed to be displayed. Furthermore, in the jackpot suggestion display FEHV, a specific character enlarged and displayed in a manner of protruding from the display screen 7a is displayed so as to cover a part of other characters constituting the character string.

[Character display effect D]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect B.
In the character display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 111 (A), the decorative symbol fluctuation effect is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 111 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are moving (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 111 (A) has made a jackpot. In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111C, on the display screen 7a, the number of rounds is pushed out and display effect is executed. When the jackpot is reached, the display of the jackpot symbol array “777” shown in FIG. 111 (B) is switched to the round display RSH indicating the number of rounds of the present jackpot shown in FIG. 111 (C). In the round display RSH, a part of the number indicating the number of rounds is displayed in a mode in which the number of rounds protrudes from the display screen 7a. That is, among the "16R" displays indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot this time, the numeral 16 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end and the lower end is displayed as it protrudes from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. It is done. In addition, R of the display of "16R" is displayed on the lower right of the number of 16 in the aspect which fits on the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), on the display screen 7a, the number of popped-out balls is out and the display effect is executed. The pop-out number is projected from the screen of the round display RSH showing the number of rounds shown in FIG. 111 (C), and displays the jackpot number-of-outs suggestion display DSH indicating the number of pop-out balls of this time. It is an effect. The number of pop-out balls is displayed in the out-of-round display effect, in which a part of the number indicating the number of pop-out balls is projected out of the display screen 7 a in the big hit pop-up ball number indication display DSH. That is, among the "2200 MAX" indicating the number of pop-out balls this time, the number 2200 is displayed large, and a part of the upper end is displayed out of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 111 (D). (A part of the left end of the left end 2 is also displayed protruding from the display screen 7a). In addition, MAX of the display of "2200 MAX" is displayed under the number 2200 in a manner to fit on the display screen 7a. In addition, MAX has suggested the upper limit of the number of balls in this 16R jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111E, on the display screen 7a, a feverish display effect is performed. This feverish display effect is performed by switching from the screen of the jackpot number indication display DSH indicating the jackpot number indicating the jackpot number shown in FIG. 111 (D). In this feverish display effect, a character string (alphabet) indicating that it has become a jackpot is moved and displayed while being separated by one character. That is, the character string "FEVER" indicating that the player has made a big hit this time is dislocated one character at a time and moved and displayed from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 111E, the character string "FEVER" is separated by one character each in the order of "R", "E", "V", "E", and "F" and the far side from the front side of the display screen 7a. The movement is displayed while rocking. Therefore, in FIG. 111 (E), "R" moved and displayed first is displayed the smallest, and "F" moved and displayed last is displayed the largest. And as for this "F", a part of the lower end is displayed protruding from the display screen 7a as shown to FIG. 111 (E). That is, when each character separated and moved and displayed by one character is positioned on the front side of the display screen 7a, a part of the character is displayed to be out of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111F, on the display screen 7a, the whole fever reduction rotation display effect is executed. In this entire fever reduction rotation display effect, each character of “R”, “E”, “V”, “E”, and “F” is displayed on the display screen 7 a as a result of execution of the failure display effect shown in FIG. 111 (E). After all are moved to the back side and displayed in a reduced size, they are aligned to form a character string of "FEVER", and all characters are displayed entirely in the display screen 7a. That is, the whole fever reduction rotation display effect is an effect of displaying a jackpot indication display FEHS indicating that a jackpot has been made. As shown in FIG. 111 (F), this jackpot suggestion display FEHS has all characters reduced and displayed substantially in the approximate center of the display screen 7a. However, of the "FEVER", only the letter V is displayed larger than the other letters, and the other letters are displayed in the same size. Then, the jackpot suggestion display FEHS, after all characters are reduced and displayed generally at the approximate center in the display screen 7a, is laterally rotated in the same position as shown by the arrow YA.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (G), on the display screen 7a, the fever V is pushed out and an enlarged display effect is executed. In this Fever V, the enlarged display effect of the Fever is shown in FIG. 111 (F), and the character string of "FEVER" which is substantially reduced in the display screen 7a in the entire Fever reduced rotation display effect and displayed in a whole is rotated horizontally. In this case, the display is moved and displayed in an integrated manner from the rear side to the front side of the display screen 7a, and the display is enlarged. That is, the Fever V is an effect that displays a jackpot indication FEHV indicating that a jackpot has become a jackpot. Like the jackpot suggestion FEHS shown in FIG. 111 (F), the jackpot suggestion FEHV is enlarged by displaying the letter V of “FEVER” which indicates that the jackpot has become big, and the top and A part of the lower end is displayed as protruding from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 111 (G). Then, in this jackpot suggestion display FEHV, the letter of V displayed in a mode which is protruded from the display screen 7 a is so as to cover a part of other letters (letters of E that are both sides of V) constituting the character string It is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111H, on the display screen 7a, a fever display effect is performed. This Fever V display effect is an effect of the Fever V shown in FIG. 111 (G) being an enlarged display effect, which is an effect of reducing the letter of V displayed in a mode of being protruded from the display screen 7a. That is, the fever display effect is an effect of displaying a jackpot indication display FEH indicating that a jackpot has been made. The jackpot suggestion display FEH is displayed in such a manner that the letter V which has been projected from the display screen 7a shown in FIG. 111 (G) is reduced and all character strings ("FEVER") fit within the display screen 7a. However, of the "FEVER", only the letter V is displayed larger than the other letters, and the other letters are displayed in the same size. And in this jackpot suggestion display FEH, the letter V is displayed so as not to cover a part of the other letters (letter E on both sides of V) constituting the character string.

  That is, in the character display effect D shown in FIG. 111, some of the characters in the round display RSH and the number-of-balls-indication display DSH at the time of the big hit as the letter display related to the big hit are from the display screen 7a. It is designed to be displayed in an out-of-round manner. In addition, the jackpot indication FEHS that indicates that the jackpot has become a character display related to the jackpot is that all characters are reduced and displayed entirely in the display screen 7a, and only a specific character is displayed than the other characters. It is enlarged and displayed. In addition, the jackpot indication FEHV indicating that the jackpot has become a letter display relating to the jackpot, the jackpot indication FEHS is enlarged and displayed, and a part of the specific character is out of the display screen 7a. It is supposed to be displayed. Furthermore, in the jackpot suggestion display FEHV, a specific character enlarged and displayed in a manner of protruding from the display screen 7a is displayed so as to cover a part of other characters constituting the character string. As a jackpot related character display, a jackpot indication FEH indicating that a jackpot has become a particular character out of the display screen 7a of the jackpot indication FEHV is reduced and displayed, and all character strings are displayed. It is displayed in such a manner as to fit within the screen 7a. However, in this jackpot suggestion display FEH, a specific character is displayed larger than the other characters, and is displayed so as not to cover other characters constituting the character string.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of the effect during fluctuation is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, it is possible to execute character display related to the jackpot as the first display, and in the first effect, part of the characters in the character display , Is configured to be displayed in a manner that is out of the display screen. According to this configuration, the character display related to the jackpot can be appealed to the player in a very impactful manner. Therefore, the player is less likely to overlook the character display associated with the jackpot which is extremely important for gaming. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, the character display is composed of a plurality of characters, and in the first effect, a specific character of the character display is enlarged and displayed from the display screen It is configured to be displayed in a mode in which it protrudes. According to this configuration, it is possible to appeal a particular character of the character display related to the jackpot to the player in a very strong manner. Therefore, the player is less likely to overlook the character display associated with the jackpot which is extremely important for gaming. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to make a particular character stand out and make it more appealing to the player.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, the specific characters displayed in the form of being protruded from the display screen are displayed so as to cover some of the other characters constituting the character display. It can be configured to be According to this configuration, only specific characters of the character display related to the jackpot can be strongly appealed to the player in a very high impact mode. Therefore, the player is less likely to overlook the character display associated with the jackpot which is extremely important for gaming. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to make a particular character stand out and make it more appealing to the player.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110 and FIG. 111, the second effect is to display the character display consisting of a plurality of characters one by one on the display screen and then display the display It is possible to display all the characters in the inside, and the first effect is configured to be performed after the second effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to appeal to the player the character display consisting of a plurality of characters related to the jackpot in a very strong manner. Therefore, the player is less likely to overlook the character display associated with the jackpot which is extremely important for gaming. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, the third effect is performed after the first effect, and the specific character displayed in the form of being out of the display screen in the first effect is displayed. This is an effect to be displayed in a reduced size so as to fit within the display screen, and in an aspect in which a specific character is displayed in a reduced size, it is configured to be displayed larger than other characters constituting the character display. According to this configuration, even when a specific character displayed in a manner out of the display screen is reduced, it is displayed larger than the other characters that constitute the character display, so the character display related to the jackpot is displayed. The specific character of can be appealed to the player in a very impactful manner. Therefore, the player is less likely to overlook the character display associated with the jackpot which is extremely important for gaming. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, it is possible to make a particular character stand out and make it more appealing to the player.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of an effect during variation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, the specific characters displayed in the form of being protruded from the display screen are displayed so as to cover some of the other characters constituting the character display However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific character displayed in a mode of being projected from the display screen may be displayed so as to cover all the other characters constituting the character display.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108 to FIG. 111, the numbers among “2200 MAX” indicating the number of big hit balls are displayed in a mode in which all the numbers are out of the display screen. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the numbers of "2200 MAX" may be displayed in a mode in which only a part of the numbers are out of the display screen (for example, a part of 2 displayed at the left end is out of the display screen Display in the form). In addition, MAX is made to fit within the display screen, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all characters or part of characters of MAX are displayed in a mode in which they protrude from the display screen. It is also good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, the right-handed V winning instruction directing effect is a V passing scheduled jackpot, the V opening / closing member 71 is long opened, and the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 Although it was made to do at the start of the round game that the passage to the easiness became easy, that is, V prize remaining time notification production was done with the game machine which is generally known as V-ST machine, but this invention It is not limited to For example, the right-handed V prize instruction effect is performed when the variable start opening (specially two) is hit and the two types of attackers having the V area are opened, that is, it is performed with a gaming machine called commonly known type 1 type 2 type mixer. You may do so.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, a part of the characters in the character display is displayed in a mode in which it protrudes from one display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image display apparatus is provided with a first display screen disposed on the front side and a second display screen disposed on the back side, and characters displayed in a mode of being projected from the display screen are the first display screen You may make it display by. In this way, the characters protruding from the display screen are displayed closer to the player, and the player can be strongly appealed to the player in a very high impact mode. The image display device having the first display screen and the second display screen may be configured to be able to display a stereoscopic image (3D). In this way, it is possible to further appeal the player by displaying in 3D the characters that are out of the display screen.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108 to FIG. 111, a part of the characters in the character display related to the jackpot is displayed in a mode in which it protrudes from the display screen. It is not limited to this. For example, characters displayed in a mode that has been projected from the display screen are characters that indicate the operation of the presentation button (for example, push, push, continuous hit) or characters that indicate a right hit (for example, , Aiming at the right, hitting the right, putting a handle, etc., a part of the characters in the character display related to the game instruction may be displayed in a mode of being projected from the display screen.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C1-1]
Production means capable of executing multiple effects,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
A gaming machine equipped with
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
The first indication is a letter indication associated with the jackpot,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
The first effect may be displayed in a mode in which a part of characters in the character display is out of the display screen.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect C1-2]
The character display consists of a plurality of characters,
In the first effect, a specific character of the character display is enlarged and displayed in a mode of being out of the display screen.
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1, characterized in that
[Aspect C1-3]
The particular character displayed in a manner of being projected from the display screen may be displayed so as to cover part or all of other characters constituting the character display.
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-2, characterized in that
[Aspect C1-4]
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is an effect of displaying all the characters in the display screen as a whole after displaying the character display composed of the plurality of characters one by one on the display screen,
The first effect is performed after the second effect,
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-2 or aspect C1-3, characterized in that
[Aspect C1-5]
One of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect to be performed after the first effect,
The third effect is an effect of reducing and displaying the specific character displayed in a mode of being out of the display screen in the first effect so as to fit within the display screen,
In the aspect in which the specific character is displayed in the reduced size, the specific character is displayed larger than the other characters constituting the character display.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-2 to C1-4, characterized in that

  The on-hold consecutive chan suggestive effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115. The pending inside consecutive chan suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined timing in relation to the content of the pending during the jackpot game. For example, the contents of the hold may be read ahead during the jackpot game, and if there is a jackpot in the contents of the hold, it may be executed during a round game, during an ending, or immediately after the end of the jackpot game.

[On Hold Uchi Chan Suggestive Direction A]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the character display effect A.
In the pending inside consecutive chan suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 112 (A), the decorative symbol variation production is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 112 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).
Further, at the left end of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed side by side vertically. H1 shows the number of reservations for the first special symbol, and H2 shows the number of reservations for the second special symbol. In the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 112 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it indicates that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "3" and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is "0".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot determination effect shows that the result of the said fluctuation | variation of the decoration design 8L, 8C, 8R shown to FIG. 112 (A) carried out the jackpot. In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112C, a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, a predetermined jackpot game is performed, and in the jackpot game, a predetermined opening effect is suggested on the display screen 7a to indicate the start of the jackpot game (round game), and then a round game effect is executed. It is supposed to be. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 112 (C), a round display RH showing the number of rounds is shown at the upper left of the display screen 7a (in this example, "5R" is shown), and at the center of the display screen 7a A predetermined jackpot display effect (not shown) is performed. Further, in this round game effect, the number of reservations H2 indicates the same "0" as before, but the number of reservations H1 is increased by one and changed from "3" to "4".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (D), the on-premises on-the-ch continuation suggestion is executed on the display screen 7a. In this on-hold consecutive-chance suggestive effect, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds on the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates "8R", and the on-hold numbers H1 and H2 indicate the same "4" and "0" as before There is. In addition, in this pending inside consecutive chan suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 112 (D), if the game ball is won in the regular winning opening (general winning opening) 29 during the round game, the pending occurred during the big hit game A sound effect KM is issued from the speaker 67 (in the present example, a sound effect "Tarally Lara" is shown) which suggests that there is a big hit in the game, i.e., indicates a pending continuous run. The normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a lower right portion of the game area 3 and is adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30. Therefore, the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening that can be won only when the player strikes the right.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112E, on the display screen 7a, a predetermined ending effect is suggested to indicate the end of the jackpot game (round game). In this ending effect, the numbers of holding H1 and H2 indicate "4" and "0" as before.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (F), the reserve digest decorative symbol variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reserve digest decorative symbol variation effect, the variation symbol of the decorative symbol is performed based on the reserve occurring during the big hit game, and thereby the reserve occurring during the big hit game is sequentially digested. In the reserve digest decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 112 (F), the reserve number H2 indicates the same "0" as before, but the reserve number H1 decreases from "4" to "2". That is, in this reserve digestion decoration symbol variation production, it is shown a situation where two of the first special symbol is digested from the ending effect (big hit game end) shown in FIG. 112 (E). That is, the variation effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 112 (F) correspond to the second reserve digest of the first special symbol after the jackpot game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (G), reach effect is performed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the reach symbol arrangement as a result of the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R being performed by the reserve digestion decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 112 (F) It indicates that it has stopped. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 112H, on the display screen 7a, a jackpot determination effect is executed. This jackpot finalization effect shows that the corresponding fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. . In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot. Note that the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 112 (H) is not always performed, and may be lost with a predetermined probability.

  In other words, in the on-hold consecutive-chance suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 112, when a specific winning opening (in this example, a normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29) is won during the jackpot game, The predetermined sound effect KM is emitted from the speaker 67, and this sound effect KM indicates that there is a big hit in the hold that occurred during the big hit game, that is, it performs an effect that suggests a pending in-between chain. ing.

[Pending Uchiren Chan Suggestive Direction B]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the on-hold consecutive chan suggestive effect B.
In the pending internal connection chan suggesting effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 113A, a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, a predetermined jackpot game is performed, and in this jackpot game, a predetermined opening effect is suggested on the display screen 7a to indicate the start of the jackpot game (round game), and then the round game effect is executed It is supposed to be. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 113 (A), a round display RH indicating the number of rounds is shown at the upper left of the display screen 7a (in the present example, “5R” is shown). A predetermined jackpot display effect (not shown) is performed.
Further, at the left end of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed side by side vertically. H1 shows the number of reservations for the first special symbol, and H2 shows the number of reservations for the second special symbol. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 113 (A), H1 indicates “4” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it is suggested that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "4" and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is "0".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), on-the-chance consecutive chan suggestion 1 effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this pending inside continuous chan suggestion 1 effect, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds at the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates “8R”, and the number of pendings H1 and H2 indicate “4” and “0” as before. ing. In addition, in this pending inside consecutive chan suggestion 1 effect, as shown in Figure 113 (B), it was generated during the big hit game, when the game ball is won in the regular winning opening (general winning opening) 29 during the round game A serif SM1 is suggested to be emitted from the speaker 67 (in this example, a serif "May be a chance!" Is indicated) which indicates that there is a jackpot in the hold, that is, indicates a pending ream. The normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a lower right portion of the game area 3 and is adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30. Therefore, the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening that can be won only when the player strikes the right. Furthermore, in the pending inside consecutive chan suggestion 1 effect, the speech SM1 ("Can be a chance!") That suggests the pending inside continuing chan from the speaker 67 is displayed as the words display SMH1 on the display screen 7a as it is . With this speech display SMH1, the player can recognize the suggestion of the pending continuous chan even when he / she misses the speech SM1.

  On the other hand, after the round game effect shown in FIG. 113 (A) is executed, there may be a case where the pending inside continuous chan suggestion 2 effect shown in FIG. 113 (C) is executed instead of FIG. 113 (B). In this pending inside continuous chan suggestion 2 effect, the round display RH indicating the number of rounds at the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates "8R", and the number of pendings H1 and H2 indicate the same "4" and "0" as before. ing. In addition, in this pending inside consecutive chan suggestion 2 effect, as shown in Figure 113 (C), when the game ball wins in the regular winning a prize opening (general winning a prize opening) 29 during the round game, it occurs during the big hit game Serif SM2 suggesting that there is a jackpot in the hold, that is, suggesting a pending inside chan is emitted from the speaker 67 (in this example, a line saying “it's still done!” Is shown) There is. Furthermore, in the pending inside continuous chan suggestion 2 production, the speech SM1 ("Yet it is finished!") Which suggests the pending inside running chan from the speaker 67 comes to be displayed as the words display SMH2 on the display screen 7a as it is ing. By this speech display SMH2, the player can recognize the suggestion of the pending continuous chan even if he / she misses the speech SM2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (D), on the display screen 7a, a predetermined ending effect is suggested to indicate the end of the jackpot game (round game). In this ending effect, the numbers of holding H1 and H2 indicate "4" and "0" as before.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (E), the reserve digest decorative symbol variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reserve digest decorative symbol variation effect, the variation symbol of the decorative symbol is performed based on the reserve occurring during the big hit game, and thereby the reserve occurring during the big hit game is sequentially digested. In the reserve digest decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 113E, the reserve number H2 indicates the same "0" as before, but the reserve number H1 decreases from "4" to "2". That is, in this reserve digestion decoration symbol variation production, it is shown a situation where two of the first special symbol is digested from the ending effect (big hit game end) shown in FIG. 113 (D). That is, the variation effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 113 (E) indicate the one corresponding to the second reserve digest of the first special symbol after the jackpot game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113F, on the display screen 7a, a lost symbol stop effect is executed. The lost symbol stop effect indicates that the result of the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R has been lost in the reserve digest decorative symbol change effect shown in FIG. 113 (E). In this example, this lost symbol arrangement is shown as "958".

  On the other hand, after the reserve digesting decoration symbol variation production shown in FIG. 113 (E) is executed, the reach production shown in FIG. 113 (G) may be executed instead of FIG. 113 (F). In this reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the reach symbol arrangement as a result of the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R being performed by the reserve digest decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 113 (E). It indicates that it has stopped. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 113H, on the display screen 7a, a jackpot determination effect is executed. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 113 (E) has made a big hit as a result of the reach effect of FIG. 113 (G). In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot. In addition, the big hit finalization effect shown in FIG. 113 (H) is not always performed, and the lost symbol stop effect shown in FIG. 113 (F) may be performed with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot decision effect will be performed is the one when the pending inside continuous chan suggestion 2 effect shown in FIG. 113 (C) is executed, the pending inside continuous chan suggestion 1 effect shown in FIG. 113 (B) Is higher than when it was run. That is, the probability that the jackpot decision effect will be performed, when the serif SM2 is issued when the serif SM2 is issued saying "still end!" It is higher than that.

  That is, in the pending internal connection chan suggestive effect B shown in FIG. 113, when a specific winning opening (in this example, a normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29) is won during the jackpot game, The predetermined speech is emitted from the speaker 67, and this speech indicates that there is a jackpot in the hold that has been generated during the jackpot game, that is, it performs an effect that suggests a holding in-line continuation. Moreover, in the on-hold consecutive chan suggestion effect B, the degree of expectation (reliability) of the on-hold consecutive chan changes depending on the content (type) of the words, and the words emitted from the speaker 67 are directly displayed on the display screen 7a. It is displayed as a display.

[On Hold U CHAN Suggestive Production C]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining a pending inside continuous chan suggestion effect C.
In the pending internal connection chan suggestive effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 114 (A), the decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 114 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in motion (in the downward direction).
Further, at the left end of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed side by side vertically. H1 shows the number of reservations for the first special symbol, and H2 shows the number of reservations for the second special symbol. In the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 114 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it indicates that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "3" and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is "0".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 114 (A) has been a jackpot. In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (C), a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, a predetermined jackpot game is performed, and in the jackpot game, a predetermined opening effect is suggested on the display screen 7a to indicate the start of the jackpot game (round game), and then a round game effect is executed. It is supposed to be. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 114 (C), a round display RH showing the number of rounds is shown at the upper left of the display screen 7a (in the present example, “5R” is shown), and at the center of the display screen 7a A predetermined jackpot display effect (not shown) is performed. Further, in this round game effect, the number of reservations H2 indicates the same "0" as before, but the number of reservations H1 is increased by one and changed from "3" to "4".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), on the display screen 7a, the on-round pending channel continuation chan suggestion effect is executed. In the on-round pending continuous connection suggestion, the round display RH showing the number of rounds at the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates "8R", and the pending numbers H1 and H2 are the same "4" and "0" as before. It shows. In addition, in this round internal suspension consecutive chan suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), when the game ball is won in the regular winning opening (general winning opening) 29 during the round game, it occurs during the big hit game To indicate that there is a jackpot in the hold, that is, a serif SM suggesting a pending ream is emitted from the speaker 67 (in the present example, a serif “it's over!” Is shown) ing. The normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a lower right portion of the game area 3 and is adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30. Therefore, the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening that can be won only when the player strikes the right. Furthermore, in the on-round pending consecutive chan suggestion effect, the dialogue SM ("Yet it is finished!") Indicating the pending on-line continuation chan emitted from the speaker 67 is displayed as it is as the dialogue display SMH on the display screen 7a. It has become. With this speech display SMH, the player can recognize the suggestion of the pending continuous reams even if he / she misses the speech SM. Here, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), a predetermined character CRA is drawn on the main body front plate in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29. That is, the motif of the character CRA is set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29. The setting of this motif will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (E), on the display screen 7a, a predetermined ending hold internal continuation chain suggestion effect that indicates the end of the jackpot game (round game) is executed. In addition, in the ending pending consecutive chan suggestive effect, the pending numbers H1 and H2 indicate the same "4" and "0" as before. Here, in this ending pending inside consecutive chan suggestion effect, the background of the display screen 7 a is configured using the same character CRA as the motif set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29. That is, in this ending pending inside consecutive chan suggestion effect, a specific image having the character CRA as a motif is displayed. In other words, by displaying this specific image at the end of the jackpot game, it is suggested to suggest a continuation in reserve.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (F), the reserve digest decorative symbol variation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reserve digest decorative symbol variation effect, the variation symbol of the decorative symbol is performed based on the reserve occurring during the big hit game, and thereby the reserve occurring during the big hit game is sequentially digested. In the reserve digest decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 114 (F), the reserve number H2 indicates the same “0” as before, but the reserve number H1 decreases from “4” to “2”. That is, in this reserve digest decorative symbol variation production, from the ending reserve inside consecutive chan suggestion effect (big hit game end) which is shown in the previous figure 114 (E), it shows a situation that two reserve of the first special symbol is digested There is. That is, the variation effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 114 (F) correspond to the second reserve digest of the first special symbol after the jackpot game.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (G), reach effect is performed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the reach symbol arrangement as a result of the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R being performed by the reserve digest decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. It indicates that it has stopped. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 114 (H), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect shows that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 114 (F) has made a jackpot as a result of the reach effect of FIG. 114 (G). In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot. Note that the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 114 (H) is not always performed, and may be lost with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot decision effect will be performed is that when the ending pending inside consecutive chan suggestion effect shown in FIG. 114 (E) is executed, the ending pending inside continuous chan suggestion effect is not executed (character This is higher than the normal ending effect where the specific image with the CRA motif is not displayed. More specifically, the probability that the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 114 (H) is performed is as follows. In other words, it is the highest when the in-round pending inside consecutive chan suggestion effect (Fig. 114 (D)) and the ending pending inside continuous chance suggesting effect (Fig. 114 (E)) is performed, and only the ending pending inside continuous in-chan suggestive effect The time when it was performed is the next highest, when the only pending in-round continuation chan suggestion production is performed is the second highest, when the in-round pending in-run continuation suggestion and the ending pending in-run continuation suggestion is not performed Is the lowest.

  In other words, in the pending inside consecutive chan suggestion effect C shown in FIG. 114, when a specific winning opening (in this example, the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29) is won during the jackpot game, The predetermined speech is emitted from the speaker 67, and this speech indicates that there is a jackpot in the hold that has been generated during the jackpot game, that is, it performs an effect that suggests a holding in-line continuation. In addition, in the on-hold consecutive-chance suggestion effect C, the speech emitted from the speaker 67 is displayed as the speech display on the display screen 7a as it is. In addition, in the reserved inside consecutive chan suggestion effect C, a predetermined motif is set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 at which the words SM suggesting the pending inside consecutive chan is emitted, and the end of the jackpot game By displaying a specific image using this predetermined motif, it is further suggested that there is a jackpot in the hold that occurred during the jackpot game, that is, an effect is suggested to suggest a hold inside continuation chan ing. In other words, in the pending inside consecutive chan suggestion effect C, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of pending inside continuous chan suggesting effects at different timings, such as pending inside continuing chan suggestion effect and ending pending inside continuing chan suggestion effect .

[Pending Uchiren Chan Suggestive Direction D]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the on-hold consecutive chan suggestive effect D.
In the pending inside consecutive chan suggestion effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), the decorative symbol variation production is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 115 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in motion (in the downward direction).
Further, at the left end of the display screen 7a, H1 and H2 indicating the number of reservations are displayed side by side vertically. H1 shows the number of reservations for the first special symbol, and H2 shows the number of reservations for the second special symbol. In the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 114 (A), H1 indicates “3” and H2 indicates “0”. That is, it indicates that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "3" and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is "0".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 115 (A) has been a jackpot. In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), a round game effect is executed on the display screen 7a. When the jackpot is reached, a predetermined jackpot game is performed, and in the jackpot game, a predetermined opening effect is suggested on the display screen 7a to indicate the start of the jackpot game (round game), and then a round game effect is executed. It is supposed to be. In the round game effect shown in FIG. 115 (C), a round display RH showing the number of rounds is shown at the upper left of the display screen 7a (in the present example, "5R" is shown). A predetermined jackpot display effect (not shown) is performed. Further, in this round game effect, the number of reservations H2 indicates the same "0" as before, but the number of reservations H1 is increased by one and changed from "3" to "4".

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), on the display screen 7a, the on-round pending channel continuation chan suggestion effect is executed. In the on-round pending continuous connection suggestion, the round display RH showing the number of rounds at the upper left of the display screen 7a indicates "8R", and the pending numbers H1 and H2 are the same "4" and "0" as before. It shows. In addition, in this round internal suspension consecutive chan suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), when the game ball is won in the regular winning opening (general winning opening) 29 during the round game, it occurs during the big hit game To indicate that there is a jackpot in the hold, that is, a serif SM suggesting a pending ream is emitted from the speaker 67 (in the present example, a serif “it's over!” Is shown) ing. The normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a lower right portion of the game area 3 and is adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30. Therefore, the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 is a winning opening that can be won only when the player strikes the right. Furthermore, in the on-round pending consecutive chan suggestion effect, the dialogue SM ("Yet it is finished!") Indicating the pending on-line continuation chan emitted from the speaker 67 is displayed as it is as the dialogue display SMH on the display screen 7a. It has become. With this speech display SMH, the player can recognize the suggestion of the pending continuous reams even if he / she misses the speech SM. Here, in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), a pattern imitating an airplane HK is drawn on the main body front plate portion. That is, the motif of the plane HK is set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29. The setting of this motif will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (E), on the display screen 7a, a predetermined ending effect is suggested to indicate the end of the jackpot game (round game). In this ending effect, the numbers of holding H1 and H2 indicate "4" and "0" as before.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), on the display screen 7a, after the jackpot end, a pending chan continuation chan suggestive effect is executed. This big hit end and after hold inside continuous chain suggestion effect is a display effect which is performed immediately after the end of the big hit game, that is, the screen of the ending effect shown in FIG. 115 (E) is switched. In this jackpot end after hold inside consecutive chan suggestive effect, the fluctuation design of the decoration design is done on the basis of the hold which has been generated during the jackpot game, and thereby the reserve which has been generated during the jackpot game is sequentially digested. In the jackpot continuation after the big hit shown in Fig. 115 (F), the pending number H2 indicates the same "0" as before, but the pending number H1 decreases from "4" to "3" . In other words, in this after the end of the big hit in the pending inside consecutive chan suggestive effect, from the ending effect (big hit game end) shown in the previous FIG. 115 (E), a mode that digested the first 1st hold of the first special symbol It shows. That is, the variation effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 115 (F) correspond to the first reserve digest of the first special symbol immediately after the end of the jackpot game. Here, after the big hit end, in the pending inside consecutive chan suggestion effect, the background of the display screen 7a is configured using the same plane HK as the motif set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29. That is, in this post-hit end and pending inside consecutive chan suggestion effect, a specific image with the motif of the plane HK is displayed. That is, after the big hit end, in the pending inside consecutive chan suggestion effect, the background image is configured using the specific image with the motif of the plane HK as the display effect to be performed immediately after the end of the big hit game by changing the screen of ending effect. An effect is shown in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are variably displayed on the top.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), reach effect is performed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R reach as a result of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R being performed by the in-line consecutive chan suggesting effect after the jackpot shown in FIG. 115 (F). It shows that it stopped at the symbol arrangement. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. In the reach effect shown in FIG. 115 (G), the number of reservations H2 indicates the same "0" as before, but the number of reservations H1 decreases from "3" to "2". That is, in this reach effect, it shows a situation that the suspension of the first special symbol has been digested into two from the end of the jackpot game by the jack-on-call continuation presentation after the jackpot end shown in FIG. 115 (F) above. That is, the reach effect shown in FIG. 115 (G) indicates the one corresponding to the second reserve digest of the first special symbol after the end of the jackpot game. In this reach effect, as shown in FIG. 115 (G), on the display screen 7a, the background image using the specific image with the motif of the plane HK is within the suspension after the jackpot shown in FIG. 115 (F). It is displayed continuously from the continuation chan suggestion production.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (H), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect shows that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 115 (F) has made a big hit as a result of the reach effect of FIG. 115 (G). In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot. Note that the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 115 (H) is not always performed, and may be lost with a predetermined probability. However, the probability that the jackpot finalization effect will be performed is that the jackpot after the jackpot end is not executed when the jackon continuation chan suggestion effect is executed after the jackpot end shown in FIG. 115 (F) (When a specific image with an airplane HK as a motif is not displayed, when the normal decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 115 (A) is performed) is higher. More specifically, the probability that the jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 115 (H) is performed is as follows. That is, it is the highest when the in-round pending inside consecutive chan suggestion effect (FIG. 115 (D)) and the big hit end is followed by the pending inside continuous chain suggesting effect (FIG. 115 (F)). The moment when only suggestive staging is performed is the next highest, and the moment when only intra-round pending intra-chan suggestive directing is performed is the next highest, during mid-round pending intra-continuous chan suggestive directing and after a big hit end pending intra-continuous chan suggestive staging Is the lowest when no action is taken.

  That is, in the on-hold consecutive-chance suggestion effect D shown in FIG. 115, when a specific winning opening (in this example, the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29) is won during the jackpot game, The predetermined speech is emitted from the speaker 67, and this speech indicates that there is a jackpot in the hold that has been generated during the jackpot game, that is, it performs an effect that suggests a holding in-line continuation. Moreover, in the on-hold consecutive-chance suggestion effect D, the speech emitted from the speaker 67 is displayed as the speech display on the display screen 7a as it is. In addition, in the reserved inside consecutive chan suggestion effect D, a predetermined motif is set in the normal winning opening (general winning opening) 29 which is caused to be issued the words SM suggesting the pending inside consecutive chan, immediately after the end of the big hit game By displaying a specific image (background image) using this predetermined motif in the decorative symbol variation effect of, it further suggests that there is a big hit in the hold that occurred during the big hit game, that is, a hold inside continuous chan It is intended to produce an effect that In other words, in the pending internal connection suggestion mode D, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of pending internal connection suggestion effects at different timings, such as in-round pending internal connection suggestion effect and after a big hit end pending internal connection suggestion. ing.

[Example of effect]
The following is an example of the effect of the on-hold consecutive chan suggestion effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112 to FIG. 115, the first effect suggests the degree of expectation of the on-hold consecutive run in relation to the winning of a specific winning opening during the jackpot game. It is configured to perform an effect. According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to perform technical intervention by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball to make the game ball reach a specific winning opening during the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, especially the monotonous jackpot game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112 to FIG. 115, the effect of suggesting the degree of expectation of the on-hold consecutive chan is performed by the sound generated in relation to the winning on a specific winning opening. It has become. According to this configuration, when indicating the degree of expectation of the on-hold consecutive run, it is possible to inform the player in various manners in an easy-to-understand manner. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since the degree of expectation of the on-hold consecutive chan is suggested by voice, the player does not have to gaze at the display screen as compared to suggesting the on-hold expected degree of the continuous on display, as a result, You can relax and enjoy the game. In addition, it is possible to easily change the degree of expectation of the on-hold consecutive chan depending on the type of voice. Furthermore, it is also possible to further appeal the player by attracting attention to a sound having a feature timbre or melody that indicates the degree of expectation of the on-hold continuation chan.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 to FIG. 115, the voice generated in connection with the winning on the specific winning opening is a speech, and the expectation of the on-hold consecutive chan is the speech It is configured to change depending on the type. According to this configuration, it is possible to generate words of various contents and easily change the degree of expectation of the on-hold continuous connection. As a result, the player can enjoy the content of the words to be issued and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, a predetermined motif is set to a specific winning opening, and the first display sets the background of the display screen to a specific winning opening. It is possible to display a specific image of the same motif as the selected motif, and the second effect is to switch the background of the display screen to the specific image at a predetermined timing when there is a hold inside break. It has become. According to this configuration, when the background of the display screen is switched to the specific image, the player can play the game with great expectation. In addition, since the specific image has the same motif as the motif set for the specific winning opening, it is possible to show the player a specific winning opening, and when the gaming ball has won the specific winning opening. I can have hope. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the timing for switching to the specific image is configured to be during the end of the jackpot game or immediately after the jackpot game is over. According to this configuration, when it is immediately after the end of the jackpot game or the end of the jackpot game, the player looks at the display screen and decides whether to switch to the specific image or not. That is, since it is determined whether or not to run in succession at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot game is not bored to the end, and as a result, the interest of the game can be significantly improved. In addition, it is suggested by the voice generated in connection with the winning to a specific winning opening during the round, suggesting a pending continuous ream, then, after a while, the end of the jackpot game, or a specific image immediately after the jackpot game By switching to, it is possible to suggest a pending chute, and as a result, the player can be expected to expect a hanging ch for a long time. As a result, the player can keep the interest of the game for a long time.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of pending inside continuation chan suggestion production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112 to FIG. 115, the on-hold consecutive-chance suggestion effect is performed for the on-hold occurring during the big hit game, but the present invention It is not limited. For example, when a player wins a specific winning opening when the gaming state is in a definite variation state other than the jackpot state, a time reduction state, or a normal state, the jackpot expectation degree in the hold occurring at that time is You may be made to suggest the effect. In particular, when the gaming state is in a definite change state, it is preferable to perform an effect that suggests the jackpot expectation in the hold related to the second special symbol. In this case, it is preferable that the second starting opening (second starting winning opening, electric chow) for changing the specific winning opening and the second special symbol should not be prized unless it is hit to the right.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 to FIG. 115, when a winning inside consecutive chan suggestion effect is won in a specific winning opening, a predetermined line is issued in relation to the winning. Although the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the on-hold consecutive chan suggestive effect, the sound effect may be generated after the speech, and the sound effect may be different depending on the type of the speech. By doing this, the speech can be further enhanced, and the player can easily grasp the type of the speech. Alternatively, sound effects may be generated after the speech is issued, and the combination of speech and sound effects may indicate the degree of expectation of the on-hold consecutive chan. In this way, it is possible to change the degree of expectation of the pending internal link variously and easily. Further, the words and sound effects emitted when winning in this specific winning combination may be made different depending on the generated round.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, a specific image (background image) using the same motif as the motif set in the specific winning opening is under the jackpot game ending, or Although the on-premises consecutive chan suggestion effect is performed by displaying immediately after the end of the jackpot game, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a pending image may be played during a predetermined round of a jackpot game by a specific image using this motif, or during a jackpot game ending, immediately after a jackpot game and a jackpot game It may be performed in two or all of the predetermined rounds.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, the motif set in the specific winning opening and the motif of the specific image immediately after the end of the jackpot game or the jackpot game is a predetermined character Or although the airplane was illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this and may have any motif.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, the specific image using the same motif as the motif set in the specific winning opening is performed on one display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image display device is configured to be able to display a stereoscopic image (3D) by providing a first display screen disposed on the front side and a second display screen disposed on the rear side, and the specific image is It may be displayed as an image (3D). In this way, by displaying the specific image in 3D, it is possible to display a powerful specific image, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C2-1]
It is a gaming machine provided with effect means capable of executing a plurality of effects,
One of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is an effect performed during a jackpot game,
The first effect is an effect that indicates the degree of expectation of the on-premises consecutive chan in relation to the winning of a specific winning opening during the jackpot game.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect C2-2]
An effect indicative of the degree of expectation of the on-premises consecutive chan is performed by voice generated in connection with the winning on the specific winning opening,
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1, characterized in that
[Aspect C2-3]
The voice generated in connection with the winning of the specific winning opening is a speech,
The degree of expectation of the pending inside ream varies depending on the type of the line,
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-2, characterized in that
[Aspect C2-4]
Equipped with display means capable of displaying multiple displays,
A predetermined motif is set to the specific winning opening,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display,
The first display is to display the background of the display screen with a specific image of the same motif as the motif set in the specific winning opening,
One of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is to switch the background of the display screen to the specific image at a predetermined timing, when the on-hold on-call continuation is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3, characterized in that
[Aspect C2-5]
The timing to switch to the specific image is during or after the jackpot game round, or immediately after the jackpot game is over,
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-4, characterized in that

  The error display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119. This error display effect can be executed when it is detected by a detection means such as a ball detection sensor that the ball receiving tray (the excess ball receiving tray (lower plate) 62) is full.

[Error indication effect A]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the error display effect A.
In the error display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 116 (A), the decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 116 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (B), reach effect is performed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the reach symbol arrangement as a result of the variable symbols of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R being displayed by the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 116 (A). It shows a picture. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "8 ↓ 8". Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (C), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 116 (A) is a jackpot after reaching the reach in FIG. 116 (B). In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is usually shown with a jackpot "888". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (D), on the display screen 7a, a button operation instruction effect is executed. During the jackpot game, a promotion effect of whether or not the jackpot is normally promoted to a probability change jackpot is performed at a predetermined timing, and a button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 116 (D) is performed during this promotion effect. The button operation instruction effect is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button operation instruction effect is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, the character SIG "button PUSH!" Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed at the left and right center of the display screen 7a. By this button operation instruction effect, the effect of the operation instruction to cause the player to depress and operate the effect button 63 is executed. In the lower part of the button image BOG, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross hatched portion) rises with the elapsed time since the button operation instruction effect is displayed, and the meter value will be removed when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 disappears. Is displayed to be full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (E), a ball drop suggestion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ball removal indication display effect is an error display effect performed when a detection means such as a ball detection sensor detects that the surplus ball tray (bottom plate) 62 is full. The ball removal suggestion display effect includes a ball removal operation image EG including a display indicating a position at which the operation lever performing ball removal in the gaming machine is present, and a ball removal operation message EM prompting the player to perform the ball removal operation by a character display. , And the center of the display screen 7a. The ball drop suggestion display effect is displayed on the front side of the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 116 (D), and the ball drop operation image EG and the ball drop operation message EM are the button image BOG and the “button PUSH!”. It is displayed so as to completely cover the characters SIG. As for the ball removal operation image EG, an image for explaining the position where the operation lever for performing the ball removal is located is displayed in the square frame, and the position where the operation lever is located is indicated by circling the circle SC and pointing by the arrow YAD. ing. In the ball removal operation message EM, characters such as “Please remove the ball” are displayed immediately above the ball removal operation image EG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (F), the ball removal suggestion character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ball removal suggestion character effect, after the ball removal suggestion display effect shown in FIG. 116 (E) is performed for a predetermined time, the display of the ball removal operation image EG is erased and only the ball removal operation message EM is displayed. It is an aspect. When the display of the ball removing operation image EG is erased, the button image BOG is displayed again on the display screen 7a, but the character SIG of "Button PUSH!" Is not displayed. This implies that the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 has disappeared within the period in which the ball out suggestion display effect is performed for a predetermined time. Further, in the display area of the button image BOG, a message NG1 of “NO!” Is displayed. The message NG1 of “NO!” Indicates that the effect button 63 has not been operated within the effective operation period of the effect button 63 (a mission failure).

Next, as shown in FIG. 116 (G), jackpot promotion failure rendering is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot promotion failure production shows how the jackpot is not normally promoted to a certainty jackpot in the promotion production after all. Therefore, the display screen 7a usually indicates "888" of the jackpot symbol array, and the character "promotion failure!" Is displayed above "888" of the normal jackpot symbol array. Due to this jackpot promotion failure presentation, the player usually recognizes that the jackpot has not been promoted to a probable jackpot. Also, in this jackpot promotion failure rendering, the ball pulling out operation message EM is not displayed, but this is because the player operated the operation lever to carry out ball pulling before the jackpot promotion failure directing is performed, It is attributable to the fact that the filling of the bowl (the surplus bowl (bottom plate) 62) was eliminated. If the fill of the ball saucer (surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62) is not canceled before the jackpot promotion failure production is performed, the ball removal operation message EM is continuously displayed even during the jackpot promotion failure production .
The jackpot promotion failure effect shown in FIG. 116 (G) is always performed even when the message NG1 of “NO!” Is displayed in the button image BOG shown in FIG. 116 (F). Instead, there is also a possibility that the jackpot is normally promoted to a probability jackpot with a predetermined probability.

  That is, in the error display effect A shown in FIG. 116, storage of gaming balls in the storage device (excess ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62) is excessive, and during effect display (button effect in effect display) ), The display for prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed in front of the effect display, and the ball removal suggestion display is performed. Then, the ball removal suggestion display is a display related to the effect button 63 (a ball removal operation image EG suggesting a position at which the operation lever performing the ball removal is) and a ball removal operation message EM prompting the ball removal operation by a character display ( The button image BOG and the character SIG of "button PUSH!" Are displayed at the left and right center of the display screen 7a so as to cover all of the button image BOG and thereafter, when a predetermined time passes, the ball removal operation image EG is erased and the ball removal operation Only the message EM is displayed.

[Error indication effect B]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the error display effect B.
In the error display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), the decorative symbol fluctuation effect is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 117 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in motion (in the downward direction).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (B), reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the reach symbol arrangement as a result of the variable symbols of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R being displayed by the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 117 (A). It shows a picture. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "8 ↓ 8". Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 117 (A) is a jackpot after reaching the reach in FIG. 117 (B). In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is usually shown with a jackpot "888". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (D), on the display screen 7a, a button operation instruction effect is executed. During the jackpot game, a promotion effect of whether or not the jackpot is normally promoted to a probability change jackpot is performed at a predetermined timing, and a button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. The button operation instruction effect is an image for urging the player to operate the effect button 63. In other words, the button operation instruction effect is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in an effective operation period. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, the character SIG "button PUSH!" Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed at the left and right center of the display screen 7a. By this button operation instruction effect, the effect of the operation instruction to cause the player to depress and operate the effect button 63 is executed. In the lower part of the button image BOG, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross hatched portion) rises with the elapsed time since the button operation instruction effect is displayed, and the meter value will be removed when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 disappears. Is displayed to be full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (E), a ball drop suggestion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ball removal indication display effect is an error display effect performed when a detection means such as a ball detection sensor detects that the surplus ball tray (bottom plate) 62 is full. The ball removal suggestion display effect includes a ball removal operation image EG including a display indicating a position at which the operation lever performing ball removal in the gaming machine is present, and a ball removal operation message EM prompting the player to perform the ball removal operation by a character display. indicate. The ball removal suggestion display effect is displayed on the front side of the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 117 (D), and the ball removal operation image EG covers a part of the button image BOG (upper part of the button image BOG) And, it is displayed at the center on the left and right of the display screen 7 a so as to completely cover the character SIG of “button PUSH!”. As for the ball removal operation image EG, an image for explaining the position where the operation lever for performing the ball removal is located is displayed in the square frame, and the position where the operation lever is located is indicated by circling the circle SC and pointing by the arrow YAD. ing. In the ball removal operation message EM, the characters “Please remove the ball” are displayed on the upper left of the ball removal operation image EG and in the upper left corner of the display screen 7 a. That is, the deburring operation image EG and the deburring operation message EM are displayed apart from each other at a predetermined interval.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (F), the ball removal suggestion character effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ball removal suggestion character effect, after the ball removal suggestion display effect shown in FIG. 117 (E) is performed for a predetermined time, the display of the ball removal operation image EG is erased, and only the ball removal operation message EM is displayed. It is an aspect. When the display of the ball removing operation image EG is erased, the button image BOG is displayed again on the display screen 7a, but the character SIG of "Button PUSH!" Is not displayed. This implies that the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 has disappeared within the period in which the ball out suggestion display effect is performed for a predetermined time. Further, in the display area of the button image BOG, a message MG1 of "OK!" Is displayed. This “OK!” Message MG1 suggests that the effect button 63 has been operated (mission success) within the effective operation period of the effect button 63. When the display of the ball removal operation image EG is erased, the display position of the ball removal operation message EM changes (moves) substantially to the center of the display screen 7a so as to cover a part (upper part) of the button image BOG. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (G), the jackpot promotion determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot promotion finalization effect usually indicates that the jackpot has been promoted to a probability variable jackpot in the promotion production. Therefore, the display screen 7a shows "777" of the probability variation big hit symbol array, and the character "promotion!" Is displayed above "777" of the probability variation big hit symbol array. By this jackpot promotion finalization effect, the player usually recognizes that the jackpot has been promoted to a probable jackpot. Further, in this jackpot promotion finalization effect, the ball withdrawal operation message EM is not displayed, but this is because the player operated the operation lever to carry out ball withdrawal before the jackpot promotion finalization effect is performed, It is attributable to the fact that the filling of the bowl (the surplus bowl (bottom plate) 62) was eliminated. If the fill of the ball saucer (surplus ball saucer (bottom plate) 62) is not canceled before the jackpot promotion decision production is performed, the ball removal operation message EM is continuously displayed even during the jackpot promotion decision production .
The jackpot promotion determination effect shown in FIG. 117 (G) is always performed even when the message MG1 of “OK!” Is displayed on the button image BOG shown in FIG. 117 (F). Instead, there is a possibility that the jackpot is not normally promoted to the jackpot probability with certain probability.

  That is, in the error display effect B shown in FIG. 117, storage of gaming balls in the storage device (excess ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62) is excessive, and during effect display (button effect in effect display) ), The display for prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed in front of the effect display, and the ball removal suggestion display is performed. Then, the ball removal suggestion display is a ball removal operation image EG suggesting a position at which the operation lever performing the ball removal is at the left and right center of the display screen 7a in a mode of covering a part of the button image BOG and all of the characters SIG. A ball removal operation message EM for displaying and prompting the ball removal operation by a character display is displayed apart from the ball removal operation image EG in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, when a predetermined time passes, the ball removal operation image EG is erased, and only the ball removal operation message EM is moved to the approximate center of the display screen 7 a and displayed.

[Error indication effect C]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the error display effect C.
In the error display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 118 (A), the decorative symbol fluctuation effect is executed in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 118A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (B), reach effect is performed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the reach symbol arrangement as a result of the variable symbols of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R being displayed by the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 116 (A). It shows a picture. In this example, "7 ↓ 7" is shown for this reach symbol arrangement. Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118C, on the display screen 7a, a button operation instruction effect is executed. The button operation instruction effect is an effect to be performed at a predetermined timing during reach effect, for example, a timing immediately before the middle decorative symbol 8C in motion is stopped. The button operation instruction effect is an effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L moves to the left corner of the display screen 7a and the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right corner, and is developed at the center of the display screen 7a. It is an image for prompting an operation. In other words, it is an image indicating that the effect button 63 is in the effective operation period. Specifically, in the button operation instruction effect, the character SIG "button PUSH!" Is displayed above the button image BOG displayed at the left and right center of the display screen 7a. By this button operation instruction effect, the effect of the operation instruction to cause the player to depress and operate the effect button 63 is executed. In the lower part of the button image BOG, a meter MAT indicating the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 is displayed. This meter MAT is displayed so that the meter value (cross hatched portion) rises with the elapsed time since the button operation instruction effect is displayed, and the meter value will be removed when the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 disappears. Is displayed to be full.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), a ball drop suggestion display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This ball removal indication display effect is an error display effect performed when a detection means such as a ball detection sensor detects that the surplus ball tray (bottom plate) 62 is full. The ball removal suggestion display effect includes a ball removal operation image EG including a display indicating a position at which the operation lever performing ball removal in the gaming machine is present, and a ball removal operation message EM prompting the player to perform the ball removal operation by a character display. indicate. The ball removal suggestion display effect is displayed on the near side of the button operation instruction effect shown in FIG. 118C, and the ball removal operation image EG is displayed so as to completely cover the button image BOG. Then, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), while the character SIG of "button PUSH!" Is continuously displayed immediately above the ball removal operation image EG, the ball removal operation message is directly below the ball removal operation image EG. EM is displayed. That is, in the ball removal suggestion display effect, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM are displayed so as not to cover the character SIG of "button PUSH!" For prompting the player to perform the button operation by character display. Thereby, the player can understand and execute the operation instruction of the button operation even when the ball removal suggestion display effect is performed. As for the ball removal operation image EG, an image for explaining the position where the operation lever for performing the ball removal is located is displayed in the square frame, and the position where the operation lever is located is indicated by circling the circle SC and pointing by the arrow YAD. ing. In the ball removal operation message EM, characters such as “Please remove the ball” are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (E), the ball removal suggestion display elimination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this ball removal suggestion display and elimination effect, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM shown in FIG. 118 (D) are simultaneously removed, and the button image BOG is displayed again on the display screen 7a. The character SIG of "Button PUSH!" Is not displayed. This implies that the remaining period of the effective operation period of the effect button 63 has disappeared within the period in which the ball out suggestion display effect is performed for a predetermined time. Further, in the display area of the button image BOG, a message MG1 of "OK!" Is displayed. This “OK!” Message MG1 suggests that the effect button 63 has been operated (mission success) within the effective operation period of the effect button 63. In addition, the fact that the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM have been erased is that the player operates the operation lever to perform the ball removal, so that the ball tray (surplus ball tray (lower tray) 62) is removed. It is due to the fact that the full tank was eliminated. Temporarily, when filling of the ball saucer (surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62) is not canceled, the ball extraction operation image EG and the ball extraction operation message EM are unconditionally until the tank is dissolved. It will continue to be displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (F), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 118 (A) has made a big hit as a result of the effects of FIGS. 118 (B) to 118 (E). In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is shown as "777". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot. The jackpot determination effect shown in FIG. 118 (F) is not always performed even when the message MG1 of “OK!” Is displayed on the button image BOG shown in FIG. 118 (E). There is also a possibility of losing at a predetermined probability.

  That is, in the error display effect C shown in FIG. 118, storage of gaming balls in the storage device (excess ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62) is excessive, and during effect display (button effect in effect display) ), The display for prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed in front of the effect display, and the ball removal suggestion display is performed. Then, the ball removal suggestion display displays a ball removal operation image EG suggesting a position at which the operation lever performing the ball removal is located at the left and right center of the display screen 7a in a mode of covering all button images BOG A ball removal operation message EM prompting by character display is displayed immediately below the ball removal operation image EG. On the other hand, the character SIG of "button PUSH!" For prompting the player to perform the button operation in character display is continuously displayed immediately above the ball removal operation image EG, that is, in the ball removal suggestion display effect In order not to cover the character SIG of "button PUSH!" Prompting the display, the ball extraction operation image EG and the ball extraction operation message EM are displayed.

[Error indication effect D]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the error display effect D.
In the error display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), the decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 119 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (B), reach effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this reach effect, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped at the reach symbol arrangement as a result of the variable symbols of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R being displayed by the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. It shows a picture. In this example, this reach symbol arrangement is shown as "8 ↓ 8". Moreover, the character of "reach!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), the jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The jackpot determination effect indicates that the result of the change of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 119 (A) is a jackpot after reaching the reach in FIG. In this example, the jackpot symbol arrangement is usually shown with a jackpot "888". In addition, the character of "big hit-!" Is displayed on the upper side of decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R. The jackpot confirmation effect causes the player to be convinced of the jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (D), a round game display effect is executed on the display screen 7a. During the jackpot game, a round game is performed, and the round game display effect is an effect including a display related to the round game. As shown in FIG. 119 (D), in the round game display effect, a round game effect is developed at the center of the display screen 7a, and a round display RS indicating the number of rounds and the number of balls in the jackpot are displayed The number-of-ball-outs display TD shown is displayed. In this example, the round display RS indicates eight rounds, and the number-of-ball-outs display TD indicates 1250 pieces. Further, at the upper right of the screen, a second decorative symbol ZH indicating the present jackpot symbol array ("888") is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (E), on the display screen 7a, a promotion battle effect (promotional effect) is usually executed as to whether or not the jackpot is promoted to a definite jackpot. This promoted battle effect is performed as a round game effect developed at the center of the display screen 7a shown in FIG. 119 (D). When eight rounds of round games are started, an image in which the teammate character CRA on the player side and the enemy character CRB battle is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (F), a jackpot promotion suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this jackpot promotion suggestion effect, as a result of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the character “winning!” Indicating that the ally character CRA has won is largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character "winning!", It is possible to make the player think that the jackpot is normally promoted to a definite jackpot (the player is given an advantageous benefit). In the jackpot promotion suggestion effect, the round indication RS indicates 12 rounds, and the number-of-ball-outs indication TD indicates 1870. In other words, the promoted battle effect shown in FIG. 119 (E) is performed over eight rounds to twelve rounds. Further, the second decorative symbol ZH indicates the probability variation big hit symbol array “777”. That is, the second decorative symbol ZH, together with the word "winning!", Usually suggests that the jackpot is promoted to a definite jackpot.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (G), a ball drop suggestion display effect is performed on the display screen 7a. This ball removal indication display effect is an error display effect performed when a detection means such as a ball detection sensor detects that the surplus ball tray (bottom plate) 62 is full. The ball removal suggestion display effect includes a ball removal operation image EG including a display indicating a position at which the operation lever performing ball removal in the gaming machine is present, and a ball removal operation message EM prompting the player to perform the ball removal operation by a character display. , And the center of the display screen 7a. The ball removal indication display effect is displayed on the front side of the jackpot promotion indication effect shown in FIG. 119 (F), and the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM completely cover the character of “winning!” And, it is displayed so as to cover the round display RS and a part of the popped ball number display TD (round part RS and the numeral part of the popped ball number display TD). That is, in the ball removal suggestion display effect, the ball removal operation image EG and the ball removal operation message EM are displayed so as to cover a part or all of predetermined character displays displayed in the round game effect. As for the ball removal operation image EG, an image for explaining the position where the operation lever for performing the ball removal is located is displayed in the square frame, and the position where the operation lever is located is indicated by circling the circle SC and pointing by the arrow YAD. ing. In the ball removal operation message EM, the characters “Please remove the ball” are displayed at the lower edge of the frame of the ball removal operation image EG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (H), the jackpot promotion determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This jackpot promotion decision production has shown that the jackpot is usually promoted to a probability variation jackpot in the round game production. Therefore, the display screen 7a shows "777" of the probability variation big hit symbol array, and the character "promotion!" Is displayed above "777" of the probability variation big hit symbol array. By this jackpot promotion finalization effect, the player is generally convinced that the jackpot has been promoted to a certainty jackpot. Further, in this jackpot promotion finalization effect, the ball pulling out operation image EG and the ball pulling out operation message EM are not displayed, but this is because the player operates the operation lever before the jackpot promotion confirmed staging is performed. It is attributable to the fact that filling of the bowl (the surplus bowl (lower tray) 62) was eliminated as a result of removal. If the fill of the ball saucer (surplus ball saucer (bottom plate) 62) is not canceled before the jackpot promotion decision production is performed, the ball removal operation message EM is continuously displayed even during the jackpot promotion decision production . Further, in this jackpot promotion finalization effect, the round display RS indicates 13 rounds, and the number-of-ball-outs display TD indicates 2025 pieces. That is, the ball removal suggestion display effect shown in FIG. 119 (G) is performed from the 12th round to the 13th round. In addition, the second decorative symbol ZH indicates the same probability variation big hit symbol array “777” as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.
Incidentally, the jackpot promotion determination effect shown in FIG. 119 (H) is always performed even when the character of "winning!" Shown in FIG. 119 (F) is displayed (the ally character CRA has won). There is a possibility that the jackpot may not normally be promoted to a jackpot probability with a predetermined probability.

  That is, in the error display effect D shown in FIG. 119, storage of gaming balls in the storage device (surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62) is excessive, and during effect display (big hit game in effect display) In the case where the effect including the display related to the round game is being performed), the ball removal suggestion display is performed in which the display prompting the discharge of the game ball is displayed in front of the effect display. Then, the ball removal suggestion display is a part of the predetermined character display displayed in the round game effect (round display RS and number-of-balls-indication displayed in the round game effect) for the ball removal operation image EG that suggests the position where the operation lever performing ball removal TD) or the whole (the character of “winning!”) Is displayed at the left and right center of the display screen 7a in a mode covering the character, and the ball extraction operation message EM for prompting the ball extraction operation by the character display is displayed in the display area It is supposed to be displayed on.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of error display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 118, the first effect is an effect including a display related to an effect button, and the second effect is an effect including a display related to an error. The display of the second effect is displayed on the near side of the display of the first effect, and a part or all of the display related to the effect button is covered with the display related to the error. According to this configuration, when an error (abnormality) occurs in the gaming machine, even if the display of the button effect which is an important effect for the game is performed, part or all of the display related to the effect button By covering the display with the display related to the error, it is possible to alert the outside in a manner that the error is occurring promptly. As a result, it is possible to promptly cope with the error and to reduce the hindrance to the game as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the first effect is an effect including a display relating to a round game in a big hit game, and a display relating to a round game includes a predetermined character display, The display of the second effect is displayed on the front side of the display of the first effect, and a part or all of the predetermined character display related to the round game is covered with the display related to the error. According to this configuration, even when the predetermined character display related to the round game, which is an effect important for the game, is performed, part or all of the predetermined character display related to the round game is made an error. Covering with the related display makes it possible to notify that the occurrence of an error has occurred promptly in a manner that is noticeable to the outside. As a result, it is possible to promptly cope with the error and to reduce the hindrance to the game as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 119, the display related to the error is a display related to the ball removal when the tray full is detected. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify in a manner that it is noticeable to the outside that the plate full error has occurred promptly. As a result, the player can quickly carry out the ball removal, and the trouble to the game such as the interruption of the game due to the ball clogging can be avoided as much as possible. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 119, the display related to the ball removal is an image showing a message prompting the ball removal and the position of the ball removal operating unit (operation lever or operation button) Is configured to be displayed together. According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to instantly determine the position of the deburring operation unit and quickly perform deburring. As a result, the player can avoid interruptions to the game as much as possible, such as interruption of the game due to a ball jam, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to the ball removal is configured to be displayed at the left and right center of the display screen. According to this configuration, since the display related to the ball removal is displayed at a prominent position, it is possible to reduce as much as possible that the player overlooks the display related to the ball removal. As a result, the player can surely perform the ball removal, and it is possible to avoid the hindrance to the game as much as possible, such as the interruption of the game due to the ball jam. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of error display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 119, the image display device 7 is configured by one display screen 7a, and the display related to the error is displayed on this one display screen 7a. In the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this display or the display related to the display related to the round game during the jackpot game. For example, the image display apparatus is provided with a first display screen arranged on the front side and a second display screen arranged on the rear side, and the display related to the error relates to the first display screen and the effect button The display or the display relating to the round game during the jackpot game may be displayed on the second display screen. In this way, the display related to the error will be displayed closer to the player, and the player can be strongly appealed to the player in a very high impact mode. The image display device having the first display screen and the second display screen may be configured to be able to display a stereoscopic image (3D). In this way, it is possible to further appeal the player by displaying the error related display in 3D.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 119, the display related to the dish filling error is displayed together with a message prompting the ball removal and an image showing the position of the ball removal operating unit. Although the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the display of the message for prompting the ball removal and the image indicating the position of the ball removal operation unit, a voice for promoting the ball removal may be generated. Alternatively, the image display indicating the position of the ball removal operation unit and the sound for prompting the ball removal may be generated, and the message for prompting the ball removal may be omitted.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to the error is displayed on the near side of the display related to the effect button and the display related to the round game in the big hit game, Although it is made to cover a part or all of the display of, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display associated with the error may cover part or all of the display of the decorative symbol that is being displayed variably, or may cover part or all of the display of the hold icon .

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 116 to 119, the display related to the error indicates the display related to the fullness error, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, errors are not only dish full error, but also abnormal winning error, door opening error, payout status error, switch abnormal error, magnet detection error, discharge error, radio wave detection error, discharge ball confirmation error, solenoid photo sensor error, There may be an impact detection error, an abnormal V prize error, a prize frequency abnormal error, etc., and a display related to these errors may be performed.
[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 to FIG. 119, the display relating to the dish full error is a target display such as a display relating to the effect button and a display relating to the round game during the big hit game. Although the display is made on the front side to cover part or all of the displays, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display related to the error determines the content of the error, and determines whether to cover part of the target display or the entire display depending on the type of the determined error. You may Furthermore, the display associated with the error may not cover the target display at all depending on the type of the determined error.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
The display means is capable of executing a first predetermined effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The display means is capable of executing a predetermined second effect as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first effect is an effect including a display related to an effect button,
The second effect is an effect including a display related to an error,
The display means may display the display of the second effect on the front side of the display of the first effect, and may cover a part or all of the display related to the effect button with the display related to the error ,
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect C3-2]
The first effect is an effect including a display relating to a round game in a jackpot game instead of an effect including a display relating to the effect button,
The display related to the round game includes a predetermined character display,
The display means displays the display of the second effect on the front side of the display of the first effect, and a part or all of the predetermined character display related to the round game is a display related to the error May cover
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1, characterized in that
[Aspect C3-3]
The display relating to the error is a display relating to the removal of the ball when the disc is full.
The gaming machine according to the aspect C3-1 or the aspect C3-2, characterized in that
[Aspect C3-4]
The display related to the ball removal simultaneously displays a message prompting the ball removal and an image indicating the position of the ball removal operation unit.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3, characterized in that
[Aspect C3-5]
The display related to the ball removal is displayed at the left and right center of the display screen
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3 or aspect C3-4 characterized in that.

  The predetermined information display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. The predetermined information display effect may be performed during standby, during a change effect of a decorative symbol, during a jackpot game, or the like. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction for executing the predetermined information display effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read out from the ROM 103 This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Predetermined information display effect A]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined information display effect A.
In the predetermined information display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 120 (A), the standby display effect is executed. The standby display effect is a effect performed while waiting for the player, and is a demonstration effect (demonstration effect). In this standby effect, a character CRA which is a main character (main character) which is used extensively in the effects of the gaming machine 1, in other words, a motif of the gaming machine 1, and a balloon image C 41 are displayed. In the balloon image C41, "I am the main character!" Is described, which suggests that the character CRA is the main character in the gaming machine 1, and in other words, the character CRA is the main character.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), a jackpot game display effect is executed. The jackpot game display effect is an effect to be performed during a jackpot game generated by the player playing a game after the standby display effect. In this jackpot game display effect, a character CRA and a balloon image C42 are displayed. In the balloon image C42, a display indicating a round is made. In the example of FIG. 120 (B), it is suggested that it is 10 rounds (10R). In the jackpot game display effect, a display indicating right strike, a display indicating the current number of rounds, or a display indicating winning balls are also performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 120 (C), an alerting effect is performed. This alerting effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the change effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In the alerting effect, the embedded alert image C43 is displayed. The intruding attention alerting image C43 is described as "Let's enjoy the game moderately" and is a display that suppresses the intruding into the game. In the intruding attention alerting image C43, a description may be made to directly draw attention to intruding into the game, such as "Let's pay attention to the inscription into the game".

[Predetermined information display effect B]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined information display effect B.
In the predetermined information display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), the standby display effect is executed. The standby display effect is a effect performed while waiting for the player, and is a demonstration effect (demonstration effect). In this standby effect, a character CRA which is a main character (main character) which is used extensively in the effects of the gaming machine 1, in other words, a motif of the gaming machine 1, and a balloon image C 41 are displayed. In the balloon image C41, "I am the main character!" Is described, which suggests that the character CRA is the main character in the gaming machine 1, and in other words, the character CRA is the main character.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), a jackpot game display effect is executed. The jackpot game display effect is an effect to be performed during a jackpot game generated by the player playing a game after the standby display effect. In this jackpot game display effect, a character CRA and a balloon image C42 are displayed. In the balloon image C42, a display indicating a round is made. In the example of FIG. 121 (B), it is suggested that it is 10 rounds (10R). In the jackpot game display effect, a display indicating right strike, a display indicating the current number of rounds, or a display indicating winning balls are also performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (C), maker logo effect is executed. The maker logo display effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the change effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this maker logo display effect, a maker logo image C44 is displayed. The maker logo image C44 is a logo representing the maker of the gaming machine 1. The manufacturer logo image C44 represents "XYZ" as a manufacturer. Further, on the maker logo image C44, a predetermined catch phrase "Happy to you !!" is displayed. The maker logo image C44 may be a logo representing a maker who has researched and developed the gaming machine 1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 121 (D), an alerting effect is performed. This alerting effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the change effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In the alerting effect, the embedded alert image C43 is displayed. The intruding attention alerting image C43 is described as "Let's enjoy the game moderately" and is a display that suppresses the intruding into the game. In the intruding attention alerting image C43, a description may be made to directly draw attention to intruding into the game, such as "Let's pay attention to the inscription into the game". Further, in this alerting effect, a display (notice of lost articles and theft !!) is also performed to alert the player to pay attention to the lost articles and theft.

[Predetermined information display effect C]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined information display effect C.
In the predetermined information display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), the standby display effect is executed. The standby display effect is a effect performed while waiting for the player, and is a demonstration effect (demonstration effect). In this standby effect, a character CRA which is a main character (main character) which is used extensively in the effects of the gaming machine 1, in other words, a motif of the gaming machine 1, and a balloon image C 41 are displayed. In the balloon image C41, "I am the main character!" Is described, which suggests that the character CRA is the main character in the gaming machine 1, and in other words, the character CRA is the main character.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), a jackpot game display effect is executed. The jackpot game display effect is an effect to be performed during a jackpot game generated by the player playing a game after the standby display effect. In this jackpot game display effect, a character CRA and a balloon image C42 are displayed. In the balloon image C42, a display indicating a round is made. In the example of FIG. 122 (B), it is suggested that it is 10 rounds (10R). In the jackpot game display effect, a display indicating right strike, a display indicating the current number of rounds, or a display indicating winning balls are also performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (C), a copyright holder display effect is executed. In this copyright holder display effect, the character CRA and the copyright holder suggested logo image C45 are displayed. The copyright holder suggestion logo image C45 is a character that is the motif of the gaming machine 1 and is a logo that represents the copyright holder of the character CRA, which is the main character.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), maker logo effect is executed. The maker logo display effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the change effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this maker logo display effect, a maker logo image C44 is displayed. The maker logo image C44 is a logo representing the maker of the gaming machine 1. The manufacturer logo image C44 represents "XYZ" as a manufacturer. Further, on the maker logo image C44, a predetermined catch phrase "Happy to you !!" is displayed. The maker logo image C44 may be a logo representing a maker who has researched and developed the gaming machine 1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (E), an alerting effect is performed. This alerting effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the change effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this alerting effect, the embedded alerting image C43 and the predetermined alerting image C49 are displayed. The intruding attention alerting image C43 is described as "Let's enjoy the game moderately" and is a display that suppresses the intruding into the game. In the intruding attention alerting image C43, a description may be made to directly draw attention to intruding into the game, such as "Let's pay attention to the inscription into the game". In addition, the prescribed alerting image C49 is described as "Please be careful about forgetting the stolen card, lost items, lost objects", and warn the player to pay attention to the forgotten, stolen items, lost objects of the stored cards. Display.

[Predetermined information display effect D]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined information display effect D.
In the predetermined information display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 123 (A), the standby display effect is executed. The standby display effect is a effect performed while waiting for the player, and is a demonstration effect (demonstration effect). In this standby effect, it is a hero character (main character) that is used extensively in the effects of the gaming machine 1, in other words, the character CRA that is the motif of the gaming machine 1, the underage attention awakening image C 46, and fraud suppression The alert C47, the fraud alert C48, and the embedded alert C410 are displayed. The underage warning image C46 is described as "If you are under the age of 18 it is not good!", And warns the player that the underage under the age of 18 does not play the game. The fraud suppression warning alert C47 is described as "Cheating is a crime. Stop it!" And is a display for alerting the player to stop because a fraud such as a goto behavior is a crime. The fraudulent action alerting C48 is described as "Beware of fraud!", And warns the player not to comply with the fraudulent act. A soaking warning C410 is described as "Let's enjoy the game moderately" and is a display that suppresses the taking in of the game. In the intruding attention alerting image C410, a description may be made to directly draw attention to intruding in the game, such as "Let's pay attention to in-game embedding."

  Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), a jackpot game display effect is executed. The jackpot game display effect is an effect to be performed during a jackpot game generated by the player playing a game after the standby display effect. In this jackpot game display effect, a character CRA and a balloon image C42 are displayed. In the balloon image C42, a display indicating a round is made. In the example of FIG. 123 (B), it is suggested that it is 10 rounds (10R). In the jackpot game display effect, a display indicating right strike, a display indicating the current number of rounds, or a display indicating winning balls are also performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 123C, the copyright holder display effect is executed. In this copyright holder display effect, the character CRA and the copyright holder suggested logo image C45 are displayed. The copyright holder suggestion logo image C45 is a character that is the motif of the gaming machine 1 and is a logo that represents the copyright holder of the character CRA, which is the main character.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), maker logo effect is executed. The maker logo display effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the change effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this maker logo display effect, a maker logo image C44 is displayed. The maker logo image C44 is a logo representing the maker of the gaming machine 1. The manufacturer logo image C44 represents "XYZ" as a manufacturer. Further, on the maker logo image C44, a predetermined catch phrase "Happy to you !!" is displayed. The maker logo image C44 may be a logo representing a maker who has researched and developed the gaming machine 1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (E), an alerting effect is performed. This alerting effect is performed after the jackpot game display effect and before the change effect by the special symbol (decorative symbol). In this alerting effect, the embedded alerting image C43 and the predetermined alerting image C49 are displayed. The intruding attention alerting image C43 is described as "Let's enjoy the game moderately" and is a display that suppresses the intruding into the game. In the intruding attention alerting image C43, a description may be made to directly draw attention to intruding into the game, such as "Let's pay attention to the inscription into the game". In addition, the prescribed alerting image C49 is described as "Please be careful about forgetting the stolen card, lost items, lost objects", and warn the player to pay attention to the forgotten, stolen items, lost objects of the stored cards. Display.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of a predetermined information display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the predetermined information effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the standby display effect is performed, then, the big hit game display effect is performed, and thereafter, the display of the embedded warning alert image C43 starts the fluctuation of the special symbol It takes place before. According to this configuration, the intruding alerting image C43 is displayed at the timing when the player can calmly take a breath after the jackpot game, so that the player can genuinely accept the content of the intruding alerting image C43. Yes, it is possible to suppress excessive involvement in the game. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the game soundly and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the predetermined information effects B to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a big hit game display effect is performed, and thereafter, a maker logo display effect (display of a maker logo image C44) is performed, and thereafter, a stagnant caution call-out image It takes place before the display of C43. According to this configuration, the maker's logo image C44 and the embedded attention alerting image C43 are performed at a timing when they can calmly take a breath after the jackpot game, so that the player can add to the embedded attention alerting image C43 The manufacturer can be firmly recognized. As a result, the player can specify the manufacturer who manufactured the gaming machine 1 that gently embraces the player who performs the intrusive alerting image C43, and the evaluation of the manufacturer of the gaming machine 1 in the player can be improved. . As a result, the player can play intimately in the gaming machine 1 created by the manufacturer corresponding to the maker logo image C44, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the predetermined information effects C and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a jackpot game display effect is performed, and thereafter, a copyright holder display effect (display of a copyright holder suggestion logo image C45) is performed, and thereafter, It is performed before the display of the intruding alerting image C43. According to this configuration, the copyright holder suggested logo image C45 and the embedded attention alerting image C43 are performed at a timing when the player can calmly take a breath after the jackpot game, so that the player can add It is possible to firmly recognize the copyright holder of the character CRA, which is the motif of Machine 1. As a result, a player who knows the copyright holder of the character CRA can play the gaming machine 1 in a friendly manner, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the predetermined information effect D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display of the embedded warning alert image C410 is performed by the standby display effect. According to this configuration, the intruding attention alerting image C43 is displayed when the user is at rest in the standby mode, so that the player can deeply receive the content of the intruding attention alerting image C43, and excessive intimacy into the game. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the game soundly and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the predetermined information effect D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the predetermined alerting image C49 (a reminder display for forgetting a stolen prepaid card, theft, or a lost item) is performed when the intruding alerting image C43 is displayed. . According to this configuration, the predetermined alerting image C49 is displayed together with the intrusive alerting image C43 at the timing when the player can calmly take a breath after the jackpot game, so the player confirms that the prepaid card has been left, or You can pay attention to the theft and check for lost items. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the game soundly and to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of predetermined information display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the predetermined information effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the alerting effect, the other image (for example, the maker logo image C44, the copyright holder suggestion logo image C45, and the minor alert image C46) together with the embedded alert image C43. , Fraud suppression alert C47, fraud alert C48) may be displayed together.
In addition, during the jackpot game, clamor alert image C43, maker logo image C44, maker logo image C44, copyright holder suggestion logo image C45, underage alert image C46, fraud suppression alert alert C47, fraud alert alert C48 An image such as the predetermined alerting image C49 may be displayed.
In addition, in the maker logo display production, other images (for example, a soaking attention alerting image C43, a copyright holder suggestion logo image C45, an underage attention alerting image C46, a fraudulent action alerting attention C47, a fraud with a maker logo image C44 A reminder C48 and a predetermined reminder C49) may be displayed together.
In addition, in the copyright holder indication effect, along with the copyright holder suggested logo image C45, other images (for example, a soaking warning awakening image C43, a maker logo image C44, a minor warning awakening image C46, a fraud suppression warning awakening C47, a fraud The action alert call C48 and the predetermined alert call image C49) may be displayed together.
In addition, in the standby display effect, the copyright holder suggestion logo image C45, the maker logo image C44, and the predetermined alerting image C49 may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In the predetermined information effect D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the embedded alert alert image C410 of the standby display effect and the embedded alert alert image C43 of the alert effect are different descriptions without departing from the meaning of the embedded alert alert. You may do it. For example, write "Let's pay attention to the game's attention!" In the warning display image C410 for the standby display effect, and "You're too addicted to the game and can not see the surroundings at the attention drawn image C43. It is something to enjoy the game moderately, please be careful!
In addition, although the display position of the intruding alerting image C410 of the standby display effect and the display position of the intruding alerting image C43 of the alerting effect are different from each other, they may be at the same position.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C4-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of performing standby display,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a jackpot game display during a jackpot game,
The third display effect is an effect that performs a first intruding warning display to alert the player to get stuck in the game,
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and after the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and the second display effect is performed. The third display effect is performed,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect C4-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect C4-1,
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a manufacturer's logo representing a manufacturer of the gaming machine,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect in some cases.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the second display effect and before the third display effect.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect C4-3]
A game machine according to aspect C4-1 or aspect C4-2,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display effect is an effect of displaying a logo representing a copyright holder of a predetermined character used for the game machine,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect in some cases.
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed after the second display effect and before the third display effect.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect C4-4]
A game machine according to any one of Aspects C4-1 to C4-3, wherein
The first display effect includes a second intrusive alert display for alerting the player to engage in the game.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect C4-5]
A gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 4, wherein
A sixth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The sixth display effect is an effect of performing a card removal reminder display to alert the user to forget to remove the prepaid card,
The combination effect may include the sixth display effect in some cases.
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed when the third display effect is performed,
A game machine characterized by

  The hold icon movement effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. The on-hold icon movement effect may be performed during the change effect of the decorative symbol, or before or after the change effect. That is, the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the pending icon movement effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103 This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Hold Icon Movement Effect A]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for describing the hold icon movement effect A. Of the on-hold icon movement effects A, FIGS. 124 (A) to 124 (E) are executed when the gaming state is the normal state. In the reserved icon movement effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed at normal times. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are respectively moved downward (along the vertical direction), and the number is not visible. At this time, the three suspension icons 9A of the special view 1 are displayed side by side along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a in the first area FA of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserve icons 9A of the special view 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbol. The three suspension icons 9A are the suspension images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special view suspension storage area 85a in order from the bottom to the top. The first area FA of the display screen 7a is a held image display area capable of displaying the held icon 9A, and here, is an area having a predetermined width from the left end of the display screen 7a. The first area FA may be configured such that the area can be identified by an image (area image) indicating an area indicated by a specific color, or the first area FA may not be distinguishable from other areas. Here, the first area FA can not be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the first area FA can be appropriately set as an area including the area where the reserve icon 9A is displayed and the periphery thereof. In FIG. 124 (A), of the three reserve icons 9A of the special view 1, the second reserve icon 9A from the bottom (the reserve image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) is read ahead. The hold is changing due to The pending digest image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 124 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, the hold icon 9A is newly added to the top of the three hold icons 9A arranged vertically. The newly added reserve icon 9A is a reserve image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a. As shown in FIG. 124 (C), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four reserved icons 9A arranged vertically is displayed first. The reserve icon 9A at the bottom (the reserve image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) moves in the right direction and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserve digest image 9C is not displayed. The remaining reserve icons 9A (the reserve images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) displayed second and subsequent among the four reserve icons 9A arranged vertically are Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (D), the next variation display is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of variation may be in the form of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). The first hold icon 9A displayed first among the three hold icons 9A of the special view 1 by the shift movement described above (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view hold storage area 85a) Is changing due to read ahead.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (E), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. 124 (D), of the three holding icons 9A arranged vertically. , The first displayed reserve icon 9A (the reserve image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) moves in the right direction. At this time, since the moved holding icon 9A is changed by prefetching, the display does not disappear even after moving to the right, and the holding digested image 9C (the holding icon 9C) is formed. Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 124 (D), among the three pending icons 9A arranged vertically, the remaining pending icons 9A displayed in the second and subsequent ones correspond to the second and third storage areas of the first special view pending storage area 85a. The reserved image 9A) shifts downward. Then, a portion of the first reserve icon 9A (the reserve image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) is overlapped with the reserve digest image 9C (the reserve icon 9C). Is displayed.

  124 (F) to 124 (J) are executed when the gaming state is a definite change state. In FIG. 124F, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed at the time of probability variation. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are respectively moved downward (along the vertical direction), and the number is not visible. At this time, the three suspension icons 9B of the special view 2 are displayed side by side along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a in the second area SA of the display screen 7a. That is, the three suspension icons 9B of the special figure 2 are arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbol. The three holding icons 9B are holding images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special view holding storage area 85b in order from the bottom to the top. The second area SA of the display screen 7a is a reserve image display area capable of displaying the reserve icon 9B, and here, an area having a predetermined width from the right end of the display screen 7a. The second area SA may be configured such that the area can be identified by an image (area image) indicating an area indicated by a specific color, or the second area SA may not be distinguishable from other areas. Here, the second area SA can not be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the second area SA can be appropriately set as an area including the area where the reserve icon 9B is displayed and the periphery thereof. In FIG. 124 (F), of the three reserve icons 9B of the special view 2, the second reserve icon 9B from the bottom (the reserve image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) is read ahead. The hold is changing due to The pending digest image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 124 (G) shows a state in which one hold icon 9B is added. Here, in the second area SA of the display screen 7a, the hold icon 9B is newly added to the top of the three hold icons 9B arranged vertically. The newly added reserve icon 9B is a reserve image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special view reserve storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 124 (H), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the first displayed suspension is displayed among the four suspension icons 9B arranged vertically. The icon 9B (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special view hold storage area 85b) moves in the left direction and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserve digest image 9C is not displayed. The remaining reserve icons 9B (the reserve images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) displayed second and subsequent among the four reserve icons 9B arranged vertically are below. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 124 (I), the next variation display is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of variation may be in the form of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). The first hold icon 9B displayed first among the three hold icons 9B of the special view 2 by the shift movement described above (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special view hold storage area 85b) Is changing due to read ahead.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (J), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. 124 (I), of the three holding icons 9B arranged vertically. , The first displayed reserve icon 9B (the reserve image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) moves in the left direction. At this time, since the moved holding icon 9B is changed by the prefetching, the display does not disappear even after moving to the left, and it becomes a holding digested image 9C (the holding icon 9C). Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the hold icon 9B behind it. In FIG. 124 (I), the remaining reserve icons 9B displayed on the second and subsequent ones among the three reserve icons 9B arranged in the vertical direction (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) The reserve image 9B shifts downward. Then, a portion of the first reserve icon 9B (the reserve image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) is overlapped with the reserve digest image 9C (the reserve icon 9C). Is displayed.

[Hold Icon Movement Effect B]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for describing the hold icon movement effect B. As compared with the pending icon movement effect A, the pending icon movement effect B is different in the variation direction of the decorative symbol and the arrangement direction of the pending icon. Of the on-hold icon movement effects B, FIG. 125 (A) to FIG. 125 (E) are executed when the gaming state is the normal state. In the reserved icon movement effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 125A, the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in a normal state. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are respectively moved in the left direction (along the left-right direction), and the number is not visible. At this time, the three suspension icons 9A of the special view 1 are displayed side by side along the left-right direction of the display screen 7a in the first area FA of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserve icons 9A of the special view 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbol. The three suspension icons 9A are the suspension images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special view suspension storage area 85a in order from right to left. The first area FA of the display screen 7a is a reserve image display area capable of displaying the reserve icon 9A, and here, is an area having a predetermined width in the vertical direction from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The first area FA may be configured such that the area can be identified by an image (area image) indicating an area indicated by a specific color, or the first area FA may not be distinguishable from other areas. Here, the first area FA can not be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the first area FA can be appropriately set as an area including the area where the reserve icon 9A is displayed and the periphery thereof. In FIG. 125 (A), of the three reserve icons 9A of the special view 1, the second reserve icon 9A from the right (the reserve image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) is read ahead. The hold is changing due to The pending digest image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 125 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, the hold icon 9A is newly added to the leftmost of the three hold icons 9A arranged side by side. The newly added reserve icon 9A is a reserve image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a. As shown in FIG. 125 (C), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four reserved icons 9A arranged sideways is displayed first. The rightmost holding icon 9A (the holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view holding storage area 85a) moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserve digest image 9C is not displayed. The remaining reserve icons 9A (the reserve images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) among the four reserve icons 9A arranged side by side are right Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (D), the next variation display is executed by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R may be in the form of the decorative symbol fluctuation presentation D (FIG. 51). The first hold icon 9A displayed first among the three hold icons 9A of the special view 1 by the shift movement described above (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view hold storage area 85a) Is changing due to read ahead.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (E), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. 125 (D), of the three holding icons 9A arranged side by side. , The first displayed reserve icon 9A (the reserve image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) moves upward. At this time, since the moved holding icon 9A is changed by the pre-reading, the display does not disappear even after moving up, and it becomes a holding digested image 9C (the holding icon 9C). Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 125 (D), among the three suspension icons 9A arranged side by side, the remaining suspension icons 9A displayed in the second and subsequent ones (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special view storage area 85a) The reserve image 9A shifts rightward. Then, a portion of the first reserve icon 9A (the reserve image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) is overlapped with the reserve digest image 9C (the reserve icon 9C). Is displayed.

  125 (F) to 125 (J) are executed when the gaming state is the definite change state. In FIG. 125 (F), the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed at the time of probability variation. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are respectively moved in the left direction (along the left-right direction), and the number is not visible. At this time, the three suspension icons 9B of the special view 2 are displayed side by side along the left-right direction of the display screen 7a in the second area SA of the display screen 7a. That is, the three suspension icons 9B of the special figure 2 are arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbol. The three holding icons 9B are holding images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special view holding storage area 85b in order from left to right. The second area SA of the display screen 7a is a reserve image display area capable of displaying the reserve icon 9B, and here, an area having a predetermined width in the vertical direction from the upper end of the display screen 7a. The second area SA may be configured such that the area can be identified by an image (area image) indicating an area indicated by a specific color, or the second area SA may not be distinguishable from other areas. Here, the second area SA can not be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the second area SA can be appropriately set as an area including the area where the reserve icon 9B is displayed and the periphery thereof. In FIG. 125F, of the three reserve icons 9B of the special view 2, the second reserve icon 9B from the left (the reserve image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) is read ahead. The hold is changing due to The pending digest image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 125 (G) shows a state in which one hold icon 9B is added. Here, in the second area SA of the display screen 7a, the hold icon 9B is newly added to the right of the three hold icons 9B arranged side by side. The newly added reserve icon 9B is a reserve image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special view reserve storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 125 (H), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four reserved icons 9B arranged sideways is displayed first. The leftmost reserve icon 9B (the reserve image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) moves downward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserve digest image 9C is not displayed. The remaining reserve icons 9B (the reserve images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) among the four reserve icons 9B arranged side by side are left Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 125 (I), the next variation display by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R is executed. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R may be in the form of the decorative symbol fluctuation effect A (FIG. 48). The first hold icon 9B displayed first among the three hold icons 9B of the special view 2 by the shift movement described above (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special view hold storage area 85b) Is changing due to read ahead.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (J), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped, in FIG. , The first displayed reserve icon 9B (the reserve image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) is moved downward. At this time, since the moved holding icon 9B is changed by prefetching, the display does not disappear even after moving downward, and it becomes a holding digested image 9C (the holding icon 9C). Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the hold icon 9B behind it. In FIG. 125 (I), among the three reserve icons 9B arranged side by side, the remaining reserve icons 9B displayed in the second and subsequent ones (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) The reserve image 9B shifts to the left. Then, a portion of the first reserve icon 9B (the reserve image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) is overlapped with the reserve digest image 9C (the reserve icon 9C). Is displayed.

[Hold Icon Movement Effect C]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for describing the hold icon movement effect C. The hold icon movement effect C is different from the hold icon movement effect A in the game state and the display mode of the hold. 126 (A) to 126 (J) are executed when the gaming state is non-probable time shortening state. In the reserve icon movement effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 126 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in the short time. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are respectively moved downward (along the vertical direction), and the number is not visible. At this time, the three holding icons 9A of the special view 1 and the three holding icons 9B of the special view 2 are displayed side by side along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a in the first area FA of the display screen 7a. Be done. That is, the three suspension icons 9A of the special figure 1 and the three suspension icons 9B of the special figure 2 are arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbol. The three suspension icons 9A are the suspension images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special view suspension storage area 85a in order from the bottom to the top. Similarly, the three suspension icons 9B are the suspension images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special view suspension storage area 85b in order from the bottom to the top. The reserve icon 9B of the special view 2 is displayed overlapping with a part of the reserve icon 9A of the special view 1. The reserve of Special Figure 2 is digested prior to the reserve of Special Figure 1 (preferential digestion). Therefore, in the three reserve icons 9A of the special view 1 and the reserve icon 9B of the special view 2, the reserve icons 9B to be preferentially digested are displayed so as to overlap on the upper side.

  The first area FA of the display screen 7a is a reserve image display area capable of displaying the reserve icons 9A and 9B, and here, an area having a predetermined width from the left end of the display screen 7a. The first area FA may be configured such that the area can be identified by an image (area image) indicating an area indicated by a specific color, or the first area FA may not be distinguishable from other areas. Here, the first area FA can not be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the first area FA can be appropriately set as an area including the area in which the reserve icons 9A and 9B are displayed and the periphery thereof. In FIG. 126A, of the three reserve icons 9B of the special view 2, the second reserve icon 9B from the bottom (the reserve image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) is read ahead. The hold is changing due to The pending digest image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 126 (B) shows a state in which one reserve icon 9B of Special Figure 2 is added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, the hold icon 9B is newly added to the top of the three hold icons 9B arranged vertically. The newly added reserve icon 9B is a reserve image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special view reserve storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 126 (C), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four reserved icons 9B arranged vertically is displayed first. The reserve icon 9B at the bottom (the reserve image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) moves rightward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserve digest image 9C is not displayed. The remaining reserve icons 9B (the reserve images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) displayed second and subsequent among the four reserve icons 9B arranged vertically are below. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (D), the next variation display is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of variation may be in the form of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). The first hold icon 9B displayed first among the three hold icons 9B of the special view 2 by the shift movement described above (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special view hold storage area 85b) Is changing due to read ahead.

  As shown in FIG. 126 (E), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. 126 (D), of the three reserved icons 9B arranged vertically. , The first displayed reserve icon 9B (the reserve image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) moves in the right direction. At this time, since the moved holding icon 9B is changed by prefetching, the display does not disappear even after the movement to the right, and the holding digested image 9C (the holding icon 9C) is formed. Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the hold icon 9B behind it. In FIG. 126 (D), among the three suspension icons 9B arranged vertically, the remaining suspension icons 9B displayed in the second and subsequent ones (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special view storage area 85b) The reserve image 9B shifts downward. Then, a portion of the first reserve icon 9B (the reserve image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) is overlapped with the reserve digest image 9C (the reserve icon 9C). Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 126F, the next variation display is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, special reach effects and the like may be performed.

  The shift movement of the above-mentioned reserve icon 9B is repeated, and as shown in FIG. 126 (G) (H), when the last reserve icon 9B is digested, as shown in FIG. 126 (I), The pending digest of the pending icon 9A is started. Here, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the lowermost holding icon 9A displayed first among the three holding icons 9A arranged vertically ( The reserve image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a moves rightward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserve digest image 9C is not displayed. The remaining reserve icons 9A (the reserve images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) displayed second and subsequent among the three reserve icons 9A arranged vertically are below. Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (J), the next variation display by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R is executed.

[Pending icon movement effect D]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement effect D. With respect to the holding icon movement effect D, compared with the holding icon movement effect A, the gaming state, the display mode of the holding, the variation direction of the decorative symbol, and the arrangement direction of the holding icon are different. FIGS. 127 (A) to 127 (J) are executed when the gaming state is non-probable time shortening state. In the reserve icon movement effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 127 (A), the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in the short time. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are respectively moved in the left direction (along the left-right direction), and the number is not visible. At this time, the three holding icons 9A of the special view 1 and the three holding icons 9B of the special view 2 are displayed side by side along the left-right direction of the display screen 7a in the first area FA of the display screen 7a. Be done. That is, the three suspension icons 9A of the special figure 1 and the three suspension icons 9B of the special figure 2 are arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbol. The three suspension icons 9A are the suspension images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special view suspension storage area 85a in order from right to left. Similarly, the three holding icons 9B are holding images 9B corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the second special view holding storage area 85b in order from left to right. The reserve icon 9B of the special view 2 is displayed overlapping with a part of the reserve icon 9A of the special view 1. The reserve of Special Figure 2 is digested prior to the reserve of Special Figure 1 (preferential digestion). Therefore, in the three reserve icons 9A of the special view 1 and the reserve icon 9B of the special view 2, the reserve icons 9B to be preferentially digested are displayed so as to overlap on the upper side.

  The first area FA of the display screen 7a is a held image display area capable of displaying the held icons 9A and 9B, and here, is an area having a predetermined width in the vertical direction from the lower end of the display screen 7a. The first area FA may be configured such that the area can be identified by an image (area image) indicating an area indicated by a specific color, or the first area FA may not be distinguishable from other areas. Here, the first area FA can not be distinguished from other areas. Even in this case, the first area FA can be appropriately set as an area including the area in which the reserve icons 9A and 9B are displayed and the periphery thereof. In FIG. 127 (A), of the three reserve icons 9B of the special view 2, the second reserve icon 9B from the right (the reserve image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) is read ahead. The hold is changing due to The pending digest image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 127 (B) shows a state in which one reserve icon 9B of Special Figure 2 is added. Here, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, the hold icon 9B is newly added to the leftmost of the three hold icons 9B arranged side by side. The newly added reserve icon 9B is a reserve image 9B corresponding to the fourth storage area of the second special view reserve storage area 85b. As shown in FIG. 127 (C), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four reserved icons 9B arranged sideways is displayed first. The rightmost holding icon 9B (the holding image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special view holding storage area 85b) moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserve digest image 9C is not displayed. The remaining reserve icons 9B (the reserve images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) among the four reserve icons 9B arranged side by side are right Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (D), the next variation display is executed by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R may be in the form of the decorative symbol fluctuation presentation D (FIG. 51). The first hold icon 9B displayed first among the three hold icons 9B of the special view 2 by the shift movement described above (the hold image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special view hold storage area 85b) Is changing due to read ahead.

  As shown in FIG. 127 (E), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. 127 (D), of the three reserved icons 9B arranged side by side. , The first displayed reserve icon 9B (the reserve image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) moves upward. At this time, since the moved holding icon 9B is changed by prefetching, the display does not disappear even after moving upward, and it becomes a holding digested image 9C (the holding icon 9C). Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the hold icon 9B behind it. In FIG. 127 (D), among the three suspension icons 9B arranged side by side, the remaining suspension icons 9B displayed in the second and subsequent ones (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the second special view storage area 85b) The reserve image 9B shifts rightward. Then, a portion of the first reserve icon 9B (the reserve image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special view reserve storage area 85b) is overlapped with the reserve digest image 9C (the reserve icon 9C). Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (F), the next variation display is executed by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R. At this time, special reach effects and the like may be performed.

  The above shift movement of the hold icon 9B is repeated, and as shown in FIG. 127 (G) (H), when the last hold icon 9B is digested, as shown in FIG. 127 (I), The pending digest of the pending icon 9A is started. Here, when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the lowermost holding icon 9A (first displayed among the three holding icons 9A arranged sideways) The reserve image 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserve digest image 9C is not displayed. The remaining reserve icons 9A (the reserve images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) among the three reserve icons 9A arranged side by side are displayed on the right Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 127 (J), the next variation display is executed by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of pending icon movement presentation is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a first effect (normal time) in which a plurality of reserved icons 9A are displayed along the vertical direction. And performing a second effect (at the time of positive variation) in which the plurality of suspension icons 9B are displayed side by side along the vertical direction in the second area SA where the position in the left-right direction is different from the first area FA. Can. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124C, in the first effect (normal time), the hold icon 9A displayed first among the plurality of hold icons 9A is in the left-right direction. Moving along (to the right), the remaining reserved icons 9A displayed after the second one shift to the top and bottom (downward). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124 (H), in the second effect (at the time of positive variation), the hold icon 9B displayed first among the plurality of hold icons 9B is in the left-right direction. It moves along the left (left direction), and the remaining reserved icons 9B displayed after the second shift move along the vertical direction (downward), as shown in FIG. 124 (C) (E) (H) (H) As shown in J), in the first effect (normal time) and the second effect (during positive error), the hold icons 9A and 9B moved along the left and right direction disappear and disappear from the display screen 7a. There is. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, in the first area FA of the display screen 7a, a plurality of hold icons 9A corresponding to the special view 1 and a plurality of hold icons 9B corresponding to the special view 2 Are displayed side by side along the upper and lower direction, respectively, and a plurality of hold icons 9B corresponding to the special view 2 are overlapped and displayed on portions of the plurality of hold icons 9A corresponding to the special view 1 Can be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, in the third effect, the hold icon 9B displayed first among the plurality of hold icons 9B corresponding to the special view 2 extends in the left-right direction. It moves (to the right) and the remaining reserved icons displayed after the second shift to the top and bottom (down). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124 and FIG. 126, the first effect (at normal time), the second effect (during positive change), and the third effect (during time) are Each game state is different. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of pending | holding icon movement presentation is shown.
[Modification 1]
Of the above pending icon movement effects A, FIGS. 124 (A) to 124 (E) are executed when the gaming state is normal, and FIGS. 124 (F) to 124 (J) indicate that the gaming state is It is assumed to be executed in the case of a definite change state. However, FIG. 124 (A) to FIG. 124 (E) and FIG. 124 (F) to FIG. 124 (J) may be executed in the same gaming state. For example, FIGS. 124 (A) to 124 (E) and FIGS. 124 (F) to 124 (J) may be respectively executed in different effect modes in the same gaming state (for example, the normal state). The same applies to the pending icon movement effect B.
[Modification 2]
FIGS. 126 (A) to 126 (J) of the above-described reserved icon movement effect C are to be executed when the gaming state is a non-deterministic time-short state. However, FIGS. 126 (A) to 126 (J) of the pending icon movement effect C may be executed when the gaming state is a state other than the non-time-short state. The same applies to the pending icon movement effect D.
[Modification 3]
The effects shown in the pending icon movement effects A to D may all be executed in the same gaming state. For example, the effects shown in the pending icon movement effects A to D may be respectively executed in different effect modes in the same gaming state (for example, normal state).

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
A first effect in which a plurality of the hold icons are displayed side by side along a first direction in a first area of the display means;
A plurality of the hold icons are displayed side by side along the first direction in a second area where the position in the second direction intersecting the first direction is different from the first area. A game machine characterized by being capable of producing an effect of.
[Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
In the first effect, the hold icon displayed first among the plurality of hold icons moves along the second direction, and the remaining hold icons displayed in the second and subsequent directions are the first hold icon. A gaming machine characterized by shifting along one direction.
[Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or aspect D1-2, wherein
In the second effect, the hold icon displayed first among the plurality of hold icons moves along the second direction, and the remaining hold icons displayed in the second and subsequent directions are the first hold icon. Shift along the direction of 1,
In the first effect and the second effect, the holding icon moved along the second direction may or may not disappear from the display means.
[Aspect D1-4]
A game machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-3, wherein
In the first area of the display means, a plurality of the hold icons corresponding to the special view 1 and a plurality of the hold icons corresponding to the special view 2 are displayed side by side along the first direction. In addition to the above, it is possible to execute a third effect in which a plurality of hold icons corresponding to the special view 2 overlap and displayed on a part of the plurality of hold icons corresponding to the special view 1.
[Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-4,
In the third effect, the hold icon displayed first among the plurality of hold icons corresponding to the special figure 2 moves along the second direction, and the remaining ones displayed for the second and subsequent ones. A game machine characterized in that the hold icon shifts along the first direction.
[Aspect D1-6]
A game machine according to aspect D1-4 or aspect D1-5, wherein
A gaming machine, wherein the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are different in gaming state.

  The hold icon superposition effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 128 to 131. The on-hold icon superimposing effect may be performed during the changing effect of the decorative symbol, or before or after the changing effect. That is, the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the pending icon superposition effect is included, the corresponding image data or drive data is read from the ROM 103 This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon superposition effect A]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the on-hold icon superposition effect A. The hold icon superposition effect A is executed when the gaming state is the normal state. In the reserved icon superposition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 128 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are respectively moved downward (along the vertical direction), and the number is not visible. At this time, the three reserved icons 9A of the special view 1 are displayed side by side along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a at the left end of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserve icons 9A of the special view 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbol. The three suspension icons 9A are the suspension images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special view suspension storage area 85a in order from the bottom to the top. In FIG. 128 (A), the reserved digested image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 128 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added. Here, the hold icon 9A is newly added to the top of the three hold icons 9A arranged vertically. The newly added reserve icon 9A is a reserve image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a. Here, the newly added stay icon 9A has its hold changed due to pre-reading. As shown in FIG. 128 (C), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four reserved icons 9A arranged vertically is displayed first. The reserve icon 9A in the normal state at the bottom (the reserve image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) moves to the right and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserve digest image 9C is not displayed. The remaining reserve icons 9A (the reserve images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) displayed second and subsequent among the four reserve icons 9A arranged vertically are Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (D), the next variation display is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of variation may be in the form of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). The pending digest image 9C (the pending icon 9C) corresponding to the change is not displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 128 (E), the hold icon displayed first among the three hold icons 9A arranged vertically while the left decoration pattern 8L, the middle decoration pattern 8C, and the right decoration pattern 8R are fluctuating 9A (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view reserved storage area 85a) displays the notice image PM before the pending change due to the prefetching is performed. In other words, before the holding icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state, the suggestion image PM that indicates that the specific state is to be reached is displayed. This suggestion image PM covers a part of the adjacent one behind retention icon 9A. Thereafter, the first image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 128 (F) is executed. Specifically, the suggestion image PM disappears, and the first image CM is displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9A in the specific state and the hold icon 9A. The first image CM is a smoke-like image that wraps around the hold icon 9A in the specific state, and includes a smile mark. The first image CM covers a portion of each of the adjacent one back holding icon 9A and the back holding icon 9A.

  As shown in FIG. 128 (G), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. 128 (F), of the three holding icons 9A arranged vertically , The first displayed reserve icon 9A (the reserve image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) moves in the right direction. At this time, since the moved holding icon 9A is changed by the prefetching (it is in the specific state), the display does not disappear even after moving to the right, and as shown in FIG. It becomes the said pending icon 9C). Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In addition, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 128 (F), the remaining reserve icons 9A displayed in the second and subsequent ones among the three reserve icons 9A arranged in the vertical direction (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) The reserve image 9A shifts downward as shown in FIG. 128 (G). Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (H), the first stored icon 9A (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view storage area 85a) that has become the first is the stored digested image 9C (the hold icon 9C concerned) is displayed overlapping. Further, the following variation display is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of variation may be in the form of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (I), during the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display disappears, and the second image LM is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Is displayed. The second image LM is a smile mark here, and after being displayed, moves in the left direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (J), it overlaps with the first image CM and covers a part of the first image CM.

[Hold icon superposition effect B]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the on-hold icon superposition effect B. As compared with the pending icon superimposed effect A, the pending icon superimposed effect B is different in the variation direction of the decorative symbol and the arrangement direction of the pending icon. The hold icon superposition effect B is executed when the gaming state is the normal state. In the reserved icon superposition effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 129 (A), the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are respectively moved in the left direction (along the left-right direction), and the number is not visible. At this time, the three reserved icons 9A of the special view 1 are displayed side by side along the left-right direction of the display screen 7a at the lower end of the display screen 7a. That is, the three reserve icons 9A of the special view 1 are arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbol. The three suspension icons 9A are the suspension images 9A corresponding to the first to third storage areas of the first special view suspension storage area 85a in order from right to left. In FIG. 129 (A), the reserved digested image 9C is not displayed.

  FIG. 129 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added. Here, the hold icon 9A is newly added to the leftmost of the three hold icons 9A arranged side by side. The newly added reserve icon 9A is a reserve image 9A corresponding to the fourth storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a. Here, the newly added stay icon 9A has its hold changed due to pre-reading. As shown in FIG. 129 (C), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, one of the four reserved icons 9A arranged sideways is displayed first. The rightmost reserve icon 9A in the normal state (the reserve image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) moves upward and disappears from the display screen 7a. Therefore, the reserve digest image 9C is not displayed. The remaining reserve icons 9A (the reserve images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) among the four reserve icons 9A arranged side by side are right Shift in the direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (D), the next variation display is performed by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R at the start of the change may be in the form of the decorative symbol change effect D (FIG. 51). The pending digest image 9C (the pending icon 9C) corresponding to the change is not displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (E), the hold icon displayed first among the three hold icons 9A arranged sideways during the variable display of the lower decoration pattern 8L, the middle decoration pattern 8C, and the upper decoration pattern 8R. 9A (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view reserved storage area 85a) displays the notice image PM before the pending change due to the prefetching is performed. In other words, before the holding icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state, the suggestion image PM that indicates that the specific state is to be reached is displayed. This suggestion image PM covers a part of the adjacent one behind retention icon 9A. Thereafter, the first image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 129 (F) is executed. Specifically, the suggestion image PM disappears, and the first image CM is displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9A in the specific state and the hold icon 9A. The first image CM is a smoke-like image that wraps around the hold icon 9A in the specific state, and includes a smile mark. The first image CM covers a portion of each of the adjacent one back holding icon 9A and the back holding icon 9A.

  As shown in FIG. 129 (G), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, in FIG. 129 (F), of the three holding icons 9A arranged side by side , The first displayed reserve icon 9A (the reserve image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) moves upward. At this time, since the moved retention icon 9A is changed by the prefetching (it is in the specific state), the display does not disappear even after the upward movement, and as shown in FIG. It becomes the said pending icon 9C). Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In addition, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 129 (F), among the three suspension icons 9A arranged side by side, the remaining suspension icons 9A displayed in the second and subsequent ones (corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special view storage area 85a) The reserve image 9A shifts rightward as shown in FIG. 129 (G). Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (H), the first stored icon 9A (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view storage area 85a) that has become the first is the stored digested image 9C (the hold icon 9C concerned) is displayed overlapping. Further, the following variation display is executed by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R at the start of the change may be in the form of the decorative symbol change effect D (FIG. 51).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 129 (I), while the lower decoration pattern 8L, the middle decoration pattern 8C, and the upper decoration pattern 8R are fluctuatingly displayed, the fluctuating display disappears, and the second image LM is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Is displayed. The second image LM is a smile mark here, and after being displayed, moves in the left direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (J), it overlaps with the first image CM and covers a part of the first image CM.

[Hold icon superposition effect C]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the on-hold icon superposition effect C. When compared with the pending icon superimposed effect A, the pending icon superimposed effect C differs in the display mode of the pending icon 9A and the display mode of the pending icon 9C. The hold icon superposition effect C is executed when the gaming state is the normal state. In the reserved icon superposition effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 130 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are respectively moved downward (along the vertical direction), and the number is not visible. At this time, the reserve digest image 9C (the reserve icon 9C) is displayed at the left end of the display screen 7a, and the two reserve icons 9A of the special figure 1 are arranged above the reserve icon 9C along the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. Displayed side by side. That is, the hold icon 9C and the two hold icons 9A are arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbol. The two hold icons 9A are hold images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas of the first special view hold storage area 85a in order from the bottom to the top. Here, the lowermost hold icon 9A (hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view hold storage area 85a) displayed first is in a specific state by prefetching (hold is changed ing. The first reserve icon 9A is displayed with the reserve digest image 9C (the reserve icon 9C) below the first reserve icon overlapping, and a part of the first reserve icon 9A is difficult to view. The second hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special view hold storage area 85a) is displayed with the first hold icon 9A overlapping, making it difficult to see a portion There is.

  FIG. 130 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added. Here, the hold icon 9A is newly added to the top of the two hold icons 9A arranged vertically. The newly added reserve icon 9A is a reserve image 9A corresponding to the third storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a. As shown in FIG. 130C, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the reserved digested image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (D), among the two pending icons 9A arranged vertically, the pending icon 9A at the bottom of the specific state displayed first (the first of the special image pending storage area 85a The hold image 9A) corresponding to one storage area moves downward and becomes the hold icon 9C. The remaining two reserve icons 9A (the reserve images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) are also shifted downward.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 130E, the next variation display is executed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of variation may be in the form of the decorative symbol variation effect A (FIG. 48). During the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, the first newly displayed (first displayed) holding icon of the two holding icons 9A arranged vertically 9A (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view reserved storage area 85a) displays the notice image PM before the pending change due to the prefetching is performed. In other words, before the hold icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state advantageous to the player, the suggestion image PM is displayed that suggests that the hold change will occur. The suggestion image PM covers a part of the adjacent next behind holding icon 9A and a part of the adjacent immediately previous previous holding icon 9C. Thereafter, the first image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 130F is executed. Specifically, the suggestion image PM disappears, and the first image CM is displayed adjacent to the first holding icon 9A in the specific state and the first holding icon 9A. The first image CM is a smoke-like image that wraps around the hold icon 9A in the specific state, and includes a smile mark. The first image CM covers a portion of each of the adjacent one back pending icon 9A and the adjacent front ahead pending icon 9C.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (G), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the display of the holding icon 9C disappears and the first (displayed first) The reserve icon 9A (the reserve image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) moves downward toward the display position of the reserve icon 9C. In addition, the remaining reserve icons 9A displayed on the second and subsequent sides (the reserve images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) are also shifted downward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 130H, the first (first displayed) suspension icon 9A newly becomes a suspension digest image 9C (the suspension icon 9C). Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In addition, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. FIG. 130H shows a mode in which the hold icon 9A is newly added while the next variation display by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is executed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R at the start of the change may be in the form of the decorative symbol change effect A (FIG. 48).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 130 (I), during the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display disappears, and the second image LM is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Is displayed. The second image LM is a smile mark here, and after being displayed, moves in the left direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 130J, it overlaps with the first image CM, and covers a part of the first image CM.

[Hold icon superposition effect D]
FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the on-hold icon superposition effect D. When compared with the pending icon overlapping effect A, the pending icon overlapping effect C differs in the change direction of the decorative symbol, the display mode of the pending icon, and the display mode of the pending icon 9C. The hold icon superposition effect D is executed when the gaming state is the normal state. In the reserved icon superposition effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 131 (A), the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R in the variable display are respectively moved in the left direction (along the left-right direction), and the number is not visible. At this time, the reserve digest image 9C (the reserve icon 9C) is displayed at the lower end of the display screen 7a, and the two reserve icons 9A of the special view 1 are along the left-right direction of the display screen 7a on the left side of the reserve icon 9C. Displayed side by side. That is, the hold icon 9C and the two hold icons 9A are arranged side by side in the direction along the variation direction of the decorative symbol. The two hold icons 9A are hold images 9A corresponding to the first and second storage areas of the first special view hold storage area 85a in order from right to left. Here, the rightmost holding icon 9A displayed first (the holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view holding storage area 85a) is in a specific state by prefetching (holding is changed ing. The first reserved icon 9A is displayed so that the right of the reserved digested image 9C (the reserved icon 9C) overlaps and part of it is difficult to view. The second hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special view hold storage area 85a) is displayed with the first hold icon 9A overlapping, making it difficult to see a portion There is.

  FIG. 131 (B) shows a state in which one hold icon 9A is added. Here, the hold icon 9A is newly added to the leftmost of the two hold icons 9A arranged side by side. The newly added reserve icon 9A is a reserve image 9A corresponding to the third storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a. When the hold icon 9A is newly added, the hold icon 9A immediately before (right side) the hold icon 9A to be added is moved to the left once and does not overlap with the previous hold icon. In addition, the newly added pending icon 9A does not overlap with the immediately preceding (right side) pending icon 9A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 131 (C), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the reserved digested image 9C (the reserved icon 9C concerned) moves upward. And then disappear from the display screen 7a. Then, among the three holding icons 9A arranged side by side, the holding icon 9A in the rightmost specific state displayed first (the holding image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view holding storage area 85a) Moves to the right, and becomes the hold icon 9C. In addition, the remaining two reserve icons 9A (the reserve images 9A corresponding to the second and third storage areas of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) are also shifted to the right. As a result of this shift movement, as shown in FIG. 131 (D), the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are in a state in which the hold icons on the front and back are partially overlapped again. Then, the next variation display is executed by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R. The lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R at the start of the change may be in the form of the decorative symbol change effect D (FIG. 51).

  As shown in FIG. 131 (E), while the lower decoration symbol 8L, the middle decoration symbol 8C, and the upper decoration symbol 8R are variably displayed, of the two reserved icons 9A arranged sideways, they are newly displayed first. Is displayed (initially displayed) reserved icon 9A (the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view reserved storage area 85a) displays the notice image PM before the pending change due to prefetching is performed . In other words, before the hold icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state advantageous to the player, the suggestion image PM is displayed that suggests that the hold change will occur. The suggestion image PM covers a part of the adjacent next behind holding icon 9A and a part of the adjacent immediately previous previous holding icon 9C. Thereafter, the first image superimposed display effect shown in FIG. 131 (F) is executed. Specifically, the suggestion image PM disappears, and the first image CM is displayed adjacent to the first holding icon 9A in the specific state and the first holding icon 9A. The first image CM is a smoke-like image that wraps around the hold icon 9A in the specific state, and includes a smile mark. The first image CM covers a portion of each of the adjacent one back pending icon 9A and the adjacent front ahead pending icon 9C.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (G), when the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the upper decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the display of the holding icon 9C disappears, and as shown in FIG. 131 (H) , The first (displayed first) hold icon 9A (the hold image 9A corresponding to the first storage area of the first special view hold storage area 85a) is moved rightward toward the display position of the hold icon 9C Do. Further, the remaining reserve icon 9A displayed second (the reserve image 9A corresponding to the second storage area of the first special view reserve storage area 85a) is also shifted to the right. As a result, the first (first displayed) suspension icon 9A newly becomes a suspension digest image 9C (the suspension icon 9C). Then, the hold icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In addition, the first image CM displayed adjacent to the hold icon 9C is displayed overlapping a part of the hold icon 9A behind it. In FIG. 131 (I), the second image LM is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a while the next variation display by the lower decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the upper decorative symbol 8R is executed. The second image LM is a smile mark here, and after being displayed, moves in the left direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 131 (J), it overlaps with the first image CM, and covers a part of the first image CM. At this time, the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappears.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of pending icon superposition production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128 (H), a first effect is shown in which the reserve digest image 9C (the reserve icon 9C) is displayed overlapping with a part of the reserve icon 9A; As shown in D), it is possible to execute a second effect in which the hold icon is displayed 9A and the hold digested image 9C (the hold icon 9C) is not displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, the hold icon 9A may be in a specific state where it has changed to a specific mode or in a normal state where it has not changed to a specific mode. As shown in FIG. 128 (F), in the first effect, a plurality of suspension icons 9A are displayed, and among the plurality of suspension icons 9A, the suspension icon 9A displayed first is in a specific state, As shown in FIG. 128 (G), when the hold icon 9A in the specific state moves to a predetermined position and becomes the hold digested image 9C (the hold icon 9C concerned), as shown in FIG. 128 (H), a plurality of holds are held. The hold icon 9C is displayed overlapping with a part of the hold icon 9A displayed second among the icons 9C. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128 (B), in the second effect, the plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed, and the hold icon 9A displayed first among the plurality of hold icons 9A. Is in the normal state, and as shown in FIG. 128 (C), after the hold icon 9A in the normal state is moved toward the predetermined position, as shown in FIG. 128 (D), the display screen 7a It disappears. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, when the hold icon 9A displayed first among the plurality of hold icons 9A is in the specific state in the first effect, the hold icon 9A in the specific state is The first image CM is displayed adjacent to the second image CM, and a portion of the first image CM covers a portion of the second displayed suspension icon 9A among the plurality of suspension icons 9A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128 (F), in the first effect, the plurality of reserved icons 9A are displayed side by side along the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. 128 (G). The hold icon 9A displayed first among the plurality of hold icons 9A moves to the right and becomes the hold icon 9C, and as shown in FIG. 128 (H), 2 of the plurality of hold icons 9A. The hold icon 9A displayed second and the hold icon 9C are arranged along the second direction, and a part thereof is displayed overlapping. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128 (E), when the hold icon 9A changes from the normal state to the specific state, it suggests that the hold icon 9A changes to the specific state before changing to the specific state. The suggestion image PM is displayed, and the suggestion image PM covers a part of the other hold icon 9A. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of pending | holding icon superimposition effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
The above-described held icon superposition effects A to D are implemented when the gaming state is normal. However, the above-described reserved icon superposition effects A to D may be implemented in a gaming state other than the normal time. For example, the above-described reserved icon superposition effects A to D may be implemented at the time of a definite change or a non-deterministic change time.
[Modification 2]
In said pending | holding icon superimposition effect AD, suggestion image PM shall be displayed before pending | holding icon 9A changes from a normal state to a specific state. However, the suggestion image PM may be displayed before the hold icon 9A changes from the specific state to a specific state that is advantageous to the player.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
態 様 [Mode D2-1]
A gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of images is the hold icon corresponding to the hold,
A first effect in which the hold icon is displayed overlapping a portion of the hold icon;
It is possible to execute a second effect in which the hold icon is displayed and the hold icon is not displayed.
[Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
The hold icon may be in a specific state where it has changed to a specific aspect, or in a normal state where it has not changed to a specific aspect,
In the first effect, a plurality of the hold icons are displayed, and the hold icon displayed first among the plurality of hold icons is in the specific state, and the hold icon in the specific state is at a predetermined position. When the user moves to the hold icon and the hold icon is displayed, the hold icon is displayed overlapping the part of the second hold icon of the plurality of hold icons.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-2,
In the second effect, a plurality of the hold icons are displayed, and the hold icon displayed first among the plurality of hold icons is in the normal state, and the hold icon in the normal state is the predetermined state. A game machine characterized by disappearing from the display means after moving toward the position.
態 様 [Aspect D2-4]
A game machine according to aspect D2-2 or aspect D2-3, wherein
In the first effect, when the hold icon displayed first among the plurality of hold icons is in the specific state, a specific image is displayed adjacent to the hold icon in the specific state, and the specific image is displayed. A gaming machine, characterized in that a part of the game icon covers a part of the second display of the holding icons among the plurality of holding icons.
態 様 [Aspect D2-5]
A game machine according to any one of aspects D2-2 to D2-4, wherein
In the first effect, a plurality of the hold icons are displayed side by side along the first direction, and among the plurality of hold icons, the hold icon displayed first is moved in the second direction, and the hold icon is displayed. The hold icon, which is the hold icon and is displayed second among the plurality of hold icons, and the hold icon are arranged along the second direction, and a part thereof is displayed in an overlapping manner. A game machine that features it.
態 様 [Aspect D2-6]
A game machine according to any one of modes D2-2 to D2-5, wherein
When the pending icon changes from the normal state to the specific state, a suggestion image indicating that the specific state changes is displayed before the pending state changes, and the suggestion image is another pending A gaming machine characterized by covering a part of icons.

  The hold special display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 132 to 135. The reserved special display effect may be performed, for example, during the change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and in the case where the instruction to execute the hold special display effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read from the ROM 103 This is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Pending special display effect]
FIG. 132 is a diagram for describing the hold display pattern 1 and the hold display pattern 2 in the hold special display effect.
FIG. 133 is a diagram for describing the hold display pattern 3 and the hold display pattern 4 in the hold special display effect.
FIG. 134 is a diagram for describing the on-hold display pattern 5 and the on-hold display pattern 6 in the on-hold special display effect.
FIG. 135 is a diagram for describing the hold display pattern 7 and the hold display pattern 8 in the hold special display effect.
This hold special display effect may be performed with a plurality of hold display patterns. Hereinafter, the hold display patterns 1 to 8 will be described. The hold display patterns 1 to 8 are effects performed by the same change until the special symbols (decorative symbols) start to change and are displayed in a stop.

[Hold display pattern 1]
In the suspension display pattern 1, first, as shown in FIG. 132 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. Further, in the change start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (B), reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach effect 1, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the friend character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The modes (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are the same as in the variation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (C), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the friend character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is the same as that of reach effect 1:00 at the time of variation start effect. In the reach effect 2, the ally character CRA is transformed from 1:00 on the reach effect.
In this pending display pattern 1, the mode of the pending display does not change.

Pending Display Pattern 2
In the hold display pattern 2, first, as shown in FIG. 132 (D), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. Further, in the change start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (E), reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach effect 1, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the friend character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The modes (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are the same as in the variation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 132 (F), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the friend character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the holding icon 9A and the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the holding icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1:00. Specifically, the positions of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are different from each other in the reach effect 1. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B move from the lower left position to the upper right position of the display screen 7a and are disposed obliquely to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The shape, the color, or the design of the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C is the same as that of the reach effect 1:00. In the reach effect 2, the ally character CRA is transformed from 1:00 on the reach effect.
The hold display pattern 2 is a mode in which the position changes among the modes of the hold display.

[Hold display pattern 3]
In the suspension display pattern 3, first, as shown in FIG. 133 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. Further, in the change start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (B), reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach effect 1, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the friend character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The modes (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are the same as in the variation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (C), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the friend character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the holding icon 9A and the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the holding icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1:00. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in two places. One place (also referred to as a first place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is the same place (position) as that of the reach effect 1:00. Another place (also referred to as a second place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is a different place (position) as compared to the reach effect 1. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B displayed in different places as compared to the reach effect 1 are displayed from the lower left position to the upper right position of the display screen 7a, and obliquely with respect to the lower side of the display screen 7a. Will be placed. The shape, the color, or the design of the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C are the same as at 1 o'clock reach effect. In the reach effect 3, the ally character CRA is transformed from the reach effect 1:00.
In this hold display pattern 3, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are simultaneously placed in two places, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in one place have positions among the hold display modes. It is a changing aspect.

[Hold display pattern 4]
In the hold display pattern 4, first, as shown in FIG. 133 (D), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. Further, in the change start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (E), reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach effect 1, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the friend character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The modes (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are the same as in the variation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 133 (F), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the friend character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the holding icon 9A and the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the holding icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1:00. Specifically, the color and the pattern of the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C are different from those at the time of the reach effect 1, and are changed to a cross hatch pattern in red. In the reach effect 4, the ally character CRA is transformed from the reach effect 1:00.
The hold display pattern 4 is a mode in which the color and the pattern change among the modes of the hold display.

[Hold display pattern 5]
In the suspension display pattern 5, first, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. Further, in the change start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (B), reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach effect 1, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the friend character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The modes (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are the same as in the variation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (C), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the friend character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the holding icon 9A and the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the holding icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1:00. Specifically, the shapes of the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C are different from those at the time of the reach effect 1, and are changed to a star shape. In the reach effect 5, the ally character CRA is transformed from 1:00 on the reach effect.
The hold display pattern 5 is a mode in which the shape changes among the modes of the hold display.

[Pending Display Pattern 6]
In the hold display pattern 6, first, as shown in FIG. 134 (D), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. Further, in the change start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (E), reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach effect 1, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the friend character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The modes (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are the same as in the variation start effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 134 (F), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the friend character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the holding icon 9A and the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the holding icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1:00. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at two places (positions). One place (also referred to as a first place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is the same place (position) as that of the reach effect 1:00. Another place (also referred to as a second place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is a different place (position) as compared to the reach effect 1. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the first place are different in color and pattern from the reach effect 1:00, and are changed to a cross hatch pattern in red. On the other hand, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B displayed in the second place are displayed from the lower left position to the upper right position of the display screen 7a and are disposed obliquely to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The shape is different compared to 1 at the time of presentation, and it changes to a star shape. In the reach effect 6, the ally character CRA is transformed from the reach effect 1:00.

  In the hold display pattern 6, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are simultaneously placed in two places, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the first place have a color and a color among the hold display modes. It is an aspect in which the design changes, and the retention icon 9A and the retention icon 9C displayed in the second place are aspects in which the position and the shape change among the retention display aspects.

[Pending display pattern 7]
In the hold display pattern 7, first, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. Further, in the change start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (B), reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach effect 1, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the friend character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The modes (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are the same as in the variation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (C), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the friend character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C is different from that of the reach effect 1:00. Specifically, the position, the shape, the color, and the design of the holding icon 9A and the holding icon 9C are different from each other during reach effect 1. . Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B move from the lower left position to the upper right position of the display screen 7a and are disposed obliquely to the lower side of the display screen 7a. In addition, with respect to the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9B, the shape is different and changes to a star shape as compared with the reach effect 1:00, and the color and pattern are different and red and a cross hatch pattern is changed. . In the reach effect 7, the ally character CRA is transformed from 1:00 on the reach effect.
The hold display pattern 7 is a mode in which the position, the shape, the color, and the pattern change among the modes of the hold display.

[Pending Display Pattern 8]
In the hold display pattern 8, first, as shown in FIG. 135 (D), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started. Further, in the change start effect, the hold icon 9A (circular shape, white, no pattern) and the hold icon 9C (circular shape, white, no pattern) are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are arranged in parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (E), reach effect 1 is executed. In the reach effect 1, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the friend character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The modes (position, shape, color or pattern) of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are the same as in the variation start effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135 (F), reach effect 2 is executed. In the reach effect 2, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the friend character CRA, the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9C are displayed. At least a part of the holding icon 9A and the mode (position, shape, color or pattern) of the holding icon 9C is different from the reach effect 1:00. Specifically, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed at two places (positions). One place (also referred to as a first place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is the same place (position) as that of the reach effect 1:00. Another place (also referred to as a second place) where the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed is a different place (position) as compared to the reach effect 1. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the first place are displayed in the same manner as the reach effect 1:00. On the other hand, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B displayed in the second place are displayed from the lower left position to the upper right position of the display screen 7a and are disposed obliquely to the lower side of the display screen 7a. The shape is different compared to 1 at the time of presentation, and it changes to a star shape. In the reach effect 8, the ally character CRA is transformed from 1:00 on the reach effect.
In the hold display pattern 8, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are simultaneously placed in two places, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the first place have no change in the hold display mode. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the second place are modes in which the position and the shape change in the hold display mode.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of a special display pending effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2 to 8, the hold display for the reach effect 1 as the display of the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C A hold display (also referred to as a hold display) and a hold display for reach effect 2 (hereinafter also referred to as a reach effect 2 o'clock hold display) are performed. According to this configuration, since the hold display mode is different between the reach effect 1 and the reach effect 2, it is possible to draw in the interest of the player for the hold display, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 3, 6 and 8, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C displayed in the first place in the reach effect 2 and the second place The displayed hold icon 9A and the held icon 9C are simultaneously displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the hold display, and it is possible to draw attention to the player's hold display and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 3, 6, 7, and 8, in the reach effect 1, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in the first place and reach In the effect 2, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in the second place. According to this configuration, since the positions of the hold display are different between the reach effect 1 and the reach effect 2, the player's interest in the hold display can be drawn in, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the hold display patterns 5 to 8, in the reach effect 1, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in a circular shape, and in the reach effect 2, the hold The icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed in a star shape. According to this configuration, since the shapes of the hold display are different between the reach effect 1 and the reach effect 2, it is possible to draw in the interest of the player for the hold display, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of pending special display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the on-hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the on-hold display patterns 2 to 8, a chance-up effect may be performed using the on-hold icon 9A and / or the on-hold icon 9C of the reach effect 2. According to this configuration, since the on-hold display and the chance-up effect can be used together, it is possible to provide an interesting effect without wasting the display screen 7a.
For example, in the hold display pattern 2, a pre-reading effect may be performed as a chance-up effect, and the pre-reading result may be displayed by changing the shape, color, and pattern of the hold display. In this case, for example, in the case where the result of the pre-reading (predetermination) is a big hit, the color of the holding icon 9A to be pre-read is changed from white to red.
Further, in the hold display pattern 2, a pre-reading effect as a chance-up effect may be performed, and a predetermined display representing a pre-reading result may be displayed in association with the hold display. In this case, for example, when the result of the pre-reading (pre-judgment) is a big hit, the timer icon or a predetermined chance-up character (such as super ats) may be associated with the holding icon 9A to be pre-read.

[Modification 2]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2 to 8, an effect number indicative effect representing the number of predetermined effects using the hold icon 9A and / or the hold icon 9C of the reach effect 2 May be performed. According to this configuration, since the on-hold display and the number-of-renderings effect can be used together, it is possible to provide interesting effects without wasting the display screen 7a.
For example, in the reach effect 2 of the hold display pattern 2, one color of the hold icon 9A in the second place may be changed each time the simulated continuous effect is performed, and the number of times of the simulated continuous effect may be represented. In this case, when the simulated sequential effect is performed three times, three icons of red (for example, red) having a color different from white are displayed among the hold icons 9A, and one white icon is displayed. In this case, when the change in which the hold display pattern 2 is performed is ended, the hold display may return to the original white.
In addition, you may make it perform a chance up production | presentation and the frequency | count of production | presentation production | presentation production | presentation using a pending | holding display combining the said modification 1 and the modification 2. FIG.

[Modification 3]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 1 to 8, in the reach effect 1 and / or the reach effect 2, in addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C, the hold icon 9A and the hold icon You may add and provide a pending display different from 9C. For example, in reach production 1 and / or reach production 2, in addition to the hold icon 9A, a hold display represented by a number may be additionally provided. The added hold display indicates the same hold number as the hold icon 9A. In this case, if the number of pending icons 9A is four (the pending number is 4), the added pending display is represented as "4".
For example, in the reach production 1 and / or the reach production 2, in addition to the hold icon 9A, a hold display represented by a symbol may be additionally provided. The added hold display indicates the same hold number as the hold icon 9A. In this case, if the number of pending icons 9A is four (the pending number is 4), the added pending display is represented by a symbol representing "4".

[Modification 3]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2 to 8, the hold display mode changes in the reach effect 2, but the position of the hold icon, the shape of the hold icon, the color of the hold icon, Change at least one of the icons in the hold icon. The position of the hold icon, the shape of the hold icon, the color of the hold icon, and the design of the hold icon may be combined to change the hold display mode.

[Modification 4]
In the hold special display effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the hold display patterns 2, 3, 6 to 8, the hold display moves to the upper left in the reach effect 2, but moves to the lower left, the upper right, and the middle. May be That is, when the hold display moves from the state of the reach effect 1 to the state of the reach effect 2, it may be moved to a different position.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D3-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect for performing a first hold display mode effect for displaying the display mode of the hold display in a first mode,
The second display effect is an effect for performing a second hold display mode effect that displays the display mode of the hold display in a second mode different from the first mode,
A first hold display pattern may be selected as one of a plurality of display patterns for displaying the hold display.
A second hold display pattern may be selected as one of a plurality of display patterns for displaying the hold display.
When the hold display is performed in the same change, one display pattern of the plurality of display patterns is selected and displayed.
The first hold display pattern is a pattern in which a first display effect is performed,
The second hold display pattern is a pattern in which the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect D3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1,
In the second hold display pattern, when the second display effect is performed, the first display effect may be performed simultaneously,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect 3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D3-1 or aspect D3-2.
The first form of the hold indication is located at the first position,
The second form of the hold indication is located at a second position different from the first position,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect D3-4]
A game machine according to any one of modes D3-1 to D3-3, wherein
The hold display of the first form has a first shape,
The hold display of the second form is a second shape different in shape from the first shape.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect D3-5]
A game machine according to any one of modes D3-1 to D3-4, wherein
In the second display effect, a chance-up effect is performed using the hold display in the second mode.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect D3-6]
A game machine according to any one of modes D3-1 to D3-5, wherein
In the second display effect, the number-of-replications indicative effect representing the number of predetermined effects is performed using the hold display in the second mode.
A game machine characterized by

  The operation means image display effects A to D will be described below with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. The operation means image display effect may be performed, for example, during the change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction to execute the operation means image display effect is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are outputted from the ROM 103. It is an effect of reading out and displaying an image on the display screen 7a.

[Operation means image display effect A]
FIG. 136 is a diagram for describing an operation means image display effect A. The operation means image display effect A is executed, for example, in accordance with a battle effect at the time of a definite change. In the operation means image display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), four button images BN1 to BN4, a meter image PL, and a sword image VI are displayed. In FIG. 136 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in such a manner that visual recognition is difficult. Examples of the mode that is difficult to be visually recognized include the case where it is not displayed, the case where it is displayed small, and the case where it is displayed lightly. Each of the four button images BN1 to BN4 represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed on the display screen 7a at the position of each vertex of the rectangular shape. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining number of points can be determined by changing the area of the inner specific color portion. Here, “1300” is described at the lower left of the meter image PL, and it is shown that when the number of points reaches 1300, the portion of the specific color inside disappears. The sword image VI represents the appearance of the sword member 64, and is displayed in a translucent manner here. The four button images BN1 to BN4 change to another color at constant intervals as shown in FIG. 136 (B), and perform an effect simulating an aspect in which the effect button 63 emits light.

  When the player repeatedly depresses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 136 (C), first, the button image BN4 on the upper right disappears, and the point number PN of "100" is displayed. When the depression operation of the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 136 (D), the point number PN of “150” is displayed overlapping the display of the point number PN of “100” displayed earlier. Be done. In addition, the depression operation of the effect button 63 is repeated, and the sword image VI changes. Here, the inside of the sword image VI changes to another color so as to represent the light emission mode.

  Further, when the player repeatedly depresses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 136 (E), the button image BN3 at the lower right disappears next, and the point number PN of "200" is displayed . When the depression operation of the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 136 (E), the point number PN of "250" is displayed overlapping the display of the point number PN of "200" displayed earlier. Be done. Further, when the player repeatedly depresses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 136 (F), the lower left button image BN2 disappears next, and the point number PN of "300" is displayed. When the depression operation of the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 136 (F), the point number PN “330” is displayed overlapping the display of the point number PN of “300” displayed earlier. Be done.

  Furthermore, when the player repeatedly depresses the effect button 63, then the upper left button image BN1 disappears, and the number of points PN is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (G), a sword image ASI, a timer bar TBI, and an operation promotion image OPI are displayed. The sword image ASI represents the appearance of the sword member 64. Here, the translucent sword image VI is darkened to become a sword image ASI. The sword image ASI includes a button image PSB representing the appearance of the sword button 65. The timer bar TBI shows the operation reception effective period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TBI is displayed on the front of the sword image ASI, overlapping the sword image ASI. The operation promotion image OPI is an image that urges the player to operate the sword member 64, and is displayed here as "press down !!!".

  When the player performs a pressing operation on the sword member 64, a total point increase display effect shown in FIG. 136 (H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the point numbers PN displayed in FIG. 136 (C) to FIG. 136 (F) is displayed, an increment display MTP in which the numerical value is rapidly incremented from 0 of the digital value Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the number of points PN, the increment is stopped and the finalized display TPD indicating the total point “1330” is displayed. Then, an effect is performed in which the remaining amount of the meter image PL decreases by an amount corresponding to the total point. As the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, the remaining amount disappears, so here, after the display of the finalized display TPD of the total point “1330”, the meter image PL decreases the area of the inner specific color portion and remains There is an effect that the quantity is exhausted. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (J), an achieved image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, in the achieved image ACV, the characters “CLEAR!” Are displayed.

[Operation means image display effect B]
FIG. 137 is a diagram for describing an operation means image display effect B. As compared with the operation means image display effect A, the number of button images BN displayed on the display screen 7 a is different in the operation means image display effect B. The operation means image display effect B is executed, for example, in accordance with a battle effect or the like at the time of a definite change. In the operation means image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 137 (A), three button images BN1 to BN3 and a meter image PL are displayed. In FIG. 137 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in such a manner that visual recognition is difficult. Examples of the mode that is difficult to be visually recognized include the case where it is not displayed, the case where it is displayed small, and the case where it is displayed lightly. Each of the three button images BN1 to BN3 represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed on the display screen 7a at a position to be a triangular apex. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining number of points can be determined by changing the area of the inner specific color portion. The three button images BN1 to BN3 change to another color at a constant interval as shown in FIG. 137 (B), and perform an effect simulating an aspect in which the effect button 63 emits light.

  When the player repeatedly depresses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 137C, first, the button image BN3 at the upper center disappears, and the point number PN of "100" is displayed. When the depression operation of the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 137 (D), the point number PN “150” is displayed overlapping the display of the point number PN of “100” displayed earlier. Be done.

  Further, when the player repeatedly depresses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 137E, the button image BN2 at the lower right disappears next, and the number of points PN of “200” is displayed. . Further, when the effect button 63 is repeatedly depressed, the point number PN "250" is displayed overlapping the display of the point number PN "200" displayed earlier. Further, when the player repeatedly depresses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 137 (F), the lower left button image BN1 disappears next, and the point number PN of "300" is displayed. Further, when the effect button 63 is repeatedly depressed, the point number PN “330” is displayed overlapping the display of the point number PN of “300” displayed earlier.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (G), a sword image ASI, a timer bar TBI, and an operation promotion image OPI are displayed. The sword image ASI represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image ASI includes a button image PSB representing the appearance of the sword button 65. The timer bar TBI shows the operation reception effective period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TBI is displayed on the front of the sword image ASI, overlapping the sword image ASI. The operation promotion image OPI is an image that urges the player to operate the sword member 64, and is displayed here as "press down !!!".

  When the player performs a pressing operation on the sword member 64, a total point increase display effect shown in FIG. 137 (H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the number of points PN displayed in FIG. 137 (C) to FIG. 137 (F) is displayed, an increment display MTP in which the numerical value is rapidly incremented from 0 of the digital value Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the number of points PN, the increment is stopped and the finalized display TPD indicating the total point “1330” is displayed. Then, an effect is performed in which the remaining amount of the meter image PL decreases by an amount corresponding to the total point. As the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, the remaining amount disappears, so here, after the display of the finalized display TPD of the total point “1330”, the meter image PL decreases the area of the inner specific color portion and remains There is an effect that the quantity is exhausted. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (J), an achieved image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, in the achieved image ACV, the characters “CLEAR!” Are displayed.

[Operation means image display effect C]
FIG. 138 is a diagram for describing an operation means image display effect C. As compared with the operation means image display effect A, the operation means image display effect C is different in that an enlarged button image BBN is displayed in place of the sword image ASI in FIG. 138 (G). The operation means image display effect C is executed, for example, in accordance with the battle effect at the time of a definite change. In the operation means image display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 138 (A), four button images BN1 to BN4 and a meter image PL are displayed. In FIG. 138 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in such a manner that visual recognition is difficult. Examples of the mode that is difficult to be visually recognized include the case where it is not displayed, the case where it is displayed small, and the case where it is displayed lightly. Each of the four button images BN1 to BN4 represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed on the display screen 7a at the position of each vertex of the rectangular shape. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining number of points can be determined by changing the area of the inner specific color portion. Here, “1300” is described at the lower left of the meter image PL, and it is shown that when the number of points reaches 1300, the portion of the specific color inside disappears. The four button images BN1 to BN4 change to another color at a constant interval as shown in FIG. 138 (B), and perform an effect simulating an aspect in which the effect button 63 emits light.

  When the player repeatedly depresses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 138C, the button image BN4 on the upper right disappears first, and the point number PN of "100" is displayed. When the depression operation of the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 138 (D), the point number PN “150” is displayed overlapping the display of the point number PN “100” displayed earlier. Be done.

  Further, when the player repeatedly depresses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 138E, the button image BN3 at the lower right disappears next, and the number of points PN of “200” is displayed. . When the depression operation of the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 138 (E), the point number PN “250” is displayed overlapping the display of the point number PN “200” displayed earlier. Be done. Further, when the player repeatedly depresses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 138 (F), the lower left button image BN2 disappears next, and the point number PN of "300" is displayed. When the depression operation of the effect button 63 is further repeated, as shown in FIG. 138 (F), the point number PN “330” is displayed overlapping the display of the point number PN of “300” displayed earlier. Be done.

  Furthermore, when the player repeatedly depresses the effect button 63, then the upper left button image BN1 disappears, and the number of points PN is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (G), the enlargement button image BBN, the timer bar TBI, and the operation promotion image OPI are displayed. The enlarged button image BBN represents the appearance of the effect button 63 and is larger than the button image BN. The enlarged button image BBN and the button image BN represent the same appearance of the effect button 63, but the shape may be the same or different. The timer bar TBI shows an operation reception effective period of the effect button 63. The timer bar TBI is displayed on the front of the enlarged button image BBN so as to overlap the enlarged button image BBN. The operation promotion image OPI is an image that urges the player to operate the effect button 63, and is displayed here as "press !!!".

  When the player performs a pressing operation on the sword member 64, a total point increase display effect shown in FIG. 138 (H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the point numbers PN displayed in FIG. 138 (C) to FIG. 138 (F) is displayed, an increment display MTP in which the numerical value is rapidly incremented from 0 of the digital value Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the number of points PN, the increment is stopped and the finalized display TPD indicating the total point “1330” is displayed. Then, an effect is performed in which the remaining amount of the meter image PL decreases by an amount corresponding to the total point. As the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, the remaining amount disappears, so here, after the display of the finalized display TPD of the total point “1330”, the meter image PL decreases the area of the inner specific color portion and remains There is an effect that the quantity is exhausted. Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (J), an achieved image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, in the achieved image ACV, the characters “CLEAR!” Are displayed.

[Operation means image display effect D]
FIG. 139 is a diagram for describing an operation means image display effect D. As compared with the operation means image display effect A, the order of increase or decrease of the number of button images BN displayed on the display screen 7a differs in the operation means image display effect D. The operation means image display effect D is executed, for example, in accordance with a battle effect at the time of a definite change. In the operation means image display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), one button image BN1 and a meter image PL are displayed. In FIG. 139 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed in such a manner that visual recognition is difficult. Examples of the mode that is difficult to be visually recognized include the case where it is not displayed, the case where it is displayed small, and the case where it is displayed lightly. The button image BN1 represents the appearance of the effect button 63, and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. The meter image PL has a configuration in which the remaining number of points can be determined by changing the area of the inner specific color portion. Here, “1300” is described at the lower left of the meter image PL, and it is shown that when the number of points reaches 1300, the portion of the specific color inside disappears. As shown in FIG. 139 (B), the button image BN1 changes to another color at a constant interval, and effects that imitate the mode in which the effect button 63 emits light are performed. When the player repeatedly depresses the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), the number of points PN “100” is displayed below the button image BN1.

  When the player further repeatedly depresses the effect button 63, a button image BN2 is newly displayed below the button image BN1 as shown in FIG. 139 (C). In addition, the point number PN of “100” and “150” is displayed on the right side of the button image BN2. Further, when the effect button 63 is repeatedly depressed, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), a button image BN3 is newly displayed on the right side of the button image BN2. Further, the number of points PN of "200" and "250" is displayed above the button image BN3. Furthermore, when the depression operation of the effect button 63 is repeated, a button image BN4 is newly displayed below the button image BN3, as shown in FIG. 139 (E).

  Further, when the effect button 63 is repeatedly depressed, as shown in FIG. 139 (F), the four button images BN1 to BN4 disappear from the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 139 (G), a sword image ASI, a timer bar TBI, and an operation promotion image OPI are displayed. The sword image ASI represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image ASI includes a button image PSB representing the appearance of the sword button 65. The timer bar TBI shows the operation reception effective period of the sword member 64. The timer bar TBI is displayed on the front of the sword image ASI, overlapping the sword image ASI. The operation promotion image OPI is an image that urges the player to operate the sword member 64, and is displayed here as "press down !!!".

  When the player performs a pressing operation on the sword member 64, a total point increase display effect shown in FIG. 139 (H) is executed. Specifically, before the total value of the point numbers PN displayed in FIG. 136 (C) to FIG. 136 (F) is displayed, an increment display MTP in which the numerical value is rapidly incremented from 0 of the digital value Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (I), after the increment display MTP, when the display value reaches the total value of the number of points PN, the increment is stopped and the finalized display TPD indicating the total point “1330” is displayed. Then, an effect is performed in which the remaining amount of the meter image PL decreases by an amount corresponding to the total point. As the meter image PL reaches 1300 points, the remaining amount disappears, so here, after the display of the finalized display TPD of the total point “1330”, the meter image PL decreases the area of the inner specific color portion and remains There is an effect that the quantity is exhausted. Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (J), an achieved image ACV indicating that the remaining amount of the meter image PL has become zero is displayed. Here, in the achieved image ACV, the characters “CLEAR!” Are displayed.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of operation means image display production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 136 (A) and 138 (A), the first effect that a plurality of button images BN1 to BN4 are displayed on the display screen 7a; C), as shown in FIG. 138C, a second effect in which button images BN1 to BN3 having a smaller number than the number of button images BN1 to BN4 displayed in the first effect are displayed; (F) As shown in FIG. 138 (F), a third effect is performed in which a smaller number of button images BN1 are displayed than the number of button images BN1 to BN3 displayed in the second effect. be able to. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 136 (E) and 138 (E), the number of button images BN1 to BN3 displayed in the second effect is smaller than the number of button images BN1 to BN3 and displayed in the third effect. It is possible to execute a fourth effect in which button images BN1 and BN2 having a larger number than the number of button images BN1 to be displayed are displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 138 (G), after the fourth effect, the enlarged button image BBN that represents the appearance of the effect button 63 and is larger than the button image BN is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 136 (G), after the fourth effect, a sword image ASI showing the appearance of the sword member 64 is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, the second effect is executed after the first effect, and the number of points is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player. The third effect is performed after the second effect, the number of points is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 63 by the player, and the fourth effect is performed after the third effect, and the player The number of points is displayed according to the operation of the effect button 63, and after the fourth effect, a total point which is the sum of the number of points displayed in the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect The number TPD is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, the meter image PL is displayed in the first effect, the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect. After the total number of points TPD is displayed, the meter image PL changes in accordance with the total number of points TPD. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of an operation means image display production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above-described operation means image display effects A to D, the button image BN represents the appearance of the effect button 63. However, the button image BN may represent the appearance of the sword button 65.
[Modification 2]
The above-mentioned operation means image display effects A to D are to be implemented when the gaming state is certain. However, the above-mentioned operation means image display effects A to D may be carried out in the gaming state other than the probability change time. For example, the above-described operation means image display effects A to D may be performed at normal times or at non-probable time short times.
[Modification 3]
The above-mentioned operation means image display effects A to D are executed when the depression operation of the effect button 63 is repeated. However, the above-described operation means image display effects A to D may be configured to advance even without the depression operation of the effect button 63. Further, even if there is no pressing operation of the sword member 64, the total point increase display effect may be performed.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E1-1]
First operation means operable by the player;
And a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
One of the plurality of types of images is a first operation means image representing the appearance of the first operation means,
A first effect in which a plurality of first operation means images are displayed on the display means;
A second effect in which the first operation means images are displayed in a smaller number than the number of the first operation means images displayed in the first effect;
It is possible to execute a third effect in which the first operation means images are displayed in a smaller number than the number of the first operation means images displayed in the second effect.
[Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1,
The number of the first operation means images is smaller than the number of the first operation means images displayed in the second effect, and larger than the number of the first operation means images displayed in the third effect. A game machine characterized by being capable of executing a fourth effect to be displayed.
[Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-2,
One of the plurality of types of images represents the appearance of the first operation means, and is an enlarged first operation means image larger than the first operation means image,
A game machine characterized in that the enlarged first operation means image is displayed after the fourth effect.
[Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-2 further includes
It has a second operation means that can be operated by the player,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second operation means image representing the appearance of the second operation means,
After the fourth effect, the image of the second operation means is displayed.
態 様 [Aspect E1-5]
A game machine according to any one of modes E1-2 to E1-4, wherein
The second effect is executed after the first effect, and the number of points is displayed according to the operation of the first operation means by the player.
The third effect is executed after the second effect, and the number of points is displayed according to the operation of the first operation means by the player.
The fourth effect is executed after the third effect, and the number of points is displayed according to the operation of the first operation means by the player.
After the fourth effect, a total number of points, which is the sum of the second effect, the third effect, and the number of points displayed in the fourth effect, is displayed. Gaming machine.
態 様 [Aspect E1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-5,
One of the plurality of types of images is a meter image,
The meter image is displayed in the first effect, the second effect, the third effect, and the fourth effect,
The gaming machine, wherein the meter image changes in accordance with the total number of points after the total number of points is displayed.

The effect during the probability change will be described below with reference to FIGS. 140 to 143. The effect during positive variation may be performed, for example, when the gaming state is positive. That is, when the microcomputer 101 for image control analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and the instruction for executing the effect during the probability change is included, the corresponding image data and drive data are read out from the ROM 103 It is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a.
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is in the definite changing state, since the positive changing state is continued until the next big jackpot, the next big hitting becomes easier than in the normal state.

[Perhaps during production A]
FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining the effect A during definite variation.
In the definite variation effect A, a first reach effect and a second reach effect can be performed. The first reach effect and the second reach effect will be described below. The first reach effect and the second reach effect are not performed with the same change, but performed with different changes.

[1st reach production]
In the first reach effect of the effect during the probability change, first, as shown in FIG. 140 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), a target hitting mission effect A is performed. The target image E21 is displayed in the target assignment mission effect A. This target image E21 represents a circular shaped target, a half area of the target is an area (probability change suggested area) that suggests a probability variation jackpot (V passing planned jackpot), and a remaining half region of the target is usually a big hit ( It is an area (usually referred to as a suggested area) that suggests a V non-passing planned jackpot). In the target hit mission effect, the target image E21 is subjected to a twirl rotation and an arrow is hit as a mission.

  After the hit assignment mission effect A, a hit impact effect A and an impact hit effect A shown below can be executed. In the case of the probability variation big hit (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: variation pattern P62 (reach of SP5)), the hit successful presentation A is executed. In the case of the normal jackpot (FIG. 11: in the case of the fluctuation pattern P63 (reach of SP5)), the game-off effect A is executed.

  In the hit successful presentation A, as shown in FIG. 140 (C), an effect in which an arrow is stuck in the probable change suggestion region of the target image E21 is performed, and a production is performed that suggests that it is a probable change jackpot. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and then it becomes a probability change state (high probability high base state).

  On the other hand, in the potential loss effect A, as shown in FIG. 140 (D), an effect in which an arrow is pierced in the normal suggested area of the target image E21 is performed, and a effect that indicates that a normal jackpot is performed is performed. After this effect, a big hit game is played, and then it becomes a time saving state (low probability high base state).

  In addition, after the target hitting mission production A, the arrow always strikes, and either production of the successful hit production A or the potential loss production A is always performed. That is, when this first reach effect is selected, the jackpot of either the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot is determined.

[2nd reach production]
In the second reach effect of the effect during the probability change, first, as shown in FIG. 140 (E), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 140 (F), a target hitting mission effect B is performed. A target image E21 is displayed in the target assignment mission effect B. This target image E22 represents a circular target, a half region of the target is a region (probable variation suggestion region) that suggests a probability variation jackpot, and a region where the other half region of the target is suggestive of a loss (loss suggestion region Also called). In the target hit mission effect, the target image E21 is subjected to a twirl rotation and an arrow is hit as a mission.

  After the hit assignment mission effect B, a hit impact effect B and an impact hit effect B shown below can be executed. In the case of the probability variation big hit (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: variation pattern P61 (reach of SP4)), the hit successful presentation B is executed. In the case of a loss (no big hit) (FIG. 11: in the case of the variation patterns P65 to 67, 69 to 71 (reach of SP4)), a potential loss effect B is executed.

  In the hit successful presentation B, as shown in FIG. 140 (G), an effect in which an arrow is stuck in the probable change suggestion region of the intended image E22 is performed, which suggests that it is a probable change jackpot. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and then it becomes a probability change state (high probability high base state).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 140 (H), in the potential loss effect B, an effect in which an arrow is stuck in the loss area of the target image E22 is performed, and an effect is suggested that indicates a loss rather than a big hit. After this effect, the variation of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is also started.

  In addition, after the target hitting mission production B, the arrow always strikes, and either production of the successful hit production B or the potential loss production BNP is performed. In other words, when the second reach effect is selected, it is determined that if there is a big hit, there will always be a positive variation big hit. In other words, when this second reach effect is selected, it is either a probability change jackpot or a loss.

[Perhaps during production B]
FIG. 141 is a diagram for explaining the effect B during definite variation.
In the effect B during production, the first reach effect and the second reach effect can be performed. The first reach effect and the second reach effect will be described below. The first reach effect and the second reach effect are not performed with the same change, but performed with different changes.

[1st reach production]
In the first reach effect of the effect during definite variation, first, as shown in FIG. 141 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (B), a battle effect is performed. In this battle effect, an effect is produced in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle (are engaged in battle).

  After battle production, battle victory production and battle defeat production shown below may be executed. In the case of the probability variation jackpot (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: variation pattern P62 (reach of SP5)), a battle victory effect is executed. In the case of the normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) (FIG. 11: in the case of the fluctuation pattern P63 (reach of SP5)), the battle defeat effect is executed.

  In the battle victory effect, as shown in FIG. 141 (C), an effect that the teammate character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB is performed, and a victory suggestion image E23 and a probability variation suggestion image E24 are displayed. The victory suggestion image E23 is an image that suggests that the teammate character CRA has won the enemy character CRB, that is, an image that suggests a probability variation jackpot. In addition, the probability variation suggestion image E24 is an image indicating a probability variation jackpot. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and then it becomes a probability change state (high probability high base state).

  On the other hand, in the battle defeat presentation, as shown in FIG. 141 (D), an effect is produced in which the allied character CRA loses the enemy character CRB, and a defeat suggestion image E25 and a normal suggestion image E26 are displayed. The defeat suggestion image E25 is an image that suggests that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB, that is, an image that usually indicates a jackpot (non-probable variation jackpot). Also, the usually suggested image E26 is an image that usually suggests a big hit (non-probable variation big hit). After this effect, a big hit game is played, and then it becomes a time saving state (low probability high base state).

  In addition, after the battle production, the battle is definitely decided, and either the battle victory production or the battle defeat production is always performed. That is, when this first reach effect is selected, the jackpot of either the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot is determined.

[2nd reach production]
In the second reach effect of the effect during the definite variation, first, as shown in FIG. 141 (E), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 141 (F), target hit mission effects are performed. The target image E21 is displayed in this target assignment mission rendition. This target image E22 represents a circular target, a half region of the target is a region (probable variation suggestion region) that suggests a probability variation jackpot, and a region where the other half region of the target is suggestive of a loss (loss suggestion region Also called). In the target hit mission effect, the target image E21 is subjected to a twirl rotation and an arrow is hit as a mission.

  After the target hitting mission rendition, the following hit success rendition and hit hit rendition can be executed. In the case of the probability variation big hit (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: variation pattern P61 (reach of SP4)), the hit successful presentation is executed. In the case of a loss (no big hit) (FIG. 11: in the case of the variation patterns P65 to 67, 69 to 71 (reach of SP4)), a lost game effect is executed.

  In the hit hitting success rendition, as shown in FIG. 141 (G), a rendition in which an arrow is stuck in the probable change suggestion region of the target image E22 is performed, and it is a rendition that suggests that it is a probable change jackpot. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and then it becomes a probability change state (high probability high base state).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 141 (H), in the intentional loss effect, an effect in which an arrow is stuck in the missing area of the target image E22 is performed, and an effect is suggested that suggests a loss rather than a big hit. After this effect, the variation of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is also started.

  In addition, after the target hit mission production, the arrow always hits, and either production of the hit hit production or the goal lost production is performed. In other words, when the second reach effect is selected, it is determined that if there is a big hit, there will always be a positive variation big hit. In other words, when this second reach effect is selected, it is either a probability change jackpot or a loss.

[Perhaps during production C]
FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the effect C during a probability change.
In the definite variation effect C, the first reach effect and the second reach effect can be performed. The first reach effect and the second reach effect will be described below. The first reach effect and the second reach effect are not performed with the same change, but performed with different changes.

[1st reach production]
In the first reach effect of the effect during definite variation, first, as shown in FIG. 142 (A), a change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (B), battle effect 1 is performed. In this battle effect 1, an effect is produced in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle (or battle).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (C), battle effect 2 is performed. In this battle effect 2, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB face each other, and a meter image E27 is displayed. The meter image E27 represents hit points (life points) of the enemy character CRB, and indicates that the smaller the meter value is, the more advantageous it is for the friend character CRA. When the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, the ally character CRA wins. The ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB perform a battle a predetermined number of times (one or more times), and when the ally character CRA damages the enemy character CRB in the battle, the meter value of the meter image E27 decreases. Naturally, when the damage is large, the decrease in meter value of the meter image E27 becomes large. If the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0 at the end of the battle, the ally character CRA wins, and if the meter value remains, the ally character CRA loses.

  After battle rendition 2, battle victory rendition and battle defeat rendition shown below may be executed. In the case of the probability variation jackpot (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: variation pattern P62 (reach of SP5)), a battle victory effect is executed. In the case of the normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) (FIG. 11: in the case of the fluctuation pattern P63 (reach of SP5)), the battle defeat effect is executed.

  In the battle victory effect, as shown in FIG. 142 (C), the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, and an effect that the ally character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB is performed, and a victory suggestion image E23 and a probability variation suggestion image E24. Is displayed. The victory suggestion image E23 is an image that suggests that the teammate character CRA has won the enemy character CRB, that is, an image that suggests a probability variation jackpot. In addition, the probability variation suggestion image E24 is an image indicating a probability variation jackpot. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and then it becomes a probability change state (high probability high base state).

  On the other hand, in the battle defeat production, as shown in FIG. 142 (D), the meter value of the meter image E27 remains, and an effect of defeating the allied character CRA to the enemy character CRB is performed. The image E26 is displayed. The defeat suggestion image E25 is an image that suggests that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB, that is, an image that usually indicates a jackpot (non-probable variation jackpot). Also, the usually suggested image E26 is an image that usually suggests a big hit (non-probable variation big hit). After this effect, a big hit game is played, and then it becomes a time saving state (low probability high base state).

  In addition, after the battle production, the battle is definitely decided, and either the battle victory production or the battle defeat production is always performed. That is, when this first reach effect is selected, the jackpot of either the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot is determined.

[2nd reach production]
In the second reach effect of the effect during the probability change, first, as shown in FIG. 142 (E), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 142 (F), target hit mission rendition is performed. The target image E21 is displayed in this target assignment mission rendition. This target image E22 represents a circular target, a half region of the target is a region (probable variation suggestion region) that suggests a probability variation jackpot, and a region where the other half region of the target is suggestive of a loss (loss suggestion region Also called). In the target hit mission effect, the target image E21 is subjected to a twirl rotation and an arrow is hit as a mission.

  After the target hitting mission rendition, the following hit success rendition and hit hit rendition can be executed. In the case of the probability variation big hit (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: variation pattern P61 (reach of SP4)), the hit successful presentation is executed. In the case of a loss (no big hit) (FIG. 11: in the case of the variation patterns P65 to 67, 69 to 71 (reach of SP4)), a lost game effect is executed.

  In the hit hit success rendition, as shown in FIG. 142 (G), a rendition in which an arrow is stuck in the probable change suggestion region of the target image E22 is performed, and it is a rendition that suggests that it is a probable change jackpot. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and then it becomes a probability change state (high probability high base state).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 142 (H), in the intentional misplacement effect, an effect is produced in which an arrow is stuck in the lost area of the intended image E22, and an effect is produced that suggests that it is not a big hit but a loss. After this effect, the variation of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is also started.

  In addition, after the target hit mission production, the arrow always hits, and either production of the hit hit production or the goal lost production is performed. In other words, when the second reach effect is selected, it is determined that if there is a big hit, there will always be a positive variation big hit. In other words, when this second reach effect is selected, it is either a probability change jackpot or a loss.

[Perhaps during production D]
FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining the effect D during definite variation.
In the definite change effect D, the first reach effect and the second reach effect can be performed. The first reach effect and the second reach effect will be described below. The first reach effect and the second reach effect are not performed with the same change, but performed with different changes.

[1st reach production]
In the first reach effect of the effect during definite variation, first, as shown in FIG. 143 (A), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (B), battle effect 1 is performed. In this battle effect 1, an effect is produced in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle (or battle).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (C), battle effect 2 is performed. In this battle effect 2, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB face each other, and a meter image E27 and an ally participation battle icon E28 are displayed. The meter image E27 represents hit points (life points) of the enemy character CRB, and indicates that the smaller the meter value is, the more advantageous it is for the friend character CRA. When the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0, the ally character CRA wins. The ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB perform a battle a predetermined number of times (one or more times), and when the ally character CRA damages the enemy character CRB in the battle, the meter value of the meter image E27 decreases. Naturally, when the damage is large, the decrease in meter value of the meter image E27 becomes large. If the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes 0 at the end of the battle, the ally character CRA wins, and if the meter value remains, the ally character CRA loses.

  In addition, the allied participation war icon E28 is an icon that suggests that a predetermined character of allies participates in the battle effect. A character is displayed on the friendly participation icon E28, and the character participates in the battle. In addition, one of the plurality of characters is displayed on the team participation battle icon E28. These characters are assigned an order of strength. If there is an ally participation battle icon E28 corresponding to a character having a high order of strength, it becomes easy to lower the meter value of the meter image E27 when the character participates in the battle. Further, as the number of team members participating in battle E 28 increases, the number of characters participating in the battle increases, so the chance of attack increases and it becomes easier to lower the meter value of the meter image E 27. That is, the larger the number of allied participation war icon E28, and the higher the order of the strength of the character corresponding to ally participation war icon E28, the easier it is to lower the meter value of meter image E27, and the more likely it is to defeat the enemy character CRB. . As a result, it becomes easy to become a certainty jackpot.

  After battle rendition 2, battle victory rendition and battle defeat rendition shown below may be executed. In the case of the probability variation jackpot (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: variation pattern P62 (reach of SP5)), a battle victory effect is executed. In the case of the normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) (FIG. 11: in the case of the fluctuation pattern P63 (reach of SP5)), the battle defeat effect is executed.

  In the battle victory effect, as shown in FIG. 143 (D), the meter value of the meter image E27 is 0, and an effect that the teammate character CRA defeats the enemy character CRB is performed, and a victory suggestion image E23 and a probability variation suggestion image E24. Is displayed. The victory suggestion image E23 is an image that suggests that the teammate character CRA has won the enemy character CRB, that is, an image that suggests a probability variation jackpot. In addition, the probability variation suggestion image E24 is an image indicating a probability variation jackpot. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and then it becomes a probability change state (high probability high base state).

  On the other hand, in the battle defeat production, as shown in FIG. 143 (E), the meter value of the meter image E27 remains, and an effect of defeating the ally character CRA to the enemy character CRB is performed. The image E26 is displayed. The defeat suggestion image E25 is an image that suggests that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB, that is, an image that usually indicates a jackpot (non-probable variation jackpot). Also, the usually suggested image E26 is an image that usually suggests a big hit (non-probable variation big hit). After this effect, a big hit game is played, and then it becomes a time saving state (low probability high base state).

  In addition, after the battle production, the battle is definitely decided, and either the battle victory production or the battle defeat production is always performed. That is, when this first reach effect is selected, the jackpot of either the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot is determined.

[2nd reach production]
In the second reach effect of the effect during the probability change, first, as shown in FIG. 143 (E), the change start effect is executed. In this variation start effect, variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is started.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 143 (F), target hit mission effects are performed. The target image E21 is displayed in this target assignment mission rendition. This target image E22 represents a circular target, a half region of the target is a region (probable variation suggestion region) that suggests a probability variation jackpot, and a region where the other half region of the target is suggestive of a loss (loss suggestion region Also called). In the target hit mission effect, the target image E21 is subjected to a twirl rotation and an arrow is hit as a mission.

  After the target hitting mission rendition, the following hit success rendition and hit hit rendition can be executed. In the case of the probability variation big hit (for example, in the case of FIG. 11: variation pattern P61 (reach of SP4)), the hit successful presentation is executed. In the case of a loss (no big hit) (FIG. 11: in the case of the variation patterns P65 to 67, 69 to 71 (reach of SP4)), a lost game effect is executed.

  In the hit hitting success rendition, as shown in FIG. 143 (G), a rendition in which an arrow is stuck in the probable change suggestion region of the target image E22 is performed, and it is a rendition that suggests that it is a probable change jackpot. After this effect, a jackpot game is performed, and then it becomes a probability change state (high probability high base state).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 142 (H), in the intentional misplacement effect, an effect is produced in which an arrow is stuck in the lost area of the intended image E22, and an effect is produced that suggests that it is not a big hit but a loss. After this effect, the variation of the special symbol (decorative symbol) is also started.

  In addition, after the target hit mission production, the arrow always hits, and either production of the hit hit production or the goal lost production is performed. In other words, when the second reach effect is selected, it is determined that if there is a big hit, there will always be a positive variation big hit. In other words, when this second reach effect is selected, it is either a probability change jackpot or a loss.

  The first reach effect corresponds to the first display effect, and the second reach effect corresponds to the second display effect. Further, in the above-mentioned positive B-D effects B to D, the first reach effect corresponds to the battle system reach effect, and the second reach effect corresponds to the non-battle system reach effect.

[Example of effect]
The following shows an example of the effect of the positive effect.
[Effect 1]
When the first reach effect is performed in the odd effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment, the jackpot is determined, and the hit mission effect A or the battle effect is performed, and the hit success effect A or the battle is performed. If it shifts to victory production, it will become definite variation jackpot (V passing planned jackpot) decision, it will shift to the probability variation state (high probability high base condition) which is relatively advantageous to the player after the jackpot game. If you shift to mission loss production or battle defeat production, usually hit a jackpot (V non-passing planned jackpot) will be determined and it will be relatively disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot game (low probability high) Transition to base state). On the other hand, when the second reach effect is performed, the jackpot is not determined, but if the target hitting effect B or the target hitting effect is performed, and the target hit success B or the hit hit success is produced, the positive variation The jackpot (V passing scheduled jackpot) is determined, and after jackpot game transition to a probability change state (high probability high base state) relatively advantageous to the player. If a target hit mission effect B or a target hit mission effect is performed, and a transition is made to target loss production B or target loss production, a normal jackpot (V non-passing planned jackpot) is determined, and a time-saving state relatively disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot game ( Go to low probability high base state).
That is, when the first reach effect is performed, the jackpot is determined, and it becomes either the probability varying jackpot or the normal jackpot. If the second reach effect is performed, the jackpot will not be determined, but in the case of the jackpot, it will be a probability varying jackpot.
During the probability change (during high probability / high base state), when the reach effect is performed, one of the first reach effect and the second reach effect is selected.
According to this configuration, when the first reach effect is achieved, the jackpot is normally determined when the target hit effect effect or the battle effect does not shift to the hit effect effect or the battle effect effect. If the first reach effect is achieved, the person will be vigilant enough to watch the transition of the first reach effect. On the other hand, in the case of the second reach effect, even if it has not transitioned to the successful hit production B or the successful hit production in the target mission production B or the target mission production, usually the jackpot can be avoided Therefore, the player can watch over the transition of the first reach effect gracefully with a feeling of "the hit hitting success effect B or the hit if it shifts to the hit success effect". As described above, the first reach effect and the second reach effect cause a large difference in the mind of the player, and when the reach effect is performed during the probability change, the first reach effect and the second reach effect are performed. Since any one of the effects is selected, it is possible to provide a crisp game effect during a certain change. As a result, the player can enjoy an effect that is clearly and steadily changing, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the odd effects B to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the first reach effect, a battle effect in which the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA battle is performed, and the second reach effect is a battle system reach If a different hit mission production is performed and the first reach effect is performed, the jackpot is fixed, and if the allied character CRA wins, the jackpot will be a jackpot, and the jackpot will be in a relatively advantageous jackpot state for the player after the jackpot game. If the ally character CRA shifts, it usually becomes a big hit and shifts to a relatively short time saving state for the player after the big hit game. According to this configuration, if the ally character CRA wins the battle, it becomes a definite change jackpot, and if the ally character CRA loses it usually becomes the jackpot, so the support target can be narrowed down to the ally character CRA, and the battle rendition can be enjoyed easily Can. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the odd effects C to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the meter image E27 is displayed in the battle effect 2 of the first reach effect, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB perform a predetermined number of battles, and ally When the character CRA damages the enemy character CRB, the meter value of the meter image E27 is reduced, and when the meter value becomes 0, the ally character CRA wins, a battle victory effect is performed, and the probability variation is After the jackpot, transition to a definite change state. According to this configuration, by using the meter image E27, the transition of the outcome in the battle production can be transmitted to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and the player can enjoy the battle production at a glance. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the case of the second reach effect, target hit mission effect indicating whether or not the target hit mission is successful is executed in the second to third turn effects in the odds during the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, and the target hit is successful. The jackpot is finalized, and after the jackpot game, it shifts to a definite change state. According to this configuration, when the target hitting mission is successful, the probability variation jackpot is determined, and even if the target hitting mission is not successful, it does not usually become a jackpot, so the superior presentation while immersing the target hitting mission in a sense of superiority It can be viewed elegantly. In addition, by setting it as a mission type presentation, it is possible to convey to the player whether it is a jackpot or a mistake that is a definite change or not. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the odd effects D of the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the battle effect, an entry display of a predetermined character to the battle is performed, and the probability that the teammate character wins increases as the number of entries increases. According to this configuration, as the predetermined character participates in the battle, the player becomes enthusiastic, and it is possible to improve the interest of the battle effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the odd changes in the effects A to D of the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the odd changes in effect are performed in the odd change state in the gaming state. According to this configuration, since it is easy to make the next jackpot, it is possible to enliven the effect during positive variation in which the effect tends to be monotonous. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of an effect during definite variation is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the probability changing state, only the effects during the probability variation (first reach effect and second reach effect) may be performed.

[Modification 2]
The stochastic variation production (the first reach production and the second reach production) of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is not only in the definite variation state (during definite variation) but also in the normal state (low probability and low base state) and time saving state (low It may be carried out at the time of high certainty base state), high certainty low base state (latency certainty change state). In addition, the first reach effect or the second reach effect of the odd variation effect of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment may be performed in a predetermined mode. This predetermined mode may be provided, for example, after the jackpot game until a predetermined number of fluctuations. Also, the predetermined mode may be provided from the change after the change of the super reach effect to the predetermined change number. Furthermore, the predetermined mode may be provided as a pre-reading effect.

[Modification 3]
In the odd effects B to D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the battle effect, the enemy character CRB and the ally character CRA are in battle, but battle may be made with characters of fellow friends.

[Modification 4]
In the positive effects D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the allied participation war icon E28 is displayed, and the allied character corresponding to the allies participation war icon E28 participates in the battle, the meter value of the meter image E27 is easily lowered. However, if the enemy participation battle icon is displayed and the enemy character corresponding to the enemy participation battle icon is weak, the opportunity for attack of the allied character may increase in the battle, and the meter value of the meter image E27 may be easily lowered.

[Modification 5]
In the effects C and D of the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the meter image E 27 corresponds to the HP of the enemy character, but may correspond to the HP of the ally character. In this case, if the meter value of the meter image E27 remains, the ally character wins, and if the meter value of the meter image E27 becomes zero, the ally character loses. Further, although the meter image E27 suggests that the reduction of the meter value is advantageous for the battle, the meter image E27 may be made to correspond to the attack energy which increases each time the teammate character attacks. In this case, as the meter value of the meter image E27 rises, the winning probability of the ally character increases.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
When the first display effect is performed, the jackpot is determined, and if the first condition is satisfied, the game transitions to a relatively advantageous first gaming state for the player after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, If a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the game state shifts to a second gaming state relatively disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot game based on the jackpot,
When the second display effect is performed, the jackpot is not determined, but in the case of the jackpot, transition to the first gaming state after the jackpot game based on the jackpot,
When the reach effect is performed in the predetermined game mode, any one effect of the first display effect and the second display effect is selected.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect E2-1,
The first display effect is a battle-based reach effect in which a first character and a second character battle.
The second display effect is a non-battle system reach production different from the battle system reach,
When the first display effect is performed, the jackpot is determined, and if the first character wins, the game transitions to a relatively advantageous first gaming state for the player after the jackpot game based on the jackpot, If the first character loses, it shifts to a second gaming state relatively disadvantageous to the player after the jackpot game based on the jackpot.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-2,
In the battle-based reach effect, a meter is displayed, the meter value represented by the meter is reduced in a predetermined number of battles, and if the meter value decreases to a predetermined value, the first character wins and the first gaming state Transition to
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect E2-4]
A game machine according to aspect E2-2 or aspect E2-3, wherein
In the non-battle-based reach effect, an effect representing whether or not a predetermined mission is successful is executed, and when the predetermined mission is successful, the jackpot is determined, and the jackpot is determined after the jackpot game based on the jackpot. Transition to the 1 game state,
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect E2-5]
A game machine according to any one of aspects E2-2 to E2-4, wherein
In the battle-based reach effect, participation display of a predetermined character to the battle is performed, and the probability that the first character wins increases as the number of participations increases.
A game machine characterized by

[Aspect E2-6]
A game machine according to any one of aspects E2-2 to E2-5, wherein
The predetermined game mode is a mode representing that the game state is a probability change state,
A game machine characterized by

  The battle effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. This battle effect is during the display of the variation of the decoration symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter also referred to simply as "special symbol"), and in particular, the gaming state is high probability state, time It can be performed in the state, in the electric support, etc.

[Battle production A]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect A.
In the battle effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 144 (A), the decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 144 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R indicate that they are moving (scrolling downward). Further, in this example, the gaming state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 144 (A), the characters "in the middle of a definite change" are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (B), battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this battle effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed, and they are developed from the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 144 (A), and the player side friendly character CRA and the enemy character at the center of the display screen 7a. The image which battles with CRB is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (C), on the display screen 7a, a battle victory jackpot symbol array advance notice effect is executed. As a result of battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the battle victory jackpot design sequence advance notice effect suggests a jackpot design sequence in which the decoration design 8L, 8C, 8R will be stopped when the ally character CRA wins. It is an effect. When the ally character CRA wins, the jackpot symbol arrangement to be stopped is a probability variation jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the definite variation state continues. As shown in FIG. 144C, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the letter "V" indicating that the ally character CRA has won is displayed in the vicinity of the ally character CRA. It is done. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, "777" as a probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ is displayed, which is to be stopped for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The “777” is displayed so that the sizes are different from each other, and the “7” on the left side, which is the friend character CRA side, is the largest, the “7” in the next is the largest, and the opposite side to the friend character CRA. The right "7" is displayed the smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ in this manner, it is possible to impress the player on the probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (D), on the display screen 7a, the battle loss jackpot symbol array advance notice effect is executed. This battle elimination jackpot symbol arrangement advance notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol arrangement that will stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R when the ally character CRA loses as a result of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle. It is an effect. When the ally character CRA is eliminated, the jackpot symbol arrangement to be stopped will usually be a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA is eliminated, it shifts from the definite change state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 144 (D), the enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the letter "V" indicating that the enemy character CRB has won is displayed in the vicinity of the enemy character CRB. It is done. In addition, on the left side of the display screen 7a, "888" is displayed as a regular jackpot symbol array BOZ that is to be stopped for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The “888” is displayed so that the sizes are different from each other, the right “8” on the enemy character CRB side is the largest, the second “8” is the largest, and the opposite side to the enemy character CRB The left "8" is displayed the smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ in this manner, it is possible to impress the player on the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Furthermore, the player is made to impress the probability variation big hit symbol sequence AOZ and the normal big hit symbol sequence BOZ by displaying the ally character CRA and the odd variation big hit symbol sequence AOZ, the enemy character CRB and the normal big hit symbol sequence BOZ in left-right symmetry. Can.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (E), on the display screen 7a, a probability variation jackpot indication effect is executed. As a result of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the characters of "winning!" Which indicate that the ally character CRA has won are largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character "winning!", The player can be made to think that it will be a probability variation jackpot with "777" of a probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (F), on the display screen 7a, a probability variation jackpot determination effect is executed. As this variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 144 (A), this variation in the probability variation jackpot determination effect is a probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ as a result of the battle effect of FIGS. 144 (B) to 144 (E). It stopped at "777", and showed that it was a definite oddity big hit. In the upper part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "probably big hit-!" Are displayed. The player is convinced that the jackpot is a jackpot by the jackpot determination effect.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 144 (G) instead of FIG. 144 (E), there may be a case where a jackpot suggestion effect is usually performed on the display screen 7a. In this normal jackpot suggestion effect, as a result of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the characters “Lone out!” Indicating that the ally character CRA has been eliminated are largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character "Delivery!", The player can be made to think that it will usually be a big hit with "888" of big hit symbol array BOZ.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (H), the jackpot determination effect is usually executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal jackpot finalization effect, the corresponding variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 144 (A) is a normal jackpot symbol array BOZ as a result of the battle effect in FIGS. 144 (B) to 144 (E). Stop at "888", which usually indicates a big hit. In addition, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "normally a jackpot ~!" Are displayed. With this normal jackpot determination effect, the player is usually convinced of the jackpot.

  That is, in the battle effect A shown in FIG. 144, the symbol array when the player wins during the battle effect and the symbol array when the player is defeated are displayed in advance. And the gaming state in which this battle effect is performed is a high probability state (during a definite change), and the symbol arrangement when winning is displayed with a notice that the probability change big hit symbol arrangement is displayed, and the symbol arrangement when lost is usually a big hit symbol arrangement Notice is displayed. That is, when it shifts to battle production, the jackpot is decided, and it is made to display during the battle production whether the decided jackpot is a probability change jackpot or a regular jackpot during the battle production. In other words, it is designed to display an advance notice as to whether the definite variation state continues during the battle production or whether it falls to the normal condition from the definite variation state.

[Battle production B]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect B.
In the battle effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 145 (A), the decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 145 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are moving (scrolling downward). Further, in this example, the gaming state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 145 (A), the characters "in the middle of a definite change" are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this battle effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed, and they are developed from the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 145 (A), and the player side friendly character CRA and the enemy character at the center of the display screen 7a. The image which battles with CRB is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (C), on the display screen 7a, a battle victory jackpot symbol array advance notice effect is executed. As a result of battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the battle victory jackpot design sequence advance notice effect suggests a jackpot design sequence in which the decoration design 8L, 8C, 8R will be stopped when the ally character CRA wins. It is an effect. When the ally character CRA wins, the jackpot symbol arrangement to be stopped is a probability variation jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the definite variation state continues. As shown in FIG. 145C, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the letter "V" indicating that the ally character CRA has won is displayed in the vicinity of the ally character CRA. It is done. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, "777" as a probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ1 is displayed, which is to be stopped for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The “777” is displayed so that the sizes are different from each other, and the “7” on the left side, which is the friend character CRA side, is the largest, the “7” in the next is the largest, and the opposite side to the friend character CRA. The right "7" is displayed the smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ1 in this manner, it is possible to impress the player on the probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (D), on the display screen 7a, the battle loss jackpot symbol array advance notice effect is executed. This battle elimination jackpot symbol arrangement advance notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol arrangement that will stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R when the ally character CRA loses as a result of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle. It is an effect. When the ally character CRA is eliminated, the jackpot symbol arrangement to be stopped will usually be a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA is eliminated, it shifts from the definite change state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 145 (D), the enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the letter "V" indicating that the enemy character CRB has won is displayed in the vicinity of the enemy character CRB. It is done. In addition, on the left side of the display screen 7a, "888" is displayed as a regular jackpot symbol array BOZ that is to be stopped for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The “888” is displayed so that the sizes are different from each other, the right “8” on the enemy character CRB side is the largest, the second “8” is the largest, and the opposite side to the enemy character CRB The left "8" is displayed the smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ in this manner, it is possible to impress the player on the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Furthermore, the player is made to impress the probability variation big hit symbol sequence AOZ1 and the normal big hit symbol sequence BOZ by displaying the ally character CRA and the odd variation big hit symbol sequence AOZ1, the enemy character CRB and the normal big hit symbol sequence BOZ in left-right symmetry. Can.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (E), on the display screen 7a, a probability variation jackpot indication effect is executed. As a result of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the characters of "winning!" Which indicate that the ally character CRA has won are largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character "winning!", The player can be made to think that he or she will become a probability variation jackpot by "777" of a probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (F), on the display screen 7a, the probability change 16R (round) jackpot determination effect is executed. This definite variation 16R big hit finalization effect, the variation of the decoration design 8L, 8C and 8R which are shown in figure 145 (A), as a result of the battle effect of figure 145 (B)-figure 145 (E), definite variation big hit symbol arrangement AOZ1 Stop at "777" as it indicates that the 16 rounds of the odds hit. In the upper part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "probability 16R jackpot ~!" Are displayed. The player is convinced that 16 rounds of probability variation jackpots are made by this probability variation 16R jackpot finalization effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 145 (G) instead of FIG. 145 (C), there may be a case where a battle victory jackpot symbol array advance notice effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The battle victory jackpot design arrangement advance notice effect suggests a jackpot design arrangement that will stop the decorative design 8L, 8C, 8R when the teammate character CRC and the enemy character CRB battle, and the teammate character CRC wins. It is an effect. When the ally character CRC wins, the jackpot symbol arrangement to be stopped is a probability variation jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the definite variation state continues. As shown in FIG. 145 (G), the ally character CRC is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the character “V” indicating that the ally character CRC has won is displayed in the vicinity of the ally character CRC. It is done. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, “555” as a probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ2 is displayed, which is to be stopped for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The “555” is displayed so that the sizes are different from each other, and the “5” on the left side, which is the friend character CRC side, is the largest, the “5” in the next is the largest, and the opposite side to the friend character CRC The right "5" is displayed the smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ 2 in this manner, it is possible to impress the player on the probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ 2.
That is, the battle victory jackpot symbol arrangement advance notice shown in FIG. 145 (G) is different from the battle victory jackpot arrangement arrangement advance notice shown in FIG. 145 (C) described above in that the ally character CRA becomes the ally character CRC. That is, "777" as the probability variation big hit symbol sequence AOZ1 is "555" as the probability variation big hit symbol sequence AOZ2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (E) described above, a definite change jackpot suggestion effect is executed on the display screen 7a, and it is shown that the ally character CRC has won as a result of battle between the ally character CRC and the enemy character CRB. The word "winning!" Is displayed large at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character "winning!", It is possible to make the player think that it becomes a probability variation jackpot by "555" of a probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (H), on the display screen 7a, a probability change 15R (round) jackpot determination effect is executed. This definite variation 15R big hit finalization effect, the variation of the decoration design 8L, 8C and 8R which are shown in figure 145 (A), as a result of the battle effect of figure 145 (B)-figure 145 (E), definite variation big hit symbol arrangement AOZ2 As "Stop at 555", it shows that 15 rounds of oddly variable jackpots. In the upper part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the characters "probably 15R jackpot ~!" Are displayed. The player is convinced of the 15 round probability variation jackpot by this probability variation 15R jackpot finalization effect.

That is, in the battle effect B shown in FIG. 145, the symbol array when the player wins during the battle effect and the symbol array when the player is eliminated are displayed in advance. And the gaming state in which this battle effect is performed is a high probability state (during a definite change), and the symbol arrangement when winning is displayed with a notice that the probability change big hit symbol arrangement is displayed, and the symbol arrangement when lost is usually a big hit symbol arrangement Notice is displayed. That is, when it shifts to battle production, the jackpot is decided, and it is made to display during the battle production whether the decided jackpot is a probability change jackpot or a regular jackpot during the battle production. In other words, it is designed to display an advance notice as to whether the definite variation state continues during the battle production or whether it falls to the normal condition from the definite variation state.
Furthermore, in battle rendition B, there are a plurality of types of probability variation big hit symbol arrangements, and probability variations big hits of different numbers of rounds are set in the plurality of types of probability variation big hit symbol sequences. Furthermore, there are a plurality of types of ally characters, and each of the plurality of types of ally characters is linked with one of a plurality of types of probability variation big hit symbol arrays to be displayed for advance notice when winning in a battle effect. In other words, the probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ1 that is displayed for advance notice when the teammate character CRA shown in FIG. 145 (C) wins is the 16 round probability variation big hit symbol array “777”, and the ally character CRC shown in FIG. 145 (G) The odd variation big hit symbol arrangement AOZ2 to display a preliminary notice when it wins is the 15 round false variation big hit symbol arrangement “555”.
That is, in the battle effect B shown in FIG. 145, there are a plurality of types of ally characters on the player side battled in the battle effect, and the player wins the battle depending on which ally character appears in the battle effect. Certainly the number of rounds of the jackpot has come to be known. In other words, the number of withdrawals in the jackpot game when the player wins the battle is determined by which ally character appears in the battle effect.

[Battle production C]
FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect C.
In the battle effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 146 (A), the decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 146 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are moving (scrolling downward). Further, in this example, the gaming state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 146 (A), the characters "in the middle of a definite change" are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this battle effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed, and they are developed from the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 146 (A), and the ally character CRA and the enemy character on the player side at the center of the display screen 7a. The image which battles with CRB is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (C), on the display screen 7a, a battle victory jackpot symbol array advance notice effect is executed. As a result of battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the battle victory jackpot design sequence advance notice effect suggests a jackpot design sequence in which the decoration design 8L, 8C, 8R will be stopped when the ally character CRA wins. It is an effect. When the ally character CRA wins, the jackpot symbol arrangement to be stopped is a probability variation jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the definite variation state continues. As shown in FIG. 146 (C), the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the letter "V" indicating that the ally character CRA has won is displayed in the vicinity of the ally character CRA. It is done. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, "777" as a probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ is displayed, which is to be stopped for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The “777” is displayed so that the sizes are different from each other, and the “7” on the left side, which is the friend character CRA side, is the largest, the “7” in the next is the largest, and the opposite side to the friend character CRA. The right "7" is displayed the smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ in this manner, it is possible to impress the player on the probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (D), on the display screen 7a, the battle loss jackpot symbol array advance notice effect is executed. This battle elimination jackpot symbol arrangement advance notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol arrangement that will stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R when the ally character CRA loses as a result of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle. It is an effect. When the ally character CRA is eliminated, the jackpot symbol arrangement to be stopped will usually be a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA is eliminated, it shifts from the definite change state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 146 (D), the enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the letter "V" indicating that the enemy character CRB has won is displayed in the vicinity of the enemy character CRB. It is done. In addition, on the left side of the display screen 7a, "888" is displayed as a regular jackpot symbol array BOZ1 which is to be stopped for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The “888” is displayed so that the sizes are different from each other, the right “8” on the enemy character CRB side is the largest, the second “8” is the largest, and the opposite side to the enemy character CRB The left "8" is displayed the smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 in this manner, it is possible to impress the player on the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Furthermore, the player is made to impress the probability variation big hit symbol sequence AOZ1 and the normal big hit symbol sequence BOZ1 by displaying the friend character CRA and the odd variation big hit symbol sequence AOZ, the enemy character CRB and the normal big hit symbol sequence BOZ1 in left-right symmetry. be able to.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (E), a jackpot suggestion effect is usually executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal jackpot suggestion effect, as a result of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the characters “Lone out!” Indicating that the ally character CRA has been eliminated are largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character "Delivery!", The player can be made to think that the player will usually win a jackpot by "888" of the jackpot symbol array BOZ1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (F), a promotion failure normal jackpot determination effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this promotion failure normal jackpot finalization effect, the screen of the character of "deletion!" Shown in FIG. 146 (E) is switched, and "888" as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, a promotion effect SKG is displayed. In this promotion effect SKG, a plurality of jackpot symbol arrangements including a regular jackpot symbol array (for example, even Zoro eyes) and a definite variation jackpot symbol arrangement (for example, odd Zoro eyes) in a display area surrounded by a square frame In the state of scrolling in the up and down direction, a button effect of causing the player to continuously hit the button is performed. In addition, this button effect is such that the button image BOG is displayed in a mode protruding from the display area (square frame) of the promotion effect SKG, and the character “button continuous hitting!” Is displayed under the button image BOG. ing. Thereby, the player can be made to impress the promotion effect SKG, and the operation of the effect button 63 can be appealed. Then, as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the button (or after the predetermined time has elapsed when the player did not hit the button continuously), the large hit symbol arrangement of the scrolled various types of symbols is stopped, and the normal jackpot symbol arrangement or the probability variation big hit Either of the symbol array is displayed. This promotion failure shown in FIG. 146 (F) indicates that “888” (normally big hit symbol sequence BOZ1) has stopped as the normal big hit symbol arrangement in the normal success jackpot determined effect, and thereby, the promotion from normal jackpot to definite variation big hit Is suggested to have failed. As a result, "888" as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 displayed at the center of the display screen 7a is continuously displayed as it is without changing to the probability variation jackpot symbol array, and the normal jackpot symbol array "888" is displayed. At the top, the text "Promotion failure Normal jackpot!" Is newly displayed. This allows the player to recognize that the promotion from the jackpot to the odds jackpot has failed normally.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 146 (G) instead of FIG. 146 (D), there may be a case where a battle out-of-battle jackpot symbol array advance notice effect is executed on the display screen 7a. This battle elimination jackpot symbol arrangement advance notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol arrangement that will stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R when the ally character CRC is eliminated as a result of a battle between the ally character CRC and the enemy character CRD. It is an effect. When the ally character CRC is eliminated, the jackpot symbol arrangement to be stopped will usually be a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA is eliminated, it shifts from the definite change state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 146 (G), the enemy character CRD is displayed on the right of the display screen 7a, and the letter "V" indicating that the enemy character CRD has won is displayed in the vicinity of the enemy character CRD. It is done. In addition, on the left side of the display screen 7a, "666" is displayed as a regular jackpot symbol array BOZ2 which is to be stopped for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The “666” is displayed so that the sizes are different from each other, and the “6” on the right side, which is the enemy character CRB side, is the largest, the “6” in the next is the largest, and the opposite side to the enemy character CRB The left "6" is displayed the smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2 in this manner, it is possible to impress the player on the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2. Furthermore, the player is made to impress the probability variation big hit symbol sequence AOZ and the normal big hit symbol sequence BOZ2 by displaying the friend character CRA and the probability variation big hit symbol sequence AOZ, and the enemy character CRD and the normal big hit symbol sequence BOZ2 in left-right symmetry. Can.
That is, the point that the enemy character CRB becomes the enemy character CRD is that the battle loss jackpot symbol array notice effect shown in FIG. 146 (G) is different from the battle defeat jackpot symbol array notice effect shown in FIG. 146 (C) described above. That is, "888" as the big hit symbol arrangement BOZ1 is usually "666" as the big hit symbol arrangement BOZ2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 146 (H), on the display screen 7a, the promotion success probability change jackpot determination effect is executed. In this promotion success probability variation jackpot finalization effect, the screen of the character of "lost" shown in FIG. 146 (E) is switched, and "666" as the big hit symbol array BOZ2 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a ( In the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, a promotion effect SKG is displayed. In this promotion effect SKG, a plurality of jackpot symbol arrangements including a regular jackpot symbol array (for example, even Zoro eyes) and a definite variation jackpot symbol arrangement (for example, odd Zoro eyes) in a display area surrounded by a square frame In the state of scrolling in the up and down direction, a button effect of causing the player to continuously hit the button is performed. In addition, this button effect is such that the button image BOG is displayed in a mode protruding from the display area (square frame) of the promotion effect SKG, and the character “button continuous hitting!” Is displayed under the button image BOG. ing. Thereby, the player can be made to impress the promotion effect SKG, and the operation of the effect button 63 can be appealed. Then, as a result of the player repeatedly hitting the button (or after the predetermined time has elapsed when the player did not hit the button continuously), the large hit symbol arrangement of the scrolled various types of symbols is stopped, and the normal jackpot symbol arrangement or the probability variation big hit Either of the symbol array is displayed. In the promotion success probability variation jackpot decision production shown in FIG. 146 (H), it is indicated that “777” has stopped as the probability variation jackpot design, and it is normally suggested that the promotion from jackpot to probability variation jackpot has succeeded Ru. As a result, "666" as the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ2 displayed at the center of the display screen 7a changes to the probability variation jackpot symbol array "777", and "promotion is promoted above this probability variation jackpot symbol array" 777 " The word “Successful oddity hit!” Is newly displayed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the player has normally been promoted from jackpot to jackpot.

That is, in the battle effect C shown in FIG. 146, during the battle effect, the symbol array at the time of winning and the symbol array at the time of losing are displayed in advance. And the gaming state in which this battle effect is performed is a high probability state (during a definite change), and the symbol arrangement when winning is displayed with a notice that the probability change big hit symbol arrangement is displayed, and the symbol arrangement when lost is usually a big hit symbol arrangement Notice is displayed. That is, when it shifts to battle production, the jackpot is decided, and it is made to display during the battle production whether the decided jackpot is a probability change jackpot or a regular jackpot during the battle production. In other words, it is designed to display an advance notice as to whether the definite variation state continues during the battle production or whether it falls to the normal condition from the definite variation state.
Furthermore, in battle rendition C, there are usually several types of jackpot symbol arrays, and in this plurality of types of regular jackpot symbol arrays, jackpots of different promotion rates (promotion rates from jackpot to probability variation jackpot) are set respectively . Furthermore, there are a plurality of types of enemy characters, and each of the plurality of types of enemy characters is linked with one of a plurality of types of normal jackpot symbol arrays to be displayed for advance notice when winning in a battle effect. That is, the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ1 displayed as a notice when the enemy character CRB shown in FIG. 146 (D) wins is the normal jackpot symbol array “888”, and the enemy character CRD shown in FIG. 146 (G) has won. The normal jackpot symbol arrangement BOZ2 to which advance notice is displayed is usually the jackpot symbol arrangement "666". And the promotion rate from a jackpot to a probability change jackpot is usually set higher for “666” than for “888”.
That is, in the battle effect C shown in FIG. 146, there are a plurality of types of enemy characters battled in the battle effect, and it is determined by the player that the enemy character has won the battle depending on which enemy character appears in the battle effect. The rate of promotion from jackpot to probability jackpot is usually estimated. In other words, depending on which enemy character appears in the battle effect, the player is expected to have a high expectation of becoming a jackpot even if the ally character is out of the battle.

[Battle production D]
FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining the battle effect D.
In the battle effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 147 (A), the decorative symbol change effect is executed in synchronization with the change display of the special symbol. In this decorative symbol variation effect, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L is in the left symbol display area, the middle decorative symbol 8C is in the middle symbol display area, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right symbol display area. Is displayed. In the stop order of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped first, then the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is finally stopped. In FIG. 147 (A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are moving (scrolling downward). Further, in this example, the gaming state is a high probability state, and as shown in FIG. 147 (A), the characters "in the middle of a definite change" are displayed above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (B), a battle effect is executed on the display screen 7a. In this battle effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed, and they are developed from the decorative symbol variation effect shown in FIG. 147 (A), and the ally character CRA and the enemy character on the player side at the center of the display screen 7a. The image which battles with CRB is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (C), on the display screen 7a, a battle victory jackpot symbol array advance notice effect is executed. As a result of battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the battle victory jackpot design sequence advance notice effect suggests a jackpot design sequence in which the decoration design 8L, 8C, 8R will be stopped when the ally character CRA wins. It is an effect. When the ally character CRA wins, the jackpot symbol arrangement to be stopped is a probability variation jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA wins, the definite variation state continues. As shown in FIG. 147C, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the letter "V" indicating that the ally character CRA has won is displayed in the vicinity of the ally character CRA. It is done. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, "777" as a probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ is displayed, which is to be stopped for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The “777” is displayed so that the sizes are different from each other, and the “7” on the left side, which is the friend character CRA side, is the largest, the “7” in the next is the largest, and the opposite side to the friend character CRA. The right "7" is displayed the smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ in this manner, it is possible to impress the player on the probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (D), on the display screen 7a, the battle loss jackpot symbol array advance notice effect is executed. This battle elimination jackpot symbol arrangement advance notice effect suggests a jackpot symbol arrangement that will stop the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R when the ally character CRA loses as a result of the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB battle. It is an effect. When the ally character CRA is eliminated, the jackpot symbol arrangement to be stopped will usually be a jackpot. That is, when the ally character CRA is eliminated, it shifts from the definite change state to the normal state. As shown in FIG. 147 (D), the enemy character CRB is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the letter "V" indicating that the enemy character CRB has won is displayed in the vicinity of the enemy character CRB. It is done. In addition, on the left side of the display screen 7a, "888" is displayed as a regular jackpot symbol array BOZ that is to be stopped for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The “888” is displayed so that the sizes are different from each other, the right “8” on the enemy character CRB side is the largest, the second “8” is the largest, and the opposite side to the enemy character CRB The left "8" is displayed the smallest. By characterizing the display mode of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ in this manner, it is possible to impress the player on the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ. Furthermore, the player is made to impress the probability variation big hit symbol sequence AOZ and the normal big hit symbol sequence BOZ by displaying the ally character CRA and the odd variation big hit symbol sequence AOZ, the enemy character CRB and the normal big hit symbol sequence BOZ in left-right symmetry. Can.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (E), a jackpot suggestion effect is usually executed on the display screen 7a. In this normal jackpot suggestion effect, as a result of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the characters “Lone out!” Indicating that the ally character CRA has been eliminated are largely displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. By displaying the character "Delivery!", The player can be made to think that it will usually be a big hit with "888" of big hit symbol array BOZ.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (F), on the display screen 7a, a normal jackpot determination fake effect is executed. This normal jackpot finalized fake effect is normally displayed on the display screen 7a as a result of the battle effect shown in FIG. 147 (B) to FIG. 147 (E), as the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R shown in FIG. 147 (A). It is an effect that appears as if the "888" as the jackpot symbol arrangement BOZ has stopped, and it seems as if the player has usually hit a jackpot. However, in the normal jackpot determination fake effect shown in FIG. 147 (F), “888” as the regular jackpot symbol array BOZ is not completely stopped, and is slightly (two or three frames) rocked up and down. It has become. In addition, above the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, characters such as "normally a jackpot ~!" Are displayed. In other words, the player usually feels that the jackpot has been determined by the normal jackpot determination fake effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (G), on the display screen 7a, battle resurrection probability variation jackpot suggestion effect is executed. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the screen of "888" of the normal jackpot symbol array BOZ that has been displayed is switched by the normal jackpot confirmation fake director shown in FIG. 147 (F), although detailed illustration is omitted. The battle effect shown in FIG. 147 (B) is executed, in which the ally character CRA that has been defeated once is recovered and battles against the enemy character CRB again. Then, in the battle effect performed again, the ally character CRA wins this time, and as a result, as shown in FIG. 147 (G), it indicates that the ally character CRA has won at the center of the display screen 7a. The words "Resurrection victory!" Are displayed in a large size. By displaying this character "resurrection victory!", It is possible to make the player think that it will be a probability variation jackpot with "777" of a probability variation jackpot symbol array AOZ1.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 147 (H), on the display screen 7a, a probability variation jackpot determination effect is executed. The screen of "resurrection victory!" Displayed in the battle resurrection definite variation jackpot indication shown in FIG. 147 (G) is switched to this definite variation big hit finalization effect, and "777" as a probability variation big hit symbol array AOZ is displayed It is displayed on 7a and shows that it has hit a certainty. In the upper part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, characters such as "probably big hit-!" Are displayed. The player is convinced that the jackpot is a jackpot by the jackpot determination effect.

That is, in the battle effect D shown in FIG. 147, the symbol array when the player wins and the symbol array when the player is defeated are displayed in advance during the battle effect. And the gaming state in which this battle effect is performed is a high probability state (during a definite change), and the symbol arrangement when winning is displayed with a notice that the probability change big hit symbol arrangement is displayed, and the symbol arrangement when lost is usually a big hit symbol arrangement Notice is displayed. That is, when it shifts to battle production, the jackpot is decided, and it is made to display during the battle production whether the decided jackpot is a probability change jackpot or a regular jackpot during the battle production. In other words, it is designed to display an advance notice as to whether the definite variation state continues during the battle production or whether it falls to the normal condition from the definite variation state.
Furthermore, in the battle production D, the ally character on the player side is temporarily defeated in the battle production, and after making the player think that the jackpot usually becomes a big hit and falls from the definite change state to the normal state, the ally character is recovered again A battle effect is performed, and a resurrection effect in which an ally character wins is performed this time. As a result, it is possible to make a player who normally makes a jackpot and thinks that he or she falls from a definite change state to a normal state turns into a definite change jackpot and continues the positive change state. That is, in the battle effect D shown in FIG. 147, after the normal jackpot symbol array temporarily displayed as a notice is displayed as a fake, a presentation is performed in which the probability variation jackpot symbol array displayed as a notice is displayed.

[Example of effect]
Below, the example of an effect of battle production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 144 to FIG. 147, it is possible to execute battle effects in which an ally character on the player's side and an enemy character fight against each other. The arrangement is such that the stop symbol arrangement in the predetermined variation of the decoration symbol when the ally character wins and the stop symbol arrangement in the predetermined variation of the decoration symbol when the ally character breaks out during the battle effect is displayed. ing. According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to estimate a benefit advantageous to the player given when the ally character wins, and a penalty disadvantageous to the player given when the ally character defeated Become. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, the stop symbol array of the decorative symbol when the ally character wins in the battle effect has a configuration that is a probability variation big hit symbol array. According to this configuration, it is known that the player becomes a big hit when the ally character wins, and after the big hit, the gaming state shifts to the high probability state or the high probability state continues. You will know what to do. As a result, the player can play a game with great expectation, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, the probability variation big hit symbol arrangement is configured such that the number of big hit rounds differs depending on the type. According to this configuration, the player can know the number of rounds of the probability variation jackpot when the ally character wins the battle. That is, the player will be able to predict the number of payouts in the jackpot game when the ally character wins the battle. In this way, the player can face the game with great expectation when the probability change big hit symbol array with a large number of rounds (with a large number of balls out) is displayed in advance in the battle effect, and as a result, the fun of the game Can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, the stop symbol array of the decorative symbol when the ally character is eliminated in the battle effect usually has a jackpot symbol array. According to this configuration, it is known that the player becomes a big hit when the ally character is eliminated, and after becoming a big hit, the gaming state is maintained in the normal state or the short time state, or from the probability change state to the normal state. It will be understood that transition to the time saving state will occur. As a result, the player can accurately grasp the development of the game destination, and can play an appropriate game with respect to the development of the game destination. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, the jackpot symbol arrangement is normally configured such that the promotion rate to the probability variation jackpot differs depending on the type. According to this configuration, the player can know the promotion rate from the normal jackpot to the probable jackpot when the ally character loses the battle. That is, even when the ally character loses the battle, the player is normally promoted from the jackpot to the expected degree of becoming the jackpot probability jackpot. In this way, even when the ally character is eliminated in the battle, the player may come to the game with great expectation when the normal jackpot symbol array having a high promotion rate to the jackpot is displayed with notice. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of battle production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, the image display device 7 is configured by one display screen 7a, and the symbol when the teammate character wins on this one display screen 7a. Although the arrangement and the symbol arrangement at the time of losing are displayed on a plane as a notice, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the image display apparatus is provided with a first display screen disposed on the front side and a second display screen disposed on the back side, and the symbol array to be displayed for advance notice is displayed on the first display screen You may In this way, the symbol array to be displayed in advance will be displayed closer to the player, and the player can be strongly appealed to the player in a very high impact mode. The image display device having the first display screen and the second display screen may be configured to be able to display a stereoscopic image (3D). In this way, it is possible to further appeal the player by displaying the symbol array to be notified in advance in 3D.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 144 to FIG. 147, during the battle production, the ally character wins and displays the probability variation big hit symbol array when winning and the normal jackpot symbol sequence when defeated Although it did, it does not specifically limit the display timing of the symbol arrangement | sequence which these notices. For example, after displaying the probability variation big hit symbol arrangement (usually the big hit symbol arrangement), it may be possible to display the normal big hit symbol arrangement (the probability variation big hit symbol arrangement) continuously or even after a predetermined period has elapsed. Good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 144 to FIG. 147, when the gaming state performs a battle effect in a high probability state (during a definite change) and the ally character loses the symbol array when winning, The symbol arrangement of is displayed for advance notice, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, battle effects may be performed in a short time state or a normal state in which the gaming state is a low probability state, and a team character may display a symbol array when winning and a symbol array when defeated. In this case, the symbol arrangement when the ally character wins may be a jackpot symbol array (including a probability variation jackpot symbol array and a regular jackpot symbol array), and a symbol array when defeated may be a lost symbol array. Alternatively, when the ally character wins, the symbol arrangement is a probability variation big hit symbol arrangement, and when the ally character is eliminated, the symbol arrangement is a regular big hit symbol arrangement without time reduction and having a small number of balls (eg, 2 rounds big hit), Alternatively, it may be made to have no number of balls (for example, in two rounds, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short and it is practically impossible to win).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, there are a plurality of types of probability variation jackpot arrangements when the ally character wins, and the plurality of kinds of probability variation jackpots array have different numbers of rounds of probability variation jackpots In the same way, when the ally character is eliminated, there are usually two or more types of normal jackpot symbol arrays, and in this plurality of types of normal jackpot symbol arrays, different types of jackpots with different numbers of rounds are used. It may be set. In this way, the player can know the number of rounds of the normal jackpot when the player is eliminated in the battle, and can predict the number of balls in the jackpot game when the player is eliminated in the battle.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 144 to 147, in the battle effect, a V-attacker having a V-area is opened in a predetermined round of a jackpot game called a so-called V-ST machine. By making the game ball to win the game ball in the V-attacker and pass the V area, the gaming state after the big hit will be performed by the gaming machine, which will be in the high probability state (probable change state) until the symbol fluctuation is performed a predetermined number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a battle effect may be performed by a gaming machine called a so-called loop machine, in which a gaming state is in a high probability state (probable state) until a next big hit after a big hit, after a big hit. In this way, when the ally character wins in the battle production and becomes a probability variation jackpot in the probability variation jackpot arrangement that has been predicted, the high probability state (probability variation state) continues until the next jackpot, so that, Furthermore, the interest of the game can be improved. Alternatively, battle rendition is commonly known as a kind 1 kind 2 kind mixing machine, 1 kind of big hit where there is no time saving big hit and time saving big hit with symbol matching by symbol variation, and when time saving there is big hit, it is a predetermined number of times after big hit. The short time state (power support state) continues until the symbol variation is performed, and at this time the two types of attackers having the V region are opened when the variable start port (special 2) comes into contact in the short state. The game ball may be played by a game machine with two types of jackpots, which are time saving and jackpots by winning a game ball and passing the V region. In this case, in the battle production, while performing in connection with the symbol variation which draws the 1 type jackpot, when the ally character wins, the time reduction has a big hit symbol arrangement display, and when the ally character loses it notices no time reduction no big hit symbol arrangement. It should be displayed.

[Example]
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E3-1]
Display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects;
Symbol display means capable of displaying variable display of symbols;
Decorative symbol display means capable of displaying a variable display of a decorative symbol according to the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means can execute, as one of the plurality of display effects, a battle effect in which an ally character on the player side and an enemy character fight against each other,
The display means performs the battle rendition in the predetermined change of the decoration symbol by the decoration symbol display means, and stops the symbol arrangement in the predetermined change of the decoration symbol when the ally character wins during the battle rendition. The notice display of the stop symbol array in the predetermined variation of the decorative symbol when the ally character is eliminated is displayed in advance.
A game machine characterized by
[Aspect E3-2]
In the battle effect, the stop symbol array of the decorative symbol when the ally character wins is a probability variation big hit symbol array,
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-1, characterized in that
[Aspect E3-3]
The number of big hit rounds differs depending on the type of the above-mentioned probability variation big hit symbol arrangement,
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-2, characterized in that
[Aspect E3-4]
In the battle effect, the stop symbol array of the decorative symbol when the ally character is eliminated is usually a big hit symbol array,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-3, characterized in that
[Aspect E3-5]
The above normal jackpot symbol arrangement has different promotion rates to jackpots depending on its type,
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-4, characterized in that

[Other modifications]
The various display effects described above may include a configuration that does not include part of the effects or effects other than those described above.

  Although the gaming machine 1 of the said embodiment mentioned and demonstrated the pachinko gaming machine as an example, it is not restricted to this. For example, the present invention may be applied to a rotary machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a ball game machine in place of a pachinko machine. When the gaming machine 1 is used as a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

  In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, although the effect button 63 is provided as an operation unit for the player to operate, the invention is not limited thereto, and a lever, a trigger, or the like may be used as an operation unit for the player to operate. . Moreover, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead, the display effect is performed using the image representing the sword member 64. The display effect may be performed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

  Although the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine which does not have a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed type gaming machine.

  Moreover, you may combine two or more presentation examples and / or a modification among several presentation examples and / or a modification which were mentioned above. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may have a sub display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the display effect described above may be performed by the sub display device.

  As mentioned above, although this aspect was demonstrated based on embodiment and a modification, embodiment of the above-mentioned aspect is for making an understanding of this aspect easy, and does not limit this aspect. The present embodiment can be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and the scope of the claims, and the present embodiment includes the equivalents thereof.

1 ... gaming machine 3 ... gaming area 7 ... image display device 9A, 9B ... pending image (pending icon)
9C ... the pending image (the pending icon)
14 First movable combination 15 Second movable combination 20 First starting port 21 Second starting opening 81 Microcomputer for game control 91 Microcomputer for effect control 101 Microcomputer for image control

Claims (5)

A gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects, wherein
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of forming a first reach state using a first decorative symbol,
The second display effect displays a second decorative pattern having higher transparency than the first decorative pattern at a first position, and has a third decorative pattern having higher transparency than the first decorative pattern. Is displayed at a second position different from the first position,
The third display effect moves the second decorative pattern from the first position, moves the third decorative pattern from the second position, and the second decorative symbol and the second decorative pattern. This is an effect in which the second decorative pattern and the fourth decorative pattern having lower transparency than the third decorative pattern are generated by overlapping the three decorative patterns.
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and the third display effect is performed after the second display effect. Using the first decorative symbol forming the first reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect A first symbol array is formed,
A game machine characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect is a symbol including a portion similar to the first decorative symbol that forms a first reach state in the first display effect.
A game machine characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein
As the first symbol arrangement using the first decorative symbol forming the first reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect A jackpot symbol array is formed,
A game machine characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein
The first display effect forms a first reach state using the first decorative symbol and a second reach state different from the first reach state using a fifth decorative symbol. It is an effect to form,
In the combination effect, using the fifth decorative symbol forming the second reach state in the first display effect and the fourth decorative symbol generated in the third display effect, the second The symbol array of is formed,
A game machine characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein
In the combination effect, after the first symbol array is formed, a feature effect is performed to move a predetermined feature,
A game machine characterized by

Images